A High Performance With Diverse Communication Interfaces Servo Drive Series User Manual

ASDA-A2R Series User Manual
Interfaces Servo Drive

A High Performance with Diverse Communication
Industrial Automation Headquarters
Delta Electronics, Inc.
Taoyuan Technology Center
No.18, Xinglong Rd., Taoyuan City,
Taoyuan County 33068, Taiwan
TEL: 886-3-362-6301 / FAX: 886-3-371-6301
Asia
Delta Electronics (Jiangsu) Ltd.
Wujiang Plant 3
1688 Jiangxing East Road,
Wujiang Economic Development Zone
Wujiang City, Jiang Su Province, P.R.C. 215200
TEL: 86-512-6340-3008 / FAX: 86-769-6340-7290
Delta Greentech (China) Co., Ltd.

238 Min-Xia Road, Pudong District,
ShangHai, P.R.C. 201209
TEL: 86-21-58635678 / FAX: 86-21-58630003
Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.

Tokyo Office
2-1-14 Minato-ku Shibadaimon,
Tokyo 105-0012, Japan
TEL: 81-3-5733-1111 / FAX: 81-3-5733-1211
Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.

1511, Byucksan Digital Valley 6-cha, Gasan-dong,
Geumcheon-gu, Seoul, Korea, 153-704
A High Performance with

TEL: 82-2-515-5303 / FAX: 82-2-515-5302
Delta Electronics Int’l (S) Pte Ltd.

4 Kaki Bukit Ave 1, #05-05, Singapore 417939
Diverse Communication
TEL: 65-6747-5155 / FAX: 65-6744-9228
Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Plot No 43 Sector 35, HSIIDC
Gurgaon, PIN 122001, Haryana, India
TEL : 91-124-4874900 / FAX : 91-124-4874945
Interfaces Servo Drive
Americas
Delta Products Corporation (USA)
Raleigh Office
P.O. Box 12173,5101 Davis Drive,
ASDA-A2R Series User
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709, U.S.A.
TEL: 1-919-767-3800 / FAX: 1-919-767-8080
Delta Greentech (Brasil) S.A.

Manual
Sao Paulo Office
Rua Itapeva, 26 - 3° andar Edificio Itapeva One-Bela Vista
01332-000-São Paulo-SP-Brazil
TEL: 55 11 3568-3855 / FAX: 55 11 3568-3865
Europe
Deltronics (The Netherlands) B.V.
Eindhoven Office
De Witbogt 15, 5652 AG Eindhoven, The Netherlands
TEL: 31-40-2592850 / FAX: 31-40-2592851
*We reserve the right to change the information in this manual without prior notice. DELTA_IA-ASDA-A2R_UM_EN_20141219 (V2.0)
www.deltaww.com
Preface
Thank you for purchasing ASDA-A2R. This user manual provides the related information of
ASDA-A2R series servo drive and ECMA, ECML series servo motors. This manual
includes:
 Installation and inspection of servo drive and servo motor

 The configuration of servo drive
 Procedures of trial run
 Control function and adjustment methods of servo drive
 Parameters
 Communication protocol
 Maintenance and inspections
 Troubleshooting
This manual addresses personnel with the following qualifications:
 Servo system designers

 Installation or wiring personnel
 Trial and tuning personnel
 Maintenance and inspection personnel
Before using the product, please read through this manual carefully in order to ensure the
correct use of the product. In addition, please place this manual safely for quick reference
whenever is needed. Please follow the rules below if you have not finished reading this
manual yet.
 No water, corrosive gas and inflammable gas are allowed in installation

environment.
 Three-phase power is prohibited to connect to U, V and W connector when wiring.
It is possible to damage the servo drive.
 Ground is a must.
 Do not disconnect the servo drive, motor or change the wiring when connecting to
the power.
 Be ensured that the emergency stop can be activated anytime before connecting to
the power and operation.
 Do not touch the heat sink to avoid scald before connecting to the power and
operation.
If you have any enquiry, please contact the distributors or DEALTA customer service center.
Revision December, 2014 i

PrefaceASDA-A2R Series
Safety Precautions
ASDA-A2R series is the high resolution and open type servo drive. It should be installed in
a shielded control box during operation. This servo drive uses precise feedback control and
the digital signal processor with high-speed calculation function to control the current output
which generated by IGBT so as to operate three-phase permanent magnet synchronous
motors (PMSM) and to achieve precise positioning.
ASDA-A2R is applicable on industrial application and is suggested to be installed in the

panel-board of the user manual. (Servo drives, wire rod and motors all should be installed
in the environment which complies with the minimum requirement of UL Level 1.)
Pay special attention to the following safety precautions anytime during inspection,
installation, wiring, operation and examination.
The symbol of danger, warning and stop represent:
It indicates the potential hazards. It is possible to cause severe injury or fatal

harm if not follow the instructions.
It indicates the potential hazards. It is possible to cause minor injury or lead to

serious damage of the product or even malfunction if not follow the instructions.
It indicates the absolute prohibited activity. It is possible to damage the product or

cannot be used due to malfunction if not follow the instructions.
Inspection
 Please follow the instruction when using servo drive and servo motor, or it is
possible to cause fire or malfunction.
Installation
 It is prohibited to expose the product with the environment which containing
water, corrosive gas, inflammable gas, etc. Or it is possible to cause electric
shock or fire.
Wiring
 Please connect the ground terminal to class-3 ground system (under 100 Ω),
poor grounding may result in electric shock or fire.
 Do not connect the three-phase source to the motor output terminal U, V and
W. Or it is possible to cause personnel injury or fire.
 Please tighten the screws of the power and motor output terminal. Or it is
possible to cause fire.
 Please connect wiring according to the wire rod in order to prevent any
danger.
ii Revision December, 2014

Operation
 Before the operation, please change the parameter setting value according to
the needs. If it is not adjusted to the correct setting value, it is possible to lead
to malfunction of the machine or the operation might out of control.
 Before the machine starts to operate, please be ensured the emergency stop
can be activated anytime.
 When power on, please make sure the motor shaft stands still and will not
operate because of mechanical inertia or other causes.
 During the operation, it is prohibited to touch any rotating motor parts. Or it is

possible to cause personnel injury.
 In order to prevent any accident, please separate the couplings and belts of
the machine and isolate them. Then conduct the initial trial run.
 If users fail to operate the machine properly after the servo motor connects to
the equipments, it would cause the damage of the equipments and lead to the
personnel injury.
 In order to prevent the danger, it is strongly recommended to check if the
motor can operate normally without load first. Then, operate the motor with
load.
 Do not touch the heat sink of the servo drive. Or it is possible to cause scald
due to the high temperature.
Maintenance and Inspection

 It is prohibited to touch the internal parts of the servo drive and servo motor.
Or it is possible to cause electric shock.
 It is prohibited to disassemble the panel of the servo drive when turning on the
power. Or it is possible to cause electric shock.
 Do not touch the ground terminal within 10 minutes after turning off the power.
Or the residual voltage may cause electric shock.
 Do not disassemble the motor. Or it is possible to cause electric shock or
personnel injury.
 Do not change the wiring when the power is on. Or it is possible to cause
electric shock or personnel injury.
 Only the qualified electrical and electronics professionals can install, wire and
maintain the servo drive and servo motor.
Main Circuit Wiring

 Do not put the power cable and the encoder cable in the same channel and
bond them together. Please separate the power cable and the encoder cable
for at least 30 centimeters (= 11.8 inches) when wiring.
 Please use stranded wires and multi-core shielded-pair wires for the encoder
cables and encoder PG feedback cables. The maximum length of command
input cable is 3 meters (= 9.84 feet) and the maximum length of PG feedback
cable is 20 meters (= 65.62 feet).
 The high voltage might remain in the servo motor even when the power is off.
Do not touch the power terminal temporally (at least 10 minutes). Please
conduct the inspection not until the indicator light, CHARGE is off.
Revision December, 2014 iii

 Do not turn the power on and off too often. If continuous power on and off is
needed, please be ensured the interval is one minute at most.
Terminal Wiring of the Main Circuit

 When wiring, please disassemble the terminal socket from the servo drive.
 One terminal of the terminal socket for one electric wire only.
 When inserting the electric wires, do not connect the conductor to the adjacent
wire.
 Before connecting to the power, please inspect and be ensured the wiring is
correct.
NOTE If there is any difference of each version, please refer to DELTA’s

website (http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/) for the latest
information.
iv Revision December, 2014

Safety precautions when connecting to linear motor

 Do not touch servo motor when the power is on. Or it is possible to
cause electric shock.
 Do not touch the ground terminal within 10 minutes after turning off
the power. Or the residual voltage may cause electric shock.
 Do not change the wiring when the power is on. Or it is possible to
cause electric shock or personnel injury.
 Do not touch the motor during operation. Or it is possible to cause
scald due to the high temperature.
 Do not touch the machine that just turned off, the residual
temperature might cause scald.
 Strong magnets! It can be harmful to pacemaker wearers and

other with medical implants.
 Caution, strong magnet field.
 Mechanical hazard! To avoid jammed during maintenance.
 Improper installation is prohibited, such as to knock, to cut off, to

stamp on or to tighten incorrect mechanism.
NOTE If there is any difference of each version, please refer to DELTA’s

website (http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/) for the latest
information.
Revision December, 2014 v

Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Inspection and Model Explanation

1.1 Inspection ...................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Product Model .............................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.1 Nameplate Information ......................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 Model Explanation ................................................................................ 1-5
1.3 Servo Drive and Corresponding Servo Motor ................................................ 1-9
1.4 Each Part of the Servo Drive ......................................................................... 1-10
1.5 ECML Series Servo Motor ............................................................................. 1-13
Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Notes ............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Ambient Conditions of Storage ...................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Ambient Conditions of Installation ................................................................. 2-2
2.4 Installation Direction and Space .................................................................... 2-3
2.5 Specification of Circuit Breaker and Fuse ...................................................... 2-4
2.6 EMI Filters Selection...................................................................................... 2-5
2.7 Selection of Regenerative Resistor ............................................................... 2-7
Chapter 3 Wiring
3.1 Wiring of Delta’s Servo System .................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1 Wiring Diagram of Peripheral Devices (connect to Delta’s Servo Motor
Communication Type) ............................................................................ 3-1
Revision December, 2014

Table of ContentsASDA-A2R Series
3.1.2 Connectors and Terminals of the Servo Drive ....................................... 3-3
3.1.3 Wiring Method ....................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.4 Specification of ECMA Motor U, V, W Power Cable .............................. 3-7
Specification of ECML Motor U, V, W Power Cable .............................. 3-9
3.1.5 Specification of Connector of Encoder Cable ........................................ 3-10
Specification and Definition of Motor Signal Cable ................................ 3-13
3.1.6 Selection of Wire Rod ............................................................................ 3-14
3.2 Schematic Diagram of Servo System ............................................................ 3-16
3.3 I/O Signal (CN1) Connection ......................................................................... 3-18
3.3.1 I/O Signal (CN1) Connector Terminal Layout ....................................... 3-18
3.3.2 Explanation of I/O (CN1) Connector Signal .......................................... 3-20
3.3.3 Wiring Diagram (CN1) .......................................................................... 3-31
3.3.4 The DI and DO Signal Specified by the User........................................ 3-39
3.3.5 Application: Wiring of CN1 Quick Connector ........................................ 3-40
3.4 CN2 Connector .............................................................................................. 3-43
3.5 Wiring of CN3 Connector ............................................................................... 3-46
3.5.1 Layout of CN3 Connector ..................................................................... 3-46
3.5.2 Connection between CN3 Connector and Personal Computer............. 3-47
3.6 CN4 Serial Connector (USB) ......................................................................... 3-48
3.7 CN5 Connector (Full-closed Loop) ................................................................ 3-49
3.8 CN6 Connector (CANopen) ........................................................................... 3-50
3.9 Extension Digital Input Connector of CN7 ..................................................... 3-52
3.10 Standard Wiring Method ................................................................................ 3-53

3.10.1 Position (PT) Mode Standard Wiring ................................................. 3-53
3.10.2 Position (PR) Mode Standard Wiring .................................................. 3-54
3.10.3 Speed Mode Standard Wiring ............................................................. 3-55
3.10.4 Torque Mode Standard Wiring ............................................................ 3-56
3.10.5 CANopen Mode Standard Wiring ........................................................ 3-57
3.11 Wiring System of other Brand of Motor .......................................................... 3-58
3.11.1 Wiring Diagram of Peripheral Devices ................................................ 3-58
3.11.2 Specification of Definition of ECML Motor Cable ................................ 3-62
3.11.3 Signal Converter Box .......................................................................... 3-64
Chapter 4 Panel Display and Operation

4.1 Panel Description .......................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 Parameter Setting Procedure ........................................................................ 4-2
4.3 Status Display................................................................................................ 4-5
4.3.1 Setting Saved Display .......................................................................... 4-5
4.3.2 Decimal Point ....................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.3 Alarm Message..................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.4 Positive and Negative Sign Setting ....................................................... 4-5
4.3.5 Monitor Display ..................................................................................... 4-6
4.4 General Function ........................................................................................... 4-9
4.4.1 Operation of Fault Record Display ........................................................ 4-9
4.4.2 JOG Mode ............................................................................................ 4-10
4.4.3 Force DO Output .................................................................................. 4-11

4.4.4 Digital Input Diagnosis Operation ......................................................... 4-12
4.4.5 Digital Output Diagnosis Operation ...................................................... 4-12
Chapter 5 Trial Operation and Tuning

5.1 Inspection without Load ................................................................................. 5-1
5.2 Apply Power to the Servo Drive ..................................................................... 5-2
5.3 JOG Trial Run without Load .......................................................................... 5-5
5.4 Trial Run without Load (Speed Mode) ........................................................... 5-6
5.5 Trial Run without Load (Position Mode) ......................................................... 5-9
5.6 Tuning Procedure .......................................................................................... 5-11
5.6.1 Flowchart of Tuning Procedure............................................................. 5-13
5.6.2 Inertia Estimation Flowchart (with Mechanism) .................................... 5-14
5.6.3 Flowchart of Auto Tuning ...................................................................... 5-15
5.6.4 Flowchart of Semi-auto Tuning ............................................................. 5-16
5.6.5 Limit of Inertia Ratio for Rotary Motor / Total Weight of Linear Motor and
Load (kg) ............................................................................................. 5-17
5.6.6 Mechanical Resonance Suppression Method....................................... 5-20
5.6.7 Tuning Mode and Parameters .............................................................. 5-21
5.6.8 Tuning in Manual Mode ........................................................................ 5-22
Chapter 6 Control Mode and Operation

6.1 Selection of Operation Mode ......................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Position Mode ................................................................................................ 6-3
6.2.1 Position Command in PT Mode ............................................................ 6-3

6.2.2 Position Command in PR Mode............................................................ 6-3
6.2.3 Control Structure of Position Mode ....................................................... 6-4
6.2.4 S-Curve Filter (Position) ....................................................................... 6-6
6.2.5 Electronic Gear Ratio ........................................................................... 6-8
6.2.6 Low-pass Filter ..................................................................................... 6-9
6.2.7 Timing Diagram in Position Mode (PR) ................................................ 6-10
6.2.8 Gain Adjustment of Position Loop ........................................................ 6-11
6.2.9 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression in Position Mode ....................... 6-12
6.3 Speed Mode .................................................................................................. 6-15
6.3.1 Selection of Speed Command .............................................................. 6-15
6.3.2 Control Structure of Speed Mode ......................................................... 6-16
6.3.3 Smooth Speed Command .................................................................... 6-18
6.3.4 The Scaling of Analog Command ......................................................... 6-20
6.3.5 The Timing Diagram in Speed Mode .................................................... 6-20
6.3.6 Gain Adjustment of Speed Loop ........................................................... 6-21
6.3.7 Resonance Suppression....................................................................... 6-26
6.4 Torque (force) Mode ...................................................................................... 6-31
6.4.1 Selection of Torque (force) Command .................................................. 6-31
6.4.2 Control Structure of Torque (force) Mode ............................................. 6-32
6.4.3 Smooth Torque (force) Command ........................................................ 6-33
6.4.4 The Scaling of Analog Command ......................................................... 6-33
6.4.5 The Timing Diagram in Torque (force) Mode ........................................ 6-34
6.5 Dual Mode ..................................................................................................... 6-35

6.5.1 Speed / Position Dual Mode ................................................................. 6-36
6.5.2 Speed / Torque (force) Dual Mode ....................................................... 6-36
6.5.3 Torque (force) / Position Dual Mode ..................................................... 6-37
6.6 Others ............................................................................................................ 6-38
6.6.1 The Use of Speed Limit ........................................................................ 6-38
6.6.2 The Use of Torque (force) Limit ............................................................ 6-38
6.6.3 Analog Monitor ..................................................................................... 6-39
6.6.4 The Use of Brake .................................................................................. 6-40
Chapter 7 Motion Control

7.1 Motion Control Functions of ASDA-A2R ........................................................ 7-1
7.2 Information of the Servo Drive ....................................................................... 7-1
7.2.1 Description of Monitor Variables ........................................................... 7-3
7.2.2 Description of Data Array...................................................................... 7-9
7.3 Description of Motion Axes ............................................................................ 7-12
7.4 Description of PR Mode ................................................................................. 7-13
7.5 The Difference between General PR Mode and the One in ASDA-A2R........ 7-13
7.6 The Position Unit of PR Mode ....................................................................... 7-14
7.7 Description of Register in PR Mode............................................................... 7-14
7.8 Homing Description of PR Mode ................................................................... 7-16
7.9 DI/DO Provided by PR Mode and Diagrams ................................................. 7-16
7.10 Parameter Settings in PR Mode .................................................................... 7-18
7.10.1 The Relation between the Previous Path the and Next Path .............. 7-24

7.10.2 Programming the Path in PR Mode .................................................... 7-24
7.11 The Description of E-Cam Function............................................................... 7-26
7.11.1 Function Description of CAPTURE (Data Capture) ............................ 7-34
7.11.2 Function Description of COMPARE (Data Compare) ........................... 7-36
Chapter 8 Parameters
8.1 Parameter Definition ...................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 List of Parameters ......................................................................................... 8-2
8.3 Parameter Description ................................................................................... 8-16
P0-xx Monitor Parameters .............................................................................. 8-16
P1-xx Basic Parameters ................................................................................. 8-37
P2-xx Extension Parameters .......................................................................... 8-81
P3-xx Communication Parameters ................................................................. 8-119
P4-xx Diagnosis Parameters .......................................................................... 8-127
P5-xx Motion Setting Parameters ................................................................... 8-138
P6-xx PR Parameters..................................................................................... 8-207
P7-xx PR Parameters..................................................................................... 8-246
PM-xx Motor Parameters ............................................................................... 8-257
Table 8.1 Function Description of Digital Input (DI) ......................................... 8-279
Table 8.2 Function Description of Digital Output (DO) .................................... 8-286
Chapter 9 Communication
9.1 RS-485／RS-232 Communication Hardware Interface ................................. 9-1

9.2 RS-485／RS-232 Communication Parameters Setting ................................. 9-3
9.3 MODBUS Communication Protocol ............................................................... 9-4
9.4 Write-in and Read-out Communication Parameters ...................................... 9-15
Chapter 10 Toubleshooting
10.1 Alarm of Servo Drive ..................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Alarm of CANopen Communication ............................................................... 10-4
10.3 Alarm of Motion Control ................................................................................. 10-6
10.4 Causes and Corrective Actions ..................................................................... 10-10
10.5 Corrective Actions after the Alarm Occurs ..................................................... 10-32
Chapter 11 Specifications
11.1 Specifications of Servo Drive ......................................................................... 11-1
11.2 Specifications of Servo Motor (ECMA Series) ............................................... 11-4
11.3 Specifications of Servo Motor (ECML Series) ............................................... 11-12
11.4 Torque Features (T-N curve) ......................................................................... 11-14
11.5 Force and Speed Features (F-S curve) ......................................................... 11-16
11.6 Overload Features ......................................................................................... 11-18
11.7 Dimensions of the Servo Drive ...................................................................... 11-20
11.8 Dimensions of ECMA Series Servo Motor ..................................................... 11-23
11.9 Dimensions of ECML Series Servo Motor ..................................................... 11-28
Chapter 12 Setting of Motor Parameters

12.1 Tuning Procedure of Motor Parameters ........................................................ 12-1

12.2 Panel Setup Procedure (without PC Software).............................................. 12-24
Appendix A Accessories
Appendix B Maintenance and Inspection

(This page is intentionally left blank.)

Chapter 1 Inspection and Model
Explanation
1.1 Inspection
In order to prevent the negligence during purchasing and delivery, please inspect the
following items carefully.
 Please check if the product is what you have purchased: check the part number of
the motor and the servo drive on the nameplate. Refer to the next page for the model
explanation.
 Check if the motor shaft can rotate smoothly: Rotate the motor shaft by hand. If it can
be rotated smoothly, it means the motor shaft is normal. However, it cannot be
rotated by hand if the motor has an electromagnetic brake.
 Check if there is any damage shown on its appearance: visually check if there is any
damage or scrape of the appearance.
 Check if there is any loose screw: If the screws are un-tightened or fall off.
If any of the above situations happens, please contact the distributors to solve the
problems.
A complete and workable servo set should include:
(1) A Servo drive and a servo motor
(2) A UVW motor power cable, the U, V and W wires can connect to the socket
attached by the servo drive and another side is the plug which could connect to the
socket of the motor. And a green ground wire which should be locked to the ground
terminal of the servo drive. (selective purchase)
(3) An encoder cable which connects to the socket of the encoder. One side of it
connects to CN2 servo drive and another side is the plug. (selective purchase)
(4) Converter box. (selective purchase)
(5) 26-PIN connecter for CN26 of converter box (selective purchase)
(6) 50-PIN connector which is used in CN1 (3M analog product) (selective purchase)
(7) 20-PIN connector which is used in CN2 (3M analog product) (selective purchase)
(8) 6-PIN connector which is used in CN3 (IEEE 1394 analog product) and is for
general communication (RS485) (selective purchase)
(9) 4-PIN connector which used in CN4 (USB Type B product) (selective purchase)
(10) RJ45 connector which used in CN6 and is for high-speed communication
(selective purchase)
(11) 7-PIN connector which used in CN7, for extension DI. (-U model) (selective
purchase)
(12) Servo drive power input:
Control circuit power Main circuit power
100 W ~ 3 kW L1c, L2C, fast connector R, S, T fast connector
Revision December, 2014 1-1

Chapter 1 Inspection and Model Explanation ASDA-A2R Series
(13) 3-PIN fast connector (U, V, W)

(14) 3-PIN fast connector (P , D, C)
(15) A plastic lever
(16) A metal short-circuit chip
(17) An installation manual
1-2 Revision December, 2014

1.2 Product Model

1.2.1 Nameplate Information
ASDA-A2R Series Servo Drive
 Nameplate Information
 Serial Number
Serial Number
Production Week
Production Year (8: Year of 2008)
Production Factory (T: Taoyuan; W: Wujiang)
Model Name
ECMA Series Servo Motor

 Nameplate Information
Model Name
Power Input Specification
Power Output Specification
Barcode
Serial Number
 Serial Number
Serial Number
Production Week
Production Year (8: Year of 2008)
Production Factory (T: Taoyuan; W: Wujiang)
Delta Standard
Model Name

ECML Series Servo Motor

 Coil Assembly_Nameplate Information
 Coil assembly_Serial Number
 Magnetic way_ Nameplate Information
 Magnetic way_ Serial Number

1.2.2 Model Explanation

ASDA-A2R Series Servo Drive
ASD-A2R-0121-U
Model Type
Input Voltage and Phase

21: 220 V 1 phase
23: 220 V 3 phase
Rated Power Input

01: 100 W 20: 2 kW
02: 200 W 30: 3 kW
04: 400 W 1B:11 kW
07: 750 W 1F:15 kW
10: 1 kW
15: 1.5 kW
Product Series
A2R
Product Name
AC SERVO Drive
Model Type
Full-closed Expansion Slot
Type Loop
CANopen DMCNET E-CAM
for Digital Input
M ○ ○ × ○ ×
U ○ × × ○ ○
F ○ × ○ × ×
L ○ × × × ×

ECMA Series Servo Motor

E C M A - C 1 0 6 0 2 E S
Standard Shaft Diameter: S
Specific Shaft Diameter: 3=42mm,
7=14mm
w/o with w/o With
Type of Shaft
Brake Brake Brake Brake
Diameter and
w/o Oil w/o Oil with Oil With Oil
Oil Seal
Seal Seal Seal Seal
Round Shaft
(with fixed A B C D
screw holes)
Keyway E F G H
Keyway
(with fixed P Q R S
screw holes)
Rated Power Output

0F:50 W 09:900 W
01:100 W 10:1.0 kW
02:200 W 13:1.3 kW
03:300 W 15:1.5 kW
04:400 W 18:1.8 kW
05:500 W 20:2.0 kW
06:600 W 30:3.0 kW
07:700 W 35:3.5 kW
08:850 W
Motor Frame Size

04:40 mm 09:86 mm 18:180 mm
06:60 mm 10:100 mm 22:22 0mm
08:80 mm 13:130 mm
Name of the Series

Rated Voltage and Rated Speed
C = 220 V/3,000 rpm;
E = 220 V/2,000 rpm;
F = 220 V/1,500 rpm;
G = 220 V/1,000 rpm;
Encoder Type
1: Incremental, 20-bit
2: Incremental, 17-bit
Servo Type
A: AC Servo
Product Name
ECM: Electronic Commutation Motor

ECML Series Servo Motor_Magnetic Way
ECM L-S M 16 1000 S

Total length of magnetic way
0340: 340 mm
0520: 520 mm
0700: 700 mm
0880: 880 mm
1060: 1060 mm
1240: 1240 mm
Magnetic way dimensions

16: Ø16 mm
20: Ø20 mm
25: Ø25 mm
32: Ø32 mm
Component type
Null: coil assembly
M: magnetic way
Name of the Series

Linear motor type
S = Shaft type coreless
Servo Type
L: Linear servo drive
Product Name

ECML Series Servo Motor_Coil assembly
ECM L-S 16 08 A 2 D NS
Cooling type
A: Air cooling
L: Water cooling
N: N/A
Hall sensor type

A: Analog
D: Digital
Input voltage
2: 220V
3: 380V
Wiring method
A: Wiring method A
Number of coil sets

03: 3 sets
04: 4sets
05: 5sets
06: 6sets
08: 8sets
Magnetic way dimensions
16: Ø16 mm
20: Ø20 mm
25: Ø25 mm
32: Ø32 mm
Component type
Null: coil assembly
M: magnetic way
Name of the Series
Linear motor type
S = Shaft type coreless
Servo Type
L: Linear servo drive
Product Name

1.3 Servo Drive and Corresponding Servo Motor

Permanent magnet Permanent magnet
Servo Drive synchronous rotary motor synchronous linear motor
(ECMA-) (ECML-)
ECMA-C△0401S (S = 8 mm) ECML-S1606A2DNS
100 W ASD-A2R-0121- ECML-S1608A2DNS
ECMA-C1040FS (S = 8 mm)
ECML-S2003A2DNS
200 W ASD-A2R-0221- ECMA-C△0602S (S = 14 mm) ECML-S2004A2DNS
ECML-S2005A2DNS
ECMA-C△0604S (S = 14mm) ECML-S2504A2DNS
ECMA-C△08047 (7 = 14 mm) ECML-S2506A2DNS
400 W ASD-A2R-0421- ECML-S3204A2DNS
ECMA-E△1305S (S = 22 mm)
ECMA-G△1303S (S = 22 mm)
ECMA-F11305S (S = 22 mm) ECML-S2508A2DNS
ECMA-C△0807S (S = 19 mm) ECML-S3206A2DNS
750 W ASD-A2R-0721- ECMA-C△0907S (S = 16 mm) ECML-S3208A2DNS
ECMA-G△1306S (S = 22 mm)
ECMA-C△0910S (S = 16 mm)
ECMA-C△1010S (S = 22 mm)
1000 W ASD-A2R-1021- ECMA-E△1310S (S = 22 mm) -
ECMA-F△1308S (S = 22 mm)
ECMA-G△1309S (S = 22 mm)
ECMA-C△1020S (S = 22 mm)
ECMA-E△1320S (S = 22 mm)
ECMA-F11313S (S = 22 mm)
ECMA-F11318S (S = 22 mm)
ECMA-C△13304 (4 = 24 mm)
ECMA-E△1830S (S = 35 mm)
3000 W ASD-A2R-3023- -
ECMA-E△1835S (S = 35 mm)
ECMA-F△1830S (S = 35 mm)
11 kW ASD-A2R-1B43- ECMA-L1221B3 (3 = 42 mm)
15 kW ASD-A2R-1F43- ECMA-L1221FS (S = 55 mm)
NOTE 1) Box, () at the end of the model name of the servo drive represents the
code of ASDA-A2R. Please refer to the type of purchasing product
information.
2) Box, (△) in the model name of the servo motor represents the type of
encoder. △=1: incremental, 20-bit; △=2: incremental, 17-bit; △=A:
absolute.
3) Box, () in the model name of the servo motor represents the type of
brake or keyway / oil seal.
The above table shows the specification of servo drive which has triple rated current. If the
user needs the servo drive which has six times of the rated current, please contact with
distributors. For detailed specification of the servo motor and servo drive, please refer to
the appendix.

1.4 Each Part of the Servo Drive

Front view of the servo drive
Please refer to
the top view
Sliding cover
Indicator of input voltage
CN5: Connector
Connect to linear scale
CN1: Connector
Connect to PLC or control I/O
CN6: CANopen connector

Connector for communication control
CN2: Connector
Connect to the encoder connector
which is on the servo motor
CN7: External DI connector

CN3: RS-485 and RS-232 connector
6 extension DI are available Connect to the controller
CN4: USB connector

Connect to personal computer
Grounding terminal
Please be ensured it is firmly
grounded so as to avoid
electric shock.
Please refer to
the bottom view

Top view of the servo drive

Bottom view of the servo drive
Servo Motor Output Reserved

Connect to motor power connector
connector (U,V,W) and
cannot connect to the
main circuit power.
Wrong connection may Grounding Terminal
damage the servo drive. Connect to power and
motor grounding

1.5 ECML Series Servo Motor
Encoder cable
It contains 7 core cables, which are for
Hall Sensor and NTC thermistor. It
connects to CN2 or CN5. Please refer
to Ch3.1 for wiring method.
Motor power cable
It contains 4 core cables, which are for
U, V, W and ground wire. It connects to
output port of the servo drive and
grounding terminal.


Chapter 2 Installation
2.1 Notes
Please pay special attention to the followings:
1) Do not strain the cable connection between the servo drive and the servo motor.
2) Make sure each screw is tightened when fixing the servo drive.
3) The motor shaft and the ball screw should be parallel.
4) If the connection between the servo drive and the servo motor is over 20 meters, please
thicken the connecting wire, UVW as well as the encoder cable.
5) Tighten the fixed four screws of the motor.
2.2 Ambient Conditions of Storage

Before the installation, this product has to be kept in shipping carton. In order to retain the
warranty coverage and for the maintenance, please follow the instructions below when
storage, if the product is not in use temporally:
 Store the product in a dry and dust-free location.
 Store the product within an ambient temperature range of -20 ℃ to +65 ℃.
 Store the product within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and a non-condensing
environment.
 Avoid storing the product in the environment of corrosive gas and liquid.
 It is better to store the product in shipping carton and put it on the shelf or working
platform.

Chapter 2 InstallationASDA-A2R Series
2.3 Ambient Conditions of Installation

The best temperature of this servo drive is between 0 ℃ and 55 ℃. If the temperature is
over 45 ℃, please place the product in a well-ventilated environment so as to ensure its
reliability performance. If the product is installed in an electric box, make sure the size of
the electric box and its ventilation condition will not overheat and endanger the internal
electronic device. Also, pay attention to the vibration of the machine. Check if the vibration
will influence the electronic device of the electric box. Besides, the ambient conditions
should also include:
 Location has no over-heat device.
 Location has no water drop, vapor, dust and oily dust.
 Location has no corrosive and inflammable gas and liquid.
 Location has no airborne dust and metal particles.
 Location has solid foundation and no vibration.
 Location has no interference of electromagnetic noise.
The ambient temperature of the motor is between 0℃ and 40℃ and the ambient conditions
include:
 Location has no over-heat device.
 Location has not water drop, vapor, dust and oily dust.
 Location has no corrosive and inflammable gas and liquid.
 Location has no airborne dust and metal particles.

2.4 Installation Direction and Space

Notes:
Follow the instructions for installation direction. Otherwise it is possible to cause
malfunction. In order to have well-cooling and circulation effect, the enough space between
adjacent objects and the baffle is needed. Or it might result in malfunction. When installing
AC servo drive, do not seal the suction hole and the vent hole. Do not place the drive in a
horizontal direction, or it might cause malfunction.
Correct Incorrect
Scheme of installation:
In order to have smaller wind resistance of the fan and increase the ventilation, please
follow the suggested clearance value when installing one or more than one servo drives.
(Refer to the following diagrams)
The above diagrams are not in equal proportion. Please refer to the
NOTE annotation.

2.5 Specification of Circuit Breaker and Fuse

Caution: Please use the fuse and circuit breaker that is recognized by UL/CSA.
Servo Drive Model Circuit breaker Fuse (Class T)

Operation Mode General General
ASD-A2R-0121- 5A 5A
ASD-A2R-0221- 5A 5A
ASD-A2R-0421- 10A 10A
ASD-A2R-0721- 10A 20A
ASD-A2R-1021- 15A 25A
ASD-A2R-1521- 20A 40A
ASD-A2R-2023- 30A 50A
ASD-A2R-3023- 30A 70A
If the servo drive equips with earth leakage circuit breaker for avoiding
NOTE electric leakage, please choose the current sensitivity which is over
200mA and can continue up to 0.1 seconds.

2.6 EMI Filters Selection

220 V
EMI Filter Model
Item Power Servo Drive Model FootPrint
1PH 3PH
1 100 W ASD-A2R-0121- RF007S21AA RF022B43AA N
4 750 W ASD-A2R-0721- RF007S21AA RF037B43BA N
5 1000 W ASD-A2R-1021- RF007S21AA RF037B43BA N
6 1500 W ASD-A2R-1521- RF015B21AA RF037B43BA N
7 2000 W ASD-A2R-2023- - RF037B43BA N
8 3000 W ASD-A2R-3023- - RF037B43BA N
EMI Filter Installation

All electronic equipment (including servo drive) generates high or low frequency noise
during operation and interfere the peripheral equipments via conduction or radiation. With
EMI Filter and the correct installation, much interference can be eliminated. It is suggested
to use Delta’s EMI Filter to suppress the interference better.
When installing servo drive and EMI Filter, please follow the instructions of the user manual
and make sure it meets the following specification.
1. EN61000-6-4 (2001)
2. EN61800-3 (2004) PDS of category C2
3. EN55011+A2 (2007) Class A Group 1
General Precaution
In order to ensure the best performance of EMI Filter, apart from the instructions of servo
drive installation and wiring, please follow the precautions mention below:
1. The servo drive and EMI Filter should be installed on the same metal plate.
2. When installing servo drive and EMI Filter, the servo drive should be installed above
the EMI Filter.
3. The wiring should be as short as possible.
4. The metal plate should be well grounded.
5. The metal cover of the servo drive and EMI Filter or grounding should be firmly fixed
on the metal plate. Also, the contact area should be as large as possible.

Motor Cable Selection and Installation Precautions
The selection of motor cables and installation affect the performance of EMI Filter. Please
follow the precautions mention below.
1. Use the cable that has braid shielding (The effect of double shielding is better)
2. The shield on both sides of the motor cable should be grounded in the shortest
distance and the largest contact area.
3. The protective paint of the U-shape saddle and metal plate should be removed in order
to ensure the good contact. Please see disgram 1.
4. It should have correct connection between the braid shielding of the motor cable and
the metal plate. The braid shielding on both sides of the motor cable should be fixed
by the U-shape saddle and metal plate. Please see diagram 2 for the correct
connection.
Remove the paint on metal saddle to ensure the good grounding
U-shape saddle Metal plate with

good grounding
Diagram 2
Diagram 1

2.7 Selection of Regenerative Resistor

When the direction of pull-out torque is different from the rotation, it means the electricity is
sent back to the servo drive from the load-end. It becomes the capacitance of DC Bus and
increases the voltage. When the voltage increases to a specific value, the come-back
eletricity can only be consumed by regenerative resistor. There is a built-in regenerative
resistor in the servo drive. Users can also use the external regenerative resistor if needed.
Specification of built-in regenerative resistor provided by ASDA-A2R

Specification of built-in *1 The capacity of
Minimum allowable
Servo Drive regenerative resistor built-in regenerative
Resistance Capacity resistor resistance
(kW)
(P1-52) (Ohm) (P1-53) (Watt) (Watt) (Ohm)
0.1 - - - 30
0.2 - - - 30
0.4 40 40 20 30
0.75 40 60 30 20
1.0 40 60 30 20
1.5 40 60 30 20
2.0 20 100 50 10
3.0 20 100 50 10
When the regenerative resistor exceeds the capacity of built-in regenerative resistor, the
external regenerative resistor should be applied. Please pay special attention to the
followings when using the regenerative resistor.
1. Please correctly set up the resistance (P1-52) and capacity (P1-53) of regenerative
resistor. Or it might influence the performance of this function.
2. If users desire to use the external regenerative resistor, please make sure the applied
value is the same as the built-in regenerative resistor. If users desire to connect it in
parallel to increase the power of regenerative resistor, please make sure the
capacitance meets the requirements.
3. In natural environment, if the capacity of regenerative resistor (the average value) is
within the rated capacity, the temperature of the capacitance will increase to 120℃ or
even higher (under the condition of regenerative energy keeps existing). For safety
concerns, please apply the method of forced cooling in order to reduce the
temperature of regenerative resistor. Or, it is suggested to use the regenerative
resistor which is equipped with thermal switches. Please contact the distributors for
load characteristics of the regenerative resistor.
When using the external regenerative resistor, the resistor should connect to P, C terminal
and the contact of P, D terminal should be opened. It is recommended to choose the above
mentioned capacitance. For easy calculation of regenerative resistor capacity, except the
energy consumed by IGBT, two ways are provided to select the capacity of external
regenerative resistor according to the selected linear motor or rotary motor.

Rotary Motor:
(1) Regenerative Power Selection
(a) When the external load on torque does not exist
If the motor operates back and forth, the energy generated by the brake will go into
the capacitance of DC bus. When the voltage of the capacitance exceeds a specific
value, the redundant energy will be consumed by regenerative resistor. Two ways of
selecting regenerative resistor are provided here. The table below provides the
energy calculation method. Users can refer to it and calculate the selected
regenerative resistor.
Regenerative The maximum

power from regenerative
Servo Drive Rotor Inertia
Motor empty load power of
(kW) J (× 10-4kg.m2)
3000r/min to stop capacitance
Eo (joule) Ec (joule)
0.05 ECMA-C1040F□ □ 0.021 0.10 4.21
0.1 ECMA-C10401□ □ 0.037 0.18 4.21
0.2 ECMA-C10602□ □ 0.177 0.87 5.62
0.4 ECMA-C10604□ □ 0.277 1.37 8.42
Low
0.4 ECMA-C10804□ □ 0.68 3.36 8.42
Inertia
0.75 ECMA-C10807□ □ 1.13 5.59 17.47
1.0 ECMA-C11010□ □ 2.65 13.10 21.22
2.0 ECMA-C11020□ □ 4.45 22.0 25.58
3.0 ECMA-C11330□ □ 12.7 62.80 25.58
0.4 ECMA-E11305□ □ 8.17 40.40 8.42
1.0 ECMA-E11310□ □ 8.41 41.59 21.22
1.5 ECMA-E11315□ □ 11.18 55.29 25.58
Medium
Inertia 2.0 ECMA-E11320□ □ 14.59 72.15 25.58
2.0 ECMA-E11820□ □ 34.68 171.49 25.58
3.0 ECMA-E11830□ □ 54.95 271.73 31.20
3.5 ECMA-E11835□ □ 54.95 271.73 31.20
0.85 ECMA-F11308□ □ 14.1 69.73 21.22
Medium 2.0 ECMA-F11313□ □ 20.0 98.90 25.58
-High
Inertia 2.0 ECMA-F11318□ □ 24.9 123.13 31.20
3.0 ECMA-F11830□ □ 54.95 271.73 28
High
0.75 ECMA-F11305□ □ 10.3 22.64 17.47
Inertia

Assume the load inertia is N times to the motor inertia and the motor decelerates from
3000r/min to 0, its regenerative energy is (N+1) x Eo. The consumed regenerative
resistor is (N+1) × Eo - Ec joule. If the cycle of back and forth operation is T sec, then
the power of regenerative resistor it needs is 2× ((N+1) x Eo - Ec) / T.
Followings are the calculation procedure:
Steps Item Calculation and Setting Method

Set the capacity of regenerative
1 Set P1-53 to the maximum value
resistor to the maximum
Set T cycle of back and forth
2 Enter by the user
operation
3 Set the rotational speed wr Enter by the user or read via P0-02
4 Set the load/motor inertia ratio N Enter by the user or read via P0-02
Calculate the maximum
5 Eo= J * wr2/182
regenerative energy Eo
Set the absorbable regenerative
6 Refer to the above table
energy Ec
Calculate the needful capacitance
7 2 x ((N+1) xEo – Ec) / T
of regenerative resistor
Take 400W as the example, the cycle of back and forth operation is T = 0.4sec, the
maximum speed is 3000r/min and the load inertia is 7 times to the motor inertia. Then,
the needful power of regenerative resistor is 2 × ((7+1) × 1.68 – 8) / 0.4 = 27.2 W. If it is
smaller than the built-in capacity of regenerative resistor, the built-in 60W
regenerative resistor will do. Generally speaking, when the need of the external load
inertia is not much, the built-in regenerative is enough. The diagram below describes
the actual operation. The smaller power of the regenerative resistor it is, the more
energy it accumulates and the higher temperature it will be. When the temperature is
higher than a specific value, ALE05 occurs.
(b) If the external load torque exists, the motor is in reverse rotation.
Usually, the motor is in forward rotation, which means the torque output direction of
the motor is the same as the rotation direction. However, in some applications, the
direction of torque output is different from the rotation. In this situation, the motor is in
reverse rotation. The external energy goes into the servo drive through the motor. The
diagram below is one example. When the external force direction is the same as the
moving direction, the servo system has to use the force of the opposite direction to
keep the speed and stability. Huge amount of energy will return to the servo drive at
the moment. When DC-BUS is full and unable to store the regenerative energy, the
energy will be leaded to regenerative resistor and consumed.

馬達轉
Motor 速
Speed
外部負載
External 扭矩
Load Torque
馬達輸
Motor 出扭Torque
Output 矩
馬達輸出負功
Negative 正功負功正功
Positive Negative Positive
torque torque torque torque
Negative torque: TL × Wr TL: external load torque

For safety reasons, please calculate it by considering the safest situation.
For example, when the external load torque is the +70% rated torque and the rotation
reaches 3000 r/min, then take 400 W (the rated torque is 1.27 Nt-m) as the example,
the user has to connect the regenerative resistor of 40, which is 2 × (0.7× 1.27) ×
(3000 × 2 ×π／60) = 560W.
(2) Simple Selection

Choose the appropriate regenerative resistor according to the allowable frequency
and empty load frequency in actual operation. The so-called empty allowable
frequency is the frequency of continuous operation when the servo motor runs from
0r/min to the rated speed and then decelerates from the rated speed to 0r/min within
the shortest time. The following table lists the allowable frequency when the servo
drive runs without load (times/min).
Allowable frequency of built-in regenerative resistor when the servo drive runs without load
(times/min)
Motor Capacity 600 W 750 W 900 W 1.0 kW 1.5 kW 2.0 kW 2.0 kW 3.0 kW 11 kW 15 kW
Corresponding 06 07 09 10 15 20 20 30 1B 1F
Motor
83
ECMA□ □ C - 312 - 137 -
(F100)
- - - -
24 10
ECMA□ □ E - - - 42 32
(F130) (F180)
11 - -
ECMA□ □ F - - - - - - - 11 - -
ECMA□ □ G 42 - 31 - - - - - - -
ECMA□ □ L - - - - - - - - - -
When the servo motor runs with load, the allowable frequency will be different

according to different load inertia or speed. The following is the calculation method.
m represents load / motor inertia ratio.
2
Allowable frequency when serv o motor run without load Rated s peed times
Allowable fr equency = x
m+1 Operating speed mi n.
The comparison table of external regenerative resistor is provided below. Please

choose the appropriate regenerative resistor according to the allowable frequency.
The table below describes the suggested allowable frequency (times/min) of
regenerative resistor when the servo drive runs without load.
Allowable frequency of regenerative resistor when the servo drive runs without load
(times/min)
Motor Capacity ECMA□ □ C
400 W 400 W
100 W 200 W 750 W 1.0 kW 2.0 kW
Corresponding (F60) (F80)
Motor 01 02 04 04 07 10 20
BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω) - - 8608 3506 2110 925 562
BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20Ω) - - - 8765 5274 2312 1406
Motor Capacity ECMA□ □ E

2.0 kW 2.0 kW
0.5 kW 1 kW 1.5 kW 3.0 kW
Corresponding (F130) (F180)
Motor 05 1.0 15 20 20 30
BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω) 291 283 213 163 68 -
BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20Ω) 729 708 533 408 171 -
BR1K5W005 (3 kW 10Ω) - - - - - 331
(times/min)
ECMA□ □ F
Motor Capacity
3.0 kW
Corresponding
30
Motor
BR1K5W005 (3 kW 10Ω) 331

(times/min)
ECMA□ □ L
Motor Capacity
11 kW 15 kW
Corresponding
1B 1F
Motor
BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω) - -
BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20Ω) - -

Linear Motor:
Regenerative Power Selection
(a) When the external load on torque does not exist
If the motor operates back and forth, the energy generated by the brake will go into
the capacitance of DC bus. When the voltage of the capacitance exceeds a specific
value, the redundant energy will be consumed by regenerative resistor. Two ways of
selecting regenerative resistor are provided here. The table below provides the
energy calculation method. Users can refer to it and calculate the selected
Regenerative The maximum

Three times of regenerative
power from
Servo Drive coil weight
Motor empty load power of
(kW) (coil assembly) 5m/s to stop
m (kg) capacitance
Eo (joule) Ec (joule)
ECML-S1606A2DNS 1.05 13.125 4.21
0.1
ECML-S1608A2DNS 1.35 16.875 4.21
ECML-S2003A2DNS 1.95 24.375 5.62
0.2 ECML-S2004A2DNS 2.49 31.125 5.62
ECML-S2005A2DNS 3 37.5 5.62
ECML-S2504A2DNS 3.3 41.25 8.42
0.4 ECML-S2506A2DNS 4.8 60 8.42
ECML-S3204A2DNS 6.3 78.75 8.42
ECML-S2508A2DNS 4.5 56.25 17.47
0.75 ECML-S3206A2DNS 6.6 82.5 17.47
ECML-S3208A2DNS 8.4 105 17.47
Assume the total weight of movable section and load is m kg, when v m/s decelerates
to 0, its regenerative energy is E = 0.5 mv2(joule) and the consumed regenerative
resistor is E – Ec joule. If the cycle of back and forth operation is T sec, then the
power of regenerative resistor it needs is 2 × (E – Ec) / T. Followings are the
calculation procedure:

Set the capacity of regenerative
1 Set P1-53 to the maximum value
resistor to the maximum
Set T cycle of back and forth
2 Enter by the user
operation
3 Set up the speed v Enter by the user or read via P0-02
Set up the total weight of movable
4 Enter by the user or read via P0-02
section and load, N


Calculate the maximum
5 E = 0.5 mv2
regenerative energy E
Set the absorbable regenerative
6 Refer to the above table
energy Ec
Calculate the needful capacitance
7 2 × (E – Ec) / T
of regenerative resistor
Take 400W as the example, the cycle of back and forth operation is T = 0.4sec,
assume that the maximum speed is 2m/s and the total weight of movable section and
load is 7kg, the needful power of regenerative resistor is 2 × (0.5*7*22－8.42) / 0.4 =
27.9 W. If it is smaller than the built-in capacity of regenerative resistor, the built-in
60W regenerative resistor will do. Generally speaking, when the need of movable
section and the external load inertia is not much, the built-in regenerative is enough.
The diagram below describes the actual operation. The smaller power of the
regenerative resistor it is, the more energy it accumulates and the higher temperature
it will be. When the temperature is higher than a specific value, ALE05 occurs.
(b) When the external load torque exists, the motor is in reverse rotation.
Usually, the motor is in forward rotation, which means the force direction of the motor
is the same as the moving direction. However, in some applications, the direction of
force is different from the moving direction. In this situation, the motor is in reverse
rotation. The external energy goes into the servo drive through the motor. The
diagram below is one of the examples. When the motor is in constant speed, it is
positive force in most of the time and a huge amount of energy rapidly transmits to
Motor speed
馬達轉
速度速
外部負載扭
External 推力矩
force
馬達輸出
Motor 推力
扭矩force
output
馬達輸出負功正功負功正功
Negative force Positive Negative force Positive
force force
Negative force: TL × Wr TL: external force

For safety reasons, please calculate it by considering the safest situation.

For example, when the external force is the +70% rated force and the speed reaches
2m/s, then take 400W (rated force is FN) as the example, the user has to connect the
regenerative resistor which is 2 × (0.7× F) × (2) = 2.8*F W, 40.

(2) Simple Selection

Choose the appropriate regenerative resistor according to the allowable frequency and
empty load frequency in actual operation. The so-called empty allowable frequency is the
maximum frequency of continuous operation when the servo motor runs from 0m/s to 5m/s
and then from 5m/s to 0r/min. The following table lists the allowable frequency of built-in
regenerative resistor when the servo drive runs without load (times/min).
Motor Capacity 400 W 400 W 400 W 750 W 750 W 750 W

Corresponding
04 06 08 04 06 08
Motor
ECML-S25□□A2DNS 87 60 45 - - -
ECML-S32□□A2DNS - - - 96 65 51
When the servo motor runs with load, the allowable frequency will be different
according to different load inertia or speed. The following is the calculation method.
The comparison table of external regenerative resistor is provided below. Please

choose the appropriate regenerative resistor according to the allowable frequency.
The table below describes the suggested allowable frequency (times/min) of
regenerative resistor when the servo drive runs without load.
(times/min)
Motor Capacity ECML-S25□ □ A2DNS
Corresponding 400 W 400 W 400 W 750 W 750 W 750 W
Motor 04 06 08 04 06 08
BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω) 872 600 457 - - -
BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20Ω) - - - - - -
Motor Capacity ECML-S32□ □ A2DNS

Corresponding 400 W 400 W 400 W 750 W 750 W 750 W
Motor 04 06 08 04 06 08
BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω) - - - 640 436 342
BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20Ω) - - - 1600 1090 855
If watt is not enough when using regenerative resistor, connecting the same
regenerative resistor in parallel can increase the power.

Dimensions of Regenerative Resistor
Delta part number: BR400W040 (400 W 40Ω)

L1 L2 H D W MAX. WEIGHT (g)
265 250 30 5.3 60 930
Delta part number: BR1K0W020 (1 kW 20Ω)

L1 L2 H D W MAX. WEIGHT (g)
400 385 50 5.3 100 2800

Delta part number: BR1K5W005 (3 kW 10Ω)

Chapter 3 Wiring
This chapter details the wiring method of servo drive, the definition of each signal and
standard wiring diagram.
3.1 Wiring of Delta’s Servo System

3.1.1 Wiring Diagram of Peripheral Devices (connect to Delta’s Servo
Motor (Communication Type))
Installation Notes:
1. Check if the power and wiring among R, S, T and L1c, L2c are correct.
2. When connecting to Delta’s 20bit rotary motor, please check if the output terminal U,
V, W of the servo motor is correctly wired. The incorrect wiring may disable the
operation of the motor or cause malfunction.
3. When applying to the external regenerative resistor, the contact between P and D
should be opened and the external regenerative resistor should connect to terminal
P and C. When applying to the internal regenerative resistor, the contact between
P and D should be closed and the contact between P and C should be opened.
4. When an alarm occurs or the system is in emergency stop status, use ALARM or
WARN to output and disconnect the power of magnetic contactor in order to
disconnect the power of servo drive.

Chapter 3 Wiring ASDA-A2R Series
Power
100W~1.5kW single-/3-phase 200~230V
2kW~3kW 3-phase 200~230V
No Fuse Breaker (NFB)

It could prevent the instantaneous
excessive current due to short-circuit
or when the power is on/off and
damage the servo drive.
Magnetic Contactor (MC)

When an alarm occurs, it could
output ALRM signal and disconnect
the power of the servo drive.
Host Controller
It could connect to Delta’s PLC
Regenerative Resistor controller or other NC controller.
(option)
P Terminal Block
Module(ASD-BM-50A)
(option)
C
In order to prevent the energy flowing back Transmit the signal of CN1
caused by motor brake and result in error, 50pin to the controller
please connect the PC end of the servo drive to through this terminal.
external regenerative resistor and the contact of
PD end should be opened. If using the internal
regenerative resistor, please be ensured the
contact of PD end should be closed and the
contact of PC end should be opened. CN1 I/O Connector
CN5 Connector (option)
Full-closed loop or position feedback connector

CN3 Connector
CN5: Support model – L, M, U (Please refer to
(option)
the model description of Section 1.2.2) Use MODBUS
CN6 CANopen Connector (option) communication control and
support RS-485/RS232.
CN6: Support model – M (Please refer to
the model description of Section 1.2.2)
CN2 Connector
CN7 Extension DI Connector

(option)
CN7: Support model – U (Please refer to
the model description of Section 1.2.2) CN4 USB Connector (option)
1. Use the standard USB connecting line to
connect to PC to operate the software.
2. Use ASDA-SOFT to conduct tuning,
parameter setting and control.
Servo Motor
3-2 Revision December. 2014

3.1.2 Connectors and Terminals of the Servo Drive

Terminal Name Description
Signal
Power input ofthe Connect to single-phase AC power (select the
L1c, L2c control circuit appropriate voltage specification according to the
product )
Power input of the main Connect to three-phase AC power (select the appropriate
R, S, T
circuit voltage specification according to the product)
Motor cable Connect to the motor
Terminal Wire
Description
Symbol Color
U Red
U, V, W
FG Three-phase main power cable of
V White
the motor
W Black
FG Green Connect to the grounding of

the servo drive.
Regenerative resistor Use internal resistor The contact between P and D
terminal or brake unit end should be closed; contact
between P and C end should be
opened.
Use external Connect P , C ends to the
P , D, C, resister resistor and the contact between
P and D end should be opened.
Use external P and P of the brake unit
braking unit should connect to P and P
respectively. The contact between
P and D and P and C should
be opened.
Connect to the ground wire of the power and the servo
Ground terminal
motor
CN1 I/O connector (option) Connect to the host controller, please refer to Section 3.3
Connector (option) Connect to the encoder of the motor, please refer to
CN2
Section 3.5
Connector (option) Connect to RS-485 or RS-232, please refer to Section
CN3
3.6
USB connector Connect to personal computer (PC or NOTEBOOK),
CN4
(Type B) (option) please refer to Section 3.7
Connector (option) Connect to linear scale or encoder for full-closed loop
CN5
and motor feedback. Please refer to Section 3.8.
CANopen connector RJ45 connector, please refer to Section 3.9
CN6
(option)
Extension DI connector Extension DI connector. Please refer to 3.10.
CN7
(option)
CN8 Battery connector Connector for absolute type of battery box

Pay special attention to the followings when wiring:

1) When the power is cutoff, do not touch R, S, T and U, V, W since the capacitance
inside the servo drive still contains huge amount of electric charge. Wait until the
charging light is off.
2) Separate R, S, T and U, V, W from the other wires. The interval should be at least 30
cm (11.8 inches).
3) If the wire of encoder CN2 or CN5 connecter is not long enough, please use shielded
twisted-pair cable which cannot exceed 20 meters (65.62 inches). If it exceeds 20
meters, please choose the bigger wire diameter of signal cable to ensure it will not
cause signal fading. As for the encoder wiring specification of 20-meter-long cable,
please use AWG26 of wire size and metal braided shield twisted-pair cable which
complies with the standard of UL 2464.
4) When using CANopen, please use the standard shielded twisted-pair cables to
ensure the communication quality.
5) When selecting the wire rod, please refer to Section 3.1.6.

3.1.3 Wiring Method

The wiring method of ASDA-A2R servo drive is divided into single-phase and
three-phase. In the diagram below, Power On is contact a, Power Off and ALRM_RY are
contact b. MC is the coil of magnetic contactor and self-remaining power and is the
contact of main power circuit.
 Wiring Method of Single-phase Power Supply (suitable for 1.5 kW and models below
1.5 kW)

 Wiring Method of Three-phase Power Supply (suitable for all series)

3.1.4 Specification of ECMA Motor U, V, W Power Cable
U, V, W／Connector of Brake Terminal

Motor Model
Definition
ECMA-C1040FS (50 W)
ECMA-C△0401S (100 W)
ECMA-C△0602S (200 W)
ECMA-C△0604S (400 W)
ECMA-C△08047 (400 W) A
ECMA-C△0807S (750 W)
ECMA-C△0907S (750 W)
ECMA-C△0910S (1000 W)
ECMA-C△0401S (100 W)
ECMA-C△0602S (200 W)
ECMA-C△0604S (400 W)
ECMA-C△08047 (400 W)
ECMA-C△0807S (750 W) B
ECMA-C△0907S (750 W)
ECMA-C△0910S (1000 W)
*：with brake
ECMA-G△1303S (300 W)
ECMA-E△1305S (500 W)
ECMA-F11305S (500 W)
ECMA-G△1306S (600 W)
ECMA-F△1308S (850 W)
ECMA-G△1309S (900 W)
ECMA-C△1010S (1000 W)
ECMA-E△1310S (1000 W) C
ECMA-F11313S (1300 W)
ECMA-E△1315S (1500 W)
ECMA-F11318S (1800 W)
ECMA-C△1020S (2000 W)
ECMA-E△1320S (2000 W)
ECMA-C△13304 (3000 W)

U, V, W／Connector of Brake Terminal

Motor Model
Definition
ECMA-E△1820S (2000 W)
ECMA-E△1830S (3000 W)
D
ECMA-E△1835S (3500 W)
ECMA-F△1830S (3000 W)
CASE
Wiring U V W BRAKE1 BRAKE2
GROUND
Name (Red) (White) (Black) (Yellow) (Blue)
(Green)
Terminal
1 2 3 4 - -
Definition A
Terminal
1 2 4 5 3 6
Definition B
Terminal
F I B E G H
Definition C
Terminal
D E F G A B
Definition D

When selecting the wire rod, please choose 600V PVC cable and the length should not
longer than 30m. If the length exceeds 30m, please take the received voltage into
consideration when selecting the wire size. Please refer to Section 3.1.6 for wire rod
selection.
NOTE 1） No polarity for brake coil, the wiring name is BRAKE1 & BRAKE2.
2） Power for brake is DC24 V. Never share it with the power of control
signal VDD.
3） Box, (△) in servo motor model represents encoder type. △=1:
incremental, 20-bit; △=2: incremental, 17-bit; △=A: absolute.
4 ) Box, () in servo motor model represents brake or keyway / oil seal.
Specification of ECML Motor U, V, W Power Cable

Motor Model Color Definition AWG
Red U phase circuit cable 20
White V phase circuit cable 20

ECML-S16S
ECML-S20S Black W phase circuit cable 20
Motor grounding and shielded
Green 20
net
Red U phase circuit cable 18
White V phase circuit cable 18
ECML-S32S Black W phase circuit cable 18
Motor grounding and shielded
Green 18
net
NOTE 1） U, V, W are the bare wire, which has no connector and terminal.
2） The total length of standard cable is 500mm.
3） The cover of the green grounding cable is heat-shrink tubing. If
users cut off the grounding cable and re-connect it, please
connect it to the shielded net for better noise separation.

3.1.5 Specification of Connector of Encoder Cable

Encoder connection diagram 1:
NOTE This diagram shows the connection between the servo drive and the
motor encoder. It is not drew by the practical scale and specification will
be different according to the selected servo drive and motor model.
1) Please refer to the Section of Specification and Definition of Encoder
Connector.
2) Please refer to Section 3.5 CN2 Connector.
Motor Model Connector of Encoder Cable

ECMA-C△0401S (100 W)
ECMA-C△0602S (200 W)
ECMA-C△0604S (400 W)
ECMA-C△08047 (400 W)
ECMA-C△0807S (750 W)
ECMA-C△0907S (750 W)
ECMA-C△0910S (1000 W)

Specification and Definition of Encoder Connector:

Connector of Connector of
Encoder Cable Motor Encoder
Housing : AMP(1-172161-9)
Servo Drive Motor

CN2 Encoder
View from View from
this side this side
1 2 3 3 2 1 (In servo motor models, encoder
Blue White types are 17-bit and 20-bit.)
-
T+ Reserved Reserved Reserved T+
4 5 6 6 5 4
Blue/Black White/Red
-
T- Reserved Reserved Reserved T-
7 8 9 9 8 7
Red/ Red & Black/Black
White & White Shield
Blue Brown
Shield GND DC+5V
DC+5V GND
3 2 1 (In servo motor models, encoder

The wire color of the servo drive types are 2500 ppr and 33-bit.)
White
connector is only for reference. It
should based on the real object. Reserved Reserved T+
6 5 4
White/Red
Reserved Reserved T-
9 8 7
Blue Brown
Shield
GND DC+5V
If not using housing and directly wire the cores, please follow the corresponding core
number for wiring. For example, core number 1 from the servo drive CN2 should connect to
core number 1 from the motor encoder; core number 2 from the servo drive CN2 should
connect to core number 2 from the motor encoder and so on. Please number the cores
from the servo drive in order and then connect it to the encoder.

Encoder connection diagram 2:
NOTE This diagram shows the connection between the servo drive and the
motor encoder. It is not drew by the practical scale and specification will
be different according to the selected servo drive and motor model.
Please refer to Section 3.5, CN2 Connector.
Motor Model Connector of Encoder Cable

ECMA-G△1303S (300 W)
ECMA-E△1305S (500 W)
ECMA-F11305S (500 W)
ECMA-G△1306S (600 W)
ECMA-F△1308S (850 W) Pin Terminal
Wire Color
No. Symbol
ECMA-G△1309S (900 W) A T+ Blue
ECMA-C△1010S (1000 W) B T- Blue & Black
ECMA-E△1310S (1000 W) S DC+5V
Red / Red &
ECMA-F11313S (1300 W) White
Black / Black
ECMA-E△1315S (1500 W) R GND
& White
ECMA-F11318S (1800 W) BRAID
ECMA-C△1020S (2000 W) L –
SHIELD
ECMA-E△1320S (2000 W)
ECMA-E△1820S (2000 W)
ECMA-C△13304 (3000 W)

ECMA-E△1830S (3000 W)
ECMA-F△1830S (3000 W)
ECMA-E△1835S (3500 W)
Please select shielded multi-core and the shielded cable should connect to the SHIELD
end. Please refer to the description of Section 3.1.6.
NOTE 1) Box, (△) in servo motor model represents encoder type. △=1:
incremental, 20-bit; △=2: incremental, 17-bit.
2) Box, () in servo motor model represents brake or keyway / oil seal.
Specification and Definition of Motor Signal Cable
Motor Model Color Definition AWG
Black Hall sensor 5V 26
Black / Red Hall sensor 0V 26

White U phase signal of hall sensor 26
ECML-S25S Brown V phase signal of hall sensor 26
Blue W phase signal of hall sensor 26
Orange Temperature signal + 26
Orange / Red Temperature signal - 26
users cut off the grounding cable and re-connect it, please connect it
to the shielded net for better noise separation.
4） All signal cable of motor must connect to the servo drive.

3.1.6 Selection of Wire Rod

The recommended wire rods are shown as the following table.
Servo Drive and corresponding Motor Power Wiring－Wire Diameter mm² (AWG)
Model L1c, L2c R, S, T U, V, W P ,C
ECMA-C1040FS 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 0.82 (AWG18) 2.1 (AWG14)
ASD-A2R -0121-
ECMA-C△0401S 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 0.82 (AWG18) 2.1 (AWG14)
ASD-A2R -0221- ECMA-C△0602S 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 0.82 (AWG18) 2.1 (AWG14)
ECMA-C△08047 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 0.82 (AWG18) 2.1 (AWG14)
ASD-A2R -0421-
ECMA-E△1305S 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 0.82 (AWG18) 2.1 (AWG14)
ECMA-G△1303S 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 0.82 (AWG18) 2.1 (AWG14)
ECMA-F11305S 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 0.82 (AWG18) 2.1 (AWG14)
ASD-A2R -0721-
ASD-A2R -1021- ECMA-E△1310S 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14)
ECMA-F△1308S 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14)
ASD-A2R-1521- ECMA-E△1315S 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14)
ASD-A2R-2023- ECMA-E△1820S 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 3.3 (AWG12) 2.1 (AWG14)
ECMA-C△13304 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 3.3 (AWG12) 2.1 (AWG14)
ASD-A2R-3023-
ECMA-F△1830S 1.3 (AWG16) 2.1 (AWG14) 3.3 (AWG12) 2.1 (AWG14)
Servo Drive Encoder Wiring — Wire Diameter mm² (AWG)

Model Size Number Specification Standard Length
ASD-A2R-0121- 0.13 (AWG26) 10 cores (4 pairs) UL2464 3 mm (9.84 inches)
NOTE 1） Please use shielded twisted-pair cable for encoder wiring so as to

reduce the interference of the noise.
2） The shield should connect to the phase of SHIELD.
3） Please follow the Selection of Wire Rod when wiring in order to
avoid the danger it may occur.

4） Box, () at the end of the servo drive model represents the model
code of ASDA-A2. Please refer to the model information of the
product you purchased.
5） Box, () in servo motor model represents brake or keyway / oil seal.

3.2 Schematic Diagram of Servo System

■ 220 V 400 W (included) model below (No built-in regenerative
resistor)

■ 220 V 750 W ~ 3 kW Model (Built-in Regenerative Resistor and Fan)

External regenerative resistor
Power
750 W ~ 1.5 kW Model Single/3-phase 200 ~ 230 V
2 kW ~ 3 kW Model 3-phase 200 ~ 230 V
P D C Servo Drive 750 W ~ 3 kW Model
PRB 60W or 120W
+12V
R Lack phase
Rectifying
detection
S
circuit
Servo
U
Regeneration
Motor
T
Circuit
V M
Encoder
L1C ±15V Dynamic
Control Power
Brake
+5V
L2C +3.3V
+24V GATE
Protect DRIVE
circuit
Position Speed Current

External speed A/D PWM
Control Control Control
External torque
Position pulse Current

Digital input signal A/D
processing
CN1
A,B,Z output Encoder

signal CN2
Digital output
processing
Analog output
Operation Display
A/D DSP CPLD
Full-closed Linear Scale
Data loop
Serial
Bus MODE SHIFT
Communication CN3 CN5 Hall Sensor
RS-232/RS-485
CHARGE SET Temperature
Sensor
USB CN4 USB/UART
CN7 Extension DI
Reserved CN8 CN6 CANopen
CN9 Reserved

3.3 I/O Signal (CN1) Connection

3.3.1 I/O Signal (CN1) Connector Terminal Layout
In order to have a more flexible communication with the master, 5 programmable Digital
Outputs (DO) and 8 programmable Digital Inputs (DI) are provided. The setting of 8
digital inputs and 5 digital outputs of each axis are parameter P2-10~P2-17 and
parameter P2-18~P2-22 respectively. In addition, the differential output encoder signal,
A+, A-, B+, B-, Z+ and Z-, input of analog torque command, analog speed/position
command and pulse position command are also provided. The followings are the pin
diagrams.
CN1 Connector (female) Side view
Rear view
The rear wiring terminal of CN1 connector

1 DO4+ Digital output 26 DO4- Digital output

Digital
2 DO3- Digital output 27 DO5-
output
3 DO3+ Digital output 28 DO5+ Digital output
High-speed
position
4 DO2- Digital output 29 /HPULSE command
5 DO2+ Digital output 30 DI8- Digital input
pulse (－)
6 DO1- Digital output 31 DI7- Digital input
7 DO1+ Digital output 32 DI6- Digital input
8 DI4- Digital input 33 DI5- Digital input
9 DI1- Digital input 34 DI3- Digital input
PULL Pull-high
10 DI2- Digital input 35 HI_S voltage of Position
Power input
11 COM+ (Sign) sign 36 SIGN command
(12~24V)
Position signal (-)
Analog input command High-speed
12 GND 37 /SIGN
signal ground position
Analog input signal (－)
13 GND 38 HPULSE command
signal ground PULL Pull-high
No pulse (＋)
14 NC 39 HI_P voltage of
connection
Analog (Pulse) pulse High-speed
Analog 15 MON2 monitor Position 40 /HSIGN position
16 MON1 monitor output 2 41 /PULSE command command (－)
output 1 pulse (－) Speed analog
+24V power
Torque 17 VDD output (for Position 42 V_REF command
analog external I/O) 43 PULSE command input (＋)
18 T_REF
command
Analog input pulse (＋) Analog input
input 19 GND 44 GND
+12 power signal ground signal ground
VDD (24V)
output (for High-speed
20 VCC 45 COM- power
analog Encoder / A position
21 OA ground 46 HSIGN
command) pulse output
command (＋)
VDD(24V)
Encoder / A
22 /OA 47 COM- power Encoder Z
pulse output
Encoder / B ground pulse
23 /OB 48 OCZ
pulse output VDD(24V) open-collector
Encoder / Z
24 /OZ 49 COM- power output
pulse output
ground Encoder Z
Encoder / B pulse
25 OB 50 OZ
pulse output differential
output
NOTE NC means NO CONNECTION. This terminal is for internal use only. Do

not connect it, or it may damage the servo drive.

3.3.2 Explanation of I/O (CN1) Connector Signal

The following details the signals listed in previous section:
General Signals
Wiring
Method
Signal Name Pin No Function
(Refer to
3.4.3)
(1) The speed command of the motor is -10
V ~ +10 V which means the speed
command is -3000 ~ +3000 r/min
(default). It can change the
V_REF 42 corresponding range via parameters. C1
Analog
(2) The position command of the motor is
Command
-10 V ~ +10 V which means the position
(input)
command is -3 cycles ~ +3 cycles
(default).
The torque command of the motor is -10 V ~
T_REF 18 +10 V which means the rated torque C1
command of -100 % ~ +100 %.
The operating state of the motor can be
shown by analog voltage, such as speed
Analog
MON1 16 and current. This drive provides two channel
Monitor C2
MON2 15 outputs. Users can select the desired
(output)
monitoring data via parameter P0-03. This
signal is based on the power ground.
Position pulse can be inputted by Line Driver
PULSE
/PULSE 43 (single phase max. frequency 500KHz) or
SIGN 41 open-collector (single phase max. frequency
Position 200 KHz). Three kinds of command type can
/SIGN 36
Pulse be selected via P1-00, CW pulse + CCW C3/C4
PULL 37
(input) pulse, pulse + direction, A pulse + B pulse.
HI_P 39
PULL 35 When position pulse uses open-collector,
HI_S the terminal should be connected to an
external applied power in order to pull high.
High-speed position pulse only accepts Line
HPULSE Drive (+5 V) as the input type.
High-speed 38
/HPULS The max. frequency of single phase is
position 29
E 4MHz. There are three kinds of command C4-2
pulse 46
HSIGN types, A pulse + B pulse, CW pulse + CCW
(input) 40
/HSIGN pulse and pulse + direction. Please refer to
parameter P1-00.
OA 21
/OA 22
OB 25 Encoder signal output A, B, Z (Line Drive
Position C13/C14
/OB 23 output)
pulse
OZ 50
(output)
/OZ 24
Encoder signal output Z (Open-collector
OCZ 48 -
output)

Wiring
Method
Signal Name Pin No Function
(Refer to
3.4.3)
VDD is the +24 V power provided by the
drive and is for Digital Input (DI) and Digital
VDD 17
Output (DO) signal. The maximum current is
500 mA.
COM+ is the common input of Digital Input
(DI) and Digital Output (DO) voltage. When
11
using VDD, VDD should be connected to
COM+ 45
COM+. If not using, it needs to apply the
COM- 47
external power (+12 V ~ + 24 V). Its positive
Power 49
end should connect to COM+ and the
negative end should connect to COM-. -
VCC is the +12V power provided by the
drive. It is used for providing the simple
VCC 20 analog command (speed or torque
command). The maximum current is 100
mA.
12,13,
GND VCC voltage is based on GND.
19,44
NO CONNECTION. This terminal is for
Other NC 14 internal use only. Do not connect it, or it may
damage the servo drive.
There are numerous operation mode of this servo drive (please refer to Chapter 6.1).
Each operation mode needs different I/O signal. In order to use the terminal in a more
efficient way, the selection of I/O signal has to be programmable. That is to say, users
can choose the desired DI/DO signal to meet the demand. Basically, the default setting of
DI/DO signal has already have the appropriate function which can satisfy the demand of
normal application.
Users have to select the operation mode based on the needs first (please refer to
Chapter 6.1 for the introduction of each mode) and refer to the following DI/DO table to
know the corresponding default setting of DI/DO signal and Pin No of the selected mode
in order to conduct the wiring.
The table below lists the default setting of DI/DO signal function and pin No:
The explanation of DO signal default setting is as the followings.
Pin No Wiring
DO Signal Method
Operation Mode Function
Name ＋－ (Refer to
3.4.3)
When the servo drive applies to the
power and no alarm (ALRM) occurs
SRDY ALL 7 6
in control circuit and motor power
C5/C6/
circuit, this DO is ON.
C7/C8
When the DI.SON is ON and the
SON N/A - - motor servo circuit can operate
smoothly, this DO is ON.

Pin No Wiring
DO Signal Method
3.4.3)
When the motor speed is slower than
ZSPD ALL 5 4 the setting value of parameter P1-38,
this DO is ON.
When the motor actual speed (r/min)
ALL (except PT,
TSPD - - is faster than the setting value of
PR)
parameter P1-39, this DO is ON.
When the deviation between the
motor command and actual position
PT, PR, PT-S,
TPOS 1 26 (PULSE) is smaller than the setting
PT-T, PR-S, PR-T
value of parameter P1-54, this DO is
ON.
When torque is limiting, this DO is
TQL N/A - -
ON.
When the alarm occurs (except
forward/reverse limit, emergency
ALRM ALL 28 27
stop, communication error, under
voltage), this DO is ON.
BRKR ALL - - Control contact of brake.
When homing is completed, this DO
HOME ALL 3 2
is ON.
When the overload level is reached,
OLW ALL - -
this DO is ON.
A warning occurs.
When it is in the status of
WARN ALL - - forward/reverse limit, emergency
stop, communication error, under
voltage, this DO is ON.
OVF ALL - - Position command overflows
SNL(SCWL) PR - - Reverse software limit C5/C6/
SPL(SCCWL) PR - - Forward software limit C7/C8
The output of internal position
Cmd_OK PR - -
command is completed.
CAP_OK PR - - CAPTURE procedure is completed.
When DO.Cmd_OK and TPOS are
MC_OK PR - -
ON, this DO is ON.
The master position of E-CAM is
CAM_AREA PR - -
inside the setting area.
When the deviation between the
speed command and the feedback
S_CMP S, Sz - - speed of the motor is smaller than the
setting value of parameter P1-47, this
DO is ON.
SDO_0 ALL - - Output the status of bit00 of P4-06

Pin No Wiring
DO Signal Method
3.4.3)
SDO_A ALL - - Output the status of bit10 of P4-06
SDO_B ALL - - Output the status of bit11 of P4-06
SDO_C ALL - - Output the status of bit12 of P4-06
SDO_D ALL - - Output the status of bit13 of P4-06
SDO_E ALL - - Output the status of bit14 of P4-06
SDO_F ALL - - Output the status of bit15 of P4-06
NOTE 1） For example, if the user selects PR mode, pin 3 and 2 are HOME. If
the user selects S mode, pin 3 and 2 are TSPD.
2） The unlisted Pin No means the signal is not the preset one. If users
want to use it, parameters need to be changed and set as the
desired ones. Please refer to Section 3.4.4 for further details.

The explanation of DI signal default setting is as the followings
Wiring
DI Signal Operation Pin Method
Function
Name Mode No (Refer to
3.4.3)
When DI is ON, the servo circuit will be activated and the
SON ALL 9
motor coil will generate current.
When the alarm (ALRM) occurs, this signal is used to reset the
ARST ALL 33
servo drive and output the signal, Ready (SRDY) again.
GAINUP ALL - It is for switching the controller gain.
It is for clearing the deviation counter.
CCLR PT, PR 10
When this DI is ON and the motor speed is slower than the
ZCLAMP ALL - setting of P1-38, the motor position will be locked when the
signal is triggered.
When this DI is ON, the motor will operate in the opposite
CMDINV PR, T, S -
direction.
PR, In PR mode, the moment CTRG is ON (rising edge), save the
CTRG PR-S, 10 position command selected by POS0~2 into the controller and
PR-T then trigger the command.
TRQLM S,Sz 10 ON means the torque limit command is effective.
SPDLM T, Tz 10 ON means the speed limit command is effective.
In PR mode, the source of position command:
POS0 34
Position
Corresponding
Comman POS5 POS4 POS3 POS2 POS1 POS0 CTRG parameter
POS1 8 d
P6-00
C9/C10
P1 0 0 0 0 0 0 C11/C12
P6-01
POS2 - P6-02
P2 0 0 0 0 0 1
P6-03
P, PR-S,
PR-T ~ ~
POS3 -
P6-98
P50 1 1 0 0 1 0
P6-99
POS4 - P7-00
P51 1 1 0 0 1 1
P7-01
~ ~
POS5 - P7-26
P64 1 1 1 1 1 1
P7-27
STOP - - Stop
The source of selecting speed command:
SPD1 SPD0 Command Source
SPD0 34
S, Sz, 0 0 S mode is analog input
PT-S, while Sz mode is 0.
PR-S, S-T 0 1 P1-09
SPD1 8 1 0 P1-10
1 1 P1-11

Wiring
Function
3.4.3)
The source of selecting torque command:
PT,T, Tz, TCM1 TCM0 Command Source
TCM0 34
PT-T 0 0 T mode is analog input
while Tz mode is 0.
0 1 P1-12
PR-T, 1 0 P1-13
TCM1 8
S-T
1 1 P1-14
S-P PT-S, PR-S 31 Mode switching. OFF: Speed; ON: Position
S-T S-T 31 Mode switching. OFF: Speed; ON: Torque
T-P PT-T, PR-T 31 Mode switching. OFF: Torque; ON: Position
When selecting PT-PR mode or the multi-mode, PT-PR-S,
PT-PR PT,PR - users can select the source via this DI. When this DI is OFF,
it is in PT mode. When this DI is ON, it is in PR mode.
In position PT mode, when the DI is OFF, the external
PTAS - - command source is external pulse. When the signal is ON,
then the source is external analog voltage.
In position PT mode, when the DI is OFF, the source of
external command pulse is low-speed pulse (PULSE,
/PULSE, SIGN, /SIGN Pin). When the DI is ON, the source
PTCMS - -
will be high-speed pulse. This function can go with C9/C10
handwheel. This DI can be used to switch the source of C11/C12
command pulse.
It is contact B and has to be ON frequently; otherwise the
EMGS ALL 30
alarm (ALRM) will occur.
PT, PR, S,
NL Reverse inhibit limit (contact B) and has to be ON
T 32
(CWL) frequently; or the alarm (ALRM) will occur.
Sz, Tz
PT, PR, S,
PL Forward inhibit limit (contact B) and has to be ON frequently;
T 31
(CCWL) or the alarm (ALRM) will occur.
Sz, Tz
ORGP PR - When DI is ON, the drive will start homing.
In PR mode, it needs to search the origin. When this DI is
SHOM PR - ON, the origin searching function is activated. (Please refer
to the setting of parameter P1-47.)
E-cam engaging control (please refer to the setting of value
CAM PR -
U and Z of P5-88.)
When this DI is ON, the motor JOG operates in forward
JOGU ALL -
direction.
When this DI is ON, the motor JOG operates in reverse
JOGD ALL -
direction.
EV1 PR - Event trigger PR command
EV2 PR - Event trigger PR command

Wiring
Function
3.4.3)
PT, PR, Electronic gear ratio (numerator) selection 0 (Please refer to
GNUM0 -
PT-S, PR-S P2-60~P2-62 for gear ratio selection (numerator).)
PT, PR, Electronic gear ratio (numerator) selection 1 (Please refer to C9/C10
GNUM1 -
PT-S, PR-S P2-60~P2-62 for gear ratio selection (numerator).) C11/C12
In position mode, when this DI is ON, the external pulse
INHP PT, PT-S -
input command is not working.

The default setting of DI and DO in each operation mode is shown as the followings.
Please note that the following table neither detail the information as the previous one nor
show the Pin number of each signal. However, each operation mode is separated in
different columns in order to avoid the confusion.
Table 3.1 Default Value of DI Input Function
DI PT PT PR PR S
Symbol Input Function PT PR S T Sz Tz
Code S T S T T
SON 0x01 Servo On DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1 DI1
ARST 0x02 Alarm reset DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5 DI5
GAINUP 0x03 Gain switch
CCLR 0x04 Pulse clear DI2 DI2 DI2
ZCLAMP 0x05 Zero speed clamp
The input command
CMDINV 0x06 will be in reverse
direction.
Reserved 0x07 Reserved
Internal position
CTRG 0x08 DI2 DI2 DI2
command triggered
TRQLM 0x09 Torque limit DI2 DI2
SPDLM 0x10 Speed limit DI2 DI2
Internal position
POS0 0x11 command selection DI3 DI3 DI3
0
Internal position
POS1 0x12 command selection DI4 DI4 DI4
1
Internal position
POS2 0x13 command selection
2
Internal position
POS3 0x1A command selection
3
Internal position
POS4 0x1B command selection
4
Internal position
POS5 0x1C command selection
5
STOP 0x46 Motor stops
Speed command
SPD0 0x14 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI5 DI3
selection 0
Speed command
SPD1 0x15 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI6 DI4
selection 1
Torque command
TCM0 0x16 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI3 DI5 DI5
selection 0
Torque command
TCM1 0x17 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI4 DI6 DI6
selection 1
Mode switch
S-P 0x18 between speed and DI7 DI7
position command
Mode switch
S-T 0x19 between speed and DI7
torque command
T-P 0x20 Mode switch DI7 DI7

DI PT PT PR PR S
Symbol Input Function PT PR S T Sz Tz
Code S T S T T
between torque and
position command
Switch between PT
PT-PR 0x2B
and PR command
In PT mode, the
switch between
PTAS 0x2C
command pulse
and analog
In PT mode, the
switch between
PTCMS 0x2D low-speed and
high-speed
command
EMGS 0x21 Emergency stop DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8 DI8
NL(CWL) 0x22 Reverse inhibit limit DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6 DI6
PL(CCWL) 0x23 Forward inhibit limit DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7 DI7
Original point of
ORGP 0x24
homing
SHOM 0x27 Homing is activated
CAM 0x36 E-Cam engaged
JOGU 0x37 Forward JOG input
JOGD 0x38 Reverse JOG input
Event trigger PR
command #1(refer
EV1 0x39
to the setting of
P5-98, P5-99)
Event trigger PR
command #2 (refer
EV2 0x3A
to the setting of
P5-98, P5-99)
Event trigger PR
command #3
firmware V1.008
EV3 0x3B
sub04 will be
provided
afterwards)
Event trigger PR
command #4
(firmware V1.008
EV4 0x3C
sub04 will be
provided
afterwards)
Electronic gear ratio
GNUM0 0x43 (numerator)
selection 0
Electronic gear ratio
GNUM1 0x44 (numerator)
selection 1
INHP 0x45 Pulse input inhibit
NOTE Please refer to Section 3.4.1 for corresponding pin from DI1 ~ 8.

Table 3.2 Default Value of DO Output Function
DO PT PT PR PR S
Symbol Output Function PT PR S T Sz Tz
Code S T S T T
SRDY 0x01 Servo is ready DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1 DO1
SON 0x02 Servo is On.
ZSPD 0x03 Zero-speed DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2 DO2
reached
TSPD 0x04 Reach the target DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3 DO3
speed
TPOS 0x05 Reach the target DO4 DO4 DO4 DO4 DO4 DO4
position
TQL 0x06 Torque limit
ALRM 0x07 Servo alarm DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5 DO5
BRKR 0x08 Brake DO4 DO4 DO4 DO4
HOME 0x09 Homing complete DO3 DO3
OLW 0x10 Early warning for
overload
WARN 0x11 Servo warning
OVF 0x12 Position
command
overflows
SNL(SCWL) 0x13 Reverse software
limit
SPL(SCCWL) 0x14 Forward software
limit
Cmd_OK 0x15 Internal position
command is
completed
CAP_OK 0x16 Capture
procedure is
completed
MC_OK 0x17 Servo procedure
is completed
CAM_AREA 0x18 Master position
area of E-CAM
SP_OK 0x19 Target speed
reached
SDO_0 0x30 Output the status
of bit00 of P4-06
of bit01 of P4-06
of bit02 of P4-06
of bit03 of P4-06
of bit04 of P4-06
of bit05 of P4-06
of bit06 of P4-06
of bit07 of P4-06
of bit08 of P4-06

DO PT PT PR PR S
Symbol Output Function PT PR S T Sz Tz
Code S T S T T
of bit09 of P4-06
SDO_A 0x3A Output the status
of bit10 of P4-06
SDO_B 0x3B Output the status
of bit11 of P4-06
SDO_C 0x3C Output the status
of bit12 of P4-06
SDO_D 0x3D Output the status
of bit13 of P4-06
SDO_E 0x3E Output the status
of bit14 of P4-06
SDO_F 0x3F Output the status
of bit15 of P4-06
NOTE Please refer to Section 3.4.1 for corresponding pin from DO1 to 5.

3.3.3 Wiring Diagram (CN1)

The valid voltage of speed analog command and torque analog command is between
-10V and +10V. The command value can be set via relevant parameters. The input
impedance is 10K.
C1: Speed, Input of Torque Analog Command
C2: Analog Monitor Output MON1 ,MON2

Pulse command can be input by the way of open-collector or Line driver. The maximum
input pulse of Line driver is 500 kpps and 200 kpps for open-collector.
C3-1: The source of pulse input is open-collector NPN equipment which applies the
internal power of the servo drive.
C3-2: The source of pulse input is open-collector PNP equipment which applies the
internal power of the servo drive.
 Caution: Do not apply to dual power or it may damage the servo drive.

C3-3: The source of pulse input is open-collector NPN equipment and applies the
external power.
C3-4: The source of pulse input is open-collector PNP equipment and applies the
external power.

C4-1: Pulse input (Line driver) can only apply to 5V power. Do not apply to 24V power.
 This opto-isolator is one-way input, please be ensured the direction of

current of pulse input is correct.
C4-2: High-speed pulse input (Line driver) can only apply to 5V power. Do not apply to
24V power.

 The high-speed pulse input interface of the servo drive is not the
isolated interface. In order to reduce the interference of the noise, it is
suggested that the terminal ground of the controller and the servo
drive should be connected to each other.
When the drive connects to inductive load, the diode has to be installed. (The permissible
current is under 40mA. The surge current is under 100mA.)
C5: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies to the internal power and the resistor is
general load.
C6: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies to the internal power and the resistor is
inductive load.

C7: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies to the external power and the resistor
is general load.
Servo Drive
No connection between
DOX：(DOX+,DOX-) VDD and COM+ .
X=1,2,3,4,5
R
DO1：(7,6) DC24V
DO2：(5,4)
DOX+
DO3：(3,2)
DO4：(1,26)
DO5：(28,27) DOX-
C8: Wiring of DO signal. The servo drive applies to the external power and the resistor
is inductive load.

Input signal via relay or open-collector transistor

NPN transistor, common emitter (E) mode (SINK mode)
C9: The wiring of DI. The servo drive applies C10: The wiring of DI. The servo drive
to the internal power. applies to the external power.
PNP transistor, common emitter (E) mode (SOURCE mode)

C11: The wiring of DI. The servo drive applies C12: The wiring of DI. The servo drive
to the internal power. applies to the external power.

C13: Encoder signal output (Line driver)
Servo Drive Max. output current 20mA Controller

AM26CS31 type
OA 21
/OA 22
125Ω
OB 25
/OB 23
125Ω
OZ 50
/OZ 24
125Ω
SG
C14: Encoder signal output (Opto-isolator)

C15: Encoder OCZ output (open-collector Z pulse output)
3.3.4 The DI and DO Signal Specified by the User

If the default setting of DI/DO signal cannot satisfy the need, self-set the DI/DO signal will
do and easy. The signal function of DI1 ~ 8 and DO1 ~ 5 is determined by parameter
P2-10 ~ P2-17 and parameter P2-18 ~ P2-22 respectively. Please refer to Chapter 7.2,
which shown as the following table. Enter DI or DO code in the corresponding parameter
to setup DI/DO.
Corresponding Corresponding
Signal Name Pin No Signal Name Pin No
Parameter Parameter
DI1- CN1-9 P2-10 DO1+ CN1-7
P2-18
DI2- CN1-10 P2-11 DO1- CN1-6
DI3- CN1-34 P2-12 DO2+ CN1-5
P2-19
Standard DI4- CN1-8 P2-13 DO2- CN1-4
DI DI5- CN1-33 P2-14 Standard DO3+ CN1-3
P2-20
DI6- CN1-32 P2-15 DO DO3- CN1-2
DI7- CN1-31 P2-16 DO4+ CN1-1
P2-21
DI8- CN1-30 P2-17 DO4- CN1-26
EDI9 CN7-2 P2-36 DO5+ CN1-28
P2-22
EDI10 CN7-3 P2-37 DO5- CN1-27
Extension
EDI11 CN7-4 P2-38
DI
(Optional) EDI12 CN7-5 P2-39
EDI13 CN7-6 P2-40
EDI14 CN7-7 P2-41

3.3.5 Application: Wiring of CN1 Quick Connector

ASD-IF-SC5020 CN1 quick connector is designed for easy wiring. It is applicable to
ASDA-A2 and ASDA-A2R series servo drive and can satisfy the demand of different DI/O
application. It will be a good choice for those who do not want to self-weld the wiring rods.
The vibration will not loose the leading wire due to the design of spring terminal blocks. It
is rather convenient and fast when wiring and under construction. 5 digital inputs, 4 digital
outputs, pulse command inputs and Z phase open-collector outputs are included.
Pin definition is as the following:

J2 J1
PIN Description PIN Description
1 VDD 17 VDD
2 COM+ 11 COM+
3 COM- 2,4,6,26,45,47 COM-
4 DI1- 9 DI1-
5 DI2- 10 DI2-
6 DI3- 34 DI3-
7 DI4- 8 DI4-
8 DI7- 31 DI7-
9 DO1+ 7 DO1+
10 DO2+ 5 DO2+
11 PULL_HI_PS 35 PULL_HI_PS
12 /PULSE 41 /PULSE
13 PULSE 43 PULSE
14 /SIGN 37 /SIGN
15 SIGN 36 SIGN
16 OCZ 48 OCZ
17 GND 12,13,19,44 GND
18 DO4+ 1 DO4+
19 DO3+ 3 DO3+
20 CN_GND 51,52 CN_GND
Example of wiring:

Wiring and installation of CN1 quick connector:

Wiring:
Installation:

3.4 CN2 Connector

The terminal block of the connector and pin number are as follows:
(A) Encoder Connector:
Side view
CN2 CN2 Rear view of the

Connector terminal block
(female)
Rear view
(B) Motor Connector:
Quick Connector

The definition of each signal is as follows:
Drive Connector Motor Connector

Terminal Military Quick
Pin No Function and Description Color
Symbol connector connector
Serial communication signal
5 T+ A 1 Blue
input/output (+)
Serial communication signal Blue &
4 T- B 4
input/output (-) Black
- - Reserved - - -
- - Reserved - - -
Red / Red
14,16 +5V Power + 5 V S 7
& White
Black /
13,15 GND Power ground R 8 Black &
White
Shell Shielding Shielding L 9 -
The shielding procedures of CN2 encoder connector are as the followings:
(1) Cut through the cable and expose the core

wire which covers the metal core wires with
shielding. The length of the reserved core
wire should be 20~30mm. Then, cover a
45mm long heat shrink tube on the cable.
(2) Spread the metal core wires with shielding

and turn it upside down in downward
direction. Ensure to follow the pin definition
from the above table to connect the pins
one by one.

(3) Leave a length of 5~10mm metal core

wires with shielding outside the cable. The
length is about the width of the metal
saddle. The other unexposed wires of the
cable should be protected by the heat
shrink tube for good ground contact.
(4) Install a metal saddle to fix the exposed

metal core wires. The metal saddle must
completely cover all the exposed metal
core wires. The extended sheet metal
should be connected to the metal part of
the connector.
(5) Install the connector into the plastic case

as shown in the figure.
(6) Tighten the screws to complete a shielded

CN2 connector.

3.5 Wiring of CN3 Connector

3.5.1 Layout of CN3 Connector
The servo drive connects to the personal computer via communication connector. The
user can operate the servo drive via MODBUS, PLC or HMI. There are two common
communication interfaces, RS-232 and RS-485. Both can be set via parameter P3-05.
Among them, RS-232 is more common. Its communication distance is about 15 meter. If
the user selects RS-485, its transmission distance is longer and supports more than one
servo drives for connection.
CN3 Connector
(female) Reserved
Side view Rear view
Pin No Signal Name Terminal Symbol Function and Description

1 Signal grounding GND + 5 V connects to the signal terminal
2 RS-232 data RS-232_TX The drive transmits the data
transmission
The connector connects to RS-232 of PC
3 - - Reserved
4 RS-232 data RS-232_RX The drive receives the data
receiving
The connector connects to RS-232 of PC
5 RS-485 data RS-485(+) The drive transmits the date to differential
transmission terminal (+)
6 RS-485 data RS-485(-) The drive transmits the date to differential
transmission terminal (-)
NOTE 1） Please refer to Chapter 9, page 2 for the wiring of RS-485.
2） Two kinds of communication wire of IEEE1394 are commercially

available. One of the internal ground terminals (Pin 1) will short
circuit with the shielding and will damage the drive. Do not connect
GND to the shielding.

3.5.2 Connection between CN3 Connector and Personal Computer

3.6 CN4 Serial Connector (USB)

CN4 is a serial connector which used to connect PC software and enhance the efficiency.
The transmission speed of USB can up to 1MB, that is to say PC Data Scope can obtain
the correct data in time.
CN4 Connector (female)
Pin No Signal Name Function and Description

1 V bus DC + 5 V (external power supply)
2 D- Data-
3 D+ Data+
4 GND Ground

3.7 CN5 Connector (Full-closed Loop)

Connect to the external linear scale or encoder (A, B, Z) and form a full-closed loop with the
servo. In position mode, the pulse position command issued by the controller is based on
the control loop of the external linear scale. Please refer to Chapter 6.

1 /Z phase input Opt_/Z /Z phase input
2 /B phase input Opt_/B /B phase input
3 B phase input Opt_B B phase input
4 A phase input Opt_A A phase input
5 /A phase input Opt_/A /A phase input
6 Encoder grounding GND Ground
7 Encoder grounding GND Ground
8 Encoder power +5V + 5 V power
9 Z phase input Opt_Z Z phase input
10 Hall sensor U phase input HALL_U Hall sensor U phase input
11 Hall sensor V phase input HALL_V Hall sensor V phase input
12 Hall sensor W phase input HALL_W Hall sensor W phase input
Temperature detection of
13 TEMP+ Thermistor input
linear motor +
Temperature detection of
14 TEMP- Thermistor input
linear motor -
15 Reserved Reserved Reserved
NOTE 1） It only supports AB phase signal and the encoder with 5 V.
2） Application of full-closed loop: It supports the encoder with highest

resolution, 1280000 pulse／rev (Full-closed loop corresponds to
the resolution of quardruple frequency when motor runs a cycle.).
3） It supports NTC, PTC type of temperature sensor.

3.8 CN6 Connector (CANopen)

Based on the standard of CANopen DS301 and DS402, CN6 uses the standard CAN
interface to implement position, torque and speed mode. It also can read or monitor the
drive status.
The station number of CANopen is the same as RS-232/RS-485. All are set via parameter
P3-00 and the transmission rate can up to 1 Mbps. It provides two sets of communication
connectors, one is for receiving and another one is for transmission, in order to connect
more than one drives. The last servo drive connects to termination resistor.
Pin No Signal Name Function and Description

1, 9 CAN_H CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2, 10 CAN_L CAN_H bus line (dominant low)
3, 11 CAN_GND Ground / 0 V / V -
4, 12 - -
5, 13 - -
6, 14 - -
7, 15 CAN_GND Ground / 0 V / V -
8, 16 - -

PLC
Connect to terminal
resistor
can be connected to max.127 axes
NOTE 1） The termination resistor is suggested to use 120 Ω (Ohm) 0.25W or

above.
2） The wiring method of concatenate more than one drives is based on
two terminals of CANopen. One is for receiving and another one is for
transmission. And the servo drive connects to the termination resistor.
The wiring diagram of the termination resistor is shown as the
followings:
or

3.9 Extension Digital Input Connector of CN7

A2R series servo drive, A2R-U, provides additional extension DI on CN7 port. The function
of this DI is similar to the one on CN1. Users can self-define and program it according to the
demand.

VDD24 V Power of VDD(24V) should be
*1 COM+
power the same as Pin 11 of CN1
2 Extension DI9 EDI 9- Digital input DI9-
3 Extension DI10 EDI 10- Digital input DI 10-
 *1 Caution: Do not use dual power supply or it might damage the servo drive.

3.10 Standard Wiring Method

3.10.1 Position (PT) Mode Standard Wiring
Servo Drive
MCCB ASDA-A2R series
MC
AC 200/230 V R ＊4
P⊕
Regenerative
3-phase＊8
resistor
S
50/60Hz D
T
C
Red
U
L1c White Power
V
L2c Black
W
CN1 Green
24V EMGS BRKR
＊5 Brake
/SIGN 37
CN2 Encoder
SIGN 36
Pulse command input ＊1
5 T+ Blue
/PULSE 41
Shielded twisted-
Blue /
(Line Driver) 10KΩ 4 T- Black
PULSE 43
pair cable
7 - Green
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18 Green /
10KΩ 9 - Black
GND 13 SG
14,16 +5V Red
/HSIGN 40
13,15 GND Black
High-speed pulse HSIGN 46
command input ＊2 CN3
(Line Receiver)
/HPULSE 29
6 RS485-
HPULSE 38
5 RS485+
Shielded twisted-
MON1 16
pair cable
10KΩ 4 RS232_RX
GND 12,13,19
10KΩ DC 24V 3 -
MON2 15
SG 2 RS232_TX
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
CN7
COM- 45,47,49 ＊3
4KΩ
1 COM+ ＊6
SON DI1 9 4KΩ
CCLR 4KΩ
2 EDI9-
DI2 10 4KΩ
4KΩ 3 EDI10-
TCM0 DI3 34 4KΩ
4KΩ 4 EDI11-
TCM1 DI4 8 4KΩ
4KΩ 5 EDI12-
ARST DI5 33 4KΩ
4KΩ 6 EDI13-
NL DI6 32 4KΩ
4KΩ 7 EDI14-
PL DI7 31
4KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊7
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
HOME
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1
TPOS
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28
ALRM 1.5KΩ 2 Opt /B
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z
A phase
OA 21 Note:
1 Opt /Z
differential signal /OA 22
6 GND *1: Please refer to section 3.3.3 for the
B phase OB 25
differential signal
7 GND wiring of C3, C4.
/OB 23
Encoder 10 HALL_U *2: Please refer to section 3.3.3 for the
pulse Z phase OZ 50
output differential signal
11 HALL_V wiring of C3, C4.
/OZ 24
12 HALL_W
*3: Please refer to section 3.3.3 for the
13 TEMP+
-
Z phase signal OCZ 48 wiring of C9~C12 SINK / SOURCE
(open-collector)
14 TEMP-
-
GND 13 mode.
15 -
Max. output current: 50mA CN6 CANopen *4: No built-in regenerative resistor for
Voltage: 30V
1,9 CAN H 100W, 200W (or below) servo drives.
2,10 CAN L *5: Brake wiring has no polarity.
3,11 CAN GND *6: Extension DI (selective)
7,15 CAN GND *7: For USB connection. It connects to
4,12
5,13
6,14
- personal computer.
8,16
*8: Model that below 1.5kW can apply
single-phase power.

3.10.2 Position (PR) Mode Standard Wiring
Note:
*1: Please refer to section 3.3.3 for the
wiring of C9~C12 SINK / SOURCE
mode.
*2: No built-in regenerative resistor for
100W, 200W (or below) servo drives.
*3: Brake wiring has no polarity.
*4: Extension DI (selective)
*5: For USB connection. It connects to
personal computer.
single-phase power.

3.10.3 Speed Mode Standard Wiring

Servo Drive
MC
AC 200/230 V ＊2
Regenerative
R
3-phase＊6 P⊕
resistor
S
50/60Hz D
T
C
Red
U
L1c white Power
V
L2c Black
W
Green
24V EMGS BRKR Brake
＊3
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
Shielded twisted-
Blue /
4 T-
pair cable
Black
7 - Green
Green /
10KΩ 9 - Black
CN1 SG
14,16 +5V Red
±10V 10KΩ V-REF 42
10KΩ 13,15 GND Black
GND 44 10KΩ
CN3
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 6 RS485-
GND 13
5 RS485+
Shielded twisted-
MON1 16
pair cable
10KΩ 4 RS232_RX
GND 12,13,19
10KΩ DC 24V 3 -
MON2 15
SG 2 RS232_TX
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
CN7
COM- 45,47,49 ＊1 ＊4
4KΩ
1 COM+
SON DI1 9 4KΩ
TRQLM 4KΩ
2 EDI9-
DI2 10 4KΩ
4KΩ 3 EDI10-
SPD0 DI3 34 4KΩ
4KΩ 4 EDI11-
SPD1 DI4 8 4KΩ
4KΩ 5 EDI12-
ARST DI5 33 4KΩ
4KΩ 6 EDI13-
CWL DI6 32 4KΩ
4KΩ 7 EDI14-
CCWL DI7 31
4KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊5
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
TSPD
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1
BRKR
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z
A phase
OA 21
1 Opt /Z
6 GND
B phase OB 25
differential signal
7 GND
/OB 23
Encoder 10 HALL_U
pulse Z phase OZ 50 Note:
11 HALL_V
/OZ 24 *1: Please refer to section 3.3.3 for
12 HALL_W
13 TEMP+
- the wiring of C9~C12 SINK /
Z phase signal OCZ 48
14 TEMP-
- SOURCE mode.
(open-collector) GND 13
15 - *2: No built-in regenerative resistor
Max. output current: 50mA for 100W, 200W (or below) servo
CN6 CANopen
Voltage: 30V
1,9 CAN H drives.
7,15 CAN GND *5: For USB connection. It connects
4,12
5,13
- to personal computer.
6,14
8,16 *6: Model that below 1.5kW can apply
single-phase power.

3.10.4 Torque Mode Standard Wiring

Servo Drive
MC
Regenerative
AC 200/230 V R ＊2
P⊕
resistor
3-phase＊6 S
50/60Hz D
T
C
Red
U
L1c White Power
V
L2c Black
W
Green 24V EMGS BRKR Brake
＊3
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
Shielded twisted-
Blue /
4 T-
pair cable
Black
7 - Green
Green /
10KΩ 9 - Black
CN1 SG
14,16 +5V Red
±10V 10KΩ V-REF 42
10KΩ 13,15 GND Black
GND 44 10KΩ
CN3
±10V 10KΩ T-REF 18
10KΩ 6 RS485-
GND 13
Shielded twisted-
5 RS485+
MON1 16
pair cable
10KΩ 4 RS232_RX
GND 12,13,19
10KΩ DC 24V 3 -
MON2 15
SG 2 RS232_TX
VDD 17
1 GND
COM+ 11
CN7
COM- 45,47,49 ＊1
4KΩ
1 COM+ ＊4
SON DI1 9 4KΩ
SPDLM 4KΩ
2 EDI9-
DI2 10 4KΩ
4KΩ 3 EDI10-
TCM0 DI3 34 4KΩ
4KΩ 4 EDI11-
TCM1 DI4 8 4KΩ
4KΩ 5 EDI12-
ARST DI5 33 4KΩ
4KΩ 6 EDI13-
CWL DI6 32 4KΩ
4KΩ 7 EDI14-
CCWL DI7 31
4KΩ
CN4
EMGS DI8 30
1 +5V DC ＊5
DO1+ 7
SRDY
1.5KΩ 2 Data-
DO1- 6
3 Data+
DO2+ 5
ZSPD
1.5KΩ 4 GND
24V DO2- 4
CN5
DO3+ 3
TSPD
1.5KΩ 8 +5V
DO3- 2
4 Opt A
DO4+ 1
BRKR
1.5KΩ 5 Opt /A
DO4- 26
3 Opt B
DO5+ 28
DO5- 27
9 Opt Z
A phase
OA 21
1 Opt /Z
6 GND
B phase OB 25
differential signal
7 GND
/OB 23
Encoder 10 HALL_U
pulse Z phase OZ 50 Note:
11 HALL_V
/OZ 24 *1: Please refer to section 3.3.3 for
12 HALL_W
13 TEMP+
- the wiring of C9~C12 SINK /
Z phase signal OCZ 48 SOURCE mode.
(open-collector)
14 TEMP-
-
GND 13 *2: No built-in regenerative resistor
15 -
Max. output current: 50mA for 100W, 200W (or below) servo
CN6 CANopen
Voltage: 30V
1,9 CAN H drives.
7,15 CAN GND *5: For USB connection. It connects
4,12
5,13 to personal computer.
6,14
-
8,16 *6: Model that below 1.5kW can apply
single-phase power.

3.10.5 CANopen Mode Standard Wiring

Servo Drive
MC
Regenerative
AC 200/230 V R ＊2
P⊕
resistor
3-phase＊5 S
50/60Hz D
T
C
Red
U
L1c White Power
V
L2c Black
W
Green
24V EMGS BRKR Brake
＊3
CN2 Encoder
5 T+ Blue
Shielded twisted-
DC 24V
CN1 4 T- Blue /
pair cable
Black
VDD 17 7 - Green
COM+ 11 9 - Green /
Black
COM- 45,47,49 ＊1 14,16 Red SG
+5V
4KΩ
Reserved DI1 9 13,15 GND Black
Reserved DI2 10 4KΩ
Reserved DI3 34
4KΩ CN4
1 +5V DC ＊4
Reserved DI4 8
4KΩ
ORGP DI5 33
4KΩ
2 Data-
NL DI6 32
4KΩ
3 Data+
PL DI7 31
4KΩ
4 GND
4KΩ
EMGS DI8 30 CN5

DO1+ 7 8 +5V
SRDY
1.5KΩ
DO1- 6 4 Opt A
DO2+ 5 5 Opt /A
ZSPD
1.5KΩ
DO2- 4 3 Opt B
24V
DO3+ 3 2 Opt /B
HOME
1.5KΩ
DO3- 2 9 Opt Z
DO4+ 1 1 Opt /Z
TPOS
1.5KΩ
DO4- 26 6 GND
DO5+ 28 7 GND
ALRM 1.5KΩ
DO5- 27 10 HALL_U
A phase
OA 21 11 HALL_V
differential signal /OA 22 12 HALL_W
B phase OB 25 13 TEMP+
-
differential signal /OB 23
Encoder 14 TEMP-
-
pulse Z phase OZ 50 15 -
output differential signal /OZ 24
CN6 CANopen
1 CAN H
Z phase signal OCZ 48
(open-collector) 2 CAN L
GND 13
3 CAN GND
Max. output current: 50mA
Voltage: 30V
4 - Data input
5 -
6 -
CN3 7 CAN GND
RS485- 6 8 -
Note: RS485+ 5
*1: Please refer to section 3.3.3 for RS232_RX 4
9 CAN H
the wiring of C9~C12 SINK / - 3
10 CAN L
SOURCE mode. RS232_TX 2
11 CAN GND
*2: No built-in regenerative resistor GND 1
12 -
Data output
for 100W, 200W (or below) servo 13 -
drives. 14 -
*3: Brake wiring has no polarity. 15 CAN GND
*4: For USB connection. It connects 16 -
to personal computer.
single-phase power.

3.11 Wiring System of other Brand of Motor

3.11.1 Wiring Diagram of Peripheral Devices
Connect Communication Type of Motor to CN2
Power

It could prevent the instantaneous excessive
current due to short-circuit or when the power
is on/off and damage the servo drive.

Host Controller

(option)
P Terminal Block Module
(ASD-BM-50A)
C (option)
In order to prevent the energy flowing back Transmit the signal of CN1
caused by motor brake and result in error, please
50pin to the controller through
connect the PC end of the servo drive to external
regenerative resistor and the contact of PD end this terminal.
should be opened. If using the internal
contact of PD end should be closed and the
Full-closed loop or position feedback connector CN3 Connector
CN5: support model - L,M,U (Please refer to (option)
model description in Section 1.2.2.) Use MODBUS
support RS-485/RS232
CN6: support model - M (Please refer to
model description in Section 1.2.2.)
CN2 Connector

(option)
CN7: support model - U (Please refer to

model description in Section 1.2.2.) CN4 USB Connector (option)
CN26
ERROR
WARNING
RUN
X1
X2 X1: A, B Pulse
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X2: A-Sin B-Cos
X3: RS-485 w/o CLK
X4: RS-485 with CLK
X5: ABZ, Pulse Out
X6: Reserve
X7: Reserve
Signal Converter Box
Drive Mode
Switch Mode
It could receive square wave digital signal or

Hall Sensor
W/O Hall Sensor
Reserve
Reserve
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
Drive Mode
Hall Sensor sinusoid analog signal and convert it to
communication type of signal which can be
X2 X8
X1 X9
W/O Hall Sensor
Switch Mode
CN20
accepted by Delta’s servo drive.
Other Brand of Permanent Magnetic

Synchronous Rotary Motor

Connect Communication Type of Motor to CN5

Connect Linear Motor to CN2

Power
No Fuse Breaker(NFB)

Host Controller
(option)
P
Terminal Block
Module(ASD-BM-50A)
C (option)
In order to prevent the energy flowing back
Transmit the signal of CN1 50pin to
caused by motor brake and result in error,
please connect the PC end of the servo drive the controller through this termiant.
to external regenerative resistor and the
contact of PD end should be opened. If using
the internal regenerative resistor, please be
ensure the contact of PD end should be closed
and the contact of PC end should be opened. CN1 I/O Connector
CN5: Support model - L, M, U (Please refer to (option)
model description in Section 1.2.2) Use MODBUS
CN6: Support model - M (Please refer to
model description in Section 1.2.2)
CN2 Connector

(option)
CN7: Support model - U (Please refer to

CN4 USB Connector
model description in Section 1.2.2)
(Option)
CN26
ERROR
WARNING
RUN
X1
X2 X1: A, B Pulse
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X2: A-Sin B-Cos
X3: RS-485 w/o CLK
X4: RS-485 with CLK
X5: ABZ, Pulse Out
X6: Reserve
X7: Reserve
Drive Mode
It could receive square wave digital signal or

Switch Mode
Hall Sensor
W/O Hall Sensor
Reserve
Reserve
X4
X5
X6
Drive Mode
Hall Sensor
sinusoid analog signal and convert it to
X3 X7
X2
X1
X8
X9
W/O Hall Sensor
Switch Mode
communication type of signal which can be
CN20
accepted by Delta’s servo drive.
Linear Scale
Hall Sensor
Permanent Magnet
Synchronous Linear Motor

Connect Linear Motor to CN5

Power


Host Controller

(option)
P
Terminal Block Module
(ASD-BM-50A)
C (option)
In order to prevent the energy flowing back
caused by motor brake and result in error, Transmit the signal of CN1 50pin to
please connect the PC end of the servo drive to the controller through this terminal.
external regenerative resistor and the contact of
PD end should be opened. If using the internal
contact of PD and should be closed and the
CN5: Support model -L, M, U (option)
(Please refer to model description in Section
1.2.2.) Use MODBUS
CN6: Support model -M
(Please refer to model
description in Section 1.2.2.) CN2 Connector

(option)
CN7: Support model -U
(Please refer to model CN4 USB connector
description in Section 1.2.2.) (option)
Hall Sensor / Temperature Sensor
Linear Scale Permanent Magnet

Synchronous Linear Motor

3.11.2 Specification and Definition of ECML Motor Cable
Motor Model U、V、W / Definition Color AWG
U Red 20
ECML-S16S V White 20
ECML-S20S W Black 20
CASE GROUND Green 20
U Red 18
ECML-S25S V White 18
ECML-S32S W Black 18
CASE GROUND Green 18
connect it to the shielded net for better noise separation.

Motor Model Encoder Cable Color AWG
Hall sensor 5V Black 26

Hall sensor 0V Black / Red 26
ECML-S20S Hall sensor U White 26
ECML-S25S Hall sensor V Brown 26
ECML-S32S Hall sensor W Blue 26
Temperature signal + Orange 26
Temperature signal - Orange / Red 26
2） The total length of standard cable is 500mm. Please use shielded
twisted-pair cable for encoder wiring so as to reduce the
interference of noise.
connect it to the shielded net. And the shielded net should firmly
connect to SHIELD end for better noise separation.
4） All signal cable of motor must connect to the servo drive.

3.11.3 Signal Converter Box

If you desire to connect Delta’s servo drive to other brands of motor, ASD-IF-EN0A20
signal converter box is a great choice for you. It does not require external power-supply,
driver or any complicated setting process.
Features and Functions:
 It can convert the square wave and sine wave to the communication signals which is
exclusive use for Delta’s servo system. It can be controlled by Delta’s servo drive.
 After the signal is converted to high resolution signal, it can dramatically enhance the
motor speed, provide precise position and control the speed limit so as to satisfy the
demand of speed and precision.
It can fine-cut the sinusoid analog signal up to 2048 times, e.g. 20 m pitch of
single-phase sinusoid analog signal is outputted to linear scale, which can up to the
20
resolution of m  10nm via transition card.
2048
 The original signal can be delivered to over 20 m without attenuation, which could
ensure communication quality.
 Through the interpolation of sine wave signal, it could improve the resolution and avoid
the limit of frequency so as to satisfy the demand of high-precision and high-speed for
linear motor.
Installation
The product should be kept in the shipping carton before installation. In order to retain the
warranty coverage, the product should be stored properly when it is not used for a period
of time. Some storage suggestions are:
 Store in a clean and dry location.
 Store within an ambient temperature range of -20°C to +65°C (-4°F~149°F).
 Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing.
 Do not store in a place subject to corrosive gases and liquids.
 Correctly packaged and place on a solid surface.
 Do not mount the production adjacent to heat-radiating elements, water, vapour, dust
and oily dirt. The location should free from corrosive gases, liquids, airborne dust or
metallic particles and no vibration and interference.
Model Name Explanation

ASD - IF – EN 0A 20 (1) Product ASD: AC Servo Drive
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (2) Product Name IF: Interface
(3) Module Type EN: Encoder
(4) Version Number 0A: Version Number
(5) Specification of 20: Connect to 20pin
Connection Port connector

Applicable Model
ASD-A2R-0121-□ , ASD-A2R-0221-□ , ASD-A2R-0421-□ , ASD-A2R-1021-□ ,
ASD-A2R-1521-□ , ASD-A2R-2023-□ , ASD-A2R-3023-□ , (□ =F,L,M,U)
ASD-S-3023-F, ASD-S-4523-F, ASD-S-5523-F, ASD-S-7523-F
Appearance
1. Signal
source CN26, 26 pin connector
connector
2. Drive
CN20, 20 pin connector
connector
3. Status ERROR: Error LED*
indicators WARNING: Warning LED*
RUN: LED for normal operation
X1: Signal source is square digital
signal
X2: Signal source is sinusoidal analog
signal
X3~X5: Reserved
X6~7: Reserved
Drive Mode: Servo drive issues the
command to control the status of
4. Function
converter box. The button and the
indicators
switch do not work at the moment.
Switch Mode: The status of converter
box is controlled by the button and the
switch. The command issued by servo
drive does not work.
Hall Sensor: Hall sensor is installed.
W/O Hall Sensor: Hall sensor is not
installed.
Use a flat screwdriver to rotate the
switch.
X1: Signal source is square digital
5. Signal
signal
switch
X2: Signal source is sinusoidal analog
signal
X3~X9: Reserved
6. Function Select the desired function by
switch switching the switch up and down.
NOTE 1) When an alarm occurs, the ERROR LED will light up and shows the alarm
code on servo drive’s LED display. Users could refer to troubleshooting
section for alarm descriptions and corrective actions.
2) When a warning occurs, the WARNING LED will light up and shows the
warning code on servo drive’s LED display. Users could refer to
troubleshooting section for alarm descriptions and corrective actions.
Specification

Item ASD-IF-EN0A20
Power Supply +5.0 V±5%
Current Consumption 250 mA Typ. 500 mA Max.
Frequency Response 2 MHz Max.
Analog Input Signal Differential Input Amplitude: 0.4 to 1.2 Vp-p
(Sin, Cos, Ref) Input Signal Level: 1.5 to 2.7 V
Pulse Input Signal +5 V
Input Signal of Hall
+3.3 V
Sensor
Position Data, Hall Sensor Information,
Output Signal
Warning
Output Type Serial data transmission
Weight Approx. 70 g
Operation Temperature 0 ~ 55 ℃
Storage Temperature -20 ~+65 ℃
Pin Definition
20 pin Connector
PIN Definition Descriptions PIN Definition Descriptions
1 Reserved - 11 /OZ -
2 FPGA_TDI - 12 FPGA_TRST -
3 FPGA_TMS - 13 GND Power Ground
Serial Communication
4 Drive_T- 14 5VD Power + 5 V
Signal Transmission (-)
Serial Communication
5 Drive_T+ 15 GND Power Ground
Signal Transmission (+)
6 FPGA_TCK - 16 5VD Power + 5 V
7 Reserved - 17 OB -
8 FPGA_TDO - 18 /OB -
9 OABZ_EN Pulse Output Enabled 19 OA -
10 OZ - 20 /OA -
26 pin Connector
PIN Definition Descriptions PIN Definition Descriptions

Sinusoid Power
1 QEA_IN+ A-phase (+) pulse input 14 AGND
Ground
2 QEA_IN- A-phase (-) pulse input 15 Motor_Temp -
W-phase Hall
3 QEB_IN+ B-phase (+) pulse input 16 HALL_W
Sensor Signal Input
V-phase Hall Sensor
4 QEB_IN- B-phase (-) pulse input 17 HALL_V
Signal Input

U-phase Hall Sensor

5 QEZ_IN+ Z-phase (+) pulse input 18 HALL_U
Signal Input
6 QEZ_IN- Z-phase (-) pulse input 19 LiMot_CLK- -
7 QES_IN- - 20 LiMot_CLK+ -
Sinusoid A-phase (+)
8 A+_IN 21 LiMot_Data- -
input
Sinusoid A-phase (-)
9 A-_IN 22 LiMot_Data+ -
input
Sinusoid B-phase (+)
10 B+_IN 23 GND Pulse Power Ground
input
Sinusoid
11 B-_IN 24 GND Pulse Power Ground
B-phase (-) input
Sinusoid Z-phase (+)
12 R+_IN 25 5VD Power + 5 V
input
Sinusoid Z-phase (-)
13 R-_IN 26 5VD Power + 5 V
input
Installation
The above diagram is not drawn in equal proportion. It is for describing the
NOTE
connection only.


Chapter 4 Panel Display and
Operation
This chapter details the panel status and operation of ADSA-A2R series servo drive.
4.1 Panel Description
Name Function
Five-/Seven-segment display is for displaying the monitoring values,

Display
parameter values and setting values.
Pressing SHIFT key can scrolls through parameter groups. After a

parameter is selected and its value displayed, pressing SHIFT key can
SHIFT Key
move the cursor to the left and then change parameter settings by using
arrow keys.
Pressing the SET key can display and save the parameter groups, the
various parameter settings. In monitor mode, pressing SET key can
SET Key
switch decimal or hexadecimal display. In parameter mode, pressing SET
key can enter into parameter setting mode.
Pressing the DOWN key can scroll through and change monitor codes,
DOWN Key
parameter groups and various parameter settings.
Pressing MODE key can enter or exit different parameter groups, and
MODE Key
switch between Monitor mode and Parameter mode.
Pressing the UP key can scroll through and change monitor codes,
UP Key
parameter groups and various parameter settings.
Charge LED The Charge LED lights to indicate the power is applied to the circuit.

Chapter 4 Panel Display and Operation ASDA-A2R Series
4.2 Parameter Setting Procedure

Switch the mode:
Operate in each mode:

Monitoring mode

Parameter Mode
Parameter
Mode
Monitor
‧‧‧
Parameter P0
SHIFT
Basic Parameter
‧‧‧
P1
SHIFT
Extension
‧‧‧
Parameter P2
SHIFT
Communication
‧‧‧
Parameter P3
SHIFT
Diagnosis
‧‧‧
Parameter P4
SHIFT
Motion Control
‧‧‧
Parameter P5
SHIFT
PR Parameter
‧‧‧
P6
SHIFT
PR Parameter
‧‧‧
P7
SHIFT
MODE
Monitoring Mode

Edit Setting Mode

4.3 Status Display

4.3.1 Setting Saved Display
When finishing editing parameter, press the SET Key to save the setting. The panel will
display the setting status according to the setting for a second.
Displayed Symbol Description
The setting value is saved correctly. (Saved)
Read-only parameter. Write-protected. (Read-Only)
Enter the wrong password or no password has been entered.
(Locked)
Incorrect setting value or enter the reserved setting value. (Out of
Range)
No entering is allowed when it is Servo ON. (Servo On)
Parameter will be effective after the servo drive is re-power on.
(Power On)
4.3.2 Decimal Point
High byte / low byte indication: When the data is displayed in
decimal 32 bits, it is for indicating the current high or low byte.
Negative sign: When the data is displayed in decimal format, the two
decimal points in the left represents the negative sign, no matter it is
showed in 16 or 32 bits. When it is showed in hexadecimal format, it
only shows positive sign.
4.3.3 Alarm Message
When there is an error of the drive, it will show ‘AL’ as the alarm
sign and ‘nnn’ as the alarm code.
For further explanation, please refer to Chapter 7, P0-01,
parameter description, or Chapter 11, Troubleshooting.
4.3.4 Positive and Negative Sign Setting
When entering into the Editing Setting Mode, pressing UP / DOWN
Key can increase or decrease the displayed content. The SHIFT
Key can change the desired adjusted carry value. (The carry value
is blinking at the moment.)
Pressing the SHIFT Key for two seconds can switch the positive (+)
and negative (-) sign. If the parameter is over the range after
switching the positive or negative sign, then it cannot be switched.

4.3.5 Monitor Display

When the drive is applied to the power, the display will show the monitor displayed
symbol for a second, and then enter into the Monitor Mode. In Monitor Mode, the UP /
DOWN Key can change the desired monitor variable. Or, the user can directly change
parameter P0-02 to set the monitor code. When applying to the power, the system will
pre-set the monitor code according to the setting value of P0-02. For example, the setting
value of P0-02 is 4. Every time when applying to the power, it will display C-PLS monitor
sign first, and then shows the input pulse number of pulse command.
P0-02 Monitor Displayed

Description Unit
Setting Value Symbol
Motor feedback pulse number (after the
0 [user unit]
scaling of electronic gear ratio) (User unit)
Input pulse number of pulse command
1 (after the scaling of electronic gear ratio) [user unit]
(User unit)
The difference of error pulse number
2 between control command pulse and [user unit]
feedback pulse number (User unit)
Motor feedback pulse number (encoder
unit) (Resolution of single-phase pulse;
3 [pulse]
1.28 millions Pulse/rev for Delta 20 bit
rotary motor)
Input pulse number of pulse command
4 (before the scaling of electronic gear ratio) [pulse]
(encoder unit)
Error pulse number (after the scaling of
5 [pulse]
electronic gear ratio) (encoder unit)
6 Input frequency of pulse command [Kpps]
Rotary
motor
[r/min]
7 Motor speed
Linear
motor
[m/s]
8 Speed input command [Volt]
9 Speed input command [r/min]
10 Torque input command [Volt]
11 Torque input command [%]
12 Average torque [%]
13 Peak torque [%]
14 Main circuit voltage [Volt]

Rotary motor: Load / Motor inertia ratio Rotary
15 Linear motor: Load / Weight of movable motor
section and load [0.1times]

P0-02 Monitor Displayed

Description Unit
Setting Value Symbol
(Note: If it shows 130, it means the actual Linear
inertia is 13.0 and the actual weight is motor
13kg) [0.1Kg]
16 IGBT temperature [℃]
Resonance frequency (Low byte is the first
17 resonance and high byte is the second [Hz]
one).
The absolute pulse number of encoder Z

phase equals to the homing value, 0. It will
18 -
be +5000 or -5000 pulse when rotating in
forward or reverse direction.
Mapping parameter #1: shows the content

19 of parameter P0-25 -
(specify the mapping target by P0-35)
Monitor variable #1: shows the content of
23 parameter P0-09 -
(specify the monitor variable code by
P0-17)
P0-18)
P0-19)
P0-20)

Example of the displayed Status Description

value
If the value is 1234, it displays 01234 (shows in
(Dec) decimal format).
16 bits If the value is 0x1234, it displays 1234 (shows in
hexadecimal format; the first digit does not show
(Hex)
any).
If the value is 1234567890, the display of the high

(Dec high)
byte is 1234.5 and displays 67890 as the low byte
(shows in decimal format).
(Dec low)
32 bits
If the value is 0x12345678, the display of the high
(Hex high)
byte is h1234 and displays L5678 as the low byte
(shows in hexadecimal format).
(Hex low)
Negative display. If the value is -12345, it displays 1.2.345
(only shows in decimal format; there is no positive or negative
sign for hexadecimal format display).
NOTE 1） Dec means it is displayed in decimal format. Hex means it is

displayed in hexadecimal format.
2） The above display methods can be applied in Monitor Mode and
Editing Setting Mode.
3） When all monitor variable is 32 bits, high / low bit and the display
(Dec/Hex) can be switched. According to the definition in Chapter
8, each parameter only supports one displaying method and
cannot be switched.

4.4 General Function

4.4.1 Operation of Fault Record Display
When it is in Parameter Mode, select P4-00~P4-04 and press the SET Key, the
corresponding fault record will be shown.
SET
The 1st recent error
SET
The 2nd recent error
SET
The 3rd recent error
SET
The 4th recent error
SET
The 5th recent error

4.4.2 JOG Mode

When it is in Parameter Mode, select P4-05 and follow the setting method below for JOG
operation.
(1) Press the SET Key to display the speed value of JOG. The default value is 20r/min.
(Unit: rotary motor [r/min]; linear motor [ 10 3 m / s ])
(2) Press UP or DOWN Key to adjust the desired speed value of JOG. It is adjusted to
100r/min in the example. (Unit: rotary motor [r/min]; linear motor [ 10 3 m / s ])
(3) Press the SET Key to display JOG and enter JOG mode.
(4) When it is in JOG Mode, press UP or DOWN Key to enable the servo motor in
forward or reverse direction. The servo motor stops running as soon as the user
stops pressing the key. JOG operation is working only when it is Servo ON.
SET
Display JOG speed value. Its

default value is 20 r/min.
Press UP/DOWN Key to adjust JOG

speed.
…
Adjust to 100 r/min
SET
Display JOG and enter JOG Mode
JOG Mode
P(CCW) N(CW)
MODE
Exit

4.4.3 Force DO Output

Enter into the Output Diagnosis Mode by the following settings. Set P2-08 to 406 and
enable the function of force DO output. Then, set the force DO output by binary method
via P4-06. When the setting value is 2, DO2 will be forced to enable. When the setting
value is 5, DO1 and DO3 will be forced to enable. No data is retained in this mode. It
returns to the normal DO mode when re-power on the drive or set P2-08 to 400.
NOTE P4-06 is displayed in hexadecimal format. Therefore, it will not show

the fifth 0.

4.4.4 Digital Input Diagnosis Operation

Enter into the Digital Input Diagnosis Mode by the following setting methods. When the
external output signal DI1~DI8 is ON, the corresponding signal will be shown on the
panel. It is displayed by bit. When it shows bit, it means it is ON.
For example, if it shows 3FE1, E is in hexadecimal format, it will be 1100 when it transfers
to binary format. Then, DI6~DI8 is ON.
SET
The panel displays in

hexadecimal format.
Binary code
DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI DI Corresponding
14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 DI status
(Display in hexadecimal format)
4.4.5 Digital Output Diagnosis Operation

Enter into the Digital Output Diagnosis Mode by the following setting methods. The
output signal DO1~DO5 is ON and the corresponding signal will be shown on the panel.
It is displayed by bit. When it shows bit, it means it is ON.
For example, if it shows 1F, F is in hexadecimal format, it will be 1111 when it transfers to
binary format. Then, DO1~DO4 is ON.
SET
The panel displays in

hexadecimal format
Binary code
DO DODODODO Corresponding
5 4 3 2 1 DO status
(Display in hexadecimal format)

Chapter 5 Trial Operation and
Tuning
This chapter is divided into two parts to describe the trial operation. The first one is the
inspection without load and another one is the inspection with load. For safety reasons,
please conduct the first inspection.
5.1 Inspection without Load

Please remove the load of the servo motor, including coupling on the shaft and accessories
so as to avoid any damage on servo drive or mechanism. This is aiming to avoid the falling
off of the disassembled parts of the motor shaft and indirectly causing the personnel injury
or equipment damage during operation. Running the motor without load, if the servo motor
can run during normal operation, then it can connect to load for operation.
Caution: Please operate the servo motor without load first. If the servo motor runs
normally, connect the load afterwards in order to avoid any danger.
Please check the following items before operation.
 Check if there is any obvious damage shown on its appearance.

 The splicing parts of the wiring terminal should be isolated.
 Make sure the wiring is correct so as to avoid the damage or any
abnormity.
 Check if the electric conductivity objects including sheetmetal
(such as screws) or inflammable objects are not inside the servo
drive.
 Check if the control switch is in OFF status.
Inspection before  Do not place the servo drive or external regenerative resistor on
operation inflammable objects.
(has not applied to  To avoid the electromagnetic brake losing efficacy, please check
the power yet) if stop function and circuit break function can work normally.
 If the peripheral devices are interfered by the electronic
instruments, please reduce electromagnetic interference with
devices.
 Please make sure the external voltage level of the servo drive is
correct.
 When connecting other brand of rotary motor, please setup
motor parameters before operation. Please refer to the Chapter
of Motor Parameter Setting.
 The encoder cable should avoid excessive stress. When the
Inspection before
motor is running, make sure the cable is not frayed or over
running the servo
extended.
drive
 Please contact with Delta if there is any vibration of the servo
(has already applied
motor or unusual noise during the operation.
to the power)
 Make sure the setting of the parameters is correct. Different

Chapter 5 Trial Operation and TuningASDA-A2R Series
machinery has different characteristic, please adjust the

parameter according to the characteristic of each machinery.
 Please reset the parameter when the servo drive is in SERVO
OFF status, or it may cause malfunction.
 When the relay is operating, make sure it can work properly.
 Check if the power indicator and LED display works normally.
5.2 Apply Power to the Servo Drive

Please follow the instructions below.
A. Make sure the wiring between the motor and servo drive is correct.
1) When connecting to Delta’s 20bit rotary motor, U, V, W and FG have to connect to
cable red, white, black and green respectively. If the wiring is incorrect, the motor
cannot work normally. If connecting to other brand of 20bit rotary motor, the new
function, Motor Auto Detection (Please refer to Chapter 12) can help to check and
correct the problem of wrong wiring. The ground wire FG of the motor must be
connected to the ground terminal of the servo drive. Please refer to Chapter 3.1 for
wiring.
2) The encoder cable of the motor has correctly connected: If users only desire to
execute JOG function, it is unnecessary to connect CN1 and CN3 (Please refer to
Chapter 5.3). Refer to Chapter 3.1 and 3.5 for the wiring of encoder.
Caution: Do not connect the power terminal (R, S, T) to the output terminal (U, V, W)
of the servo drive. Or it might damage the servo drive.
B. Power circuit of the servo drive:
Apply power to the servo drive. Please refer to Chapter 3.1.3 for power wiring.
C. Power on:
Power of the servo drive: including control circuit (L1c, L2c) and main circuit (R, S, T) power.
When the power is on, the display of the servo drive will be:
The digital input (DI6~DI8) of the default value is the signal of reverse limit error (NL),
forward limit error (PL) and emergency stop (EMGS), if not using the default setting of
DI6~DI8, adjusting the setting of P2-15~P2-17 is a must. Parameters could be set to 0
(disable this DI function) or modified to another function.
From the last setting, the servo drive status displays parameter P0-02 setting as the
motor speed (06), then the screen display will be:
When the screen displays no text, please check if the power of control circuit is under
voltage.

1) When the screen displays
Warning of overvoltage:
It means the voltage input by the main circuit is higher than the rated voltage or power
input error (incorrect power system).
Corrective action:
 Use the voltmeter to measure if the input voltage from the main circuit is within the
range of rated voltage value.
 Use the voltmeter to measure if the power system complies with the specification.
Warning of encoder error:

Check if the motor encoder is securely connected or the wiring is correct.
Corrective action:
 Check if the wiring is the same as the instruction of the user manual.
 Check the encoder connector.
 Check if the wiring is loose.
 Encoder is damaged.
Warning of emergency stop:

Please check if any of the digital input DI1~DI8 is set to emergency stop (EMGS).
Corrective action:
 If not desire to set emergency stop (EMGS) as one of the digital input, make sure
no digital input is set to emergency stop (EMGS) among DI1~DI8. (That is to say
none of the parameters, P2-10~P2-17 is set to 21.)
 If the signal of emergency stop (EMGS) is needed, make sure one of the digital
input, DI1~DI8, is set to emergency stop (EMGS) and that DI has to be ON.

Warning of negative limit error:

Please check if any of the digital input DI1~DI8 is set to negative limit (NL) and that DI
is ON.
Corrective action:
 If not desire to set negative limit (NL) as one of the digital input, make sure no
digital input is set to negative limit (NL) among DI1~DI8. (That is to say none of the
parameters, P2-10~P2-15 is set to 22.)
 If the signal of negative limit (NL) is needed, make sure one of the digital input,
DI1~DI8, is set to negative limit (NL) and that DI has to be ON.
Warning of positive limit error:

Please check if any of the digital input DI1~DI8 is set positive limit (PL) and that DI is
ON.
Corrective action:
 If not desire to set positive limit (PL) as one of the digital input, make sure no
digital input is set to positive limit (PL) among DI1~DI8. (That is to say none of the
parameters, P2-10~P2-17 is set to 23.)
 If the signal of positive limit (PL) is needed, make sure one of the digital input,
DI1~DI8, is set to positive limit (PL) and that DI has to be ON.
Warning of overcurrent:
Corrective action:
 Check the connection between the motor and servo drive.
 Check if the conducting wire is short circuited.
Exclude short circuit and avoid metal conductors being exposed.
Warning of under voltage:

Corrective action:
 Check if the wiring of main circuit input voltage is correct.
 Use voltmeter to measure if the main circuit voltage is normal.
 Use voltmeter to measure if the power system complies with the specification.
Note: During the process of power on or servo on, if an alarm occurs or shows any
abnormal display, please contact the distributors.

5.3 JOG Trial Run without Load

It is very convenient to test the motor and servo drive with the method of JOG trial run
without load since the extra wiring is unnecessary. For safety reasons, it is recommended
to set JOG at low speed. Please see the following descriptions.
STEP 1: Use software setting to Servo ON. Set parameter P2-30 to 1. This setting is to
force the servo ON through software.
STEP 2: Set P4-05 as JOG speed (Unit: rotary motor [r/min]; linear motor [ 10 3 m / s ]). After
setting the desired JOG speed, press the SET Key, the servo drive will enter JOG
mode.
STEP 3: Press the MODE Key to exist JOG mode.

5.4 Trial Run without Load (Speed Mode)

Before the trial run without load, firmly secure the motor base so as to avoid the danger
cause by the reaction of motor operation.
STEP 1:
Set the control mode of the servo drive to speed mode. Set P1-01 to 2. Then, re-power on
the servo drive.
STEP 2:
In speed control mode, the digital input settings of trial run are as follows:
Digital Input Parameter Symbol Function Description CN1 Pin No

Setting Value
DI1 P2-10 = 101 SON Servo ON DI1- = 9
DI2 P2-11 = 109 TRQLM Torque limit DI2- = 10
Speed command
DI3 P2-12 = 114 SPD0 DI3- = 34
selection
Speed command
DI4 P2-13 = 115 SPD1 DI4- = 8
selection
DI5 P2-14 = 102 ARST Alarm reset DI5- = 33
DI6 P2-15 = 0 Disabled Invalid DI function -
EDI9 P2-36 = 0 Disabled Invalid DI function CN7 = 2
The above table disables the function of negative limit (DI6), positive limit (DI7) and
emergency stop (DI8). Thus, the value of parameter P2-15 ~ P2-17 is set to 0 (Disabled).
The digital input of Delta’s servo drive can be programmed by users. When programming
digital input, please refer to the description of DI code.
The default setting includes the function of negative limit, positive limit and emergency stop,
therefore, after the setting is completed, if there is any alarm occurs, please re-power on
the servo drive or switch ON DI5 to clear the alarm. Please refer to Chapter 5.2.

The speed command selection is determined by SPD0 and SPD1. See the table below.
Speed DI signal of
CN1 Command
Command Content Range
SPD1 SPD0 Source
No.
S1 0 0 External Voltage deviation between -10V ~ +10V
analog V-REF and GND
command
S2 0 1 P1-09 -60000 ~ 60000
S3 1 0 Register P1-10 -60000 ~ 60000
parameter
S4 1 1 P1-11 -60000 ~ 60000
0: means DI is OFF
1: means DI is ON
Register parameter
Permanent magnet synchronous rotary motor is -60000 ~ 60000; Setting value = setting
range x unit (0.1r/min).
Permanent magnet synchronous linear motor is -15999999 ~ 15999999; Setting value =
setting range x 10 6 m / s .
For example: P1-09 = +30000; the setting value of permanent magnet synchronous
rotary motor is +30000 x 0.1r/min = +3000r/min.
The setting value of permanent magnet synchronous linear motor =
+30000 x 10 6 m / s = 0.03m/s.
For example: P1-09 = +30000; Setting value = +30000 x 0.1r/min = +3000r/min

Command setting of speed register (Take rotary motor as the example)
Set parameter P1-09 to 30000. Input command Rotation direction
Set parameter P1-10 to 1000. + CW
Set parameter P1-11 to -30000. - CCW
STEP 3：
(1) Users switch ON DI1 and Servo ON.

(2) Both DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1), the speed command, are OFF, which means it
currently executes S1 command. The motor rotates according to analog voltage
command.
(3) When DI3 (SPD0) is ON, it means it currently executes S2 command (3000r/min). The
speed is 3000r/min at the moment.
(4) When DI4 (SPD1) is ON, it means it currently executes S3 command (100r/min). The
speed is 100r/min.
(5) When both DI3 (SPD0) and DI4 (SPD1) are ON, it means S4 command (-3000r/min)
is executed at the moment. The speed is -3000r/min.

(6) Step (3), (4) and (5) can be repeatedly executed.

(7) If users desire to stop the motor, switch OFF DI1 (Servo OFF).

5.5 Trial Run without Load (Position Mode)

Before the trial run without load, firmly secure the motor base so as to avoid the danger
cause by the reaction of motor operation.
STEP 1:
Set the control mode of the servo drive to position mode.
Set parameter P1-01 to 1, which is the position mode. Then, re-power on the servo drive.
STEP 2: In position mode, the digital input settings of trial run are as follows:
Parameter
Digital Input Symbol Function Description CN1 Pin No
Setting Value
DI1 P2-10 = 101 SON Servo ON DI1- = 9
DI2 P2-11 = 108 CTRG Torque limit DI2- = 10
Position command
DI3 P2-12 = 111 POS0 DI3- = 34
selection
Position command
DI4 P2-13 = 112 POS1 DI4- = 8
selection
DI5 P2-14 = 102 ARST Alarm reset DI5- = 33
The above table disables the function of negative limit (DI6), positive limit (DI7) and
emergency stop (DI8), thus, set P2-15 ~ P2-17 and P2-36 ~ P2-41 to 0 (Disabled). The
digital input of Delta’s servo drive can be programmed by users. When programming
digital input, please refer to the description of DI code.
The default setting includes the function of negative limit, positive limit and emergency stop,
therefore, after the setting is completed, if there is any alarm occurs, please re-power on
the servo drive or switch ON DI5 to clear the alarm. Please refer to Chapter 5.2.
Please refer to Chapter 3.10.2, Position (PR) Mode Standard Wiring for wiring diagram.
However, since POS2 is not the default digital input, set P2-14 to 113. Please refer to the
table below for 64 sets of register command, POS0~POS5 and the relative parameters.

Position Corresponding
POS5 POS4 POS3 POS2 POS1 POS0 CTRG
Command Parameter
P6-00
P1 0 0 0 0 0 0
P6-01
P6-02
P2 0 0 0 0 0 1
P6-03
~ ~
P6-98
P50 1 1 0 0 1 0
P6-99
P7-00
P51 1 1 0 0 1 1
P7-01
~ ~
P7-26
P64 1 1 1 1 1 1
P7-27
0: means DI is OFF
1: means DI is ON
Users can set the 64-set of command value (P6-00~P7-27). The value can be set as the
absolute position command.

5.6 Tuning Procedure

Inertia ratio of rotary motor / Total weight estimation (kg) of linear motor and load ---- JOG
mode
1. After completing wiring, when applying to the power, the
servo drive will display:
2. Press the MODE Key to select the mode of parameter
function.
3. Press the SHIFT Key twice to select the mode of parameter
group.
4. Press the UP Key to select parameter P2-17.
5. Press the SET Key to display parameter value, which is

shown as the content on the right.
6. Press the SHIFT Key twice, then press the UP Key and then
press the SET Key.
7. Press the UP Key to select parameter P2-30.
8. Press the SET Key to display the parameter value.
9. Press the UP Key and select the parameter value 1.
10. Press the SET Key. The panel will display P2-30 as shown
on the right.
11. Press the MODE Key and then press the DOWN Key to
select the value of inertia ratio.
12. The panel displays the current value of inertia ratio / total
weight of movable section and load (kg) (default value).
13. Press the MODE Key to select the mode of parameter
function.
14. Press the SHIFT Key twice to select the mode of parameter
group.
15. Press the UP Key twice to select parameter P4-05.
16. Press the SET Key to show the content, which is 20r/min at
JOG speed. Press the UP or DOWN Key to increase or
decrease the JOG speed. Press the SHIFT Key to move to
the next digit of the left. (Unit: rotary motor [r/min]; linear
motor [ 10 3 m / s ])
17. Set the desired JOG speed and press the SET Key which is
shown as the figure on the right.
18. Press the UP Key to rotate the motor in forward direction while press the DOWN Key
the motor will rotate in reverse direction.
19. Execute JOG operation at low speed first. With the constant speed, if the motor
operates smoothly in forward and reverse direction, users can execute JOG operation
at higher speed.
20. In P4-05, the servo drive cannot display inertia ratio. Please press the MODE Key
twice to view the value of inertia ratio. If users desire to execute JOG operation again,

press the MODE Key, and then press the SET Key twice. Observe the panel display to
see if the load inertia ratio / total weight of movable section and load remain at the
same value after acceleration and deceleration.

5.6.1 Flowchart of Tuning Procedure

5.6.2 Inertia Estimation Flowchart (with Mechanism)

5.6.3 Flowchart of Auto Tuning

Description of Auto Tuning:
Set P2-32 to 1. Continue to estimate the system inertia. Automatically save the value in
P1-37 every 30 minutes and refer the stiffness and bandwidth setting of P2-31. Increase
the value of P2-31 to increase stiffness or decrease to reduce the noise. Continue to tune
until the performance is satisfied. Then, tuning is completed.
P2-31Stiffness setting in auto tuning mode (The default value is 80), the bigger the value
is, the stronger the stiffness will be.
In auto and semi-auto mode, the bandwidth setting of speed circuit is:
1~50Hz: low-stiffness, low-response
51~250Hz: medium-stiffness, medium-response
251~850Hz: high-stiffness, high-response
851~1000Hz: extremely high-stiffness, extremely high-response
Servo off. Set P2-32 to 1. Then, Servo on.
Set P0-02 to 15. The panel

will display inertia ratio.
Alternately accelerate and

decelerate.
1. Decrease the value of P2-31 to reduce the

noise. Yes Any
2. If not decrease the value of P2-31, then resonance?
adjust the value of P2-23 and P2-24 to
suppress the resonance.
(Please refer to Chapter 5.6.6)
No
Satisfactory Yes Tuning

performance? completed.
No
High response No
is required?
Yes
Increase the value of P2-31
to increase the response and
stiffness.
Note: Inertia ratio is for rotary motor; while total weight of movable section and load (kg) is for linear motor

5.6.4 Flowchart of Semi-auto Tuning

Description of Semi-auto Tuning:
Set P2-32 to 2. After tuning for a while and wait until the system inertia is stable, it stops
estimating. The estimated inertia ratio will be saved to P1-37. When switching mode from
manual or auto to semi auto, the system starts tuning again. During the process of
estimation, the system will refer the stiffness and bandwidth setting of P2-31. Increase
the value of P2-31 to increase the response or decrease to reduce the noise. Continue to
tune until the performance is satisfied. Then, tuning is completed.
P2-31: Response setting in auto mode (The default value is 80). The bigger the value is,
the better the response will be.
In auto and semi-auto mode, the bandwidth setting of speed circuit is:
1~50Hz: low-stiffness, low-response
51~250Hz: medium-stiffness, medium-response
251~850Hz: high-stiffness, high-response
851~1000Hz: extremely high-stiffness, extremely high-response
Note:
1. Note: Inertia ratio is for rotary motor; while total weight of movable section and
load (kg) is for linear motor
2. If P2-33 bit 0 is set to 1, it means the inertia estimation in semi-auto mode is
completed. The result can be accessed by P1-37. If the value of P2-33 bit 0 is
cleared to 0, the system will start to estimate again.

5.6.5 Limit of Inertia Ratio for Rotary Motor / Total Weight of Linear
Motor and Load (kg)
Limitation:
Rotary Motor Linear Motor
1. Acceleration / Deceleration time of 1. Acceleration / Deceleration time of
reaching 2000r/min should be less reaching 1m/s should be less than
than 1 second. 0.24 second.
2. The speed in forward and reverse 2. The moving speed should > 0.01m/s.
direction should be higher than
200r/min.
3. The load inertia should be under 100 3. The load inertia should be under 100
times of motor inertia. times of motor inertia.
4. The change of external force of 4. The change of external force of inertia
inertia ratio cannot be too severe. ratio cannot be too severe.
Estimation:
In auto mode, the inertia value will be saved to P1-37 every 30 minutes; while in
semi-auto mode, the inertia value will be saved to P1-37 only until the system inertia is
stable and stops the estimation of load inertia.


Note:
1. If resonance still exists, repeatedly set P2-47 to 1 for 3 times and manually adjust
the setting of resonance.
2. Parameter P2-44 and P2-46 are the setting value of resonance suppression. If the
value has been set to the maximum (32dB), and still cannot suppress the
resonance, please reduce the speed bandwidth. After setting P2-47, users can
check the value of P2-44 and P2-46. If the value of P2-44 is not 0, it means the
resonance frequency exists in the system. Then, users can access P2-43 to see
the resonance frequency (Hz). When there is another resonance frequency, the
information will be shown in P2-45 and p2-46.
3. Inertia ratio is for rotary motor; while total weight of movable section and load (kg)
is for linear motor

5.6.6 Mechanical Resonance Suppression Method

Three groups of Notch filter are provided to suppress mechanical resonance. Two of
them can be set to the auto resonance suppression and manual adjustment.
The procedure of manually suppress the resonance is as the followings:

5.6.7 Tuning Mode and Parameters

Auto-set User-defined parameters Inertia
Tuning mode P2-32
parameters adjustment
P1-37 (Inertia ratio of the
motor)
P2-00 (Position control
gain)
P2-04 (Speed control gain)
0
P2-06 (Speed integral The value
Manual mode (default N/A
compensation) remains
setting)
P2-25 (Low-pass filter of
resonance
suppression)
P2-26 (Anti-interference
gain)
P1-37
P2-00
Continuous
P2-02 P2-31 Frequency response
Auto mode tuning (update
P2-04 of speed loop setting
(continuous 1 the inertia
P2-06 in auto mode
estimation) every 30
P2-25 (response level)
minutes)
P2-26
P2-49
P1-37
P2-00 Non-continuous
Semi-auto P2-02 P2-31 Frequency response tuning (stop
mode P2-04 of speed loop setting updating the
2
(non-continuous P2-06 in semi-auto mode inertia after
estimation) P2-25 (response level) operating for a
P2-26 while)
P2-49
When switching mode from auto mode 1 to manual mode 0, the value of P2-00, P2-02,
P2-04, P2-06, P2-25, P2-26 and P2-49 will be modified to the one in auto mode.
When switching mode from semi-auto mode 2 to manual mode 0, the value of P2-00,
P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25, P2-26 and P2-49 will be modified to the one in semi-auto
mode.

5.6.8 Tuning in Manual Mode

The selection of position / speed response frequency should be determined by the
machinary stiffness and application. General speaking, the high-frequency machinary or
the one requries precise processing needs the higher response frequency. However, it
might easily cause the resonance. And the stronger stiffness machinary is needed to
avoid the resonance. When using the unknown resonse frequency machinary, users
could gradually increase the gain setting value to increase the resonse frequency. Then,
decrease the gain setting value until the resonance exists. The followings are the related
descriptions of gain adjustment.
Position control gain (KPP, parameter P2-00)
Description This parameter determines the response of position loop. The bigger KPP
value will cause the higher response frequency of position loop. And it will
cause better following error, smaller position error, and shorter settling
time.
Note If the value is set too big, the machinery will vibrate or overshoot when
positioning.
Calculation
Speed control gain (KVP, parameter P2-04)
Description This parameter determines the response of speed loop. The bigger KVP
value will cause the higher response frequency of speed loop and better
following error.
Note If the value is set too big, it would easily cause machinery resonance. The
response frequency of speed loop must be 4~6 times higher than the
response frequency of position loop. Otherwise, the machinery might
vibrate or overshoot when positioning.
Calculation JM: motor inertia
JL: load inertia
P1-37: 0.1 times
When P1-37 (estimation or setting) equals the real inertia ratio (JL/JM), the real speed
K VP
= Hz
loop frequency response will be: 2
Speed integral compensation (KVI, parameter P2-06)
Description The higher the KVI value is, the better capability of eliminating the
deviation will be.
Note If the value is set too big, it might easily cause the vibration of machinery.
Calculation

Low-pass filter of resonance suppression (NLP, parameter P2-25)
Description The high value of inertia ratio will reduce the frequency response of speed
loop. Therefore, the KVP value must be increased to maintain the
response frequency.
Note During the process of increasing KVP value, it might cause machinary
resonance. Please use this parameter to elimiate the noise of resonance.
The bigger the value is, the better the capability of improving
high-frequency noise will be. However, if the value is set too big, it would
cause the unstability of speed loop and overshoot.
Calculation It is suggested to set the value as the following:
Anti-interference gain (DST, parameter P2-26)
Description This parameter is used to strengthen the ability of resisting external force
and gradually eliminate overshoot during acceleration / deceleration. Its
default value is 0. It is suggested not to adjust the value in manual mode,
unless it is for fine-tuning.
Position feed forward gain (PFG, parameter P2-02)
Description It can reduce the position error and shorten the settling time.
Note If the value is set too big, it might cause overshoot. If the setting of e-gear
ratio is bigger than 10, it might cause the noise as well.


Chapter 6 Control Mode of
Operation
6.1 Selection of Operation Mode
Three basic operation modes are provided in this servo drive, position, speed and torque
(force). Users can use single mode (only in one-mode control) and dual mode to control.
The following table lists all operation mode and description.
Short Setting
Mode Name Description
Name Code
The servo drive receives position command
Position mode and commands the motor to the target
PT 00
(Terminal input) position. The position command is input via
terminal block and receives pulse signal.
The servo drive receives position command
and commands the motor to the target
Position mode
PR 01 position. The position command is issued by
(Register input)
register (64 sets of register in total) and uses
DI signal to select the register.
The servo drive receives speed command
speed. The speed command can be issued
Speed Mode S 02
by register (3 sets of registers in total) or the
external analog voltage (-10V ~ +10V). DI
signal is used to select the command source.
The servo drive receives speed command
Single speed. The speed command is issued by
Speed mode
Mode Sz 04 register (3 sets of registers in total) and
(No analog input)
cannot be issued by the external terminal
block. DI signal is used to select the
command source.
The servo drive receives torque (force)
command and commands the motor to the
target torque. The torque (force) command
Torque (force)
T 03 can be issued by register (3 sets of registers
mode
in total) or the external analog voltage (-10V
~ +10V). DI signal is used to select the
command source.
The servo drive receives torque (force)
command and commands the motor to the
Torque (force) target torque (force). The torque (force)
mode Tz 05 command can be issued by register (3 sets
(No analog input) of registers in total) and cannot be issued by
the external terminal block. DI signal is used
to select the command source.

Chapter 6 Control Mode of Operation ASDA-A2R Series
Short Setting
Mode Name Description
Name Code
PT-S 06 Switch the mode of PT and S via DI signal.
PT-T 07 Switch the mode of PT and T via DI signal.
PR-S 08 Switch the mode of PR and S via DI signal.
PR-T 09 Switch the mode of PR and T via DI signal.
Dual Mode
S-T 0A Switch the mode of S and T via DI signal.
CANopen 0B Control by the master
Reserved 0C Reserved
PT-PR 0D Switch the mode of PT and PR via DI signal.
PT-PR-S 0E Switch the mode of PT, PR and S via DI
Multi Mode signal.
PT-PR-T 0F Switch the mode of PT, PR and T via DI signal.
Steps of switching mode:

1. Servo Off the servo drive first. It can be done by switching OFF SON signal.
2. Select the axis of desired changing mode first. Then, fill in the setting code in control
mode setting of parameter P1-01. Please refer to the description of Chapter 8.
3. After the setting is completed, turn off the servo drive and then re-power on will do.
The followings will introduce the operation of each mode, including the mode structure,
command source and selection, command processing and gain adjustment.

6.2 Position Mode

The followings describe the related information and settings of position mode.
6.2.1 Position Command in PT Mode

PT, position command is the pulse input from terminal block. There are three types of
pulse and each type has positive/negative logic which can be set in parameter P1-00.
Related parameter: Please refer to Chapter 8 for further information.
Parameter Abbr. Function
P1-00 PTT External Pulse Input Type
Position pulse can be input from CN1 terminal, PULSE (43), /PULSE (41), HPULSE (38),
/HPULSE (29) and SIGN (36), /SIGN (37), HSIGN (46), /HSIGN (40). It could be
open-collector or Line Driver. Please refer to Chapter 3.10.1 for wiring method.
6.2.2 Position Command in PR Mode

PR position command source of each axis is from the 64-set of register which constituted
by parameters (P6-00, P6-01) ~ (P7-26, P7-27). When going with the external DI/DO
(CN1, POS0 ~POS5 and CTRG), one of the previous 64 sets of register can be selected
as the position command. See as the following table:
Position Corresponding
Command Parameter
P6-00
P0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P6-01
P6-02
P1 0 0 0 0 0 1
P6-03
~ ~
P6-98
P50 1 1 0 0 1 0
P6-99
P7-00
P51 1 1 0 0 1 1
P7-01
~ ~
P7-26
P63 1 1 1 1 1 1
P7-27
Status of POS0 ~ POS5: 0 means the DI is OFF; 1 means the DI is ON.
CTRG : the moment DI is OFF to ON.

The application of absolute type and incremental type register is rather extensive. It is
more like a simple procedure control. Users can complete the cyclic operation by
referring to the above table. For example, position command P1 is 10 turns and P2 is 20

turns. P1 is issued first and P2 comes after. The following diagram shows the difference
of both.
Absolute Type Incremental Type
20 turns
20 turns
10 turns 10 turns
6.2.3 Control Structure of Position Mode

The basic control structure is as the following diagram:
For a better control, the pulse signal should be processed and modified through position
command unit. Structure is shown as the diagram below.
The upper path of the above diagram is PR mode and the lower one is PT mode which
could be selected via P1-01. Both modes can set E-gear ratio for the proper position
resolution. Moreover, either S-curve filter or low-pass filter can be used to smooth the

command. See the description in later parts.
Pulse Command Inhibit Function (INHP)

Use DI to select INHP (Refer to P2-10~17 and table 8.1 INHP (45)) before using this
function. If not, this function will be unable to use. When DI (INHP) is ON, the pulse
command will be cleared in position control mode and the motor will stop running. (Only
DI 8 supports this function.)
INHP
ON OFF ON
Pulse
command

6.2.4 S-curve Filter (Position)

S-curve filter smoothes the motion command. With S-curve filter, the process of
acceleration becomes more continuous and the jerk will be smaller. It not only improves
the performance when motor accelerates / decelerates, but also smoothes the operation
of mechanical structure. When the load inertia increases, the operation of the motor will
be influenced by friction and inertia during the time of activation and stop. However, the
situation can be improved by increasing the value of Acceleration / Deceleration Constant
of S-Curve (TSL), Acceleration Constant of S-Curve (TACC) and Deceleration Constant
of S-Curve (TDEC). When the position command source is pulse, its speed and angular
acceleration is continuous, thus, S-curve filter is not a must.

Related parameters: Please refer to Chapter 8 for further information

P1-34 TACC Acceleration Constant of S-Curve
P1-35 TDEC Deceleration Constant of S-Curve
Acceleration / Deceleration Constant of
P1-36 TSL
S-Curve

6.2.5 Electronic Gear Ratio

P1-44 GR1 Gear Ratio (Numberator) (N1)
P1-45 GR2 Gear Ratio (Denominator) (M)
Electronic gear provides simple ratio change of travel distance. The high electronic gear
ratio would cause the position command to be the stepped command. S-curve or
low-pass filter can be used to improve the situation. When electronic gear ratio is set to 1,
the motor will turn one cycle for every 1280000PUU. When electronic gear ratio is
changed to 0.5, then every two pulses from the command will be refer to one PUU of
motor encoder.
For example (rotary motor): after setting the electronic gear ratio properly, the moving
distance of the object is 1μm/pulse, which is easier to use.
WL: Working Load

WT: Working Table
Ball Screw
Motor (Encoder resolution: A/B, Z) Pitch: 3 mm
Encoder: 1280000 pulse/rev
Gear Ratio Moving distance of each pulse command

Electronic gear is 1 3  1000 3000
    m
unapplied. 1 4  2500 10000
Eectronic gear is 10000
  1m
applied. 3000

6.2.6 Low-pass Filter

Smooth Constant of Position Command
P1-08 PFLT
(Low-pass filter)
Target
Position

6.2.7 Timing Diagram in Position Mode (PR)

In PR mode, the position command is selected by either DI signal (POS0~POS5 and
CTRG) of CN1 or communication. Please refer to Section 6.2.2 for the information about
DI signal and its selected register. Followings are the timing diagrams.

6.2.8 Gain Adjustment of Position Loop

Before setting the position control unit, users have to manually (P2-32) complete the
setting of speed control unit since the speed loop is included in position loop. Then, set
the proportional gain (parameter P2-00) and feed forward gain (parameter P2-02) of
position loop. Users also can use the auto mode to set the gain of speed and position
control unit automatically.
1）Proportional gain: Increase the gain so as to enhance the response bandwidth of

position loop.
2）Feed forward gain: Minimize the deviation of phase delay
The position loop bandwidth cannot exceed the speed loop bandwidth. It is suggested
fv
that fp  .
4
fv: response bandwidth of speed loop (Hz).
KPP = 2 ×  × fp.
fp: response bandwidth of position loop (Hz).
For example, the desired position bandwidth is 20 Hz  KPP = 2 ×  × 20= 125.
Related parameters: Please refer to Chapter 8 for further information.
P2-00 KPP Position Loop Gain
P2-02 PFG Position Feed Forward Gain
When the value of proportional gain, KPP is set too big, the response bandwidth of
position loop will be increased and diminish the phase margin. And the motor rotor
rotates vibrantly in forward and reverse direction at the moment. Thus, KPP has to be
decreased until the rotor stops vibrating. When the external torque interrupts, the
over-low KPP cannot meet the demand of position deviation. In this situation, parameter
P2-02 can effectively reduce the position error.

6.2.9 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression in Position Mode

If the stiffness is not enough, the mechanical transmission will continue to vibrate even
when the motor stops after completing the positioning command. The function of
low-frequency vibration suppression can eliminate the vibration of mechanical
transmission. The range is between 1.0Hz and 100.0HZ. Both manual setting and auto
setting are provided.
Auto setting:
If the frequency is hard to find, it can enable the function of auto low-frequency vibration
suppression. This function automatically searches the frequency of low-frequency
vibration. If P1-29 is set to 1, the system will disable the function of low-frequency
vibration suppression automatically and starts to search the vibration frequency. When
the detected frequency remains at the same level, P1-29 will be set to 0 automatically
and set the first frequency in P1-25 and set P1-26 to 1. The second frequency will be set
in P1-27 and then set P1-28 to 1. If P1-29 is automatically set back to 0 and still has
low-frequency vibration, please check if the function of P1-26 or P1-28 is enabled. If the
value of P1-26 and P1-28 is 0, it means no frequency has been detected. Please
decrease the value of P1-30 and set P1-29 to 1 so as to search the vibration frequency
again. Please note that when the detection level is set too small, the noise will be
regarded as the low-frequency.

Flowchart of auto low-frequency vibration suppression:
Note 1: When the value of P1-26 and P1-28 is 0, it means it is unable to search the
frequency. It is probably because the detection level is set too high and is unable
to detect the low-frequency vibration.
Note 2: When the value of P1-26 or P1-28 is not set to 0 and still cannot eliminate the
vibration, it is probably because the detection level is set too low, the system
regards the noise or other non-primary frequency as the low-frequency vibration.
Note 3: When the process of auto vibration suppression is completed and the vibration
still cannot be diminished, P1-25 or P1-27 can be manually set to suppress the
vibration if the frequency (Hz) of the low-frequency is identified.

Auto Low-frequency Vibration Suppression
P1-29 AVSM
Setting
P1-30 VCL Low-frequency Vibration Detection
P1-30 is to set the range to detect the magnitude of low-frequency vibration. When the
frequency is not being detected, it is probably because the value of P1-30 is set too big
which exceeds the range of vibration. It is suggested to decrease the value of P1-30.
Please note that if the value is too small, the system might regard the noise as the
vibration frequency. If the SCOPE is available, it can be used to observe the range of
position error (pulse) between upper and lower magnitude of the curve and set up the
appropriate value of P1-30.

Manual Setting:
There are two sets of low-frequency vibration suppression. One is parameter
P1-25~P1-26 and another one is parameter P1-27~P1-28. These two sets of
low-frequency vibration suppression can be used to eliminate two different frequency
vibration. Parameter P1-25 and P1-27 are used to suppress the low-frequency vibration.
The function is working only when the parameter setting value of low-frequency vibration
close to the real vibration frequency. Parameter P1-26 and P1-28 are used to set the
response after filter. The bigger the setting value of P1-26 and P1-28 is, the better
response will be. However, if the value is set too big, the motor might not operate
smoothly. The default value of parameter P1-26 and P1-28 is 0, which means the
function is disabled.

P1-25 VSF1 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression (1)
P1-26 VSG1 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression Gain (1)
P1-28 VSG2 Low-frequency Vibration Suppression Gain (2)

6.3 Speed Mode

Speed control mode (S or Sz) is applicable in precision speed control, such as CNC
machine tools. This servo drive includes two types of command input, analog and register.
Analog command input can use external voltage to control the motor speed. There are two
methods in register input. One is used before operation. Users set different value of speed
command in three registers, and then use SP0, SP1 of CN1 DI signal for switching. Another
method is to change the value of register by communication. In order to deal with the
problem of non-continuous speed command when switching register, a complete S-curve
program is provided. In close-loop system, this servo drive adopts gain adjustment and
integrated PI controller and two modes (manual and auto) for selection.
Users can set all parameters and all auto or auxiliary function will be disabled in manual
mode. While in auto mode, it provides the function of load inertia estimation and parameter
adjustment. In auto mode, parameters which set by users will be regarded as the default
value.
6.3.1 Selection of Speed Command

There are two types of speed command source, analog voltage and internal parameters.
The selection is determined by CN1 DI signal. See as the followings.
Rotary Motor
Speed CN1 DI Signal
Command Command Source Content Range
SPD1 SPD0
No.
External Voltage deviation
S analog between V-REF -10 V ~ +10V
S1 0 0 Mode command and GND
Speed command
Sz N/A 0
is 0
S2 0 1 P1-09 -60000 ~ 60000
S3 1 0 Register parameters P1-10 -60000 ~ 60000
S4 1 1 P1-11 -60000 ~ 60000
Linear Motor
Speed CN1 DI Signal

Command Command Source Content Range
SPD1 SPD0
No.
External Voltage deviation
S analog between V-REF -10 V ~ +10V
S1 0 0 Mode command and GND
Speed command
Sz N/A 0
is 0
-15999999 ~
S2 0 1 P1-09
15999999
-15999999 ~
S3 1 0 Register parameters P1-10
15999999
-15999999 ~
S4 1 1 P1-11
15999999

 Status of SPD0 ~ SPD1: 0 means DI OFF, 1 means DI ON.

 When both SPD0 and SPD1 are 0, if it is in Sz mode, the command will be 0. Thus, if
there is no need to use analog voltage as the speed command, Sz mode can be
applied to tackle the problem of zero-drift. If it is in S mode, the command will be the
voltage deviation between V-REF and GND. The range of input voltage is between
-10V and +10V and its corresponding speed is adjustable (P1-40).
 When one of SPD0 and SPD1 is not 0, the speed command is from the internal
parameter. The command is activated after changing the status of SPD0~SPD1.
There is no need to use CTRG for triggering.
 The setting range of internal parameters for rotary motor is between -60000 and
60000. Setting value = setting range x unit (0.1r/min).
For example: P1-09 = +30000, setting value = +30000 x 0.1r/min = +3000r/min
The setting range of internal parameters for linear motor is between -15999999 and
15999999. Setting value = setting range x unit ( 10 6 m/s).
For example: P1-09 = +30000, setting value = +30000 x 10 6 m/s = +0.03m/s
The speed command not only can be issued in speed mode (S or Sz), but also in torque
mode (T or Tz) as the speed limit.
6.3.2 Control Structure of Speed Mode

The basic control structure is shown as the following diagram:
The speed command unit is to select speed command source according to Section 6.3.1,
including the scaling (P1-40) setting and S-curve setting. The speed control unit
manages the gain parameters of the servo drive and calculates the current command for
servo motor in time. The resonance suppression unit is to suppress the resonance of
mechanism. Detailed descriptions are shown as the following:
Here firstly introduces the function of speed command unit. Its structure is as the
following diagram.

The upper path is the command from register while the lower one is external analog
command. The command is selected according to the status of SPD0, SPD1 and
P1-01(S or Sz). Usually, S-curve and low-pass filter are applied for having a smooth
resonance of command.

6.3.3 Smooth Speed Command

S-curve Filter
During the process of acceleration or deceleration, S-curve filter applies the program of
three-stage acceleration curve for smoothing the motion command, which generates the
continuous acceleration. It is for avoiding the jerk (the differentiation of acceleration)
came from the sudden command change and indirectly causes the resonance and noise.
Users can use acceleration constant of S-curve (TACC) to adjust the slope changed by
acceleration, deceleration constant of S-curve (TDEC) to adjust the slope changed by
deceleration and acceleration / deceleration constant of S-curve (TSL) to improve the
status of motor activation and stop. The calculation of the time to complete the command
is provided.
The relation between S-curve and time setting

Acceleration / Deceleration Constant of
P1-36 TSL
S-Curve

Analog Speed Command Filter

Analog speed command filter is provided especially for ASDA-A2R series users. It mainly
helps with buffer when the analog input signal changes too fast.
Speed (rpm) Analog speed command Motor Torque

3000
0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Time (sec)
-3000
Analog speed command filter smooth the analog input command. Its time program is the
same as S-curve filter in normal speed. Also, the speed curve and the acceleration curve
are both continuous. The above is the diagram of analog speed command filter. The
slope of speed command in acceleration and deceleration is different. Users could adjust
the time setting (P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36) according to the actual situation to improve the
performance.
Command end low-pass filter
It is usually used to eliminate the unwanted high-frequency response or noise. It also can
smooth the command.
P1-06 SFLT Analog Speed Command (Low-pass Filter)

6.3.4 The Scaling of Analog Command

The motor speed command is controlled by the analog voltage deviation between V_REF
and VGND. Use parameter P1-40 to adjust the speed-control slope and its range.
The slope is determined by P1-40.
Analog Input Voltage (V)

Parameter Abbr. Function Setting
Maximum Speed of Set P1-40 to 2000. If the input voltage is
P1-40 VCM Analog Speed 10V, the speed command will be
Command 2000r/min.
6.3.5 The Timing Diagram in Speed Mode
Register
External analog voltage or zero
Exteranl I/O
NOTE 1）OFF means the contact point is open while ON means the contact
point is close.
2）When it is in Sz mode, the speed command S1 = 0; When it is in S
mode, the speed command S1 is the external analog voltage input.
3）When the servo drive is On, please select the command according to
SPD0~SPD1 status.

6.3.6 Gain Adjustment of Speed Loop

Here introduces the function of speed control unit. The following shows its structure.
Rotary motor:：
※Inertia ratio is for rotary motor; while total weight of movable section and load is for
linear motor.
Many kinds of gain in speed control unit are adjustable. Two ways, manual and auto, are
provided for selection.
Manual: All parameters are set by users and the auto or auxiliary function will be disabled
in this mode.
Auto: General load inertia estimation is provided. It adjusts the parameter automatically.
Its framework is divided into PI auto gain adjustment and PDFF auto gain
adjustment.
Parameter P2-32 can be used to adjust the gain.
P2-32 AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection

Manual Mode
When P2-32 is set to 0, users can define Speed Loop Gain (P2-04), Speed Integral
Compensation (P2-06) and Speed Feed Forward Gain (P2-07). Influence of each
parameter is as the followings.
Proportional gain: To increase proportional gain can enhance the response frequency of
speed loop.
Integral gain: To increase the integral gain could increase the low-frequency stiffness of
speed loop, reduce the steady-state error and sacrifice the phase margin.
The over high integral gain will cause the instability of the system.
Feed forward gain: Diminish the deviation of phase delay.

P2-04 KVP Speed Loop Gain
P2-06 KVI Speed Integral Compensation
P2-07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain
Theoretically, stepping response can be used to explain proportional gain (KVP), integral
gain (KVI) and feed forward gain (KVF). Here, the frequency domain and time domain
are used to illustrate the basic principle.

Frequency Domain

Time Domain
The bigger KVP value cause

higher bandwidth and shorten the
rising time. However, if the value is
set too big, the phase margin will
be too small.
To steady-state error, the result is
not as good as KVI. But it helps to
reduce the dynamic following error.
The bigger KVI value cause

greater low-frequency gain and
shorten the time the steady-state
error returns to zero. However, the
phase margin will dramatically
decrease as well.
To steady-state error, it is very
helpful but shows no benefit to
dynamic following error.
If the KVF value closes to 1, the

feed forward compensation will be
more complete and the dynamic
following error will become smaller.
However, if the KVF value is set
too big, it would cause vibration.

If the KVF value closes to 1, the

feed forward compensation will be
more complete and the dynamic
following error will become smaller.
However, if the KVF value is set
too big, it would cause vibration.
Generally, instrument is needed when applying frequency domain for measurement.

Users are required to adopt the measurement techniques; while time domain only needs
a scope and goes with the analog input / output terminal provided by the servo drive.
Thus, time domain is frequently used to adjust PI controller. The abilities of PI controller
to deal with the resistance of torque (force) load and the following command are the
same. That is to say, the following command and resistance of torque load have the
same performance in frequency domain and time domain. Users can reduce the
bandwidth by setting the low-pass filter in command end.
Auto Mode
Auto mode adopts adaptive principle. The servo drive automatically adjusts the
parameters according to the external load. Since the adaptive principle takes longer time,
it will be unsuitable if the load changes too fast. It would be better to wait until the load
inertia is steady or changes slowly. Depending on the speed of signal input, the adaptive
time will be different from one another.
Motor speed
馬達轉速
(重量)
(weight)
慣量估 Estimation
Inertia 測

6.3.7 Resonance Suppression

When resonance occurs, it is probably because the stiffness of the control system is too
strong or the response is too fast. Eliminating these two factors might improve the
situation. In addition, low-pass filter (parameter P2-25) and notch filter (parameter P2-23
and P2-24) are provided to suppress the resonance if not changing the control
parameters.
P2-23 NCF1 Resonance Suppression (Notch filter) (1)
Resonance Suppression (Notch filter)
P2-24 DPH1
Attenuation Rate (1)
P2-25 NLP Low-pass Filter of Resonance Suppression
P2-44 DPH2
P2-46 DPH3
There are two sets of auto resonance suppression, one is P2-43 and P2-44 and another
one is P2-45 and P2-46. When the resonance occurs, set P2-47 to 1 or 2 (enable the
function of resonance suppression), the servo drive searches the point of resonance
frequency and suppresses the resonance automatically. Write the point of frequency into
P2-43 and P2-45 and write the attenuation rate into P2-44 and P2-46. When P2-47 is set to
1, the system will set P2-47 to 0 (disable the function of auto suppression) automatically
after completing resonance suppression and the system is stable for 20 minutes. When
P2-47 is set to 2, the system will keep searching the point of resonance.
When P2-47 is set to 1 or 2, but resonance still exists, please confirm the value of
parameter P2-44 and P2-46. If one of them is 32, it is suggested to reduce the speed
bandwidth first and then start to estimate again. If the value of both is smaller than 32 and
resonance still exists, please set P2-47 to 0 first and then manually increase the value of

P2-44 and P2-46. It is suggested to reduce the bandwidth if the resonance has not been
improved. Then use the function of auto resonance suppression.
When manually increase the value of P2-44 and P2-46, please check if the value of both is
bigger than 0. If yes, it means the frequency point of P2-43 and P2-45 is the one searched
by auto resonance suppression. If the value of both is 0, it means the default, 1000 of
P2-43 and P2-45 is not the one searched by auto resonance suppression. Deepen the
resonance suppression attenuation rate might worsen the situation.
P2-47 Function Table

P2-47 P2-47
Function
Current Value Desire Value
0 1 Clear the value of P2-43~P2-46 and enable the
function of auto resonance suppression.
1 0 Save the current value of P2-43~P2-46 and
disable the function of auto resonance
suppression.
1 2 Not clear the value of P2-43~P2-46 and continue
to enable the function of auto resonance
suppression.
2 0 Save the current value of P2-43~P2-46 and
disable the function of auto resonance
suppression.
2 2 Not clear the value of P2-43~P2-46 and continue
to enable the function of auto resonance
suppression.

Flowchart of Auto Resonance Suppression:

Here illustrates the effect via low-pass filter (parameter P2-25). The following diagram is
the system open-loop gain with resonance.
增益
Gain
頻Frequency
率
When the value of P2-25 is increased from 0, BW becomes smaller (See as the following
diagram). Although it solves the problem of resonance frequency, the response
bandwidth and phase margin is reduced.
增益
Gain
0dB 頻率
Frequency
BW
If users know the resonance frequency, notch filter (parameter P2-23 and P2-24) can
directly eliminate the resonance. The frequency setting range of notch filter is merely
from 50 to 1000Hz. The suppression strength is increased from 0 to 32dB. If the
resonance frequency is not within the range, it is suggested to use low-pass filter
(parameter P2-25).
Here firstly illustrates the influence brought by notch filter (P2-23 and P2-24) and
low-pass filter (P2-25). The following diagrams are the system of open-loop gain with
resonance.
Resonance suppression with notch filter

Resonance suppression with low-pass filter
When the value of P2-25 is increased from 0, BW becomes smaller. Although it solves
the problem of resonance frequency, the response bandwidth and phase margin is
reduced. Also, the system becomes unstable.
If users know the resonance frequency, notch filter (parameter P2-23 and P2-24) can
directly eliminate the resonance. In this case, notch filter will be more helpful than
low-pass filter. However, if the resonance frequency drifts because of time or other
factors, notch filter will not do.

6.4 Torque (force) Mode

Torque (force) control mode (T or Tz) is appropriate in torque (force) control application,
such as printing machine, winding machine, etc. There are two kinds of command source,
analog input and register. Analog command input uses external voltage to control the
torque (force) of the motor while register uses the internal parameters (P1-12~P1-14) as
the torque (force) command.
6.4.1 Selection of Torque (force) Command

Torque (force) command source are external analog voltage and parameters. It uses
CN1 DI signal for selection. See as below.
Torque CN1 DI Signal
Command TCM1 TCM0 Command Source Content Range
No.
T1 External Voltage deviation
T analog between T-REF -10 V ~ +10V
0 0 Mode command and GND
Torque (force)
Tz N/A 0
command is 0
T2 0 1 P1-12 -300% ~ 300%
T3 1 0 Parameters P1-13 -300% ~ 300%
T4 1 1 P1-14 -300% ~ 300%
 The status of TCM0 ~ TCM1: 0 means DI OFF and 1 means DI ON.

 When TCM0 = TCM1 = 0, if it is in Tz mode, then the command is 0. Thus, if there is
no need to use analog voltage as torque (force) command, Tz mode is applicable
and can avoid the problem of zero drift. If it is in T mode, the command will be the
voltage deviation between T-REF and GND. Its input voltage range is -10V～+10V,
which means the corresponding torque (force) is adjustable (P1-41).
 When neither TCM0 nor TCM1 is 0, parameters become the source of torque (force)
command. The command will be executed after TCM0 ~ TCM1 are changed. There
is no need to use CTRG for triggering.
The torque (force) command can be used in torque (force) mode (T or Tz) and speed
mode (S or Sz). When it is in speed mode, it can be regarded as the command input of
torque (force) limit.

6.4.2 Control Structure of Torque (force) Mode

The basic control structure is as the following diagram:
The torque (force) command unit is to select torque (force) command source according to
Section 6.4.1, including the scaling (P1-41) setting and S-curve setting. The current
control unit manages the gain parameters of the servo drive and calculates the current
for servo motor in time. Since the current control unit is very complicated, and is not
relevant to the application. There is no need to adjust parameters. Only command end
setting is provided.
The structure of torque (force) command unit is as the following diagram.
The upper path is the command from register while the lower one is external analog
command. The command is selected according to the status of TCM0, TCM1 and P1-01
(T or Tz). The torque (force) represented by analog voltage command can be adjusted
via the scaling and can obtain a smoother response via low-pass filter.

6.4.3 Smooth Torque (force) Command

Analog Torque (force) Command (Low-pass
P1-07 TFLT
Filter)
目標
Target 速度
speed
TFLT
6.4.4 The Scaling of Analog Command

The motor torque command is controlled by the analog voltage deviation between
T_REF and GND and goes with parameter P1-41 to adjust the torque slope and its
range.
The slope is set by

parameter P1-41.
Torque Command
Analog voltage (V)

Parameter Abbr. Function Setting
Maximum Output of Set P1-41 to 100. Then, the input
P1-41 TCM Analog Torque (force) voltage 10V corresponds to 100% of
Speed rated torque.

6.4.5 The Timing Diagram in Torque (force) Mode
Register
External analog
voltage or zero
External DI/O
NOTE 1）OFF means the contact point is open while ON means the contact
point is close.
2）When it is in Tz mode, the torque (force) command T1 = 0; When it is
in T mode, the torque (force) command T1 is the external analog
voltage input.
3 ） When the servo drive is Servo On, please select the command
according to TCM0~TCM1 status.

6.5 Dual Mode

Apart from single mode, dual mode is also provided for operation. According to Section 6.1,
dual modes are as followings:
1） Speed/position dual mode (PT-S, PR-S, PT-PR)
2） Speed/torque (force) dual mode (S-T)
3） Torque (force)/position dual mode (PT-T, PR-T)
4） Position speed multi mode (PT-PR-S)
5） Position torque (force) multi mode (PT-PR-T)
Mode Short Name Setting Description

Name Code
PT-S 06 PT and S can be switched via DI signal, S_P.
PT-T 07 PT and T can be switched via DI signal, T_P.
PR-S 08 PR and S can be switched via DI signal, S_P.
Dual Mode
PR-T 09 PR and T can be switched via DI signal, T_P.
S-T 0A S and T can be switched via DI signal, S_T.
PT-PR 0D PT and PR can be switched via DI signal, PT_PR.
Multi Mode PT-PR-S 0E PT , PR and S can be switched via DI signal, S_P
and PT_PR.
PT-PR-T 0F PT , PR and T can be switched via DI signal, T_P
and PT_PR.
Sz and Tz dual mode is not provided here. For avoiding occupying too many digital inputs
in dual mode, speed and torque (force) mode can use external analog voltage as the
command source so as to reduce digital input (SPD0, SPD1 or TCM0, TCM1). Position
mode could use input pulse of PT mode to save the use of DI (POS0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5). Please
refer to Chapter 3.3.2, table 3.1, Default Value of DI Input Function and table 3.2, Default
Value of DO Output Function for the default DI/DO of each mode.
The relationship between DI/DO signals and PIN define are set after the mode is selected.
If users desire to change the setting, please refer to Chapter 3.3.4.

6.5.1 Speed／Position Dual Mode

There are PT-S and PR-S in speed/position dual mode. The command source of the
former one comes from external pulse while the latter one comes from internal
parameters (P6-00~P7-27). Speed command could be issued by external analog voltage
or internal parameters (P1-09~P1-11). The switch of speed/position mode is controlled by
S-P signal and the switch of PR-S mode is controlled by DI signal, which is more
complicated. The timing diagram is shown as below.
Diagram 1: Dual control mode of speed and position
In speed mode (S-P is ON), the speed command is selected via SPD0 and SPD1. CTRG
is not working at the moment. When switching to position mode (S-P is OFF), since
position command has not been issued (needs to wait the rising edge of CTRG), the
motor stops. The position command is determined by POS0~POS5 and triggered by
rising edge of CTRG. When S-P is ON, it goes back to speed mode again. Please refer to
the introduction of single mode for DI signal and the selected command of each mode.
6.5.2 Speed／Torque (force) Dual Mode

S-T is the only mode. The speed command comes from the external analog voltage and
internal parameters (P1-09 ~P1-11), which is selected via SPD0~SPD1. Similarly, the
source of torque (force) command could be external analog voltage and internal
parameters (P1-12～P1-14) and is selected via TCM0~TCM1. The switch of
speed/torque (force) mode is controlled by S-T signal. The timing diagram is shown as
below.
Diagram 2: Dual control mode of speed and torque
In torque (force) mode (S-T is ON), the torque (force) command is selected via TCM0
and TCM1. When switching to speed mode (S-T is OFF), the torque (force) command is
selected via SPD0 and SPD1. The motor operates according to the speed command.

When S-T is ON, it goes back to the torque (force) mode again. Please refer to the
introduction of single mode for DI signal and the selected command of each mode.
6.5.3 Torque (force) ／Position Dual Mode

There are PT-T and PR-T. The command source of the former one comes from external
pulse while the latter one comes from internal parameters (P6-00~P7-27). Torque (force)
command could be issued by external analog voltage or internal parameters
(P1-12~P1-14). The switch of torque (force)/position mode is controlled by T-P signal and
the switch of PR-T mode is controlled by DI signal, which is more complicated. The timing
diagram is shown as below.
Diagram 3: Dual control mode of torque and position
In torque (force) mode (T-P is ON), the torque (force) command is selected via TCM0 and
TCM1. CTRG is not working at the moment. When switching to position mode (T-P is
OFF), since position command has not been issued (needs to wait the rising edge of
CTRG), the motor stops. The position command is determined by POS0~POS5 and
triggered by rising edge of CTRG. When T-P is ON, it goes back to torque (force) mode
again. Please refer to the introduction of single mode for DI signal and the selected
command of each mode.

6.6 Others
6.6.1 The Use of Speed Limit
The maximum speed in each mode is limited by internal parameters (P1-55), no matter it
is in position, speed or torque (force) mode.
The issuing method of speed limit command and speed command is the same. The
command source could be external analog voltage or internal parameter (P1-09 ~ P1-11).
Please refer to Section 6.3.1 for descriptions.
Speed limit can be used in torque (force) mode (T) only. It is used for limiting the motor
speed. When the command in torque (force) mode is issued by external analog voltage,
DI signal is enough and can be regarded as SPD0~SPD1 which is used to determine the
speed limit command (internal parameters). If the DI signal is not enough, speed limit
command can be issued by analog voltage. When the function of disable/enable limit
function in P1-02 is set to 1, the speed limit function is enabled. See the timing diagram
as below.
Enable the speed limit function of P1-02

Disable the speed limit function of P1-02
Command source selection of speed limit
6.6.2 The Use of Torque (force) Limit

The issuing method of torque (force) limit command and torque (force) command is the
same. The command source could be external analog voltage or internal parameter
(P1-12 ~ P1-14). Please refer to Chapter 6.4.1 for descriptions.
Torque (force) limit can be used in position mode (PT, PR) or speed mode (S). It is used
for limiting the motor torque (force) output. When the command in position mode is
issued by external analog voltage, DI signal is enough and can be regarded as
TCM0~TCM1, which is used to determine torque (force) limit command (internal
parameters). If the DI signal is not enough, torque (force) limit command can be issued
by analog voltage. When the function of disable/enable torque (force) limit function in
P1-02 is set to 1, the torque (force) limit function is enabled. See the timing diagram as
below.
Enable the torque limit function of P1-02

Disable the torque limit function of P1-02
Command source selection of torque speed limit

6.6.3 Analog Monitor

Users could observe the needed voltage signal via analog monitor. Two analog channels
are provided by the servo drive and locate in terminal 15 and 16 of CN1.
P0-03 MON Analog Output Monitor
P1-03 AOUT Polarity Setting of Encoder Pulse Output
P1-04 MON1 MON1Analog Monitor Output Proportion
P1-05 MON2 MON2 Analog Monitor Output Proportion
Offset Adjustment Value of Analog Monitor
P4-20 DOF1
Output (Ch1)
Offset Adjustment Value of Analog Monitor
P4-21 DOF2
Output (Ch2)
For example, when users desire to observe the voltage signal of channel 1, if the monitor
output voltage is 8 V per 2.25 M, then the setting value of P1-04 should be changed to 50
(= 2.25 M/max. input frequency). Other related setting includes P0-03 (X = 3), P1-03
(Polarity Setting of Encoder Pulse Output , range from 0 to 3, to setup positive / negative
output); In general, when the output voltage value of Ch1 is V1, the pulse command
frequency is equal to (Max. input frequency × V1/8) × P1-04/100.
Since there is an offset value of analog monitor output voltage, the zero voltage level of
analog monitor output does not match to the zero point of setting value. It is
recommended to use Offset Adjustment Value of Analog Monitor Output, DOF1 (P4-20
and DOF2 (P4-21) to improve it. The max. output voltage is ±8V, if the voltage exceeds
the range, it will be limited within the range of ±8V. The revolution of ASDA-A2R is 10bits,
which approximates to 13mV/LSB.
8V
DOF
-8V

6.6.4 The Use of Brake

When operating brake via servo drive, if the DO signal, BRKR is set to OFF, it means the
brake is not working and the motor will be locked. If BRKR is set to ON, it means the
brake is working and the motor can operate. The operation of brake has two kinds. Users
can set the relevant dealy via regiser MBT1 (P1-42) and MBT2 (P1-43). It is usually
applied in Z axis in order to reduce the heat generated when servo motor puts up
resistance and shorten its lifetime. In order to avoid the error of brake, it must be worked
when the servo drive is off. To operate the brake, the brake has to be activated before the
motor stops running (Servo OFF). The brake has to be released after Servo ON.
Otherwise, it would become the loading of the motor and might damage the brake.
If it works during the process of acceleration or constant speed, the servo drive needs to
generate more current to resist the brakeforce of brake and it might cause the alarm of
overload warning.
Timing diagram of brake control:
ON
SON
OFF OFF
(DI輸入)
DI input
ON
BRKR OFF OFF
(DO輸出)
DO output
MBT1(P1-42) MBT2(P1-43)
馬達轉速
Motor speed ZSPD(P1-38)
The output timing of BRKR:

1. When Servo OFF, go through the time set by P1-43 and the motor speed is faster
than the setting in P1-38, DO.BRKR is OFF (the brake is locked).
2. When Servo OFF, has not reached the time set by P1-43 but the motor speed is
slower than the setting in P1-38, DO.BRKR is OFF (the brake is locked).

The wiring diagram of using mechanical brake:
NOTE 1）Please refer to Chapter 3, Wiring.

2）The brake signal controls the solenoid valve, provides power to
the brake and enables the brake.
3）Please note that there is no polarity in coil brake.
4）Do not use brake power and control power (VDD) at the same
time.
Timing diagram of control power and main power:
L1c, L2c
Control power
5V
Control power
> 0 mse
R, S, T
Main power
BUS voltage
READY
Servo On (DI input)

1 mesc (min) + DI Debouncing Time (P2-09)
Servo On (DO output)
Position / Speed / Torque

command can be inputted Input is available


Chapter 7 Motion Control
7.1 Motion Control Functions of ASDA-A2R
1） Single-axis motion controller of PR (Procedure) control
2） Function of CAPTURE (data capture)／COMPARE (data compare)
3） Function of E-Cam
7.2 Information of the Servo Drive

The information of this servo drive can be divided into three parts: System parameters,
Monitor variables and Data array.
Descriptions are as follows:
System Parameters Monitor Variables
Functional It is used to be the reference The status of the servo drive or
Description mode, important data or
motor,
operation condition when the
servo drive is operating, e.g. e.g. motor position, speed, electric
Control Mode, Servo Loop Gain, current, etc.
etc.
Display Format Panel displays PX-XX. Set P0-02 to Monitor variables code
Pressing the SET Key to display and enter into Monitor Mode. The
parameters and start setting. panel will display the value of the
Please refer to Chapter 4 for variable.
Panel Display and Operation.
Or pressing the MODE Key on the
panel to switch to Monitor Mode.
Please refer to Chapter 4 for Panel
Display and Operation.
Access Method Readable and writable (depends Read-only
on parameters)
Data Size 16-bit or 32-bit (depends on 32-bit integers only
parameters)
Communication Access via MODBUS / CANopen  It only can be monitored via PC
software by connecting USB
/ USB
 It does not directly support
Each parameter occupies two MODBUS / CANopen access,
MODBUS addresses unless mapping is for
corresponding the specified
monitor variables to system
parameters.
Mapping 8 groups of parameter, P0-25 ~ 5 groups of parameter, P0-09 ~
Support
P0-32 P0-13
(set by P0-35 ~ P0-42) (set by P0-17 ~ P0-21)

Chapter 7 Motion Control ASDA-A2R Series
Note In Monitor Mode, pressing

UP/DOWN Key on the panel to
switch the commonly used monitor
variables (code 0~26); however, it
cannot display all (about 150 in
total)

7.2.1 Description of Monitor Variables

Description of Monitor Variables:
Item Descriptions
Variable Each monitor variable has a code. Set the code via P0-02 so that the
Code users can monitor the variable.
Format Every monitor variable is saved with the format of 32-bit (long integer) in
the servo drive.
Classification It is divided into basic variables and extension variables:
1. Basic variables: Use the Monitor Mode on the panel to find the
variable (variables in the cycle) by pressing UP/ DOWN Key
(P0-02 = 0~26)
2. Extension variables: Variables other than the basic ones (P0-02 =
27~127)
Monitor Two methods, Panel display and Mapping:
Method
1. Panel display: View through the panel directly
2. Mapping: Correspond the variables to the system parameters and
view the variables via parameters.
Panel 1. Switch to the Monitor Mode by pressing the MODE Key and select
Display the desired monitoring variables via UP/DOWN Key.
2. Directly enter the desired monitoring code via P0-02 for viewing.
Pressing the SHF Key on the panel can switch the display of high /
low word; Pressing the SET Key on the panel can switch the
display of decimal / hexadecimal format.
Mapping 1. Mapping parameters that support monitor variable are P0-09 ~
P0-13. Please refer to Chapter 8.3 for parameter description.
2. Monitor variables can be read via communication by mapping
parameters.
3. The value of mapping parameters (P0-09~P0-13) is the content of
basic variables (17h, 18h, 19h, 1Ah). The setting value which is set
by P0-17 should be monitored via p0-09 (refer to p0-02). When
accessing data via communication, the value of P0-17 can be read
or monitored via panel (Set P0-02 to 23). When the panel shows
「VAR-1」, it means it is the value of P0-09.

The descriptions of monitor variables attribute are as the following.

Attribute Descriptions
B BASE: basic variables. Variables that can be viewed by UP/DOWN Key
on the panel.
Dn When the panel displays, the position of the decimal point will be D1
which means it only shows one decimal point; D2 means it shows two
decimal points.
Dec When the panel displays, the information only can be shown in decimal
format. Pressing the SET Key on the panel cannot switch it to
hexadecimal format.
Hex When the panel displays, the information only can be shown in
hexadecimal format. Pressing the SET Key on the panel cannot switch it
to decimal format.
Descriptions of monitor variables in sequence of code are as the following.

Code Name of Variables Descriptions
／Attribute
000 Feedback position The current feedback position of the motor encoder. The
(00h) (PUU) B unit is PUU (user unit).
001 Position command The current coordinate of position command. The unit is
(01h) (PUU) B PUU (user unit).
PT mode: it represents the pulse number the servo drive
received.
PR mode: the value of absolute coordinate from position
command
Equals to the pulse number sent by the controller.
002 Position deviation The deviation between the position command and
(02h) (PUU) B feedback position. The unit is PUU (user unit).
003 Feedback position Current feedback position of the motor encoder. The unit
(03h) (pulse) B is pulse (encoder unit).
004 Position command The current coordinate of the position command. The unit
(04h) (pulse) B
is pulse (encoder unit).
The command that had gone through E-gear.
005 Position deviation The deviation between the position command and
(05h) (pulse) B feedback position. The unit is pulse (encoder unit).
006 Pulse command Frequency of pulse command received by the servo drive.
(06h) frequency B
The unit is Kpps.
It is suitable in PT/PR mode.
007 Speed feedback Current speed of the motor. The unit of rotary motor is 0.1
(07h) B D1 Dec r/min. And the unit of linear motor is 10 6 m / s .
The value is more stable since it has been though
low-pass filter.
008 Speed command The speed command is issued by analog. The unit is 0.01
(08h) (analog) Volt.
B D2 Dec
009 Speed command The processed speed command. The unit of rotary motor
(09h) (processed) B


／Attribute
is 0.1 r/min. And the unit of linear motor is 10 6 m / s .
The source might be analog, register or position loop.
010 Torque (force) The torque (force) command is issued by analog. The unit
(0Ah) command is 0.01 Volt.
(analog)
B D2 Dec
011 Torque (force) The processed torque (force) command. The unit is
(0Bh) command
percentage (%).
(processed) B
The source might be analog, register or speed loop.
012 Average load B The average load output by the servo drive. The unit is
(0Ch) percentage (%).
013 Peak load B The maximum load output by the servo drive. The unit is
(0Dh) percentage (%).
014 DC Bus voltage B Capacitor voltage after rectification. The unit is Volt.
(0Eh)
015 Inertia ratio (Total Rotary motor: Ratio of load inertia and motor inertia. The
(0Fh) weight of linear unit is 0.1 times.
motor and load) Linear motor: Total weight of linear motor and load; Unit:
B D1 Dec 0.1kg
016 IGBT temperature The temperature of IGBT. The unit is °Ｃ.
(10h) B
017 Resonance Resonance frequency of the system, including 2 groups of
(11h) frequency
frequency, F1 and F2.
B Dec
When monitoring via panel, pressing SHF can switch the
display of both:
F2 shows no decimal point while F1 shows one.
When reading through communication (mapping
parameter):
Low-16 Bit (Low WORD) returns frequency F2.
High-16 Bit (High WORD) returns frequency F1.
018 Z phase offset The offset between the motor position and Z phase. The
(12h) B Dec range is from -5000 to +5000.
If the position is the same as Z phase, its value is 0. The
bigger the value is, the more the offset will be.
019 Mapping Return the value of parameter P0-25 which is mapped by
(13h) parameter ＃1 B P0-35


／Attribute
023 Mapping monitor Return the value of parameter P0-09 which is the monitor
(17h) variable ＃1 B variables mapped by P0-17
(1Ah) variable ＃4 B variables mapped by P0-20
039 DI status The processed DI status of the servo drive. Each bit
(27h) (processed)
corresponds to one DI channel.
Hex
The source includes hardware channel / software P4-07
which is determined by P3-06.
040 DO status The real status of Digital Output hardware. Each bit
(28h) (hardware) Hex corresponds to one DI channel.
041 Drive status Return the value of P0-46. Please refer to the description
(29h) of the parameter.
043 CAP, data The Data captured by CAP hardware from the latest time
(2Bh) capturing Note: CAP could continuously capture many points.
048 Auxiliary encoder The value of pulse counter from auxiliary encoder (CN5)
(30h) CNT
049 Pulse command The value of pulse counter from pulse command (CN1)
(31h) CNT
050 Speed command The processed speed command. The unit of rotary motor
(32h) (processed) is 0.1 r/min. The unit of linear motor is 10 6 m / s .
D1 Dec
The source might be analog, register or position loop.
051 Speed feedback Current actual speed of the motor. The unit of rotary motor
(33h) (immediate) is 0.1 r/min. And the unit of linear motor is 10 6 m / s .
D1 Dec
052 Speed feedback Current actual speed of the motor. The unit of rotary motor
(34h) (filter) is 0.1 r/min. And the unit of linear motor is 10 6 m / s .
D1 Dec
053 Torque (force) The processed torque (force) command. The unit is 0.1
(35h) command
percent (%).
(processed)
D1 Dec The source might be analog, register or speed loop.
054 Torque (force) Current actual torque (force) of the motor. The unit is 0.1
(36h) feedback percent (%).
D1 Dec
055 Electric current Current actual electric current of the motor. The unit is
(37h) feedback 0.01 ampere (Amp).
D2 Dec
056 DC Bus voltage Capacitor voltage after rectification. The unit is 0.1 volt.
(38h) D1 Dec


／Attribute
059 Pulse from E-Cam The accumulative pulse number of E-Cam master axis. It
(3Bh) master axis is the same as P5-86.
(accumulation)
060 Pulse from E-Cam The incremental pulse number from master axis. The unit
(3Ch) master axis is pulse number per msec.
(increment)
061 Pulse from E-Cam The lead pulse of E-Cam master axis which is used to
(3Dh) mast axis
judge the engaging condition.
(lead pulse)
When it is disengaged: lead pulse = P5-87 or P5-92.
When it is engaged: lead pulse = P5-89. When the value
is 0, it will be disengaged.
062 The position of The position of E-Cam axis.
(3Eh) E-Cam axis Unit: The pulse is from the master axis. When the
incremental pulse from master axis is P, the axis
rotates M cycle (P5-83＝M, P5-84＝P).
063 Position of E-Cam The position of E-Cam slave axis.
(3Fh) slave axis Unit: PUU
064 Terminal register In PR mode, the termination of position command
(40h) of PR command (Cmd_E)
065 Output register ofIn PR mode, the accumulative output of position
(41h) PR command command
067 PR target speed The target speed of path command in PR mode. The unit
(43h) is PPS (Pulse Per Second)
068 S-curve filter The input command of S-curve filter which is used to
(44h) (input)
smooth the input command.
It is effective in PR mode, E-Cam and speed command.
069 S-curve filter The output command of S-curve filter which is used to
(45h) (output)
smooth the output command.
It is effective in PR mode, E-Cam and speed command.
076 Speed command In PR mode, the programmed trapezoid speed curve is
(4Ch) of PR contour
determined by the target speed, acceleration, deceleration
and moving distance (before S-curve filter).
The unit is PPS (Pulse Per Second).
081 Synchronous When synchronous capture axis is enabled, the received
(51h) capture axis pulse number between two captures can be used to
Incremental input measure the real distance of Mark.
pulse
084 Synchronous The deviation between the real output pulse and the target
(54h) capture axis pulse when synchronous capture axis is enabled. If it
Deviation pulse reaches the synchronization, the value will close to 0.
number
096 Firmware version It includes two versions, DSP and CPLD.
(60h) Dec
When monitoring via panel, pressing the SHF Key can


／Attribute
switch the display of both:
DSP shows no decimal point while CPLD shows one.
When reading through communication (parameter
mapping):
Low-16 Bit (Low WORD) returns DSP version number.
High-16 Bit (High WORD) returns CPLD version number.
098 PLC scan time The update time of DI/DO. The unit is 0.5 msec.
(62h)
109 The amount of Returns the amount of data array. The unit is DWORD (32
(6Dh) data array Bits)
111 Error code of the Error code of the servo drive: only for the control loop, not
(6Fh) servo drive including the motion controller.
112 CANopen SYNC The time the servo drive receives SYNC signal
(70h) TS (hasn’t been (TimeStamp)
through the filter) The unit is usec.
113 CANopen SYNC The time the servo drive receives SYNC signal and has
(71h) TS (has been
been through the filter
through the filter)
The unit is usec.
114 CANopen To synchronize the device timing with the controller during
(72h) timing the operation.
synchronization
The unit is usec.
123 The returned The returned value when monitoring via panel
(7Bh) value when
monitoring via
panel

7.2.2 Description of Data Array

Many functions of motion control, such as CAPTURE, COMPARE and E-Cam are the
data that needs to be saved in large amount of memory space, therefore, the servo
drive reserves a continuous internal space to satisfy the need. The main feature of the
data array is as the followings:
Feature Introduction of Data Array
Usage  Save the captured data of CAPTURE
 Save the compared value of COMPARE
 Save the contour table of E-Cam
Note: The system does not partition off the data array into the
individual space of CAP, CMP and E-Cam. The user could
program it according to the demand. Therefore, the space
might be overlapped. Please pay close attention to it when
using.
Size of Data Array  32-bit integer x 800 (refer to P5-10)
 Each data has its corresponding address. Specify the
address is a must when reading or writing the data.
 The 800 data is from 0 to 799.
Data Retained  Manually set up the saving (P2-08 = 30, 35) is a must and
the data should be saved in EEPROM of the servo drive.
 Save the data when it is Servo Off.
 The data will be loaded into data array automatically when it
is Servo On.
Accessing Window  Should be access via parameter P5-10 ~ P5-13.
The content of data array cannot be read or wrote directly, reading or writing the data
must via parameter P5-10 ~ P5-13. The description of the parameters is as the
followings:
Description of Related Parameter about Data Array
Parameter Name Description
Size of data
P5-10 Return the size of data array (read-only)
array
Reading /
P5-11 writing Set the desired address of reading and writing
address
P5-12 Reading / Read via panel: After reading the content of P5-11, the
writing value of P5-11 will not change.
window #1 Write via panel: After writing the content of P5-11, the value
of P5-11 will increase 1 automatically.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Read via communication: After reading the content of
P5-11, the value of P5-11 will
increase 1 automatically.
Write via communication: After writing the content of P5-11,
the value of P5-11 will increase 1
automatically.
P5-13 Reading / Read via panel: After reading the content of P5-11, the
writing value of P5-11 will increase 1
window #2 automatically.

Write via panel: It cannot be written via panel.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Read via communication: After reading the content of
P5-11, the value of P5-11 will
increase 1 automatically.
Write via communication: After writing the content of P5-11,
the value of P5-11 will increase 1
automatically.
Set the desired reading / writing address via P5-11 first. Then, read / write P5-12 or
P5-13 in order to access the content of data array. If users desire to continuously write 3
data, 100, 200, 300 into the address of data array, 11, 12 and 13, the operation step is
as follows:
A. Write via panel: Use P5-12 (reading / writing window #1), since P5-13 does not
support writing via panel:
1. Set address: Set P5-11 to 11 (The first written address)
2. Write into data: Set P5-12 to 100 (After writing 100 into address 11 in data array, the
value of P5-11 will increase 1 automatically.)
Set P5-12 to 200 (After writing 200 into address 12 in data array, the
Set P5-12 to 300 (After writing 300 into address 13 in data array, the
The last step is to read address 11, 12 and 13 and check if the content is the value that
just wrote into.
B. Read via panel: Use P5-13 (reading / writing window #2) so as to continuously read
the content.
1. Set address: Set P5-11 to 11 (The first read address)
2. Read the data: When the panel displays P5-13,
Press the SET Key for the first time and show the content of address
11. Then, press the MODE Key to exit.
Press the SET Key for the second time and show the content of
address 12. Then, press the MODE Key to exit.
Press the SET Key for the second time and show the content of
address 13. Then, press the MODE Key to exit.
Note: Every time when reading the data via P5-13, the value of P5-11
will increase 1 automatically. Thus the user could continuously
read the data.
If reading the data via P5-12, then the value of P5-11 will not
change. The user is unable to read the next data automatically.
If users desire to read / write the data array via communication, the operation procedure
is similar to panel. Moreover, the function of P5-12 and P5-13 is the same. If users
desire to write 6 data, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500 and 600 into the address of data array
via Modbus communication command 0x10 (continuous writing), the content of the
issued command is as the followings:

Content of Communication Command: Write into Data Array

P5-11 P5-12 P5-13
Start Written
No. Command Low High Low High Low High
Add. Amount
Word Word Word Word Word Word
11 0 100 0 200 0
6
1 0x10 P5-11 The second
(Word) The first address The first data
data
6 13 0 300 0 400 0
2 0x10 P5-11
(Word) The third address The third data The fourth data
6 15 0 500 0 600 0
3 0x10 P5-11
(Word) The fifth address The fifth data The sixth data
If users desire to read the value of data array in order to check the previous written
content, users can write the desired reading start address into P5-11 via MODBUS
communication command 0x06 (write 1 data). The issuing communication command is
as the following:
Content of Communication Command: Set the
Reading Address of Data Array
No. Command Start Add. Written Data
4 0x06 P5-11 11
Then, read the content of specified address by communication command 0x03

(continuous reading). The issuing communication command is as follows:
Content of Communication Return Data
Command: Read Data Array
P5-11 P5-12 P5-13
Start Read
No. Command Low High Low High Low High
Add. Amount
Word Word Word Word Word Word
11 0 100 0 200 0
6
5 0x03 P5-11 Data of Data of
(Word) Read address
address 11 address 12
13 0 300 0 400 0
6
(Word) Read address
15 0 500 0 600 0
6
(Word) Read address
The return value on the right-hand side of the above table represents the read
parameter, P5-11, P5-12 and P5-13, which is also the content of address 11~16 in data
array.

7.3 Description of Motion Axes

The motion axis is an internal counter of the servo drive. It is used for counting the absolute
position of the axis (32-bit integer). The following motion axes are included in this servo
drive:
Name of the Axis Description Access Attribute
1. Main Encoder It represents the absolute feedback position of R Physical
(P5-16) the motor. The unit is PUU (user unit). Axis
2. Auxiliary It is counted by the pulse signal from CN5 and R/W Physical
Encoder usually connects to the second encoder or linear Axis
(P5-17) scale. Its pulse is A/B type.
3. Pulse It is counted by the pulse signal from CN1 and R/W Physical
Command usually connects to the pulse command of the Axis
(P5-18) controller. The pulse type could be set by P1-00.
4. Capture Axis It is the axis which has CAP function. Its R/W Functional
(P5-37) command source could be the above mentioned Axis
axis 1~3, which can write the new value into it
and has an offset from the physical axis.
Moreover, after capturing the first point, the axis
position can be redefined.
5. Compare Axis It is the axis which has CMP function. Its R/W Functional
(P5-57) command source could be the above mentioned Axis
axis 1~4, which can write the new value into it
and has an offset from the physical axis.
6. Master Axis It is the master axis of E-Cam. Its command R/W Functional
(P5-86) source could be the above mentioned axis 2, 3, 4 Axis
and 7, which can write the new value into it and
has an offset from the physical axis.
7. Command The command position is from the path R Virtual
Axis in PR generator in PR mode. Axis
Mode
8. Internal Time It is the internal accumulative time counter of the R Virtual
Axis servo drive. The value increases 1 every 1ms. Axis
9. Synchronous It is similar to Capture Axis (P5-37); however, it R/W Virtual
Capture Axis automatically adjusts the incremental pulse Axis
(P5-77) between two CAPs to the setting value of P5-78.
Note: Physical Axis: The position value is counted from the actual hardware signal.
Functional Axis: It is the virtual axis which has been processed by the physical. The
value might not be the same as the source of physical axis.
However, the incremental value is the same as the one in physical
axis.
Virtual Axis: The axis position comes from the internal firmware of the servo drive.
The command axis of PR mode is not instantaneous; therefore, it
cannot be the command source axis of CAP and CMP function.
However, it could be the command source of master axis of E-Cam.

7.4 Description of PR Mode

PR Procedure: It is the smallest unit of command. Command could be one or many
procedures to constitute.
Procedure is triggered by DI.CTRG. POS0~POS5 is used to specify the triggered
procedure number.
The triggered procedure is completed and will trigger the next one automatically. The
procedure number can be set and the delay time between procedures as well.
The E-Cam function is provided in PR mode. It can be enabled via PR procedure. After it is
disabled, it can return to the specified PR procedure.
7.5 The Difference between General PR Mode and the One in

ASDA-A2R
General PR Mode PR Mode in A2R
Command 8 64
Number
Command Positioning Command Positioning／Constant speed
Type
Command
PR jump, write in parameters
Position  Absolute or incremental  Absolute / incremental can be set
Command  Acceleration/Deceleration individually
Parameter time x 1 set  Acceleration/Deceleration time x
 Motion speed x 8 sets 16 sets
 Delay time x 8 sets  Motion speed x 16 sets
 Delay time x 16 sets
Command It has to wait until DO.ZSPD is Anytime will do. It could specify the
Triggering Time ON next command issuing method (in
sequence / interrupt / overlap)
Command  Use DI.CTRG + POSn  Use DI.CTRG + POSn
Triggering  Event trigger: DI.Event＋CAP
Method
complete
 P5-07, fill in PR number to
trigger.
Position  Trapezoid curve with  Trapezoid curve with S-curve
Command S-curve filter filter
PROFILE (If S-curve is not enabled, then (Trapezoid curve and S-curve
it has no function of can be set individually.
acceleration / deceleration)
Format of  Two register for turns and  PUU (32bit)
Position pulse within one turn
Command respectively.
Homing  The function is enabled  The function is enabled
Function automatically when the automatically when the power is
power is On. (Servo ON On. (Servo ON for the first time)
for the first time)  Use DI.SHOM to trigger
 Use DI.SHOM to trigger  PR 0 = Homing
 After homing is completed, the
specified PR will be executed

General PR Mode PR Mode in A2R

automatically.
Software limit No Yes
protection
7.6 The Position Unit of PR Mode

The position data of PR mode is represented by PUU (Pulse of User Unit). It is also the
proportion between the controller position unit and the internal position unit of the servo
drive, which is the so-called electronic gear ratio of the servo drive.
1） The position unit of the servo drive (pulse):
Delta’s 20bit rotary motor: Encoder unit: 1280000 (pulse/rev), which will not
change.
Motor from other brands: Unit is single-phase pulse.
2） User unit (PUU): The unit of the controller.

Delta’s 20bit rotary motor: P pulse per revolution (PUU/rev), the gear ratio should
set as:
GEAR_NUM(P1-44) / GEAR_DEN(P1-45) = 1280000 / P
Rotary motor from other brands: P pulse per revolution (PUU/rev), the gear ratio
should set as:
GEAR_NUM(P1-44) / GEAR_DEN(P1-45) = X / P
X = encoder resolution (pulse/rev)
Linear motor: if 1PUU = P m , the gear ratio should set as:

GEAR_NUM(P1-44) / GEAR_DEN(P1-45) = P*X
X = encoder resolution ( m / pulse ), which is the width of single-phase pulse.
7.7 Description of Register in PR Mode

1） Position register of PR mode: All is represented in PUU (Pulse of User Unit).
2） Command register (monitor variable 064): Command termination register Cmd_E. It
represents the absolute terminal coordinate of position command.
3） Command output register (monitor variable001): Cmd_O; it represents the absolute
coordinate from the current output command.
4） Feedback register (monitor variable 000): Fb_PUU; it shows the absolute feedback
position of the motor.
5） Deviation register (monitor variable 002): Err_PUU; it is the deviation between the
register from command output and feedback register.
6） In PR mode, either in operation or stop status, it satisfies the condition of Err_PUU =
Cmd_O - Fb_PUU.

Influence brought by position command:

Type of When issuing the ＝＞When command ＝＞ Command is
Command command ＝＞
is executing＝＞ completed
Absolute Cmd_E = command data Cmd_E does not Cmd_E does not
Positioning (absolute) change. change.
Command Cmd_O does not change. Cmd_O continuously Cmd_O = Cmd_E
DO.CMD_OK is OFF output DO.CMD_OK is ON
...
Incremental Cmd_E+= command data Cmd_E does not Cmd_E does not
Positioning (incremental) change. change.
Command Cmd_O does not change. Cmd_O continuously Cmd_O = Cmd_E
DO.CMD_OK is OFF output DO.CMD_OK is ON
...
Issue the Cmd_E does not change. Cmd_E does not Cmd_E does not
command of Cmd_O continuously change. change.
DI：STP to output Cmd_O stops Cmd_O = position after
DO.CMD_OK is according to the stop
stop the
unchangeable deceleration curve DO.CMD_OK is ON
command
anytime
Homing Cmd_E does not change. Cmd_E continuously Cmd_E = the absolute
Command Cmd_O does not change. output position of Z
DO.CMD_OK is OFF Cmd_O continuously Cmd_O = position after
output stop
DO.HOME is OFF
... DO.CMD_OK is ON
... DO.HOME is ON
Speed Cmd_E continuously output.
Command Cmd_O continuously output. When the speed command is completed, it
means the speed reaches the setting value and does not stop.
DO.CMD_OK is OFF
Enter PR (Servo Off->On or switch the mode Cmd_O = Cmd_E = current feedback
and enter into PR mode) position
Note: The incremental positioning command is accumulated by command termination
Cmd_E. It is neither related to the current position of the motor nor the command
time.

7.8 Homing Description of PR Mode

The purpose of homing is to connect the Z pulse position of motor encoder to the internal
coordinate of the servo drive. The coordinate value corresponded by Z pulse can be
specified.
After homing is completed, the stopped position will not be the Z pulse. It is because it has
to decelerate to stop when finding the Z pulse. It might therefore exceed a bit. However,
since the position of Z pulse has correctly setup, it would not influence the accuracy of
positioning. For example, when specifying the coordinate value corresponded by Z pulse is
100 and it is Cmd_O = 300 after homing, it means the deceleration distance is 300 – 100 =
200 (PUU). Since Cmd_E = 100 (Z’s absolute coordinate), if desire to return to Z pulse
position, issuing the positioning command will do, absolute 100 command or incremental 0
command.
After homing is completed, it will execute the specified PR automatically, which can move a
distance of offset after homing.
When it is executing homing, software limit is disabled.
7.9 DI／DO Provided by PR Mode and Diagrams

DI signal:
CTRG, SHOM, STP, POS 0~5, ORG, PL(CCWL), NL(CWL), EV1~4
DO signal:
CMD OK, MC_OK, TPOS, ALM, CAP_OK, CAM_AREA
System frame:
DI.CTRG
DO.CMD_OK
DLY
Command is issuing Servo positioning is

completed
DO.TPOS
DO.MC_OK PR procedure is
completed.

Description of command triggered method in PR mode:

64 command procedures are in each axis of PR mode. Procedure #0 is homing and the
others (#1~#63) are the procedures that users can self-define. The command triggered
method is concluded as the followings:
Command Source Description
Standard DI.CTRG + POS0 ~ 5 Use DI.POS0 ~ 5 to trigger the desired procedure
trigger
number. Then, use the rising edge of DI.CTRG to
trigger PR command.
Application: PC or PLC that issues command via DI
Functional DI.STP, SHM When DI.STP is from OFF  ON, the command
trigger
stops in half way.
When DI.SHM is from OFF  ON, it starts homing.
Event DI.EV1~4 The change status of DI.EV1 ~ 4 can be the triggered
trigger
event.
Set the triggered procedure number from OFF  ON
by parameter P5-98.
Set the triggered procedure number from ON  OFF
by parameter P5-99.
Application: connect to the sensor and trigger the
preset procedure.
Software P5-07 Directly write the procedure number into P5-07 and
trigger
trigger command.
Both panel and communication (RS-232/485／
CANopen) can do.

Application: PC or PLC that issues command via
communication.
Other CAP trigger After the capture is completed, procedure #50 can be
E-CAM disengage
triggered and activated by the setting value Bit3 of
trigger
P5-39 X.
When E-cam is disengaged and returns to PR mode,
the procedure specified by P5-88 BA setting value
can be triggered.

7.10 Parameter Settings in PR Mode

1) Target speed: P5-60 ~P5-75, 16 PR in total
Rotary Motor:
32 ~ 0 BIT
W0 TARGET_SPEED: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 (r/min)
Linear Motor:
32 ~ 0 BIT
W0 TARGET_SPEED: 1 ~ 15999999 ( 10 6 )
2) Acceleration / Deceleration time: P5-20 ~ P5-35, 16 PR in total

15 ~ 0 BIT
W0 T_ACC / T_DEC: 1 ~ 65500 (msec)
3) Pause time: P5-40 ~ P5-55, 16 PR in total

15 ~ 0 BIT
W0 IDLE: 0 ~ 32767 (msec)
4) PR parameter: P5-00 ~ P5-09, P6-00 ~ P6-01, 12 DWORD in total
32 BIT
P5-00 Reserved
P5-01 Reserved (It is for testing only, do not use)
P5-02 Reserved (It is for testing only, do not use)
P5-03 Deceleration time of auto protection
P5-04 Homing mode
P5-05 1st Speed setting of high speed homing
P5-06 2nd Speed setting of low speed homing
P5-07 PR command register
P5-08 Forward software limit
P5-09 Reverse software limit
P6-00 Homing setting
P6-01 Origin definition
Note: Path (procedure)
5) PR definition: P6-02 ~ P7-27, (64 BIT), 63 sets of PR in total (2N)

31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7 ~ 4 3 ~ 0 BIT
DW0 … … … … … … … TYPE
DW1 DATA (32 bit)
Each PR has two parameters, the PR function is determined by TYPE. DATA represents
position or speed data while the others are the additional information.
6) SPEED, Constant speed control: TYPE = 1

31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7 ~ 4 3 ~ 0 BIT
DW0 - - DLY - DEC ACC OPT 1
DW1 DATA (32 bit): Target Speed ; Unit is defined by OPT.UNIT
When this command is executing, the motor accelerates or decelerates from the current

speed until it reaches the target speed. After the command is completed, the motor will
remain at the same speed and never stop.
OPT:
OPT selection
7 6 5 4 BIT
- UNIT AUTO INS
※DI.STP stop and software limit are acceptable.
INS: When this PR is executing, it will interrupt the previous PR.
AUTO: When the speed reaches the constant speed area, the next PR will be loaded
automatically.
UNIT: 0 unit is 0.1r/min ( 10 6 m / s for linear motor); 1 unit is PPS (Pulse Per Second)
ACC/DEC: 0 ~ F, acceleration / deceleration number (4 BIT)

ACC / DEC (4) Index P5-20 ~ P5-35
SPD: 0 ~ F, target speed number (4 BIT)

SPD (4) Index P5-60 ~ P5-75
DLY: 0 ~ F, delay time number (4 BIT). The delay after executing this PR. The external INS
is invalid.
DLY (4) Index P5-40 ~ P5-55
7) POSITION, Positioning control: (TYPE = 2, PR is completed and stopped), (TYPE = 3,

the next PR is executed automatically after the PR is completed)
31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7 ~ 4 3 ~ 0 BIT
DW0 - - DLY SPD DEC ACC OPT 2 or 3
DW1 DATA (32 bit): target position, Unit: Pulse of User Unit
OPT:
OPT Selection
7 6 5 4 BIT Description
CMD OVLP INS
0 0 Absolute positioning command: Cmd_E=DATA
(Note 1)
1 0 Incremental positioning command: Cmd_E= Cmd_E
+ DATA (Note 2)
- -
0 1 Relative positioning command: Cmd_E= current
feedback +DATA (Note 3)
1 1 CAP positioning command: Cmd_E=CAP position +
DATA (Note 4)
※DI.STP stop and software limit are acceptable.
INS: When this PR is executing, it will interrupt the previous PR
OVLP: It is allowed to overlap the next PR. When overlapping, please set DLY to 0.
CMD: The calculation of the position terminal command (Cmd_E) is as the followings:
Note 1: Position terminal command is determined by DATA.

Note 2: Position terminal command is determined by the previous terminal command

(Monitor variable 40h) plus DATA.
Note 3: Position terminal command is determined by the current feedback position (Monitor
variable 00h) plus DATA.
Note 4: Position terminal command is determined by the position latched by CAP (Monitor
variable 2Bh) plus DATA.
8) Special code: TYPE = 7, jump to the specified PR

31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~4 3 ~ 0 BIT
DW0 - - DLY - FUNC_CODE - OPT 7
DW1 PATH_NO (0 ~ 63)
OPT:
OPT selection
7 6 5 4 BIT
- - - INS
PATH_NO: The jump target procedure number
FUNC_CODE: Reserved
DLY: The delay time after jump
9) Special code: TYPE = 8, write the specified parameter

31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~4 3 ~ 0 BIT
DW0 0 S_D DLY DESTINATION OPT 8
DW1 SOURCE
DLY: The delay time after write
Bit28 ~ Bit31are not 0x0, then AL213 occurs.

S_D: Specified data source and written target.
S_D Specified Selection
27 26 25 24 BIT Description
SOUR Rsvd DEST Data Source Written Target
0 0 0 Constant Parameter, Px-xx
0 1 0 Parameter, Px-xx Parameter, Px-xx
1 0 0 Data array Parameter, Px-xx
1 1 0 Monitor variable Parameter, Px-xx
0
0 0 1 Constant Data array
0 1 1 Parameter, Px-xx Data array
1 0 1 Data array Data array
1 1 1 Monitor variable Data array
Rsvd is not 0, then AL213 occurs.
OPT：
OPT Selection
7 6 5 4 BIT
- ROM AUTO INS

Para_Data: the written data

INS: When executing this PR, it interrupts the previous one.

AUTO: When this PR is completed, it will execute the next PR automatically.
ROM: 1 means to write into EEPROM at the same time. (The supported written target is
parameter, if the target is data array, then it will not be written into EEPROM.)
DESTINATION: Setting of the written target

DESTINATION
19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 BIT
When DEST = 0, it
represents parameter, P_Grp P_Idx
Px-xx
When DEST = 1, it
Array_Addr
represents data array.
P_Grp, P_Idx: Specified parameter group and number.
Array_Addr: The position of specified data array
SOURCE: Setting of data source

SOURCE
31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7 ~ 4 3 ~ 0 BIT
SOUR = 00 means
Para_Data
constant
SOUR = 01 means
Rsvd (0x0000 0) P_Grp P_Idx
parameter Px-xx
SOUR = 10 means
Rsvd (0x0000 0) Array_Addr
data array
SOUR = 11 means
Rsvd (0x0000 00) Sys_Var
monitor variable
P_Grp, P_Idx: specified parameter group and number
Array_Addr: specified the position of data array
Para_Data: the written constant
Sys_Var: monitor parameter code. Refer to P0-02 for its setting.
When Rsvd is not 0, it will display AL213. When P_Grp exceeds the range, it will display
AL.207. When displaying AL.209, it means P_Idx exceeds the range.
When Array_Addr exceeds the range, it will display AL.213. And AL.231 is for Sys_Var
exceeding the range.
Note: 1. Even when the written parameter is retained, the new value will not be written into
EEPROM. Too frequent written will not shorten the lifetime of EEPROM.
Note: The aim of writing parameters via PR procedure is for turning ON/OFF or
adjusting some functions. (e.g. according to different positioning command
to adjust P2-00, Position Loop Gain.) This procedure will continuously
repeat during the operation. If the data is all written into EEPROM, it will
shorten the lifetime of EEPROM. In addition, if P2-30 is set to 5, the
modified parameters (either from panel or communication) will not be saved
and is inconvenient to use. Thus, this new function is added.
2. If writing parameters fails, alarm AL.213~219 will occur (Refer to Chapter 11 of
the manual) and the next PR which is enabled by AUTO function will not be
executed.

10) Special code: TYPE = 0xA, Indexing command

31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~4 3 ~ 0 BIT
DW0 - OPT2 DLY SPD DEC ACC OPT 0xA
DW1 DATA (32 bit): indexing coordinates command; Unit: PUU
OPT：
OPT selection
7 6 5 4 BIT
DIR
00: Always onward (Forward)
01: Always towards the back (Reverse)
10: Shortest distance (judge by current and target
position)
11: Reserved Shortest
Current 最短距離
Indexing distance
Always towards
coordinate the back position
分度座標值一律向後
OVLP INS
Always onward
一律向前
Current
position
Current
position
Rotary direction
INS: When this PR is executing, it interrupts the previous one.

OVLP: It is allowed to overlap the next PR. When overlapping, please set DLY to 0.
OPT2：
OPT2 Selection
27 26 25 24 BIT
- AUTO - S_LOW
AUTO: Position reached and the next PR is loaded automatically.
S_LOW: Selection of speed unit. 0 means the unit is 0.1r/min; while 1 means
0.01r/min
DATA (DW1) Data format:
DW1：DATA (32 bits)
PUU：0 ～ (P2-52 - 1)
P2-52: Size of indexing coordinate
11) Homing setting: P6-00 ~ P6-01, (64 BIT) one set of PR.
31 ~ 28 27 ~ 24 23 ~ 20 19 ~ 16 15 ~ 12 11 ~ 8 7~4 3 ~ 0 BIT
DW0 BOOT - DLY - DEC1 ACC PATH BOOT
DW1 ORG_DEF (32 bit)
PATH: 0 ~ 3F, (6 BIT)

00 (Stop): Homing completed and stops

01 ~ 3F (Auto): Homing completed and executes the specified PR: 1 ~ 63.
Note: PATH (procedure)
ACC: Acceleration time
DEC1/DEC2: The first / second deceleration time
DLY: Delay time
BOOT: Activation mode. When the POWER is ON:
0: will not do homing
1: start homing (Servo ON for the first time)
ORG_DEF: the coordinate value of the origin definition which might not be 0
A. After finding the origin (Sensor or Z), the motor has to decelerate to stop. The stop
position will slightly exceed the origin. After the positioning is completed, users can
determine and setup the motor position:
If not returning to the original point, set PATH to０.

If desire to return to the original point, set PATH to non-zero value and setup that
PR: absolute positioning command＝ORG_DEF.
CMD_O: Command Output Position
CMD_E: Command End Position
B. Homing does not define the offset value but uses PATH to specify a path as the offset
value.
After finding the origin, if the user desires to move a short distance of offset S (the related
home Sensor or Z) and set the coordinate to P after moving: (incremental positioning
command = S will do)

7.10.1 The Relation between the Previous Path and the Next Path
1) Interrupt (the previous path) and overlap (the next path) can be set in every path
INS OVLP INS OVLP

Path 1 Path 2
Note: Path (procedure)
2) The priority of interrupt command is higher than overlap

PATH 1 PATH 2 Relation Output Note
In PATH 1/2 which could be the
OVLP=0 INS=0 DLY 1
sequence combination of speed/position
PATH 2 is SPEED and does not
OVLP=1 INS=0 Overlap NO DLY
support overlap
OVLP=0 PATH 1/2 which could be the
INS=1 Interrupt N/A
OVLP=1 combination of speed/position
7.10.2 Programming the Path in PR Mode

1) Sequence command
Path 1: is AUTO and has set DLY
Path 2: does not set INS
(DLY starts to count after completing

the command)
Path 1: speed command and has

set DLY
Path 2: position command DLY 1
(DLY starts to count after completing

the command) Speed 1 Path 2
2) Overlap
Path 1: has set OVLP but cannot set

DLY
Path 2: does not set INS
Path 1
Path 2

3) Internal Interrupt
Path 1: AUTO and has set DLY
Path 2: has set INS
(DLY is effective to the internal

interrupt)
It can be used to pre-constitute
complicated Profile
4) External interrupt
Path 1: AUTO or SINGLE
Regardless the setting of DLY
Path 2: has set INS
(DLY is ineffective to the external

interrupt)
Profile can be changed from external
any time

7.11 The Description of E-Cam Function

E-Cam is a virtual cam which is implemented by software. It includes Master axis and Slave
axis. The illustration is as the following:
In PT mode, the position command (slave) is issued by the external pulse input (master).
The two is merely the linear scaling relation (its scaling equals to e-gear ratio). However,
instead of linear scaling, E-Cam is defined by cyclic curve profile, just like the cam shape. In
physical machine cam, slave axis can operate as variable speed motion, alternating motion,
intermittent motion, etc by master axis with the constant speed motion. It is very extensive
in application. Using E-Cam could have similar effect. The following table describes the
differences between E-Cam and Machine Cam.
Machine Cam E-Cam
Structure Return to the original position It might not return to the original
after rotating a cycle. position after rotating a cycle. The
structure could be in spiral shape like
mosquito coil incense.
Smooth It is determined by the fineness It is interpolated by cubic curve via
Performance of the real process. software
Position Very precise (when it has no The command is very precise, but the
Accuracy vibration) actual position might have deviation
due to the servo delay.
Long Distance The longer the slave axis is, Change the value of the table will do. It
Motion the bigger the cam will be. It is is easy to realize.
not easy to make.
The Necessity The master axis is necessary. The master axis is unnecessary when
of Master Axis it is applied to constant speed motion.
It will do by using the internal signal of
the servo drive.
Flexibility It is inconvenient to change It will do by re-setting the parameter.
and modify and it is expensive
as well.
Maintenance Machine will wear and the No need to maintain.

maintenance is necessary.
Others The master axis needs space Save the space and energy which
and it consumes energy as protects the environment.
well.
The main feature of E-Cam is as the followings:

Features of E-Cam
Operation Operate the E-cam in PR mode only.
Active the E-Cam 0: disable E-cam function and force to disengage (default).
Function 1: enable E-cam function and starts to judge the engaged condition.
P5-88.X
E-Cam Status Stop / Pre-engage / Engage
Source of Master  Auxiliary encoder (linear scale)
Axis
 Pulse command
 CAP axis (defined by CAP function)
 PR command
 Time axis
 Synchronous capture axis
Motion Command The overlap motion command issued by PR and E-Cam
of the Servo Drive
Command of the Servo Drive = E-Cam command ＋ PR
command
 The command will be issued only in Engaged status
 PR command is effective regardless to the E-Cam status.
Except when E-cam is engaging and the source of master axis
is PR command, PR command is 0.
When E-Cam is operating, its position still can be adjusted by PR
command (incremental command in general).
Data Storage  It is stored in Data array and the start address is set by P5-81.
Address of E-Cam
table
Data Size of  It is set by P5-82. 720 points is the maximum and 5 points is
E-Cam table the minimum.
Data Format of  32-bit signed value.
E-Cam table
Data Content of  Save the position of slave axis (User unit, PUU)
E-Cam table
The operation of  The master axis operates by incremental command input.
E-Cam position
 The slave axis issues position command incrementally.
 The start and the end of E-Cam curve profile could not always
be the same. It depends on the value of E-Cam table.
 The command is interpolated by cubic curve. The torque on
each point will be smoothly connected because of quadratic
differential operation.

Features of E-Cam
DO.CAM_AREA  Digital Output (DO): CAM_AREA. If this DO is ON, it means
(DO no.= 0x18) the E-Cam axis is in the setting area.
E-Cam provided by this servo drive and below is its functional diagram:
Master P5-84: Pulse number sent by master axis

Clutch Gear box P5-83: E-cam rotation cycle
axis
＃１
P5-88.Y P5-88.ZU engaged
setting method
E-cam axis
value P5-87 lead pulse
P5-89 Engaged Pulse command
distance Slave axis Slave axis
Position
Gear box
Data array (pulse) controller
Cam (PUU) ＃２
…..
POS 0 P5-81: Table address P1-44: gear ratio P5-88.X
POS 1 P5-82: Data amount N (numerator) setting
P5-85: Entering point P1-45: gear ratio value
~ P5-19: Table scale (denominator)
 Master Axis, the description is as follows:

Function The moving distance of the master axis is the source which
could drive the E-Cam
Source of Master Source selected by P5-88.Y:
Axis
 Auxiliary encoder (linear scale)
The Setting
Value of P5-88 Y  Pulse command
 PR command
 Time axis
 Synchronous capture axis
 CAP axis (defined by CAP function)
Position of The position of master axis can be monitored via P5-86. It also
Master Axis can be written before the E-cam engaged. To change this
P5-86 parameter will not influence the position of the slave. It is
because the moving distance of master axis remains.
 Clutch, the description is as follows:
Function It is used to determine the status of engaged / disengaged
between the master axis and gear box # 1.
The moving distance of the master axis can drive the E-Cam not
until the cam is engaged.
Activate 0: disable E-cam function (default value). If the cam is engaged,
E-cam
the cam will be forced to disengage.
function

P5-88.X 1: enable E-cam function and starts to judge the engaged

condition
E-Cam Status Status can be known via parameter P5-88.S: 0 – Stop; 1 –
Engage; 2 – Pre-engage
Status Description:
 Stop: It is the initial status of the cam. The E-cam will not
operate with the master pulse. When E-cam function is
disabled (P5-88.X=0), it returns to this status.
 Pre-engage: When the engaged condition (path 1) is
established, it enters this status. The E-cam still
will not operate with the master pulse.
 Engage: When it reaches pre-engaged status (path 3), it
enters this status. The E-cam starts to operate with
the master pulse.
Path Description:
 Path 1：When the engaged condition is established (P5-88.Z),
the status is Stop → Pre-engaged.

The lead pulse is determined by P5-87.
 Path 2：When the E-cam function is disabled (P5-88.X=0), it
returns to Stop status.
 Path 3：When it is in pre-engaged status, the status is
Pre-engaged → Engaged.
 Path 4：When the disengaged condition is established
(P5-88.U=4), the status is Engaged → Pre-engaged.
The lead pulse is determined by P5-92. (It is available
after firmware version V1.006sub04)
 Path 5：When the disengaged condition is established
(P5-88.U=1,2,6), or the E-cam function is disabled
(P5-88.X=0), the status is Engaged → Stop.
Engage When the E-cam is in Stop status, the method of determine

Condition
engaged (path 1) is as the following:

P5-88.Z 0: Engaged immediately. If P5-88.X is set to 1, the engaged

condition is established.
1: When DI.CAM is ON, E-cam is engaged.
2: From CAP to engaged: E-cam is engaged when CAP function
is enabled. After engaged, it starts to count the moving
distance. Since the CAP position is captured by hardware, it
has good instantaneity and no software delay, which is suitable
for the operating master axis before engaged.
Lead Pulse  In pre-engaged status, the lead pulse is the moving distance
Monitor
of master axis before the E-cam is engaged (path 3). Its
Variables
(061) value decreases when input the master pulse. When the
value is 0, it enters Engaged status.
 Enter Pre-engaged status via path 1, the lead pulse is
determined by the value of P5-87.
 Enter Pre-engaged status via path 4, the lead pulse is
determined by the value of P5-92.
 If the setting is 0, it means no lead pulse and will enter
Engaged status immediately.
Symbol ＋/－ represents the direction of lead pulse. Please note
that the E-cam will be unable to engage if setting the wrong

direction.
If setting the wrong direction, the value of monitor variable (061)
will increase, which is far from 0 and causes overflow at the end.
If it overflows, the E-cam function will be disabled (P5-88.X=0)
and the E-cam will be forced to return to Stop status.
Disengage When the E-cam is in Engaged status, the method of determine
Condition
disengaged is as the following:
P5-88.U
Note: 2, 4 and 6 cannot be selected at the same time
U Disengage Condition After Disengaged
0 Never disengaged. It will be forced to (Path 5)
disengage until P5-88.X is set to 0. Enter Stop Status
1 DI.CAM is OFF (Path 5)
Enter Stop Status
2 Master axis receives the pulse
number which is set by P5-89 and
stops immediately. (The symbol
represents the direction)
(Path 5)
6 Same as 2, the E-cam starts to
decelerate when disengaging. It is Enter Stop Status
suitable for the application of calling
the next PR position command right
after disengaged.
4 Master axis receives the pulse
(Path 4)
number which is set by P5-89 and

stops immediately. (The symbol Returns to

represents the direction)
Pre-engage Status
The lead pulse is
P5-92
8 Disable the E-cam after disengaging Set P5-88.X＝０
Auxiliary When the E-cam disengaged, if it is in the setting distance
Selection (P5-88.U=2), it returns to Stop status and can determine the
P5-88.BA execution PR number.
 Gear＃1, the description is as follows:

Function  Set the relativity of master axis and E-cam axis.
e.g. The master axis operates one cycle, the E-cam axis
is no need to operates one cycle.
Description  E-cam axis is a virtual axis.
 The E-cam axis operates one cycle (360 degrees) means
the cam operates one cycle and the slave axis operates
one cycle.
 The pulse number is the unit of moving distance of the
master axis. Its resolution is determined by the source.
Setting Method  If the pulse number of master axis is P, the E-cam axis
P5-83: M
operates M cycle.
P5-84: P
Then, the setting of gear ratio is P5-83＝M, P5-84＝P
 Cam, the description is as follows:

Function  Set the relation between E-cam axis and slave axis and
define it in the E-cam table.
E-cam axis operates one cycle and the slave axis operates
one cycle.
Data Storage  Data array, the start address is set by P5-81
Address of
E-Cam table
Data Format  32-bit (It has positive and negative, user unit: PUU)
E-Cam Curve  It is used to magnify (minify) the E-cam shape.
Scaling  It equals to the value of data multiplies P5-19.
P5-19
 Switch the symbol,＋／－ will change the operation direction
0 ~ +/- 32.700
of slave axis.
 If P5-19 is set to０, the E-cam command will not be
outputted. (The setting will be 0 for good).
Data Size  It is divided into N parts via P5-82 (> = 5) and does not
exceed the limit of data array. It means 360 degrees a cycle
of E-cam are divided into N areas. Each area is (360/N)
degrees.

Data Content  The position data of slave axis is saved in E-cam table. (User
unit: PUU).
 If E-cam is divided into N areas, the position of each area
must be included in the table. It must set N＋1 points in total.
It is because the position of the first point (0 degree) and the
final point (360 degree) might not be the same.
The data of 1.0° and 360° The data of 2.0° and 360°
is the same. is different.
 If:
1. The start and final position is the same, it means after
the E-cam operating a cycle, the slave axis returns to
the origin position.
The position of slave
E-cam operates a cycle

axis
The position of E-cam axis
2. The start and final position is different, it means after the

E-cam operating a cycle, the slave axis does not return
to the origin position.
of
E-cam operates a cycle

position
slave axis
The
The position of E-cam axis
Operation  The slave axis is a virtual axis and the unit of slave position is
Description
PUU.
 After the E-cam is engaged, the position of the master is the
entering point of P5-85. The position of the slave axis is in
the corresponding point to the P5-85 in E-cam table.
 After engaging, if the master does not operate, the slave axis
will not operate. If the master operates, the slave will travel
according to the E-cam table.

 For one cycle of the chart, the slave axis operates a cycle.
 E-cam axis can operate in forward / reverse direction.
 If the E-cam position is between two points of the E-cam
table, the position of the slave axis will be interpolated with
cubic curve function. The adjacent curve remains quadratic
differential at the point in order to smooth torque. The point
amount of the table will not influence the smoothing
operation of E-cam.
 Gear＃2, the description is as follows:

Function  Set the relation between slave axis and pulse command
 The slave axis operates a cycle, but the pulse command
might not operate a cycle.
Description  The slave axis is a virtual axis and the unit of slave
position is PUU.
 The pulse command is the encoder unit (pulse). The
resolution is 1280000 pulse/rev.
 For one cycle of the chart, the slave axis operates a cycle.
Setting Method  If the pulse number of slave axis is L, the motor axis
P1-44: numerator
operates R cycle.
P1-45:
denominator Then, the setting of gear ratio is P1-44/P1-45＝1280000 x
R/L
 The gear ratio of PT and PR is the same.
 Digital Output of E-cam, the description is as follows:
DO Name and  DO.CAM_AREA (DO no.= 0x18)
Number
Function  If DO.CAM_AREA is ON, it means the position of E-cam
axis is in the setting range.
When the E-cam  Set the angle range of DO ON by P5-90 and P5-91.
is engaging  Please refer to table 1 and 2 below
When the E-cam  DO.CAM_AREA is OFF.
is disengaging
Table 1 P5-90 <= P5-91:

E-Cam angle 0° ~ P5-90 ~ P5-91 ~ 360°
DO:CAM_AREA OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF
Table 2 P5-90 > P5-91:

E-Cam angle 0° ~ P5-91 ~ P5-90 ~ 360°
DO:CAM_AREA ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON ON

7.11.1 Function Description of CAPTURE (Data Capture)

The concept of CAPTURE is to capture the position of motion axis instantaneously by
using the external trigger signal DI7. Then save it in data array so as to be used for
motion control afterwards. Since CAPTURE is finished by hardware, there is no
problem of software delay. It also can accurately capture the high-speed motion axis.
The CAPTURE features provided by this servo drive is as follows.
CAPTURE Features
Pulse Source  Main encoder of the motor
 Auxiliary encoder (linear scale)
 Pulse command
The selected axis will be displayed in P5-37, the default value can
be written in before capture.
Note: When the source of COMPARE is CAP axis, the CAP
source cannot be changed.
Trigger signal  Triggered by DI7, the response time is 5 usec.
Note: DI7 directly connects to CAPTURE hardware. Thus,
regardless the setting value of P2-16 (DI Code), CAPTURE
can work. When using CAPTURE, in order to avoid DI error,
system will force to disable DI function, which means the
setting will be P2-16 = 0x0100 automatically. Since the
value is not written into EEPROM, P2-16 will return to the
default value after re-power on.
Trigger method  Edge trigger can select contact A/B
 It is capable to continuously capture more than one point.
 It can set the trigger interval.
(The interval between this trigger and the next one.)
Data storage  Data array. The start address is set by P5-36.
position
Capture number  It is set via P5-38 and will not exceed the limit of data array.
Capture format  32-bit (It has positive and negative.)
Auxiliary selection  After capturing the first data, the CAP axis coordinate system
will be set to the value the same as P5-76.
 After capturing the first data, the COMPARE function is
enabled automatically.
 After capturing all points, PR procedure＃50 is triggered
automatically.
DO.CAP_OK  The default value is OFF.
 After capturing the last point, this DO is ON.
 Set P5-39.X0 to 1 so as to activate CAPTURE function and
this DO is OFF.
Note  If P5-38=0, set the value of P5-39 X, Bit0 to 1 will disable the
CAPTURE function. Clear the setting value of P5-39 X, Bit0
to 0 and set DO.CAP_OK to OFF.
 Since the capture axis is 32-bit wide, the accumulation will
cause overflow. Please avoid this.

The CAP data is saved in data array and the first CAP data locates in P5-36. The CAP
number has no limit, thus it can be set via P5-38. The last CAP data is saved in P5-36
＋P5-38－1. Set the value of P5-39 X, Bit0 to 1 so as to activate CAP function. Every
time when DI7 is triggered, one data will be captured and saved in data array. Then, the
value of P5-38 will decrease one automatically until the CAP number reaches the
setting value (P5-38 = 0). The CAP procedure is completed, the setting value of P5-39
X, Bit0 will be cleared to 0 and DO.CAP_OK is ON.
When capturing the first data, the position of CAP axis can be reset. The first CAP value
will be the value set by P5-76. And the value of the second CAP data will be the
incremental value from the first data. This method is called Relative Capture. If not
selecting the first data reset, it is called Absolute Capture.
When capturing the first data, it automatically activates COMPARE function, which
means the COMPARE function is activated via DI5.
The diagram of CAP:
The 1st axis Data Array

Automatically activate COMPARE
position can …..
st
The 1 point is saved in P5-36.
be reset to POS 1
the value as The 2nd point is saved in P5-36+1. POS 2
P5-76 The 3rd point is saved in P5-36+2 POS 3
~
Position of POS N
CAP Axis
(P5-37)
CAP signal:
(DI7) 1 2 3 N The CAP number is
set via P5-38
DO.CAP_OK:
 CAP is completed and set P5-39.X0 to 0.

 PR procedure #50 can be triggered.
 P5-39.X0=1 to activate the next CAP and switch off DO.

7.11.2 Function Description of COMPARE (Data Compare)

The concept of COMPARE is to compare the instant position of motion axis with the
value which is saved in data array. Then output DO3 after the COMPARE condition is
established for motion control. Since COMPARE is finished by hardware, there is no
problem of software delay. It also can accurately compare the high-speed motion axis.
The COMPARE features provided by this servo drive is as follows.
COMPARE Features
Pulse Source  Main Encoder of the Motor
 Auxiliary Encoder (linear scale)
 Pulse Command
 CAP Axis (set by CAPTURE). When selecting this axis,
CAP source cannot be changed.
The selected axis is displayed in P5-57. Before compare, the
default value can be written in.
Output Signal  Output by DO4 and the response time is 5 usec.
Note: DO3 directly connects to COMPARE hardware, thus,
regardless the setting value of P2-20 (DO Code), the
function can work. When using COMPARE, in order to
avoid DO error, the system will force to disable DO
function, which means the setting will be P2-21 =
0x0100 automatically. Since the value is not written into
EEPROM, P2-21 will return to the default value after
re-power on.
Output Method  Pulse output can select contact A/B.
 It is capable to continuously output more than one point.
 It can set the pulse output time.
Data Storage Position  Data array. The start address is set by P5-56.
Compare Number  It is set via P5-58 and will not exceed the limit of data
array.
Compare Format  32-bit (It has positive and negative.)
Compare Condition  It will be triggered when the source of compare axis pass
through the compare value.
Auxiliary Selection  Cycle mode: When comparing to the last point, it
automatically returns to the first point and starts to
compare.
 When the last compare is completed, the CAPTURE
function is activated automatically.
Note  If P5-58 is set to 0, set the value of P5-59 X, Bit0 to1 will
be unable to compare. Set the value of P5-59 X, Bit0 to 0.
 Since the capture axis is 32-bit wide, the accumulation will
cause overflow. Please avoid this.

The value of COMPARE is saved in data array and the first compare data locates in
P5-56. The CMP number has no limit, thus it can be set via P5-58. The last CMP data is
saved in P5-56＋P5-58－1. Set the value of P5-59 X, Bit0 to 1 so as to activate CMP
function and start to compare the first data of data array. Every time when a position
saved in data array is compared, the compare DO will be outputted. Then, the value of
P5-58 will decrease one automatically and compare the next value until the CMP
number reaches the setting value (P5-58 = 0). When the CMP procedure is completed,
the setting value of P5-59 X, Bit0 will be cleared to 0.
When comparing to the last point, it can select if it returns to the first data for comparing.
This is called cycle mode. Or it can activate CAPTURE function and wait DI7for
triggering CAP/CMP procedure.
The diagram of COMPARE:
Data Array
…..
The 1st point is saved in P5-56.
POS 1
nd
The 2 point is saved in P5-56+1.
POS 2
The 3rd point is saved in P5-56+2.
POS 3
Position of ~
CMP axis: POS N
(P5-57)
CMP signal:
(DO4) 1 2 3 N
Set the compared number via P5-58
The output pulse can be set via P5-59.CBA
 Select to activate CAPTURE function

(If Capture has been activated, it is invalid.)
The output of the last pulse is completed, it will execute:
 Non-cycle mode: CMP is completed, set P5-59.X0 to 0.

st
 Cycle mode: Compare the 1 point again, the value of P5-59.X0 is 1.


Chapter 8 Parameters
8.1 Parameter Definition
Parameters are divided into nine groups which are shown as follows. The first character
after the start code P is the group character and the second character is the parameter
character.
As for the communication address, it is the combination of group number along with two
digit number in hexadecimal. The definition of parameter groups is as the followings:
Group 0: Monitor Parameters (e.g.: P0-xx)
Group 1: Basic Parameters (e.g.: P1-xx)
Group 2: Extension Parameters (e.g.: P2-xx)
Group 3: Communication Parameters (e.g.: P3-xx)
Group 4: Diagnosis Parameters (e.g.: P4-xx)
Group 5: Motion Setting Parameters (e.g.: P5-xx)
Group 6: PR Parameters (e.g.: P6-xx)
Group 7: PR Parameters (e.g.: P7-xx)
Group M: Motor Parameters (e.g.: PM-xx)
Control Mode Description:

PT is position control mode. (Input the position command via the terminal block)
PR is position control mode. (The internal register issues the position command)
S is speed control mode.
T is torque (force) control mode.
Special Symbol Description:

(★) Read-only register, can only read the status. For example: parameter P0-00, P0-10
and P4-00, etc.
(▲) Setting is unable when Servo On, e.g. parameter P1-00, P1-46 and P2-33, etc.
(●) Not effective until re-power on or off the servo drive, e.g. parameter P1-01 and
P3-00.
(■) Parameters of no data retained setting, e.g. parameter P2-31 and P3-06.

Chapter 8 ParametersASDA-A2R Series
8.2 List of Parameters

Monitor and General Output Parameter
Control Mode Related
Parameter Abbr. Function Default Unit
PT PR S T Section
Factory
P0-00★ VER Firmware Version Setting
N/A O O O O -
11.1
Alarm Code Display of Drive
P0-01■ ALE N/A N/A O O O O 11.2
(Seven-segment Display)
11.3
P0-02 STS Drive Status 00 N/A O O O O 7.2
P0-03 MON Analog Output Monitor 01 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
P0-08★ TSON Servo On Time 0 Hour -
P0-09★ CM1 Status Monitor Register 1 N/A N/A O O O O 4.3.5

Status Monitor Register 1
P0-17 CM1A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-18 CM2A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-19 CM3A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-20 CM4A 0 N/A -
Selection
P0-21 CM5A 0 N/A -
Selection
No need
P0-25 MAP1 Mapping Parameter # 1 to N/A O O O O 4.3.5
initialize
No need
initialize
No need
initialize
No need
initialize
No need
initialize

Monitor and General Output Parameter

PT PR S T Section
No need
initialize
No need
initialize
No need
initialize
Target Setting of Mapping
P0-35 MAP1A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-25
P0-36 MAP2A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-26
P0-37 MAP3A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-27
P0-38 MAP4A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-28
P0-39 MAP5A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-29
P0-40 MAP6A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-30
P0-41 MAP7A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-31
P0-42 MAP8A 0x0 N/A O O O O 4.3.5
Parameter P0-32
Servo Digital Output Status
P0-46★ SVSTS 0 N/A O O O O -
Display
MON1 Analog Monitor Output %(full
P1-04 MON1 100 O O O O 6.4.4
Proportion scale)
MON2 Analog Monitor Output %(full
P1-05 MON2 100 O O O O 6.4.4
Proportion scale)
Filter and Resonance Suppression Parameter

PT PR S T Section
Analog Speed Command
P1-06 SFLT 0 ms O 6.3.3
(Low-pass Filter)
Analog Torque (force)
P1-07 TFLT 0 ms O 6.4.3
Command (Low-pass Filter)
Smooth Constant of Position
10
P1-08 PFLT Command 0 O O 6.2.6
ms
(Low-pass Filter)

Low-frequency Vibration 0.1H

P1-25 VSF1 100.0 O O 6.2.9
Suppression (1) z
Low-frequency Vibration
P1-26 VSG1 0 N/A O O 6.2.9
Suppression Gain (1)
Low-frequency Vibration 0.1H
P1-27 VSF2 100.0 O O 6.2.9
Suppression (2) z
P1-28 VSG2 0 N/A O O 6.2.9
Suppression Gain (2)
Auto Low-frequency Vibration
P1-29 AVSM 0 N/A O O 6.2.9
Supression Setting
P1-30 VCL 500 pulse O O 6.2.9
Detection
Acceleration Constant of
P1-34 TACC 200 ms O O 6.3.3
S-Curve
Deceleration Constant of
P1-35 TDEC 200 ms O O 6.3.3
S-Curve
Acceleration / Deceleration
P1-36 TSL 0 ms O O 6.3.3
Constant of S-Curve
0.1m
P1-59 MFLT Analog Speed Command 0 O -
s
P1-62 FRCL Friction Compensation 0 % O O O O -
P1-63 FRCT Friction Compensation 0 ms O O O O -
Position Command Moving
P1-68 PFLT2 0 ms O O -
Filter
Low-pass Filter Time Constant
P1-75 FELP 100 ms O O -
of Full-closed Loop control
Resonance suppression
P2-23 NCF1 1000 Hz O O O O 6.3.7
(Notch filter) (1)
Resonance Suppression
P2-24 DPH1 (Notch filter) Attenuation Rate 0 dB O O O O 6.3.7
(1)
P2-43 NCF2 1000 Hz O O O O 6.3.7
(Notch filter) (2)
(2)
P2-45 NCF3 1000 Hz O O O O 6.3.7
(Notch filter) (3)
(3)
Auto Resonance Suppression
P2-47 ANCF 1 N/A O O O O -
Mode Setting
P2-48 ANCL 100 N/A O O O O -
Detection Level
Low-pass Filter of Resonance 0.1m
P2-25 NLP 2 or 5 O O O O 6.3.7
Suppression s
P2-33▲ INF Semi-auto Inertia Adjustment 0 N/A O O O O 6.3.6

P2-49 SJIT Speed Detection Filter 0 - O O O O -
Gain and Switch Parameter

PT PR S T Section
P2-00 KPP Position Loop Gain 35 rad/s O O 6.2.8
Switching Rate of Position
P2-01 PPR 100 % O O 6.2.8
Loop Gain
P2-02 PFG Position Feed Forward Gain 50 % O O 6.2.8
Smooth Constant of Position
P2-03 PFF 5 ms O O -
Feed Forward Gain
P2-04 KVP Speed Loop Gain 500 rad/s O O O O 6.3.6
Switching Rate of Speed Loop
P2-05 SPR 100 % O O O O -
Gain
P2-06 KVI Speed Integral Compensation 100 rad/s O O O O 6.3.6
P2-07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain 0 % O O O O 6.3.6
P2-26 DST Anti-interference Gain 0 0.001 O O O O -
Gain Switching and Switching
P2-27 GCC 0 N/A O O O O -
Selection
10
P2-28 GUT Gain Switching Time Constant 10 O O O O -
ms
pulse
Kpps
r/min
(rotary
P2-29 GPE Gain Switching 1280000 motor) O O O O -
10 3
m/s
(linear
motor)
Speed Loop Frequency 5.6
P2-31■ AUT1 Response Setting in Auto and 80 Hz O O O O
Semi-auto Mode 6.3.6
5.6
P2-32▲ AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection 0 N/A O O O O
6.3.6
Position Control Parameter

PT PR S T Section
pulse
Input Setting of Control Mode
P1-01● CTL 0 r/min O O O O 6.1
and Control Command
N-M


PT PR S T Section
Speed and Torque (force) Limit
P1-02▲ PSTL 0 N/A O O O O 6.6
Setting
P1-12 ~ Internal Torque (force) Limit 1 ~
TQ1 ~ 3 100 % O O O O 6.4.1
P1-14 3
Pulse Number of Encoder
P1-46▲ GR3 2500 pulse O O O O -
Output
r/min
(rotary
motor)
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Setting rated 10 3 O O O O -
m/s
(linear
motor)
Resolution of Linear Scale for Pulse
P1-72 FRES 5000 O O -
full-closed loop control /rev
Error Protection Range for
P1-73 FERR 30000 pulse O O -
Full-closed Loop Control
Full-closed Loop Control of
P1-74 FCON 000h - O O -
Linear Scale
P2-50 DCLR Pulse Clear Mode 0 N/A O O -
External Pulse Command (PT mode)
P1-00▲ PTT External Pulse Input Type 0x2 N/A O 6.2.1
P1-44▲ GR1 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N1) 1 pulse O O 6.2.5
P1-45▲ GR2 Gear Ratio (Denominator) (M) 1 pulse O O 6.2.5
P2-60▲ GR4 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N2) 1 pulse O O -
Register Control Command (PR mode)
P6-02 ~ PO1 ~ Internal Position Command 1 ~
0 N/A O 7.10
P7-27 PO63 63
0.1r/m
in
(rotary
P5-60 ~ POV1 ~ 20 ~ motor)
Target Speed Setting#0 ~ 15 O 7.10
P5-75 POV15 3000 10 6
m/s
(linear
motor)
Deceleration Time of Auto 0XF00F
P5-03 PDEC FFFF
N/A O O O O -
Protection
P5-04 HMOV Homing Mode 0 N/A O O -


PT PR S T Section
0.1r/m
in
(rotary
1st Speed Setting of High motor)
P5-05 HSPD1 100 O O O O -
Speed Homing 10 6
m/s
(linear
motor)
0.1r/m
in
(rotary
2nd Speed Setting of Low motor)
P5-06 HSPD2 20 O O O O -
Speed Homing 10 6
m/s
(linear
motor)
Trigger Position Command (PR
P5-07 PRCM 0 N/A O -
mode only)
P5-20 ~ AC0 ~ 200 ~
Acceleration/Deceleration
ms O 7.10
P5-35 AC15 Time 30
P5-40 ~ DLY0 ~Delay Time after Position 0 ~
ms O 7.10
P5-55 DLY15 Completed 5500
Position Command of Event
P5-98 EVON 0 N/A O -
Rising-edge Trigger
Position Command of Event
P5-99 EVOF 0 N/A O -
Falling-edge Trigger
PATH#1 ~ PATH#2 No Data
P5-15 PMEM 0x0 N/A O O O O -
Retained Setting
P5-16 AXEN Axis Position－Motor Encoder N/A N/A O O O O 7.3
Axis Position－Pulse
P5-17 AXPC N/A N/A O O O O 7.3
Command
Axis Position - Auxiliary
P5-18 AXAU N/A N/A O O O O 7.3
Encoder
P5-08 SWLP Forward Software Limit +231 PUU O -
P5-09 SWLN Reverse Software Limit -231 PUU O -

Speed Control Parameter

PT PR S T Section
pulse
and Control Command
N-M
Speed and Torque (force) Limit
P1-02▲ PSTL 0 N/A O O O O 6.6
Setting
Output Pulse Counts Per One
P1-46▲ GR3 1 pulse O O O O -
Motor Revolution
r/min
(rotary
motor)
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit rated 10 3 O O O O -
m/s
(linear
motor)
0.1r/m
in
(rotary
1000 motor)
P1-09 ~
SP1 ~ 3 Internal Speed Command 1 ~ 3 ~ O O 6.3.1
P1-11 10 6
3000 m/s
(linear
motor)
P1-12 ~ Internal Torque (force) Limit 1 ~
TQ1 ~ 3 100 % O O O O 6.6.2
P1-14 3
r/min
(rotary
motor)
Maximum Speed of Analog
P1-40▲ VCM
Speed Command
rated 10 3 O O 6.3.4
m/s
(linear
motor)
Maximum Output of Analog
P1-41▲ TCM 100 % O O O O -
Torque (force) Speed
r/min
(rotary
motor)
Maximum Rotation Setting of
P1-76 AMSPD
Encoder Setting (OA, OB)
5500 10 3 O O O O -
m/s
(linear
motor)

Torque (force) Control Parameter

PT PR S T Section
pulse
and Control Command
N-M
Speed and Torque (foce) Limit
P1-02▲ PSTL 0 N/A O O O O 6.6
Setting
Output Pulse Counts Per One
P1-46▲ GR3 1 pulse O O O O -
Motor Revolution
r/min
(rotary
motor)
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit rated 10 3 O O O O -
m/s
(linear
motor)
0.1r/m
in
(rotary
P1-09 100 motor)
~ SP1~3 Internal Speed Limit 1~3 ~ O O 6.6.1
10 6
P1-11 300 m/s
(linear
motor)
P1-12
Internal Torque (force)
~ TQ1~3 100 % O O O O 6.4.1
Command 1~3
P1-14
r/min
(rotary
motor)
Maximum Speed of Analog
P1-40▲ VCM
Speed Command
rated 10 3 O O -
m/s
(linear
motor)
Maximum Output of Analog
P1-41▲ TCM 100 % O O O O 6.4.4
Torque (force) Limit
Planning of Digital Input / Output Pin and Output Setting Parameter

PT PR S T Section
P2-09 DRT DI Debouncing Time 2 2ms O O O O -
Table
P2-10 DI1 DI1 Functional Planning 101 N/A O O O O
8.1
Table
8.1

Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
P2-36 EDI9 DI9 Functional Planning 0 N/A O O O O
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
8.1
Table
P2-18 DO1 DO1 Functional Planning 101 N/A O O O O
8.2
Table
8.2
Table
8.2
Table
8.2
Table
8.2
Planning of Digital Input / Output Pin and Output Setting Parameter

PT PR S T Section
0.1r/m
in
(rotary
motor) Table
P1-38 ZSPD Zero Speed Range Setting 100 O O O O
10 3 8.2
m/s
(linear
motor)

0.1r/m
in
(rotary
motor) Table
P1-39 SSPD Target Motor Detection Level 3000 3 O O O O
10 8.2
m/s
(linear
motor)
P1-42 MBT1 Enable Delay Time of Brake 0 ms O O O O 6.5.5
P1-43 MBT2 Disable Delay Time of Brake 0 ms O O O O 6.5.5
r/min
(rotary
motor)
Speed Reached (DO：SP_OK) Table
P1-47 SCPD 10 10 3 O
8.2
Range m/s
(linear
motor)
Table
P1-54 PER Position Completed Range 12800 pulse O O
8.2
Output Overload Warning Table
P1-56 OVW 120 % O O O O
Level 8.2
Communication Parameter
PT PR S T Section
P3-00● ADR Address Setting 0x01 N/A O O O O 9.2
P3-01 BRT Transmission Speed 0x3203 bps O O O O 9.2
P3-02 PTL Communication Protocol 6 N/A O O O O 9.2
P3-03 FLT Communication Error Disposal 0 N/A O O O O 9.2
P3-04 CWD Communication Timeout 0 sec O O O O 9.2
P3-05 CMM Communication Mechanism 0 N/A O O O O 9.2
Control Switch of Digital Input
P3-06■ SDI 0 N/A O O O O 9.2
(DI)
Communication Response
P3-07 CDT 0 1ms O O O O 9.2
Delay Time
P3-08 MNS Monitor Mode 0000 N/A O O O O 9.2
P3-09 SYC CANopen Synchronize Setting 0x57A1 N/A O O O O 9.2
Diagnosis Parameter
PT PR S T Section
P4-00★ ASH1 Fault Record (N) 0 N/A O O O O 4.4.1
P4-01★ ASH2 Fault Record (N-1) 0 N/A O O O O 4.4.1

Diagnosis Parameter
PT PR S T Section

r/min
(rotary
motor)
P4-05 JOG Servo Motor Jog Control 20 10 3 O O O O 4.4.2
m/s
(linear
motor)
Digital Output Register
P4-06▲■ FOT 0 N/A O O O O 4.4.4
(Readable and Writable)
4.4.5
P4-07 ITST Multi-function of Digital Input 0 N/A O O O O
9.2
Input Status of the Drive
P4-08★ PKEY N/A N/A O O O O -
Keypad
P4-09★ MOT Digital Output Status N/A N/A O O O O 4.4.6
P4-10▲ CEN Adjustment Selection 0 N/A O O O O -
Analog Speed Input Offset Factory
P4-11 SOF1 Setting
N/A O O O O -
Adjustment 1
Analog Speed Input Offset Factory
P4-12 SOF2 Setting
N/A O O O O -
Adjustment 2
Analog Torque (force) Input Factory
P4-13 TOF1 Setting
N/A O O O O -
Offset Adjustment 1
Analog Torque (force) Input Factory
P4-14 TOF2 Setting
N/A O O O O -
Offset Adjustment 2
Current Detector (V1 Phase) Factory
P4-15 COF1 Setting
N/A O O O O -
Offset Adjustment
Current Detector (V2 Phase) Factory
P4-16 COF2 Setting
N/A O O O O -
Offset Adjustment
Current Detector (W1 Phase) Factory
P4-17 COF3 Setting
N/A O O O O -
Offset Adjustment
Current Detector (W2 Phase) Factory
P4-18 COF4 Setting
N/A O O O O -
Offset Adjustment
IGBT NTC Adjustment Factory
P4-19 TIGB Setting
N/A O O O O -
Detection Level
Offset Adjustment Value of
P4-20 DOF1 0 mV O O O O 6.4.4
Analog Monitor Output (Ch1)
Offset Adjustment Value of
P4-21 DOF2 0 mV O O O O 6.4.4
Analog Monitor Output (Ch2)

Diagnosis Parameter
PT PR S T Section
P4-22 SAO Analog Speed Input OFFSET 0 mV O -
Analog Torque (force) Input
P4-23 TAO 0 mV O -
OFFSET
Motor Parameter
Applicable
Parameter Abbr. FUnction Default Unit Motor Related
section
SPM LM
PM-00 Motor Type 0 N/A O O -
Automatic Identification
PM-01 0 N/A O O -
of Motor Parameter
Confirmation of Motor
PM-02 0 N/A O O -
Parameter
PM-03 Encoder Type 0x0100 N/A O O -
Rotary motor:
Pulse/rev
(square wave digital
signal)
Periods/rev
(Sinusoid analog
siganl)
PM-04 Encoder Resolution 2500 Linear motor: O O -
5
10 m / period
(square wave digital
signal)
10 3 m / period
(Sinusoid analog
siganl)
The Interpolation of
PM-05 11 N/A O O -
UVW Phase Sequence
PM-06 0 N/A O O -
and Hall Sensor
Offset Angle of Hall
PM-07 0 0.1° O O -
Sensor
Hysteresis Width of
PM-08 Hall Sensor Moving 0 0.1° O O -
Back and Forth
Correction of Electrical
PM-09 Angle When Reached 0X11 N/A O O -
Z Axis

Motor Parameter
Applicable
section
SPM LM
PM-10 Offset Angle of Z Signal 0 0.1° O O -
Current of Magnetic
PM-11 Field Detection When 100 % O O -
Power On
Condition of Magnetic
PM-12 Field Detection When 0X44 N/A O O -
Power On
PM-13 Reserved 0 N/A O O -
Proportional Gain of
PM-15 0 0.001 O O -
Current Loop
Integral Gain of Current
PM-16 0 N/A O O -
Loop
PM-17 Reserved
PM-18 Reserved
Overload Gain
PM-19 100 % O O -
(Temperature Rises)
Overload Gain
PM-20 100 % O O -
(Temperature Falls)
Cogging 0X1A0
PM-21 N/A O O -
Compensation 0
Motor Temperature
PM-22 0 N/A O O -
Sensor
Reserved
PM-26 0 N/A O O -
(FOR BARCODE)
Reserved
PM-27 0 N/A O O -
(FOR BARCODE)
PM-28 PM Motor Poles 2 pole O -
PM Motor Rated
PM-29 30 0.01A O -
Current
The Max. Current of
PM-30 100 0.01A O -
PM Motor
PM-31 PM Motor Rated Speed 3000 RPM O -
The Max. Speed of PM
PM-32 5000 RPM O -
Motor

Motor Parameter
Applicable
section
SPM LM
PM Motor Torque 0.01
PM-33 0 O -
(force) Constant Nm / A
PM-34 PM Motor Inertia 0 107 kg.m2 O -
PM Motor Phase
PM-35 0 0.001ohm O -
Resistance
PM Motor Phase
PM-36 0 0.01 mH O -
Inductance
PM-37 Reserved
PM Motor Back EMF
PM-38 0 10 4 Volt/rpm O -
Constant
PM-39 Reserved 0 N/A O -
0.1mm
PM-45 Linear Motor Pole Pitch 0 O -
/360°
Linear Motor Rated
PM-46 30 0.01A O -
Current
Max. Current of Linear
PM-47 100 0.01A O -
Motor
Max. Speed of Linear
PM-48 5000 10 3 m/s O -
Motor
Force Constant of
PM-49 0 0.01N / A O -
Linear Motor
Linear Motor Phase
PM-50 0 0.001ohm O -
Resistance
Linear Motor Phase
PM-51 0 0.01mh O -
Inductance
PM-52 Reserved
Linear Motor Back
PM-53 0 10 1 Volt/(m/s) O -
EMF Constant

8.3 Parameter Description

P0-xx Monitor Parameters
Address: 0000H
P0-00★ VER Firmware Version
0001H
Operational Related Section: -
Panel / Software Communication
Interface：
Default： Factory Setting
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： This parameter shows the firmware version of the servo drive.
Alarm Code Display of Drive Address: 0002H

P0-01■ ALE
(Seven-segment Display) 0003H
Operational Related Section:
Panel / Software Communication 11.1, 11.2, 11.3
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000~0xFFFF: It only can be set to 0 to
clear the alarm (Same as DI.ARST).
Data Size： 16bit
Format： BCD
Settings： Hexadecimal format: displays the alarm code
Alarm of Servo Drive
001：Over current
002：Over voltage
003：Under voltage (In default setting, the alarm occurs only when
the voltage is not enough in Servo ON status; In Servo ON
status, when it applies to power R, S, T, the alarm still will not
be cleared. Please refer to P2-66.)
004：Motor combination error (The drive corresponds to the wrong
motor)
005：Regeneration error

006：Over load
007：Over speed
008：Abnormal pulse command
009：Excessive deviation of position command
010：Reserved
011：Encoder error (The servo drive cannot connect to the
encoder because of disconnection or abnormal wiring)
012：Adjustment error
013：Emergency stop
014：Reverse limit error
015：Forward limit error
016：IGBT overheat
017：Abnormal EEPROM
018：Abnormal signal output
019：Serial communication error
020：Serial communication time out
021：Reserved
022：Main circuit power lack phase
023：Early warning for overload
024：Encoder initial magnetic field error (The magnetic field of the
encoder U,V, W signal is in error)
025：The internal of the encoder is in error. (The internal memory
of the encoder and the internal counter are in error)
026：Unreliable internal data of the encoder
027：Encoder reset error
030：Motor crash error
031：Incorrect wiring of the motor power line U, V, W (Incorrect
wiring of the motor power line U, V, W, GND)
033：Connection of 26 pin on converter box is breakdown
040：Excessive deviation of full closed-loop position control
041：Communication of CN5 is breakdown
044：Warning of servo drive function overload
050：Auto detection of motor parameters is completed
051：Auto detection of motor parameters is in error.
052：Initial magnetic pole detection error

053：Motor parameter is not confirmed

054：Exceeding the range of motor parameter
055：Motor magnetic field is abnormal
057：Feedback pulse is lost
058：Excessive deviation of initial magnetic pole detection
position when power on
099：DSP firmware upgrade
Alarm of CANopen Communication

111：CANopen SDO receives buffer overflow
112：CANopen PDO receives buffer overflow
121：Index error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO
122：Sub-Index error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO
123：Data size error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO
124：Data range error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO
125：CANopen PDO mapping object is read-only and
write-protected.
126：CANopen PDO mapping object is not allowed in PDO
127：CANopen PDO mapping object is write-protected when
Servo ON
128：Error occurs when reading CANopen PDO mapping object
via EEPROM
129：Error occurs when writing CANopen PDO mapping object via
EEPROM
130：The accessing address of EEPROM is out of range when
using CANopen PDO mapping object
131：CRC of EEPROM calculation error occurs when using
CANopen PDO mapping object
132：Enter the incorrect password when using CANopen PDO
mapping object
Alarm of Motion Control

201：An error occurs when loading CANopen data
213 ~ 219：An error occurs when writing parameter via PR
procedure. Please refer to Chapter 11 of the manual for further
information.
235：PR command overflows
245：PR positioning is over time

249：The number of PR command exceeds the range

261：Index error occurs when accessing CANopen object
263：Sub-Index error occurs when accessing CANopen object
265：Data size error occurs when accessing CANopen object
267：Data range error occurs when accessing CANopen
269：CANopen object is read-only and write-protected
26b：CANopen object is not allowed in PDO
26d：CANopen object is write-protected when Servo ON
26F：Error occurs when reading CANopen object via EEPROM
271：Error occurs when writing CANopen object via EEPROM
273：The accessing address of EEPROM is out of range when
using CANopen object
275： CRC of EEPROM calculation error occurs when using
CANopen object
277：Enter the incorrect password when using CANopen object
283：Forward software limit
285：Reverse software limit
289：Feedback position counter overflows
291：Servo OFF error
301：CANopen fails to synchronize
302：The synchronized signal of CANopen is sent too fast
303：The synchronized signal of CANopen is sent too slow
304：CANopen IP command is failed
305：SYNC Period is in error
380：Position Deviation Alarm of DO.MC_OK. Please refer to
parameter P1-48.
Address: 0004H
P0-02 STS Drive Status
0005H
Panel / Software Communication 7.2
Interface：
Default： 00
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 00 ~ 127
Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
Settings： 00：Motor feedback pulse number (after the scaling of
electronic gear ratio) [PUU]
01：Input pulse number of pulse command (after the scaling of
electronic gear ratio) [PUU]
02：Deviation between control command pulse and feedback
pulse number[PUU]
03：The number of motor feedback pulse [Encoder unit,
1,280,000 Pulse/rev]
04：Distance to command terminal (Encoder unit) [Pulse]
05： Error pulse number (after the scaling of electronic gear ratio)
(Encoder unit) [Pulse]
06：The frequency of pulse command input [Kpps]
07：Motor speed
[Permanent magnet synchronous rotary motor: r/min;
Permanentmagnet synchronous linear motor: m/s]
08：Speed command input [Volt]
09：Speed command input
[Permanent magnet synchronous rotary motor: r/min;
Permanentmagnet synchronous linear motor: m/s]
10：Torque (force) command input [Volt]
11：Torque (force) command input [%]
12：Average torque [%]
13：Peak torque [%]
14：Main circuit voltage (BUS voltage) [Volt]
15：Load/motor inertia ratio [0.1times]
16：IGBT temperature
17：The frequency of resonance suppression
18：The distance from the current position to Z. The range of the
value is between -5000 and +5000;
The interval of the two Z-phase pulse command if 10000

Pulse.
19：Mapping Parameter #1：P0 - 25


23：Monitor Variable #1：P0 - 09
38：It display the battery voltage [0.1 Volt ]. For example, if it
displays 36, it means the battery voltage is 3.6 V.
Address: 0006H
P0-03 MON Analog Output Monitor
0007H
Panel / Software Communication 6.6.4
Interface：
Default： 00
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 00 ~ 0x77
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
MON1,
MON2
Description
Setting
Value
0 Motor speed (+/-8 Volts/Max. speed)
1 Motor torque (force) (+/-8 Volts/Max. torque (force))
2 Pulse command frequency (+8 Volts／4.5Mpps)
3 Speed command (+/-8 Volts/ Max. speed command)
Torque (force) command (+/-8 Volts/Max. torque
4
(force) command)
5 VBUS voltage (+/-8 Volts／450V)
6 Reserved
7 Reserved

NOTE Please refer to parameter P1-04, P1-05 for proportional

setting of analog output voltage.
For example: P0-03 = 01 (MON1 is the analog output of motor

speed; MON2 is the anlog output of motor torque (force))
(unit：Volts)
(unit: Volts)
Address: 0008H
P0-04■ Reserved
0009H
Address: 000AH
P0-05■ Reserved
000BH
Address: 000CH
P0-06■ Reserved
000DH
Address: 000EH
P0-07■ Reserved
000FH
Address: 0010H
P0-08★ TSON Power On Time
0011H
Operational Related Section：-
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：
Unit： Hour
Range： 0 ~ 65535
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： It shows the total startup time of the servo drive.
Address: 0012H
P0-09★ CM1 Status Monitor Register 1
0013H
Interface：
Default： -

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
The setting value which is set by P0-17 should be monitored via
Settings：
P0-09. (Please refer to Chapter 7.2.1, Description of Monitor
Variable for the setting value.)
For example, if P0-17 is set to 3, when accessing P0-09, it

obtains the total feedback pulse number of motor encoder. For
MODBUS communication, two 16bit data, 0012H and 0013H will
be read as a 32bit data; (0013H : 0012H) = (Hi-word：Low-word).
Set P0-02 to 23, the panel displays VAR-1 first, and then shows
the content of P0-09.
Address: 0014H
0015H
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Variable for the setting value.) Set P0-02 to 24, the panel displays
VAR-2 first, and then shows the content of P0-10.
Address: 0016H
0017H
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：

Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address: 0018H
0019H
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address: 001AH
001BH
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
Settings：
Variable for the setting value.)
Address: 001CH
P0-14 Reserved
001DH
Address: 001EH
P0-15 Reserved
001FH
Address: 0020H
P0-16 Reserved
0021H
Address: 0022H
P0-17 CM1A Status Monitor Register 1 Selection
0023H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 127
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Please refer to Chapter 7.2.1, Description of Monitor Variable for
the setting value.
For example:
If P0-17 is set to 07, then reading P0-09 means reading「Motor
speed (r/min)」.
Address: 0024H
0025H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 127
Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
the setting value.
Address:0026H
0027H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 127
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
the setting value.
Address: 0028H
0029H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 127
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
the setting value.
Address: 002AH
002BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
-
Mode：

Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 127
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
the setting value.
Address: 002CH
P0-22 Reserved
002DH
Address: 002EH
P0-23 Reserved
002FH
Address: 0030H
P0-24 Reserved
0031H
Address: 0032H
P0-25 MAP1 Mapping Parameter # 1
0033H
Interface：
Default： No need to initialize
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： determined by the corresponding
parameter of P0-35
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings： Users can rapidly continuously read and write parameters that are
not in the same group. The content of parameter that is specified
by P0-35 will be shown in P0-25.
Please refer to the description of P0-35 for parameter setting.
Address: 0034H
0035H
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -


parameter of P0-36
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The using method is the same as P0-25. The mapping target is
set by parameter P0-36.
Address: 0036H
0037H
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
parameter of P0-37
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0038H
0039H
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
parameter of P0-38
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 003AH
003BH
Interface：


Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
parameter of P0-39
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 003CH
003DH
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
parameter of P0-40
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 003EH
003FH
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
parameter of P0-41
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX

Address: 0040H
0041H
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
parameter of P0-42
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0042H
P0-33 Reserved
0043H
Address: 0044H
P0-34 Reserved
0045H
Target Setting of Mapping Parameter Address: 0046H

P0-35 MAP1A
P0-25 0047H
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： determined by the communication
address of the parameter group
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX

Settings： Select the data block to access the parameter corresponded by

register 1.
The mapping content is 32 bits wide and can map to two 16-bit
parameters or one 32-bit parameter.
P0-35:
Mapping parameter: P0-35; Mapping content: P0-25.

When PH≠PL, it means the content of P0-25 includes two 16-bit
parameters.
VH=*(PH), VL=*(PL)
Mapping parameter: P0-35; Mapping content: P0-25.

When PH=PL=P, it means the content of P0-25 includes one
32-bit parameter.
If P=060Ah (parameter P6-10), then V32 is P6-10.
The setting format of PH, PL is:
A: The hexadecimal of parameter indexing

B: The hexadecimal of parameter group
For example:
If the mapping target is P2-06, set P0-35 to 0206.
If the mapping target is P5-42, set P0-35 to 052A.
For example:
If users desire to read / write P1-44 (32bit) through P0-25, set
P0-35 to 0x012C012C via panel or communication. Then, when
reading / writing P0-25, it also reads / writes P1-44.
Moreover, users can also access the value of P2-02 and P2-04
through P0-25.
P2-02 Position feed forward gain (16bit)
P2-04 Speed control gin (16bit)
Users only need to set P0-35 to 0x02040202. Then, when reading
/ writing P0-25, it also reads / writes the value of P2-02 and
P2-04.

P0-36 MAP2A
P0-26 0049H


Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
Target Setting of Mapping Parameter Address: 004AH

P0-37 MAP3A
P0-27 004BH
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
Target Setting of Mapping Parameter Address: 004CH

P0-38 MAP4A
P0-28 004DH
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -


Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
Target Setting of Mapping Parameter Address: 004EH

P0-39 MAP5A
P0-29 004FH
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings：

P0-40 MAP6A
P0-30 0051H
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings：


P0-41 MAP7A
P0-31 0053H
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings：

P0-42 MAP8A
P0-32 0055H
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
Address: 0056H
P0-43 Reserved
0057H
Address: 0058H
P0-44★ PCMN Status Monitor Register (for PC software)
0059H
Interface：

Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Same as parameter P0-09
Status Monitor Register Selection Address: 005AH

P0-45■ PCMNA
(for PC software) 005BH
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0~127
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Same as parameter P0-17
Address: 005CH
P0-46★ SVSTS Servo Digital Output Status Display
005DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x00 ~ 0xFF
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX

Settings： Bit0: SRDY (Servo is ready)

Bit1: SON (Servo ON)
Bit2: ZSPD (Zero speed detection)
Bit3: TSPD (Target speed reached)
Bit4: TPOS (Target position reached)
Bit5: TQL (Torque limit)
Bit6: ALRM (Servo alarm)
Bit7: BRKR (Brake control output)
Bit8: HOME (Homing finished)
Bit9: OLW (Early warning for overload)
Bit10: WARN (When Servo warning,CW, CCW, EMGS, under
voltage, Communication error, etc, occurs, DO is ON)
Bit11: Reserved
Bit12: Reserved
Bit13: Reserved
Bit14: Reserved
Bit15: Reserved
P1-xx Basic Parameters

Address: 0100H
P1-00▲ PTT The Type of External Pulse Input
0101H
Interface：
Default： 0x2

Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x1132
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
 Pulse Type
0: AB phase pulse (4x)
1: Clockwise (CW) and Counterclockwise (CCW) pulse
2: Pulse + symbol
Other setting: reserved
 Filter Width
If the received frequency is much higher than the setting, it will be
regarded as the noise and filtered out.
Low-speed filter High-speed filter
Setting Setting
frequency frequency
Value Value
(Min. pulse width*note1) (Min. pulse width*note1)
0 0.83Mpps (600ns) 0 3.33Mpps (150ns)
1 208Kpps (2.4us) 1 0.83Mpps (600ns)
2 104Kpps (4.8us) 2 416Kpps (1.2us)
3 52Kpps (9.6us) 3 208Kpps (2.4us)
4 No filter function 4 No filter function

NOTE When the source of external pulse is from the high-speed differential signal
and the setting value is 0 (the high-speed filter frequency is 3.33Mpps at the
moment), then:
If the user uses 2~4 MHz input pulse, it is suggested to set the filter value to 4.
Please note that the applicable version is: DSP version 1.036 sub05 and
CPLD version above 10.
Note: When the signal is the high-speed pulse specification of 4 Mpps and the
settings value of the filter is 4, then pulse will not be filtered.

 Logic Type
High-speed and Low-speed pulse input
Logic Pulse Type Forward Reverse
A Pulse Phase Lead A Pulse Phase Lag
AB phase
Positive Logic
pulse
0
CW and
CCW pulse
High-speed pulse input

Sign = high Sign = low
Positive
Logic
Pulse +
0
Symbol
Low-speed pulse input

Sign = low Sign = high
Positive
Logic
Pulse +
0
Symbol
For digital circuit, it uses 0 and 1 represents two status, which is high voltage and low
voltage. In Positive Logic, 1 represents high voltage and 0 represents low voltage and
vice versa in Negative Logic.
For example:
Positive Logic Negative Logic

Pulse Max. Input Minimum time width

Specification Frequency T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6
High-speed Differential
4Mpps 62.5ns 125ns 250ns 200ns 125ns 125ns
pulse Signal
Differential
Low-speed 500Kpps 0.5μs 1μs 2μs 2μs 1μs 1μs
Signal
pulse
Open-collector 200Kpps 1.25μs 2.5μs 5μs 5μs 2.5μs 2.5μs
Max. Input Voltage

Pulse Specification Forward Current
Frequency Specification
High-speed Differential
4Mpps 5V < 25mA
pulse Signal
Differential
Low-speed 500Kpps 2.8V ~ 3.7V < 25mA
Signal
pulse
Open-collector 200Kpps 24V (Max.) < 25mA
 The Source of External Pulse:

0: Low-speed optical coupler (CN1 Pin: PULSE, SIGN)
1: High-speed differential (CN1 Pin: HPULSE, HSIGN)
Input Setting of Control Mode and Control Address：0102H

P1-01● CTL
Command 0103H
Panel / Software Communication Section 6.1
Interface：
Table 8.1
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： P (pulse); S (r/min, m/s); T (N-M)
Range： 00 ~ 0x110F
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：

 Control Mode Settings
PT PR S T Sz Tz
Mode
Single Mode
00 ▲
01 ▲
02 ▲
03 ▲
04 ▲
05 ▲
Dual Mode
06 ▲ ▲
07 ▲ ▲
08 ▲ ▲
09 ▲ ▲
0A
25B ▲ ▲
0B CANopen Mode
0C Reserved
0D
26B ▲ ▲
Multiple Mode
0E ▲ ▲ ▲
0F ▲ ▲ ▲
PT: Position Control Mode (The command source is external

pulse and analog voltage which can be selected via DI.
PTAS. Analog voltage can be used soon.)
PR: Position Control Mode (The command source is internal
signal which provides 64 positions and can be selected via
DI.POS0~POS5.It also provides various ways of Homing.)
S: Speed Control Mode (The command source is the external
analog voltage and register. It can be selected via DI. SPD0,
SPD1.)
T: Torque (force) Control Mode (The command source is the
external analog voltage and register. It can be selected via DI.
TCM0, TCM1.)
Sz: Zero Speed / Internal Speed Command
Tz: Zero Torque / Internal Torque Command
 Dual Mode: It can switch mode via the external Digital Input
(DI). For example, if it is set to the dual mode of PT/S
(Control mode setting: 06), the mode can be switched via DI.
S-P (Please refer to table 7.1).
 Multiple Mode: It can switch mode via the external Digital
Input (DI). For example, if it is set to multiple mode of
PT/PR/S (Control Mode Setting: 12), the mode can be
switched via DI. S-P, PT-PR (Please refer to table 7.1).

 Torque (force) Output Direction Settings

(Delta’s 20bit rotary motor)
0 1
Forward
Reverse
※If you do not use Delta’s 20bit rotary motor, the forward /
reverse direction might be different because of the different wiring

of UVW.
 Digital Input / Digital Output (DIO) Setting
0: When switching mode, DIO (P2-10 ~ P2-22) remains the
original setting value and will not be changed.
1: When switching mode, DIO (P2-10 ~ P2-22) can be reset
to the default value of each operational mode
automatically.
Address: 0104H
P1-02▲ PSTL Speed and Torque (Force) Limit Setting
0105H
Panel / Software Communication Section 6.6
Interface：
Table 8.1
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 00 ~ 0x11
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：

 Disable / enable speed limit function

0: Disable speed limit function
1: Enable speed limit function (it is effective in T mode only)
Other: Reserved
Block diagram of speed limit setting:
(0)
Vref
Speed Limit
P1-09(1) Command
P1-10(2)
P1-11(3)
SPD0
SPD1
 Disable / enable torque (force) limit function
0: Disable torque (force) limit function
1: Enable torque (force) limit function (it is effective in P/S
mode)
Other: Reserved
Block diagram of torque limit setting:
(0)
Tref
Torque Limit
P1-12(1) Command
P1-13(2)
P1-14(3)
TCM0
TCM1
When desiring to use torque limit function, users could use

parameter to set this value to 1 and limit the torque for good.
Thus, the user can save one DI setting. Also, users could
enable or disable the limit function via DI.TRQLM, which is a
more flexible way but would need to take one DI setting.
Torque limit can be enabled by P1-02 or DI.
DI.TCM0 and DI.TCM1 are for selecting the limiting source.
Address: 0106H
P1-03 AOUT Polarity Setting of Encoder Pulse Output
0107H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x13
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX

Settings：
Polarity of monitor analog output
Polarity of encoder pulse output
Not in use
 Polarity of monitor analog output
0: MON1(+), MON2(+)
1: MON1(+), MON2(-)
2: MON1(-), MON2(+)
3: MON1(-), MON2(-)
 Polarity of encoder pulse output
0: Forward output
1: Reverse output
Address: 0108H
0109H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： % (full scale)
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Please refer to parameter P0-03 for the setting of analog output
selection.
For example:
P0-03 = 0x00 (MON1 is the speed analog output)
When the output voltage value of MON1 is V1:
Motor speed = (Max. speed × V1/8) × P1-04/100
Address: 0108H
0109H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： % (full scale)

Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Please refer to parameter P0-03 for the setting of analog output
selection.
For example:
P0-03 = 0x00 (MON2 is the speed analog output)
When the output voltage value of MON2 is V2:
Motor speed = (Max. ×V2/8) × P1-05/100
Address: 010CH
P1-06 SFLT Analog Speed Command (Low-pass Filter)
010DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000 (0: disable this function)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： 0: Disabled
Analog Torque (Force) Command Address: 010EH

P1-07 TFLT
(Low-pass Filter) 010FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
T
Mode：
Unit： ms
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

Smooth Constant of Position Command Address: 0110H

P1-08 PFLT
(Low-pass Filter) 0111H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： 10 ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Example： 11 = 110 ms
Internal Speed Command 1／Internal Address: 0112H

P1-09 SP1
Speed Limit 1 0113H
Interface：
Default： 1000
Control
S／T
Mode：
Permanent magnet synchronous rotary
Unit：
motor: 0.1rpm
Permanent magnet synchronous linear
motor: 10 6 m/s
Range： Permanent magnet synchronous rotary
motor: -60000 ~ +60000
motor: -15999999 ~ 15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Example： Internal speed command:
motor: 120 = 12 r/min
motor: 1200000=1.2m/s
Internal Speed Limit: Positive value and
negative value is the same. Please refer
to the following description.

Settings： Internal Speed Command 1: The setting of the first internal speed
command
Internal Speed Limit 1: The setting of the first internal speed limit
Example of inputting internal speed limit:
Permanent magnet synchronous rotary motor:
Speed limit Allowable Forward Reverse
setting Speed Speed Limit Speed Limit
value of Range
P1-09
1000 -100 ~ 100
100 r/min -100 r/min
-1000 r/min
Permanent magnet synchronous linear motor:

value of Range
P1-09
100000 -0.1 ~ 0.1
0.1 m/s -0.1 m/s
-100000 m/s

P1-10 SP2
Speed Limit 2 0115H
Interface：
Default： 2000
Control
S／T
Mode：
Unit：
motor: 0.1rpm
motor: 10 6 m/s
motor: -60000 ~ +60000
motor: -15999999~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Example： Internal speed command:

motor: 1200000=1.2m/s
Internal Speed limit: Positive value and
Settings： Internal Speed Command 2：The setting of the second internal
speed command
Internal Speed Limit 2: The setting of the second internal speed
limit
value of Range
P1-10
1000 -100 ~ 100
-1000 r/min

value of Range
P1-10
100000 -0.1 ~ 0.1
0.1 m/s -0.1 m/s
-100000 m/s

P1-11 SP3
Speed Limit 3 0117H
Interface：
Default： 3000
Control
S／T
Mode：
Unit：
motor: 0.1rpm
motor: 10 6 m/s
motor: -60000 ~ +60000
motor: -15999999~15999999

Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
Example： Internal Speed Command:
motor: 1200000=1.2m/s
Internal Speed limit: Positive value and
Settings： Internal Speed Command 3: The setting of the third internal
speed command
Internal Speed Limit 3: The setting of the third internal speed limit
setting of Speed Speed Limit Speed Limit
P1-11 Range
1000 -100 ~ 100
-1000 r/min

setting of Speed Speed Limit Speed Limit
P1-11 Range
100000 -0.1 ~ 0.1
0.1 m/s -0.1 m/s
-100000 m/s
Internal Torque (Force)Command 1／ Address: 0118H

P1-12 TQ1
Internal Torque (Force) Limit 1 0119H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
T／P, S
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： -300 ~ +300
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

Example： Internal Torque (Force) Command: 30 =

30 %
Internal Torque (Force) Limit: Positive
value and negative value is the same.
Please refer to the following description.
Settings： Internal Torque (Force) Command 1: The setting of the first
internal torque (force)command
Internal Torque (Force) Limit 1: The setting of the first internal
torque (force) limit
Example of inputting internal torque (force) limit:
Torque Allowable Forward Reverse

(force) limit Torque Torque (force) Torque (force)
setting (force) Limit Limit
value of Range
P1-12
30
-30 ~ 30 % 30 % -30 %
-30
Internal Torque (Force) Command 2／ Address: 011AH

P1-13 TQ2
Internal Torque (Force) Limit 2 011BH
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
T／P, S
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： -300 ~ +300
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
30 %
Settings： Internal Torque (Force) Command 2: The setting of the second
internal torque (force) command
Internal Torque (Force) Limit 2: The setting of the second internal

Example of inputting internal torque (force) limit:
Torque limit Allowable Forward Reverse

setting Torque Torque (force) Torque (force)
value of (force) Limit Limit
P1-13 Range
30
-30 ~ 30 % 30 % -30 %
-30
Internal Torque (Force) Command 3／ Address: 011CH

P1-14 TQ3
Internal Torque (Force) Limit 3 011DH
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
T／P, S
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： -300 ~ +300
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
30 %
Settings： Internal Torque (Force) Command 3: The setting of the third
internal torque (force) command
Internal Torque (Force) Limit 3: The setting of the third internal
Example of inputting internal torque limit:
Torque Allowable Forward Reverse

(force) limit Torque Torque (force) Torque (force)
setting (force) Limit Limit
value of Range
P1-14
30
-30 ~ 30 % 30 % -30 %
-30

Capture Synchronous Axis – Threshold of Address: 011EH

P1-15 CXFT
Correction 011FH
Interface：
Default： 0000h
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0000h ~ 0x1F5F
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
YX: Threshold of correction (%)

Z: Filter intensity
U: Filter is functioning (read-only)
YX: When synchrounous axis captures the signal, the system will
calculate the error. This function is enabled only when the
error is less than the the setting range. Otherwise, the system
will use the new threshold of correction to perform the
operation.
YX 00 01~05F
Function Diabled It will be enabled when error is between 1%
and YX%.

Z 0 1~F
Function Disabled Average of 2^Z: Enabled
Z: The setting of filter intensity (Bigger value brings less severe

change and better filter effect)
U: Vaue Definition (read-only):

0: Filter function is disabled. It means the error is greater than Y
& X Range.
1: Filter function is enabled. It means the error is within Y & X
range.
If value Z or YX is 0, filter function is disabled.
Capture Synchronous Axis – Offset Address: 0120H

P1-16 CSOF
Compensation 0121H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse unit of Capture Axis
Range： -32768 ~ +32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
When capture synchronous axis is enabled, if desire to change
Settings：
the synchronous error (P5-79), setting this parameter will do.
Write P1-16: P5-79 ＝ P5-79 + writing value

Read P1-16: Read value ＝ P5-79
NOTE 1）The setting value of this parameter is the accumulative value,

which will not be influenced by current error value.
2）The value of P5-79 can be monitored by monitoring variable
0x54.

Compensation of Following Error－ Address: 0122H

P1-17 TEET
Additional Time Setting 0123H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Ms; the smallest unit is usec
Range： -20.000 ~ +20.000 (three decimal point)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Example： 1.5 = Motor speed x 1.5 ms (PUU)
Settings：
When this function is enabled (P1-36 = 1), the system will make
the position error (PUU) close to 0 according to the compensation
amount of command. If the time delay is caused by other reasons,
users could setup the additional compensation time to
compensate the position error.
Additional compensation distance ＝ P1-17 x Motor speed
NOTE 1) Value of P1-36 has to set to 1.
Address: 0124H
P1-18 Reserved
0125H
Address: 0126H
P1-19 Reserved
0127H
Address: 0128H
P1-20 Reserved
0129H
Address: 012AH
P1-21 Reserved
012BH
Address: 012CH
P1-22 Reserved
012DH
COMPARE－Offset Data of CMP Address: 012EH

P1-23 CMOF
(non-volatile) 012FH
Operational Related Section：
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：

Unit： Pulse unit of compare source

Range： -10000000 ~ +10000000
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
The real compared data is offset by this value.
Settings：
CMP_DATA = DATA_ARRAY[*] + P1-23 + P1-24
NOTE 1）P1-23: Non-volatile parameter

2）P1-24: After setting, if P1-19.Z0 = 1, the value will be 0
automatically.
3）CMP_DATA can be monitored via monitoring variable 0x25.
COMPARE－Offset Data of CMP (can Address: 0130H

P1-24■ CMOF
reset to 0 automatically) 0131H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse unit of compare source
Range： -32768 ~ +32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
The real compared data is offset by this value.
CMP_DATA = DATA_ARRAY[*] + P1-23 + P1-24
NOTE 1）P1-24: volatile parameter.

2）After setting, if P1-19.Z0 = 1, the value will be 0 automatically.
Address: 0132H
0133H
Interface：
Default： 1000
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： 0.1 Hz

Range： 10 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Example： 150= 15 Hz
Settings： The setting value of the first low-frequency vibration suppression.
If P1-26 is set to 0, then it will disable the first low-frequency filter.
Low-frequency Vibration Suppression Address: 0134H
P1-26 VSG1
Gain (1) 0135H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 9 (0: Disable the first low-frequency
filter)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The first low-frequency vibration suppression gain. The bigger
value it is, the better the position response will be. However, if the
value is set too big, the motor will not be able to smoothly operate.
It is suggested to set the value to 1.
Address: 0136H
0137H
Interface：
Default： 1000
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： 0.1 Hz
Range： 10 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Example： 150 = 15 Hz
Settings： The setting value of the second low-frequency vibration
suppression. If P1-28 is set to 0, then it will disable the second
low-frequency filter.

Low-frequency Vibration Suppression Address: 0138H

P1-28 VSG2
Gain (2) 0139H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 9 (0: Disable the second
low-frequency filter)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The second low-frequency vibration suppression gain. The
bigger value it is, the better the position response will be.
However, if the value is set too big, the motor will not be able to
smoothly operate. It is suggested to set the value to 1.
Auto Low-frequency Vibration Supression Address: 013AH

P1-29 AVSM
Setting 013BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 1
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： 0: The function is disabled.
1: The value will set back to 0 after vibration suppression.
Description of Auto Mode Setting:
When the parameter is set to 1, it is in auto suppression. When
the vibration frequency is not being detected or the value of
searched frequency is stable, the parameter will set to 0 and save
the low-frequency vibration suppression to P1-25 automatically.
Address: 013CH
P1-30 VCL Low-frequency Vibration Detection
013DH
Interface：
Default： 500

Control
PT / PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 1 ~ 8000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When enabling the auto suppression (P1-29 = 1), it will
automatically search the detection level. The lower the value is,
the more sensitive the detection will be. However, it is easy to
misjudge the noise or regard the other low-frequency vibration as
the suppression frequency. If the value is bigger, it will make more
precise judgment. However, if the vibration of the mechanism is
smaller, it might not detect the frequency of low-frequency
vibration.
Address: 013EH
P1-31 Reserved
013FH
Address: 0140H
P1-32 LSTP Motor Stop Mode
0141H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x20
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX

Settings：
Not in use
Selection of executing dynamic brake
Not in use
 Selection of executing dynamic brake: Stop Mode when
Servo Off or Alarm (including EMGS) occurs.
0: Execute dynamic brake
1: Motor free run
2: Execute dynamic brake first, then execute free run until it
stops (The motor speed is slower than P1-38).
When PL and NL occur, please refer to event time setting value of
P5-03 for determining the deceleration time. If the setting is 1 ms,
it can stop instantaneously.
Address: 0142H
P1-33 Reserved
0143H
Address: 0144H
0145H
Interface：
Default： 200
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Acceleration Constant of Rotary Motor:
The time that speed command accelerates from 0 to the rated
speed.
Acceleration Constant of Linear Motor
The time that speed command accelerates from 0 to 5m/s.
P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36, the acceleration time of speed
command from zero to the rated speed, all can be set individually.
Even when P1-36 is set to 0, it still has acceleration / deceleration
of trapezoid-curve.

NOTE 1）When the source of speed command is analog, and P1-36 is

set to 0, it will disable S-curve function.
2）When the source of speed command is analog, the max. range
of P1-34 will be set within 20000 automatically.
Address: 0146H
0147H
Interface：
Default： 200
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Deceleration Constant of Rotary Motor:
The time that speed command decelerates from the rated speed
to 0.
Deceleration Constant of Linear Motor:
The time that speed command decelerates from 5m/s to 0.
P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36, the deceleration time of speed
command from the rated speed to zero, all can be set individually.
Even when P1-36 is set to 0, it still has acceleration / deceleration
of trapezoid-curve.
Acceleration / Deceleration Constant of Address: 0148H

P1-36 TSL
S-Curve 0149H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
S, PR
Mode：
Unit： ms

Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
Settings： Acceleration / Deceleration Constant of S-Curve:
P1-34: Set the acceleration time of acceleration / deceleration of

trapezoid-curve
P1-35: Set the deceleration time of acceleration / deceleration of
trapezoid-curve
P1-36: Set the smoothing time of S-curve acceleration and
deceleration
P1-34, P1-35 and P1-36 can be set individually. Even when
P1-36 is set to 0, it still has acceleration / deceleration of
trapezoid-curve.
Version after V1.036 sub00 provides the compensation function
of following error.
P1-36 = 0 P1-36 = 1 P1-36 > 1
Smoothing function
Disable Disable Enable
of S-curve
Compensation
Determine by
function of Disable Enable
P2-68.X
following error
Inertia Ratio and Load Weight Ratio to Address: 014AH

P1-37 GDR
Servo Motor 014BH
Interface：
Default： 1.0 10
Control
ALL
Mode：

Unit： Permanent magnet Permanent magnet

synchronous rotary synchronous rotary
motor: 1times motor: 0.1times
synchronous linear synchronous linear
motor: 1kg motor: 0.1kg
Range： 0.0 ~ 1638.3 0 ~ 16383
Data Size： 16bit
Format： One decimal DEC
Example： Permanent magnet Permanent magnet
motor: 1.5 = 1.5 motor: 15 = 1.5
times times
motor: 1.5 = 1.5kg motor: 15 = 1.5kg
Settings： Inertia ratio to servo motor (rotary motor):
(J_load／J_motor)
Among them:
J_motor: Rotor inertia of the servo motor
J_load : Total equivalent of inertia of external mechanical load.
Total weight of movable section and load (linear motor):
(M_load+M_motor)
Among them:
M_motor: the weight of motor’s movable section
M_load: Total equivalent weight of mechanical loading
Address: 014CH
P1-38 ZSPD Zero Speed Range Setting
014DH
Panel / Software Communication Table 8.2
Interface：
Default： 10.0 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit：
motor: 1rpm motor: 0.1rpm
motor: 10 3 m/s motor: 10 3 m/s
Range： 0.0 ~ 200.0 0 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16bit

Example： Permanent magnet

synchronous rotary Permanent magnet
motor: 1.5 = 1.5 synchronous rotary
r/min motor: 15 = 1.5 r/min
motor: 1.5 = motor:15 = 0.015m/s
0.015m/s
Settings： Setting the output range of zero-speed signal (ZSPD). When the
forward / reverse speed of the motor is slower than the setting
value, the digital output will be enabled.
Address: 014EH
P1-39 SSPD Target Motor Detection Level
014FH
Interface：
Default： 3000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit：
motor: rpm
motor: 10 3 m/s
motor: 0 ~ 5000
motor: 0 ~ 15999
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When the target speed is reached, DO (TSPD) is enabled. It
means when the motor speed in forward / reverse direction is
higher than the setting value, the target speed is reached and
enables DO.
Maximum Speed of Analog Speed Address: 0150H

P1-40▲ VCM
Command 0151H
Interface：
Default： Same as the rated speed of each model
Control
S／T
Mode：
Unit：
motor: rpm
motor: 10 3 m/s


motor: 0 ~ 5000
motor: 0 ~ 15999
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Maximum Speed of Analog Speed Command:
In speed mode, the analog speed command inputs the swing
speed setting of the max. voltage (10V).
For example, if the setting is 3000, when the external voltage
input is 10V, it means the speed control command is 3000r/min. If
the external voltage input is 5V, then the speed control command
is 1500r/min.
If the setting is 3000, when the external voltage input is 10V, it
means the speed control command is 3m/s. If the external voltage
input is 5V, then the speed control command is 1.5m/s.
Speed control command = input voltage value x setting value／10
In position or torque (force) mode, analog speed limit inputs the
swing speed limit setting of the max. voltage (10V).
Speed limit command = input voltage value x setting value／10
Maximum Output of Analog Torque Address: 0152H

P1-41▲ TCM
(Force) Speed 0153H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

Settings： Maximum Output of Analog Torque (force) Speed:

In torque (force) mode, the analog torque (force) command inputs
the torque (force) setting of the max. voltage (10V). When the
default setting is 100, if the external voltage inputs 10V, it means
the torque (force) control command is 100% rated torque (force).
If the external voltage inputs 5V, then the torque (force) control
command is 50% rated torque (force).
Torque (force) control command = input voltage value x setting
value／10 (%)
In speed, PT and PR mode, the analog torque (force) limit inputs
the torque (force) limit setting of the max. voltage (10V).
Torque (force) limit command = input voltage value x setting value
／10 (%)
Address: 0154H
P1-42 MBT1 Enable Delay Time of Brake
0155H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Set the delay time from servo ON to activate the signal of
mechanical brake (BRKR).
Address: 0156H
P1-43 MBT2 Disable Delay Time of Brake
0157H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： -1000 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

Settings： Set the delay time from servo OFF to switch off the signal of brake
(BRKR).
NOTE 1）If the delay time of P1-43 has not finished yet and the motor
speed is slower than P1-38, the signal of brake (BRKR) will be
disabled.
2）If the delay time of P1-43 is up and the motor speed is higher
than P1-38, the signal of brake (BRKR) will be disabled.
3） When Servo OFF due to Alarm (except AL022) or emergency,
the setting of P1-43 is equivalent to 0 if P1-43 is set to a
negative value.
Address: 0158H
P1-44▲ GR1 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N1)
0159H
Interface：
Default： 1
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
29
Range： 1 ~ (2 -1)
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Please refer to P2-60~P2-62 for the setting of multiple gear ratio
(numerator).
NOTE 1. In PT
mode, the setting value can be changed when Servo ON.
2. In PR
mode, the setting value can be changed when Servo OFF.
Address: 015AH
P1-45 GR2 Gear Ratio (Denominator) (M)
015BH
Interface：
Default： 1
Control
PT／PR
Mode：

Unit： Pulse
31
Range： 1 ~ (2 -1)
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： If the setting is wrong, the servo motor will easily have sudden
unintended acceleration.
Please follow the rules for setting:
The setting of pulse input:
Pulse Position
input N command N
f2 = f1 x
f1 M f2 M
Range of command pulse input: 1／50＜Nx／M＜25600
NOTE 1） The
setting value cannot be changed when Servo ON neither in
PT nor in PR mode.
Address: 015CH
P1-46▲ GR3 Pulse Number of Encoder Output
015DH
Interface：
Default： 2500
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 20 ~ 536870912
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Permanent magnet synchronous rotary motor:
The number of single-phase pulse output per revolution.
The number of single-phase puse output per meter.
NOTE The following circumstances might exceed the max. allowable
input pulse frequency and occurs AL018:
1. Abnormal encoder
2. The motor speed is faster than the setting of P1-76.
Motor Speed
3.  P1  46  4  19.8  10 6
60

Address: 015EH
P1-47 SPOK Speed Reached (DO：SP_OK) Range
015FH
Interface：
Default： 10
Control
S / Sz
Mode：
Unit：
motor: rpm
motor: 10 3 m/s
Range： 0 ~ 300
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When the deviation between speed command and motor
feedback speed is smaller than this parameter, then the digital
output DO.SP_OK（DO code is 0x19）is ON.
Block diagram:
1. Speed command: It is the command issued by the user (without

acceleration / deceleration), not the one of front end speed circuit.
Source: Analog voltage and register
2. Feedback speed: The actual speed of the motor and have gone through
the filter.
3. Obtain the absolute value.
4. DO.SP_OK will be ON when the absolute value of speed error is smaller
than P1-47, or it will be OFF. If P1-47 is 0, DO.SP_OK is always OFF.

Operation Selection of Motion Reached Address: 0160H

P1-48 MCOK
(DO：MC_OK) 0161H
Interface：
Default： 0x0000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0011
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： Control selection of digital output DO.MC_OK (DO code is 0x17).
(It will be available after firmware version V1.003 sub08)
The format of this parameter: 00YX
X＝0: It will not remain the digital output status
1: It will remain the digital output status
Y＝0: Alarm, AL380 (position deviation) is not working
1: Alarm, AL380 (position deviation) is working
Block diagram:

Description:
1. Command triggered: It means the new PR command is effective.
Psition command starts to output and clear signal
2, 4, 5, 6 at the same time.
2. CMD_OK: It means the position command is completely outputted and
can set the delay time (DLY).
3. Command output: Output the profile of position command according to
the setting acceleration / deceleration.
4. TPOS: It means the position error of the servo drive is smaller than the
value of P1-54.
5. MC_OK: It means the position command is completely outputted and the
position error of the servo drive is smaller than P1-54.
6. MC_OK (remains the digital output status): It is the same as 5.
However, once this DO
is ON, its status will be
remained regardless
signal 4 is OFF or not.
7. The output profile is determined by parameter P1-48.X.
8. Position Deviation: When number 7 happens, if 4 (or 5) is OFF, it means
the position is deviated and AL380 can be triggered.
Set this alarm via parameter P1-48.Y.
Address: 0162H
P1-49 Reserved
0163H
Address: 0164H
P1-50 Reserved
0165H
Address: 0166H
P1-51 Reserved
0167H
Address: 0168H
P1-52 RES1 Regenerative Resistor Value
0169H
Interface：
Default： Determined by the model. Please refer to
the following table.
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Ohm
Range： 10 ~ 750
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

Settings：
Model Default
1.5 kW (included) or
40Ω
below
2 kW ~ 4.5 kW (included) 20Ω
5.5 kW 15Ω
7.5 kW 15Ω
Address: 016AH
P1-53 RES2 Regenerative Resistor Capacity
016BH
Interface：
Default： Determined by the model. Please refer to
the following table.
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Watt
Range： 0 ~ 15000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Model Default
1.5 kW (included) or below 60W
2 kW ~ 4.5 kW (included) 100W
5.5 kW 0W
7.5 kW 0W
Address: 016CH
P1-54 PER Position Completed Range
016DH
Interface：
Default： 12800
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 0 ~ 1280000
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Settings： In position mode (PT), if the deviation pulse number is smaller

than the setting range (the setting value of parameter P1-54),
DO.TPOS is ON.
In position register (PR) mode, if the deviation between the target
position and the actual motor position is smaller than the setting
range (the setting value of parameter P1-54), DO.TPOS is ON.
Address: 016EH
P1-55 MSPD Maximum Speed Limit
016FH
Interface：
Default： Same as the rated speed of each model
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit：
motor: rpm
motor: 10 3 m/s
Range： 0 ~ max.speed
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The default of the max. speed of servo motor is set to the rated
speed.
Address: 0170H
P1-56 OVW Output Overload Warning Level
0171H
Interface：
Default： 120
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 120
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The setting value is 0 ~ 100, if the servo motor continuously
outputs the load and is higher than the setting proportion (P1-56),
the early warning for overload (DO is set to 10, OLW) will occur.
If the setting value is over 100, it will disable this function.

Motor Crash Protection (torque Address: 0172H

P1-57 CRSHA
percentage) 0173H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 300
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Setup protection level (for the percentage of rated torque, set the
value to 0 means to disable the function, set the value to 1 or
number above means to enable the function)
Address: 0174H
P1-58 CRSHT Motor Crash Protection Time
0175H
Interface：
Default： 1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Setup the protection time:
When it reaches the level, AL030 occurs after exceeding the
protection time.
NOTE This function is only suitable for non-contactable application, such
as electric discharge machines. (please setup P1-37 correclty).
Address: 0176H
P1-59 MFLT Analog Speed Command
0177H
Interface：
Default： 0.0 0
Control
S
Mode：

Unit： 1 ms 0.1 ms
Range： 0.0 ~ 4.0 0 ~ 40
Data Size： 16bit
Example： 1.5 = 1.5 ms 15 = 1.5 ms
Settings： (Moving Filter)
0: Disabled
P1-06 is low-pass filter and P1-59 is moving filter. The difference
between both is that moving filter can smooth the command in the
beginning and end of the step command; while the low-pass filter
brings better smooth effect to command end.
Therefore, it is suggested that if the speed loop receives the
command from the controller for forming the position control loop,
then low-pass filter can be used. If it is only for the speed control,
then it should use Moving Filter for better smoothing.
Original step analog speed command
Holding Time
Command that has

gone through moving
filter
Address: 0178H
P1-60 Reseved
0179H
Address: 017AH
P1-61 Reserved
017BH
Address: 017CH
P1-62 FRCL Friction Compensation
017DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PT／PR／S
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
Settings： The level of friction compensation (the percentage of rated
torque. Set the value to 0 means to disable the function; set the
value to 1 or number above means to enable it.)
Address: 017EH
P1-63 FRCT Friction Comenpsation
017FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PT／PR／S
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Setup smoothing constant of friction compensation.
Address: 0180H
P1-64 Reserved
0181H
Address: 0182H
P1-65 Reserved
0183H
Max. Rotation Number of Analog Address: 0184H

P1-66 PCM
Position Command 0185H
Interface：
Default： 1.0 10
Control Mode：PT
Unit： 1 cycle 0.1 cycle
Range： 0.0 ~ 200.0 0 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16bit
Example： 1.5 = 1.5 cycles 15 =1.5 cycles

Settings： It is the rotation number setting when analog speed command

inputs the max. voltage (10V). If it is set to 30 and the external
voltage inputs 10V, it means the position command is +3
cycles. 5V means the speed control command is 1.5 cycles.
-10V means the position command is -3 cycles.
Position control command = Input voltage value x Setting value
／10
NOTE It will be available after firmware version v1.031 sub8.
Address: 0186H
P1-67 Reserved
0187H
Address: 0188H
P1-68 PFLT2 Position Command Moving Filter
0189H
Interface：
Default： 4
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Moving Filter can activate smooth function in
the beginning and the end of step command,
but it will delay the command.
Address: 018AH
P1-69 Reserved
018BH
Address: 018CH
P1-70 Reserved
018DH
Address: 018EH
P1-71 Reserved
018FH

Resolution of Linear Scale for Full-closed Address: 0190H

P1-72 FRES
Loop Control 0191H
Interface：
Default： 5000
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： pulse／rev
Range： 200 ~1280000
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： A/B pulse corresponded by full-closed loop when motor runs a
cycle (after quardruple frequency)
Error Protection Range for Full-closed Address: 0192H

P1-73 FERR
Loop Control 0193H
Panel / Software Communication P2-34
Interface：
Default： 30000
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： Pulse (based on the feedback of
full-closed loop)
31
Range： 1 ~ (2 -1)
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The protection is for excessive deviation between feedback
position of linear scale and the encoder. When the deviation is
excessive, it might result from the loose of connector or other
mechanism problems.
Address: 0194H
P1-74▲ FCON Full-closed Loop Control of Linear Scale
0195H
Interface：
Default： 1000h
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0000h ~ 0x6111

Data Size： 16bit

Format： HEX
Settings：
Settings：  Switch of full-closed loop control

0: Function of full-closed loop is not used
1: Function of full-closed loop is used
2: Use the function of synchronous control
 Selection of OA/OB/OZ output source

0: Motor encoder is the output source
1: Encoder of linear scale is the output source
Firmware version DSP V1.016 + CPLD 0.07(or the later
version) will provide:
2: Pulse command of CN1 is the output source
 Positive / negative direction selection of linear scale

feedback:
0: It is in positive direction when A phase leads B phase of
linear scale
1: It is in negative direction when B phase leads A phase of
linear scale
 Filter setting of linear scale
0: BYPASS
1: 20Mhz
2: 10Mhz
3: 6.66Mhz
4: 1.66Mhz
5: 833K
6: 416K
Take 20Mhz(50ns) as the example:
50ns 50ns
If the width of single-phase pulse is smaller than 50ns, the signal

will be filtered.

Low-pass Filter Time Constant of Address: 0196H

P1-75 FELP
Full-closed Loop control 0197H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When the stiffness of mechanical system between full- and
half-closed loop is insufficient, users can setup the appropriate
time constant to enhance the stability of the system.
Set the value to 0 to disable the function of low-pass filter
(Bypass)
The stiffness of mechanical system ↑, the setting value of P1-75 ↓
The stiffness of mechanical system ↓, the setting value of P1-75 ↑
Maximum Rotation of Encoder Output Address: 0198H

P1-76 AMSPD
Setting (OA, OB) 0199H
Interface：
Default： 5500
Control
ALL
Mode：
Permenant magnet synchronous rotary
Unit：
motor: rpm
Permenant magnet synchronous linear
motor: 10 3 m/s
Range： Permenant magnet synchronous rotary
motor: 0 ~ 6000
Permenant magnet synchronous linear
motor: 0 ~ 15999
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： According to the real application, this parameter is set for the
maximum speed and the servo drive will generate smooth
function automatically for encoder output signals.
When the value is set to 0, the function is disabled.

Address: 019AH
P1-77 Reserved
019BH
Address: 019CH
P1-78 Reserved
019DH
Address: 019EH
P1-79 Reserved
019FH
Address: 01A0H
P1-80 Reserved
01A1H
Max. Speed of 2nd Analog Speed Address: 01A2H

P1-81 VCM2
Command 01A3H
Interface：
Default： Motor rated speed
Control
S/T
Mode：
Unit： rpm/10V
Range： 0 ~ 50000
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Please refer to the description of P1-40.
Filter Switching Time between P1-40 and Address: 01A4H

P1-82 VCMLPF
P1-81 01A5H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： msec
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

P2-xx Extension Parameters

Address: 0200H
P2-00 KPP Position Loop Gain
0201H
Interface：
Default： 35
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 2047
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When the value of position loop gain is increased, the position
response can be enhanced and the position error can be
reduced. If the value is set too big, it may easily cause vibration
and noise.
Address: 0202H
P2-01 PPR Switching Rate of Position Loop Gain
0203H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 10 ~ 500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Switch the changing rate of position loop gain according to the
gain-switching condition.
Address: 0204H
P2-02 PFG Position Feed Forward Gain
0205H
Interface：
Default： 50
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： %

Range： 0 ~ 100
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： If the position command is changed smoothly, increasing the gain
value can reduce the position error.
If the position command is not changed smoothly, decreasing the
gain value can tackle the problem of mechanical vibration.
Smooth Constant of Position Feed Address: 0206H

P2-03 PFF
Forward Gain 0207H
Interface：
Default： 5
Control
PT／PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 2 ~ 100
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： If the position command is changed smoothly, decreasing the
value can reduce the position error. If the position command is not
changed smoothly, increasing the value can tackle the problem of
mechanical vibration.
Address: 0208H
P2-04 KVP Speed Loop Gain
0209H
Interface：
Default： 500
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 8191
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Increase the value of speed loop gain can enhance the speed
response. However, if the value is set too big, it would easily
cause resonance and noise.

Address: 020AH
P2-05 SPR Switching Rate of Speed Loop Gain
020BH
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 10 ~ 500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Switch the changing rate of speed loop gain according to the gain
switching condition.
Address: 020CH
P2-06 KVI Speed Integral Compensation
020DH
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 1023
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Increasing the value of speed integral compensation can enhance
speed response and diminish the deviation of speed control.
However, if the value is set too big, it would easily cause
resonance and noise.
Address: 020EH
P2-07 KVF Speed Feed Forward Gain
020FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 100

Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
Settings： When the speed control command runs smoothly, increasing the
gain value can reduce the speed command error. If the command
does not run smoothly, decreasing the gain value can reduce the
mechanical vibration during operation.
Address: 0210H
P2-08■ PCTL Special Parameter Write-in
0211H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 65535
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Special parameter write-in:
Parameter
Function
code
Reset the parameter (Apply to the power
10
again after reset)
20 P4-10 is writable
22 P4-11~P4-19 are writable
Save the data of COMPARE, CAPTURE,
30,35
E-Cam
406 Enable forced DO mode
When forced DO mode is enabled, it can
400
switch back to the normal DO mode.
Address: 0212H
P2-09 DRT DI Debouncing Time
0213H
Interface：
Default： 2
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 2ms
Range： 0 ~ 20

Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
Example： 4 = 8 ms
Settings： When the environmental noise is big, increasing the setting value
can enhance the control stability. However, if the value is set too
big, the response time will be influenced.
Address: 0214H
P2-10 DI1 DI1 Functional Planning
0215H
Interface：
Default： 101
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x015F (the last two codes are DI
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
Input function selection
Input contact
Not in use
 Input function selection: Please refer to table 8.1

 Input contact: a or b contact
0: Set the input contact as normally closed (b contact)
1: Set the input contact as normally opened (a contact)
(P2-10 ~ P2-17) The setting value of function programmed
When parameters are modified, please re-start the servo drive to
ensure it can work normally.
Note: Parameter P3-06 is used to set how digital inputs (DI)
accepts commands, through external terminal or the
communication which determined by P4-07.
Address: 0216H
0217H
Interface：
Default： 104

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： Please refer to the description of P2-10
Address: 0218H
0219H
Interface：
Default： 116
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Address: 021AH
021BH
Interface：
Default： 117
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX

Address: 021CH
021DH
Interface：
Default： 102
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Address: 021EH
021FH
Interface：
Default： 22
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0220H
0221H
Interface：
Default： 23
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit

Format： HEX
Address: 0222H
0223H
Interface：
Default： 21
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0224H
P2-18 DO1 DO1 Functional Planning
0225H
Interface：
Default： 101
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x013F (the last two codes are DO
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
Output function selection
Output contact
Not in use

 Output function selection: Please refer to table 8.2

 Output contact: a or b contact
0: Set the output contact as normally closed (b contact)
1: Set the output contact as normally opened (a contact)
Address: 0226H
0227H
Interface：
Default： 103
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0228H
0229H
Interface：
Default： 109
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX

Address: 022AH
022BH
Interface：
Default： 105
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Address: 022CH
022DH
Interface：
Default： 7
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Address: 022EH
022FH
Interface：
Default： 1000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz
Range： 50 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
Settings： The first setting value of resonance frequency. If P2-24 is set to 0,
this function is disabled. P2-43 and P2-44 are the second Notch
filter.
Resonance Suppression (Notch filter) Address: 0230H

P2-24 DPH1
Attenuation Rate (1) 0231H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： dB
Range： 0 ~ 32 (0: disable the function of Notch
filter)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The first resonance suppression (notch filter) attenuation rate.
When this parameter is set to 0, the function of Notch filter is
disabled.
Low-pass Filter of Resonance Address: 0232H

P2-25 NLP
Suppression 0233H
Interface：
Default： 0.2 (under 1kW) or 2 (under 1kW) or
0.5 (other model) 0.5 (other model)
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 1 ms 0.1 ms
Range： 0.0 ~ 100.0 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Example： 1.5 = 1.5 ms 15 = 1.5 ms
Settings： Set the low-pass filter of resonance suppression. When the value
is set to 0, the function of low-pass filter is disabled.

Address: 0234H
P2-26 DST Anti-interference Gain
0235H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 1
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Increasing the value of this parameter can increase the damping
of speed loop. It is suggested to set P2-26 equals to the value of
P2-06. If users desire to adjust P2-26, please follow the rules
below.
1. In speed mode, incrase the value of this parameter can
reduce speed overshoot.
2. In position mode, decrease the value of this parameter can
reduce position overshoot.
Address: 0236H
P2-27 GCC Gain Switching and Switching Selection
0237H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x4
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
Gain switching condition

Gaing switching method
Not in use

 Gain switching condition:

0: Disable gain switching function.
1: The signal of gain switching (GAINUP) is ON.
2: In position control mode, the position error is bigger than
the value of P2-29.
3: The frequency of position command is bigger than the
value of P2-29.
4: When the speed of servo motor is faster than the value of
P2-29.
5: The signal of gain switching (GAINUP) is OFF.
6: In position control mode, the position error is smaller than
the value of P2-29.
7: When the frequency of position command is smaller than
the value of P2-29.
8: When the speed of servo motor is slower than the value of
P2-29.
 Gain switching method:
0: Gain switching
1: Integrator switching, P -> PI
Setting
Control Mode P Control Mode S
Value
P2-00 x 100% Before
P2-04 x 100%
P2-04 x 100% switching
0
P2-00 x P2-01 After
P2-04 x P2-05
P2-04 x P2-05 switching
P2-06 x 0% Before
1
P2-06 x 100% After
Address: 0238H
P2-28 GUT Gain Switching Time Constant
0239H
Interface：
Default： 10
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 10ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Example： 15 = 150 ms
Settings： It is for switching the smooth gain. (0: disable this function)

Address: 023AH
P2-29 GPE Gain Switching
023BH
Interface：
Default： 1280000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse, Kpps, r/min
Range： 0 ~ 3840000
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The setting of gain switching (Pulse error, Kpps, r/min) is
determined by the selection of gain switching (P2-27).
Address: 023CH
P2-30■ INH Auxiliary Function
023DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -8 ~ +8
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

0: Disable all functions described below

Settings：
1: Force to Servo On the software
2~4: (reserved)
5: This setting allows the written parameters not retain after power
off. When the data is no need to save, it can avoid the
parameters continuously writing into EEPROM and shortening
the lifetime of EEPROM.
Setting this parameter is a must when using communication
control.
6: In simulation mode (command simulation), the external Servo
On signal cannot work and DSP Error (variable 0x6F) is
regarded as 0. Parameter P0-01 only shows the external Error
(positive/negative limit, emergency stop, etc)
In this status, DO.SRDY is ON. Command is accepted in each
mode and can be observed via scope software. However, the
motor will not operate. The aim is to examine the command
accuracy.
7: (It will be available after firmware version V1.013)
High-speed oscilloscope, disable Time-Out function (It is for PC
software)
8: (It will be available after firmware version V1.013)
Back up all parameters (current value) and save in EEPROM.
The value still exists when re-power on.
The panel displays ‘to.rom’ during execution. (It can be
executed when Servo ON.)
-1,-5,-6,-7: (It will be available after firmware version V1.013)
Individually disable the function of 1,5,6,7
-2~-4, -8: (Reserved)
NOTE Please set the value to 0 in normal operation. The value returns to
0 automatically after re-power on.
Speed Loop Frequency Response Setting Address: 023EH

P2-31 AUT1
in Auto and Semi-auto Mode 023FH
Panel / Software Communication 5.6 and 6.3.6
Interface：
Default： 80
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz
Range： 1 ~ 0x1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX

Settings： 1~50Hz: Low stiffness, low response

51~250Hz: Medium stiffness, medium response
251~850Hz: High stiffness, high response
851~1000Hz: Extremely high stiffness, extremely high response
NOTE 1）According to the speed loop setting of P2-31, the servo drive
sets the position loop response automatically.
2）The function is enabled via parameter P2-32. Please refer to
Chapter 5.6 for corresponding bandwidth size of the setting
value.
Address: 0240H
P2-32▲ AUT2 Tuning Mode Selection
0241H
Panel / Software Communication 5.6 and 6.3.6
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x2
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： 0: Manual Mode
1: Auto Mode (continuous adjustment)
2: Semi-auto Mode (non- continuous adjustment)
Relevant description of manual mode setting:
When P2-32 is set to 0, parameters related to gain control, such
as P2-00, P2-02, P2-04, P2-06, P2-07, P2-25 and P2-26, all can
be set by the user.
When switching mode from auto or semi-auto to manual,
parameters about gain will be updated automatically.
Relevant description of auto mode setting:

Continue to estimate the system inertia, save the inertia ratio to
P1-37 every 30 minutes automatically and refer to the stiffness
and bandwidth setting of P2-31.
1. Set the system to manual mode 0 from auto 1 or semi-auto 2,
the system will save the estimated inertia value to P1-37
automatically and set the corresponding parameters.

2. Set the system to auto mode 1 or semi-auto mode 2 from

manual mode 0, please set P1-37 to the appropriate value.
3. Set the system to manual mode 0 from auto mode 1, P2-00,
P2-04 and P2-06 will be modified to the corresponding
parameters of auto mode.
4. Set the system to manual mode 0 from semi-auto mode 2,
P2-00, P2-04, P2-06, P2-25 and P2-26 will be modified to the
corresponding parameters of semi-auto mode.
Relevant description of semi-auto mode setting:

1. When the system inertia is stable, the value of P2-33 will be 1
and the system stops estimating. The inertia value will be
saved to P1-37 automatically. When switching mode to
semi-auto mode (from manual or auto mode), the system
starts to estimate again.
2. When the system inertia is over the range, the value of P2-33
will be 0 and the system starts to estimate and adjust again.
※ Rotary motor uses inertia ratio for estimation; Linear motor
uses weight of linear motor and load for estimation.
Address: 0242H
P2-33▲ AUT3 Semi-auto Inertia Adjustment
0243H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 1
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

Settings：
Semi-auto setting
Reserved
Not in use
 Semi-auto Setting:
1: It means the inertia estimation in semi-auto mode is
completed. The inertia value can be accessed via P1-37.
0: 1. When the display is 0, it means the inertia adjustment is
not completed and is adjusting.
2. When the setting is 0, it means the inertia adjustment is
not completed and is adjusting.
※ Rotary motor uses inertia ratio for estimation; Linear motor
uses weight of linear motor and load for estimation.
Address: 0244H
P2-34 SDEV The Condition of Overspeed Warning
0245H
Interface：
Default： 5000
Control
S
Mode：
Unit：
motor: rpm
motor: 10 3 m/s
motor: 1 ~ 5000
motor: 1~15999
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The setting of over speed warning in servo drive error display
(P0-01)
Condition of Excessive Position Control Address: 0246H

P2-35 PDEV
Deviation Warning 0247H
Interface：
Default： 3840000
Control
PT／PR
Mode：

Unit： pulse
Range： 1 ~ 128000000
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The setting of excessive position control deviation warning in
servo drive error display (P0-01)
Address: 0248H
P2-36 EDI9 Extended EDI9 Functional Planning
0249H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x015F (the last two codes are EDI
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
Input function selection

Input contact
Not in use
 Input function selection: Please refer to table 8.1
 Input contact: a or b contact
0: Set the input contact as normally closed (b contact)
1: Set the input contact as normally opened (a contact)
Address: 024AH
024BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：

Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Address: 024CH
024DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Address: 024EH
024FH
Operational Related Section
Panel / Software Communication Table: 8.1
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX

Address: 0250H
0251H
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0252H
0253H
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
code)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0254H
P2-42 Reserved
0255H
Address: 0256H
0257H
Interface：
Default： 1000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz

Range： 50 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The second setting value of resonance frequency. If P2-44 is set
to 0, this function is disabled. P2-23 and P2-24 are the first Notch
filter.
Resonance Suppression (Notch filter) Address: 0258H

P2-44 DPH2
Attenuation Rate (2) 0259H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： dB
Range： 0 ~ 32 (0: disable Notch filter)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The second resonance suppression (notch filter) attenuation rate.
When this parameter is set to 0, the function of Notch filter is
disabled.
Address: 025AH
025BH
Interface：
Default： 1000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz
Range： 50 ~ 2000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The third group of mechanism resonance frequency setting value.
If P2-46 is set to 0, this function will be disabled. P2-23 and P2-24
are the first group of resonance suppression (Notch filter).

Resonance Suppression (Notch filter) Address: 025CH

P2-46 DPH3
Attenuation Rate (3) 025DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： dB
Range： 0 ~ 32
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The third group of resonance suppression (Notch filter)
attenuation rate. Set the value to 0 to disable the function of
Notch filter.
Auto Resonance Suppression Mode Address: 025EH

P2-47 ANCF
Setting 025FH
Interface：
Default： 1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 2
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： 0: The value of P2-43, P2-44 and P2-45, P2-46 will retain.
1: The value of P2-43, P2-44 and P2-45, P2-46 will retain after
resonance suppression.
2: Continuous resonance suppression
Description of Auto Mode Setting:
When it is set to 1: Auto resonance, the value returns to 0
automatically and saves the point of
resonance suppression when it is stable. If it is
unstable, re-power on or set back to 1 for
re-estimation again.
When it is set to 2: Continuous suppression automatically. When
it is stable, the point of resonance
suppression will be saved. If it is unstable,
re-power on for re-estimation.
When switching to mode 0 from mode 2 or 1, the setting of P2-43,
P2-44, P2-45 and P2-46 will be saved automatically.

Address: 0260H
P2-48 ANCL Resonance Suppression Detection Level
0261H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 1 ~ 300%
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： (The smaller the setting value is, the more sensitive the
resonance wil be.)
P2-48↑, resonance sensitiveness↓
P2-48↓, resonance sensitiveness↑
Address: 0262H
P2-49 SJIT Speed Detection Filter
0263H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 1F
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

Settings： The filter of speed estimation

Speed Estimation
Setting Value
Bandwithdth (Hz)
00 2500
01 2250
02 2100
03 2000
04 1800
05 1600
06 1500
07 1400
08 1300
09 1200
0A 1100
0B 1000
0C 950
0D 900
0E 850
0F 800
10 750
11 700
12 650
13 600
14 550
15 500
16 450
17 400
18 350
19 300
1A 250
1B 200
1C 175
1D 150
1E 125
1F 100
Address: 0264H
P2-50 DCLR Pulse Clear Mode
0265H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PT／PR
Mode：

Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x2
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： Please refer to table 8.1 for digital input setting.
When set digital input (DI) as CCLR, the function of pulse clear is
effective. Clear the position error (It is applicable in PT, PR mode).
If this DI is ON, the accumulative position error will be cleared to
0.
0: The triggering method of CCLR is rising-edge.
1: The triggering method of CCLR is level.
Address: 0266H
P2-51 Reserved
0267H
Address: 0268H
P2-52 Reserved
0269H
Address: 026AH
P2-53 KPI Position Integral Compensation
026BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： rad/s
Range： 0 ~ 1023
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When increasing the value of position control integral, reducing
the position steady-state error, it may easily cause position
overshoot and noise if the value is set too big.
Address: 026CH
P2-54 SVP The Gain of Synchronous Speed Control
026DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Rad/s

Range： 0~8191
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When increasing the value of synchronous speed control, it can
enhance the speed following of two motors. However, if the value
is set too big, it may easily cause vibration and noise.
Integral Compensation to Synchronous Address: 026EH

P2-55 SVI
Position 026FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Rad/s
Range： 0~1023
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When increasing integral compensation to synchronous speed,
two motors speed following can be enhanced and the speed error
between two motors can be reduced. However, if the value is set
too big, it may easily cause vibration and noise.
Integral Compensation to Synchronous Address: 0270H

P2-56 SPI
Position 0271H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Rad
Range： 0~1023
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When increasing integral compensation to synchronous position,
two motors speed following can be enhanced and the speed error
between two motors can be reduced. However, if the value is set
too big, it may easily cause vibration and noise It is suggested to
set the value the same as P2-06.

Address: 0272H
P2-57 SBW The Bandwidth of Synchronous Control
0273H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Hz
Range： 0~1023
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： If users do not know how to set P2-54~P2-56, setting the
bandwidth of synchronous control value will do since the value
will correspond to P2-54~P2-56. The bigger the bandwidth of
synchronous control value is, the better the synchronous effect
will be. When increasing the bandwidth of speed loop and
synchronous control, pay special attention to the response of
P2-25 which should be faster than the setting of the both
bandwidth.
Low-pass Filter of Synchronous Speed Address: 0274H

P2-58 SVL
Error 0275H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 0.1ms
Range： 0~1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Example： 15 = 1.5 ms
Settings： If the synchronous control is influenced by low resolution and
causes noise (not a high-pitched but rough sound), low-pass filter
can be used to solve this problem. Please note that bandwith of
the synchronous control should be set as large as possible and
should larger than the bandwith of speed-loop.
Address: 0276H
P2-59 Reserved
0277H

Address: 0278H
P2-60 GR4 Gear Ratio (Numerator) (N2)
0279H
Interface：
Default： 128
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： pulse
29
Range： 1 ~ (2 -1)
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The numerator of electronic gear ratio can be selected via
DI.GNUM0 and DI.GNUM1 (Please refer to table 8.1). If
DI.GNUM0 and DI.GNUM1 are not set, P1-44 will automatically
be the numerator of electronic gear ratio. Please switch GNUM0
and GNUM1 in stop status to avoid the mechanical vibration.
Address: 027AH
027BH
Interface：
Default： 128
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： pulse
29
Range： 1 ~ (2 -1)
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Address: 027CH
027DH
Interface：
Default： 128
Control
PT
Mode：
Unit： pulse
29
Range： 1 ~ (2 -1)
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 027EH
P2-63 Reserved
027FH
Address: 0280H
P2-64 Reserved
0281H
Address: 0282H
P2-65 GBIT Special-bit Register
0283H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PT／PR／S
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0xFFFF
Data Size： -
Format： -

Settings：
Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8

 Bit2 ~ 5, Bit7 and Bit14 ~ Bit15: Reserved, please set to 0.
 Bit0 ~ Bit1: Reserved.
 Bit6: In PT mode, the switch of pulse error protection
function (pulse frequency is over high)
Bit6
Bit6 = 0: Normally use the function of pulse error protection
Bit6 = 1: Disable the function of pulse error protection
 Bit8：U, V, W wiring error protection

Bit8
Bit8 = 1: Enable U, V, W wiring error protection
 Bit9：U, W, W wiring cut-off detection

Bit9
Bit9 = 1: Enable U, W, W wiring cut-off detection
 Bit 10: DI.ZCLAMP function selection
Bit10
When the following conditions are all established, the function
of ZCLAMP is enabled.
Condition 1: speed mode
Condition 2: DI. ZCLAMP is On.
Condition 3: Motor speed is slower than the value of P1-38.
Bit10 = 0: The command source is analog, ZCLAMP function
will use the analog speed command without
acceleration / deceleration processing to judge if this
function should be enabled. The motor will be locked
at the position where ZCALMP conditions are
established.

Bit10 = 0: The command source is register. ZCLAMP function

will use the register speed command with
acceleration / deceleration processing to judge if
this function is enabled. The motor will be locked at
the position where ZCALMP conditions are
established.
Bit10 = 1: The command source is analog spped command.

ZCLAMP function will use the analog speed
command without acceleration / deceleration
processing to judge if this function is enabled. When
ZCALMP conditions are established, the motor
speed decelerates to 0 through S-curve. If not, the
motor follow the analog speed command through
S-curve.

Bit10 = 1: The command source is register. ZCLAMP function

will use the register with acceleration / deceleration
processing to judge if this function is enabled.
When ZCLAMP conditions are established, the
motor speed will be set to 0.
 Bit 11: Pulse inhibit function

Bit11
Bit11 = 0: Disalbe NL / PL pulse input inhibit function. In PT
mode, the external position pulse command will be
input into the servo drive in any condition.
Bit11 = 1: Enable NL / PL pulse input inhibit function. In PT
mode, if NL exists, the external NL pulse will be
inhibited to input to the servo. PL pulse input will be
accepted. In PT mode, if PL exists, the external PL
pulse will be inhibited to input to the servo. NL pulse
will be accepted.
Please note: In PT mode, if NL and PL both exist, both of them
will be inhibited to input to the servo.
 Bit12: Lack phase detection

Bit12
Bit12 = 0: Enable lack phase (AL022) detection
Bit12 = 1: Disable lack phase (AL022) detection
 Bit13: Encoder output error detection function

Bit13
Bit13 = 0: Enable encoder output error (AL018) detection
function
Bit13 = 1: Disable encoder output error (AL018) detection
function
 Bit15: Friction compensation mode selection

Bit15
Bit15 = 0: If the speed is slower than the value of P1-38, the
compensation value remains.
Bit15 = 1: If the speed is slower than the value of P1-38, the
compensation will become 0 according to the
smoothing time of P1-63.

Address: 0284H
P2-66 GBIT2 Special-bit Register 2
0285H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PT / PR / S
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x000F
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： Special-bit Register 2:
B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 B0
- - - - - - - -
B0~B1: Reserved
B2: Cancel latch function of low-voltage error
0: Latch function of low-voltage error: the error will not be cleared
automatically.
1: Cancel latch function of low-voltage error: the error will be
cleared automatically.
B3: Reserved
B4: Cancel the detection of AL.044
0: AL.044 will occur
1: AL.044 will be ignored.
B5: Enable disconnection detection of linear scale (only when the
full-closed loop control function is enabled)
0: AL.041 will be ignored
1: AL.041 will occur
B6~B7: Reserved
Address: 0286H
P2-67 JSL The Stable Level of Inertia Estimation
0287H
Interface：
Default： 1.5 15
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Permanent magnet Permanent magnet
motor: 1times motor: 0.1times
motor: 1kg motor: 0.1kg

Range： 0 ~ 200.0 0 ~ 2000

Data Size： 16bit
motor: 1.5 = 1.5 motor: 15 = 1.5
times times
motor: 1.5 = 1.5kg motor: 15 = 1.5kg
Settings： In semi-auto mode, if the value of inertia estimation is smaller
than P2-67 and the status remains for a while, the system will
regard the inertia estimation as completed.
Address: 0288H
P2-68 TEP Switch of Following Error Compensation
0289H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0000h ~ 0x0001
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： X＝0: P1-36＞1, following error compensation is disabled.
1: P1-36＞1, following error compensation is enabled.
(The function is available after V1.036 sub00)
Y＝0: When E-CAM is engaged, JOG cannot work.
1: When E-CAM is engaged, JOG can work.
(This function is not available now.)
Z＝0: DI.STP is triggered by rising edge.
1: DI.STP is Level triggered.
(The function is available after V1.042 sub00)
U＝0: AL.003 is WARNING
1: AL.003 is ALARM
(This function is not available now.)
Address: 028AH
P2-69 Reserved
028BH

Address: 028CH
P2-70 Reserved
028DH
Address: 028EH
P2-71 Reserved
028FH
Address: 0290H
P2-72 Reserved
0291H
Address: 0292H
P2-73 Reserved
0293H
Address: 0294H
P2-74 Reserved
0295H
Address: 0296H
P2-75 Reserved
0297H
Address: 0298H
P2-76 Reserved
0299H
Address: 029AH
P2-77 Reserved
029BH
Address: 029CH
P2-78 Reserved
029DH
Address: 029EH
P2-79 Reserved
029FH
Address: 02A0H
P2-80 Reserved
02A1H
Address: 02A2H
P2-81 LPUS Swtich of Pulse Loss Detection
02A3H
Interface：
Default： 1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit：
Range： 0~1
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Set the parameter to 0 to disable the function; set it to 1 to enable
it.
Address: 02A4H
P2-82 LPUL Warning Level of Pulse Loss
02A5H
Interface：
Default： 10

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： pulse
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： If the amount of pulse loss exceeds the setting level, it means the
pulse loses too much and AL.057 will occur.
※This function is available only when motor travels through Z
phase signal.
Address: 02A6H
P2-83 Level Checked via Z
02A7H
Interface：
Default： 2000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： N/A
Range： 0 ~ 2 31
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address: 02A8H
P2-84 LRSF Special Funciton of Low Resolution
02A9H
Interface：
Default： 0X0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： N/A
Range： 0 ~0x011F
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX

Settings：
Jitter suppression function:

If motor resolution is lower, noise will occur when the motor stops.
This function can help to reduce the noise. When the value is set
to 0, this function is disabled. Set the value to 1 can enable this
function. Bigger value brings better effect of suppression, but it
sometimes brings bigger sound if users adjust the value too much.
Switch of the estimated gain: If motor resolution is lower and
operates at low speed, it will cause noise. If this function is
enabled and the motor speed is slower than 25 rpm, then the
value of the estimated gain will become smaller. Thus, when the
motor is at low speed, the operation will be more smoothing and
reduce the noise that caused by the motor. Set the value to 0 to
disable the function; while set to 1 can enable it.
Smooth speed estimation: If motor resolution is low, the estimated
speed will be unable to operate smoothly. When enabling this
function, it can help to smooth the operation. Set the value to 0 to
disable the function; while set to 1 can enable it.

P3-xx Communication Parameters

Address: 0300H
P3-00● ADR Address Setting
0301H
Interface：
Default： 0x7F
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x01 ~ 0x7F
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The communication address setting is divided into Y, X
(hexadecimal):
0 0 Y X
Range －－ 0~7 0~F
When using RS-232/RS-485 to communicate, one servo drive
can only set one address. The duplicate address setting will
cause abnormal communication.
This address represents the absolute address of the servo drive
in communication network. It is also applicable to RS-232/485
and CAN bus.
When the communication address setting of MODBUS is set to
0xFF, the servo drive will automatically reply and receive data
regardless of the address. However, P3-00 cannot be set to 0xFF.
Address: 0302H
P3-01 BRT Transmission Speed
0303H
Interface：
Default： 0x0203
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： bps
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x0405
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX

Settings： The setting of transmission speed is divided into Z, Y, X

(hexadecimal):
0 Z Y X
Communication － CAN － RS-232/485
Port
Range 0 0~4 0 0~5
 Definition of X setting value
0: 4800
1: 9600
2: 19200
3: 38400
4: 57600
5: 115200
 Definition of Z setting value
0: 125 Kbit/s
1: 250 Kbit/s
2: 500 Kbit/s
3: 750 Kbit/s
4: 1.0 Mbit/s
NOTE 1）If this parameter is set via CAN, only Z can be set and the
others remain.
2）The communication speed of USB is 1.0 Mbit/s only and is
unchangeable.
Address: 0304H
P3-02 PTL Communication Protocol
0305H
Interface：
Default： 6
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x8
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The definition of the setting value is as the followings:
0: 7, N, 2 (MODBUS, ASCII)
1: 7, E, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
2: 7, O,1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
3: 8, N, 2 (MODBUS, ASCII)
4: 8, E, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII)

5: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, ASCII)
6: 8, N, 2 (MODBUS, RTU)
7: 8, E, 1 (MODBUS, RTU)
8: 8, O, 1 (MODBUS, RTU)
Address: 0306H
P3-03 FLT Communication Error Disposal
0307H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x1
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The definition of the setting value is as the following:
0: Warning and keeps running
1: Warning and stops deceleration (The deceleration time is set to
parameter P5-03.B)
Address: 0308H
P3-04 CWD Communication Timeout
0309H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： sec
Range： 0 ~ 20
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： If the setting value is not 0, enable communication timeout
immediately. If it is set to 0, disable the function.

Address: 030AH
P3-05 CMM Communication Mechanism
030BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x00 ~ 0x01
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： Communication port can select one or more than one
communications.
 Communication Interface
0: RS232
1: RS485
Address: 030CH
P3-06■ SDI Control Switch of Digital Input (DI)
030DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0x3FFF
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The source of DI controls the switch.
Each bit of this parameter decideds one input source of DI signal:
Bit0 ~ Bit7 correspond to DI1 ~ DI8.
Bit8 ~ Bit13 correspond to extended DI EDI9 ~ EDI14;
The setting of bit is as the followings:
0: The input status is controlled by the external hardware.
1: The input status is controlled by P4-07.
For the functional planning of digital input, please refer to:
DI1 ~ DI8: P2-10 ~ P2-17
EDI9 ~ EDI14: P2-36 ~ P2-41

Address: 030EH
P3-07 CDT Communication Response Delay Time
030FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： 1ms
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Delay the time of communication response from servo drive to
controller
Address: 0310H
P3-08■ MNS Monitor Mode
0311H
Interface：
Default： 0000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： Shown as below
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The setting of monitor mode is divided into L and H.
(hexadecimal):
Item －－ L H
Low-speed
Function －－ monitoring Monitor Mode
time
Range 0 0 0~F 0~3

The status of this axis or multi-axis can be monitored by USB.

The definition of setting value is as follows:
 The definition of H setting value
3: USB is high-speed monitor. The sampling frequency is
16K and can only monitor 2CH.
2: USB is high-speed monitor. The sampling frequency is 8K
and can monitor 4CH.
1: USB is low-speed monitor. The sampling time is set by L
and can monitor 4CH.
0: disable the monitor function
 L: the sampling time of USB low-speed monitor. Its unit is ms.
It means the axial status will be set via USB every L ms. So
the controller can monitor the axial status. Each monitoring
message includes 4 CH data (16 bit x 4). If L is set to 0, this
function is disabled. L is enabled when H is set to 1.
Address: 0312H
P3-09 SYC CANopen Synchronize Setting
0313H
Interface：
Default： 0x57A1
Control
CANopen
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： Shown as below
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The synchronous setting of CANopen is divided into E, T, D and
M (hexadecimal):
Item E T D M
Range of
Target Adjusting
Function Synchronous Deadband
Value amount
error
Range 1~9 0~9 0~F 1~F
The slave of CANopen synchronizes with the master via SYNC.
See as the followings:
M: If the slave needs to synchronize with the master, correct the
clock is a must. This parameter sets the maximum correction
value per time. (Unit: usec)
D: Set the size of deadband (Unite: usec). If the deviation
between the SYNC reaching time and the target value does
not exceed the deadband, correction is no need.

T: SYNC arrival time. The standard value is 500usec but it might

be different from the target value. Thus, the buffer is necessary.
Target value＝400 + 10 x T.
For instance, if T=5, the target value will be 450.

E: If the deviation between SYNC reaching time and the target
value is smaller than the range, it means the synchronization is
successful. (Unit: 10 usec)
Address: 0314H
P3-10 Reserved
0315H
Address: 0316H
P3-11 Reserved
0317H

P4-xx Diagnosis Parameters

Address: 0400H
P4-00★ ASH1 Fault Record (N)
0401H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The last abnormal status record
Low word: LXXXX: display ALM number
High word: hYYYY: display the error code corresponds to
CANopen
Address: 0402H
P4-01★ ASH2 Fault Record (N-1)
0403H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The last second abnormal status record
High word word: hYYYY: display the error code corresponds to
CANopen
Address: 0404H
0405H
Interface：
Default： 0

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The last third abnormal status record
CANopen
Address: 0406H
0407H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The last fourth abnormal status record
CANopen
Address: 0408H
0409H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX

Settings： The last fifth abnormal status record

CANopen
Address: 040AH
P4-05 JOG Servo Motor Jog Control
040BH
Interface：
Default： 20
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit：
motor: rpm
motor: 10 3 m/s
motor: 0 ~ 5000
motor: 0~15999
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Three control methods are as follows:
1. Operation Test
After the JOG speed is set by P4-05 via panel, the panel will
display the symbol of JOG. Pressing the UP Key can control
JOG operation in positive direction, pressing the DOWN Key
can control negative direction. Stop pressing to stop the JOG
operation. If there is any error in this setting, then the motor
cannot operate. The maximum JOG speed is the maximum
speed of the servo motor.
2. DI Control
If the DI is set to JOGU and JOGD (refer to table 7.1), then the
JOG operation in positive or negative direction can be
controlled via this DI.
3. Communication Control
1 ~ 5000: JOG speed
4998: JOG operation in positive direction
4999: JOG operation in negative direciton
0: Stop operation
NOTE When writing via communication, if the frequency is high, please
set P2-30 to 5.

P4-06▲ Digital Output Register (Readable and Address: 040CH

FOT
■ Writable) 040DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0xFF
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： bit 00: correspond to DO code=0x30
bit 01: correspond to DO code=0x31
bit 10: correspond to DO code=0x3A
bit 11: correspond to DO code=0x3B
bit 12: correspond to DO code=0x3C
bit 13: correspond to DO code=0x3D
bit 14: correspond to DO code=0x3E
bit 15: correspond to DO code=0x3F
If P2-18 is set to 0x0130, then the DO#1is bit 0 status of P4-06.
DO Code (0x30~0x3F) can be set via communication DO, and
then write into P4-06.
Address: 040EH
P4-07■ ITST Multi-function of Digital Input
040FH
Panel / Software Communication Section 4.4.4
Interface：
Table 9.2
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x3FFF

Data Size： 16bit

Format： HEX
Settings： The DI input signal can come from external terminal (DI1 ~ DI8;
EDI9 ~ EDI14) or software SDI1 ~ 14 (Bit 0 ~ 13 of corresponding
parameter P4-07) and is determined by P3-06. The
corresponding bit of P3-06 is 1, which means the source is
software SDI (P4-07). If the corresponding bit is 0, then the
source is hardware DI. See the following graph:
External DI: DI1~8 P3-06

EDI9~14
DI after
combination
Software DI,
SDI1~14 (P4-07 bit)
Read parameters: shows the DI status after combination

Write parameters: writes the software SDI status
For example:
The value of reading P4-07 is 0x0011, which means DI1 and DI5
is ON after combination.
The value of writing P4-07 is 0x0011, which means software SDI1
and SDI5 is ON.
Please refer to P2-10 ~ P2-17 for the function programe of digital
input pin DI (DI1~DI8) and P2-36 ~ P2-41 for extended DI (EDI9 ~
EDI14).
Input Status of the Drive Keypad Address: 0410H

P4-08★ PKEY
(Read-only) 0411H
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： (read-only)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The aim is to check if the five Keys, MODE, UP, DOWN, SHIFT
and SET can work normally. This parameter is also used to check
if the Keys are all functional when producing servo drives.

Address: 0412H
P4-09★ MOT Digital Output Status (Read-only)
0413H
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x1F
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： Note: There is no difference whether read by panel or
communication.
Address: 0414H
P4-10■ CEN Adjustment Selection
0415H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 6
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： 0: reserved
1: Exectue the adjustment of analog speed input offset
2: Exectue the adjustment of analog torque input offset
3: Exectue the adjustment of current detector (V phase) hardware
offset
4: Exectue the adjustment of current detector (W phase)
hardware offset
5: Exectue the adjustment of 1~4 hardware offset
6: Execute the adjustment of IGBT ADC
NOTE The adjustment function needs to be enabled by the setting of
parameter P2-08. When adjusting, the external wiring which
connects to analog speed or torque (force) needs to be removed
completely and must be in Servo Off status.

Address: 0416H
P4-11 SOF1 Analog Speed Input Offset Adjustment 1
0417H
Interface：
Default： Factory default
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Manually adjust the hardware offset. The adjustment function
needs to be enabled by the setting of parameter P2-08. It is not
suggested to adjust the auxiliary adjustment. This parameter
cannot be reset.
Address: 0418H
P4-12 SOF2 Analog Speed Input Offset Adjustment 2
0419H
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
cannot be reset.
Address: 041AH
P4-13 TOF1 Analog Torque Input Offset Adjustment 1
041BH
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
cannot be reset.
Address: 041CH
P4-14 TOF2 Analog Torque Input Offset Adjustment 2
041DH
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
cannot be reset.
Current Detector (V1 Phase) Offset Address: 041EH

P4-15 COF1
Adjustment 041FH
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
cannot be reset.

Current Detector (V2 Phase) Offset Address: 0420H

P4-16 COF2
Adjustment 0421H
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
cannot be reset.
Current Detector (W1 Phase) Offset Address: 0422H

P4-17 COF3
Adjustment 0423H
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
cannot be reset.
Current Detector (W2 Phase) Offset Address: 0424H

P4-18 COF4
Adjustment 0425H
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -

Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
cannot be reset.
IGBT NTC Adjustment Detection Level Address: 0426H

P4-19 TIGB
(cannot reset) 0427H
Interface：
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 1 ~ 4
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Please cool down the drive to 25 Celsius degree when adjusting
Offset Adjustment Value of Analog Address: 0428H

P4-20 DOF1
Monitor Output (Ch1) 0429H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： mV
Range： -800 ~ 800
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Offset adjustment value (cannot reset)

Offset Adjustment Value of Analog Address: 042AH

P4-21 DOF2
Monitor Output (Ch2) 042BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： mV
Range： -800 ~ 800
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Offset adjustment value (cannot reset)
Address: 042CH
P4-22 SAO Analog Speed Input OFFSET
042DH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
S
Mode：
Unit： mV
Range： -5000 ~ 5000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Users manually adjust the OFFSET
Address: 042EH
P4-23 TAO Analog Torque (Force) Input OFFSET
042FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
T
Mode：
Unit： mV
Range： -5000 ~ 5000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

Settings： Users manually adjust the OFFSET
Address: 0430H
P4-24 LVL Level of Undervoltage Error
0431H
Interface：
Default： 160
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： V (rms)
Range： 140~190
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When the voltage of DC BUS is lower than P4-24* 2 , the
undervoltage alarm occurs.

P5-xx Motion Setting Parameters

Address: 0500H
P5-00 Reserved
0501H
Address: 0502H
P5-01 Reserved
0503H
Address: 0504H
P5-02 Reserved
0505H
Address: 0506H
P5-03 PDEC Deceleration Time of Auto Protection
0507H
Interface：
Default： 0XE0EFEEFF
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x00000000 ~ 0xF0FFFFFF
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The parameter setting is divided into D, C, B, A, W, Z, Y, X
(hexadecimal), including:
1. The deceleration time when activating the auto-protection
function: OVF, CTO (communication timeout AL020), SPL,
SNL, PL, NL
2. Deceleration time of Stop Command: STP
Item D C B A W Z Y X
Function STP Reserved CTO OVF SNL SPL NL PL
Range ０~ F －０~ F ０~ F ０~ F ０~ F ０~ F ０~ F
0 ~ F is used to indexing the deceleration time of P5-20~P5-35.
For example: If X is set to A, then the deceleration time of PL is
determined by P5-30.
Address: 0508H
P5-04 HMOV Homing Mode
0509H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -

Range： 0 ~ 0x128
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
X: Homing method
Y: Z pulse setting
Z: Limit setting
W: Reserved
Not in use
The definition of the setting value is as the followings:

W Z Y X
Reserved Limit Setting Z pulse Setting Homing Method
- 0~1 0~2 0~8
Y=0: Stop and X=0: Homing in forward
return to Z direction and regard PL as
pulse the homing origin.
Y=1: Go forward X=1: Homing in reverse
to Z pulse direction and regard NL as
Y=2: Do not look the homing origin.
for Z pulse
When X=2: Homing in forward
encounter direction
limit: ORGP: OFF  ON, as the
Z=0: shows homing origin
error
X=3: Homing in reverse
Z=1: rotates direction
backwards
ORGP: OFF  ON, as the
homing origin
X=4: Look for Z pulse in
forward direction and
regard it as the homing
origin
X=5: Look for Z pulse in
reverse direction and
regard it as the homing
origin
Y=0: Stop and X=6: Homing in forward
return to Z direction
pulse ORGP: ON  OFF, as the
Y=1: Go forward homing origin
to Z pulse
X=7: Homing in reverse
Y=2: Do not look direction
for Z pulse
ORGP: ON  OFF, as the
homing origin
X=8: directly define the
current position as the
origin

Address: 050AH
P5-05 HSPD1 1st Speed Setting of High Speed Homing
050BH
Interface：
Default： 100.0 1000
Control
ALL
Mode：
Permanet magnet Permanet magnet
Unit：
Range： Permanet magnet Permanet magnet
motor: 0.1 ~ 2000.0 motor: 1 ~ 20000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: 1.5 = 1.5 motor: 15 = 1.5
r/min r/min
motor: 1500.0 = motor: 15000 =
0.015m/s 0.015m/s
st
Settings： The 1 speed of high speed homing

Address: 050CH
P5-06 HSPD2 2nd Speed Setting of Low Speed Homing
050DH
Interface：
Default： 20.0 200
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit：
Range： Permanent magnet Permanent magnet
motor: 0.1 ~ 2000.0 motor: 1 ~ 20000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
synchronous rotary
synchronous rotary
motor: 1.5 = 1.5
motor: 15 = 1.5 r/min
r/min
Permanent magnet
Permanent magnet
synchronous linear
synchronous linear
motor: 15000 =
motor: 1500.0 =
0.015m/s
0.015m/s
nd
Settings： The 2 speed setting of low speed homing
Trigger Position Command (PR mode Address: 050EH

P5-07■ PRCM
only) 050FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 1000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

Settings： Set P5-07 to 0 to start homing

Set P5-07 to 1~63 to execute PR procedure which is the same as
DI.CTRG+POSn
It is prohibited to set P5-07 to 64 ~ 9999 (The value exceeds the
valid range)
Set P5-07 to 1000 to execute Stop Command which is the same
as DI.STOP
When reading P5-07:
If the command is incompleted, the drive will read the current
command.
If the command is completed, the drive will read the current
command + 10000.
If the command is completed and DO.TPOS is ON, reach the
motor position, the drive will read the current command +20000.
When PR is triggered by DI, the reading value is the same
For example:
Set P5-07 to 3, PR#3 will be triggered.
If the reading value is 3, it means PR #3 is incompleted.
If the reading value is 10003, it means PR#3 is issued completed,
but the motor has not reached the target position yet.
If the reading value is 20003, it means PR#3 is issued completed
and the motor has reached the target position.
Address: 0510H
P5-08 SWLP Forward Software Limit
0511H
Interface：
Default： 2147483647
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： PUU
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： In PR mode, if the motor rotates in forward direction and its
command position exceeds the setting value of P5-08, it will
trigger AL.283.

Address: 0512H
P5-09 SWLN Reverse Software Limit
0513H
Interface：
Default： -2147483648
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： PUU
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： In PR mode, if the motor rotates in reverse direction and its
command position exceeds the setting value of P5-09, it will
trigger AL.285.
Address: 0514H
P5-10★ AYSZ Data Array－Data Size
0515H
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： Read-only
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Data size (N x 32 bits) means size N of data array
Address: 0516H
P5-11■ AYID Data Array - Address of Reading / Writing
0517H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ (value set by P5-10 minus 1)
Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
Settings： The address of specified data when reading or writing data array.
Data Array－Window #1 for Reading / Address: 0518H

P5-12■ AYD0
Writing 0519H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Window #1 (Array[P5-11++])
When reading the parameter via panel, the value set by P5-11 will
not add 1, but the others will.
Data Array - Window #2 for Reading / Address: 051AH

P5-13■ AYD1
Writing 051BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Window #2 (Array[P5-11++])
When reading and writing the parameter via panel or
communication, the value set by P5-11 will add 1. Panel is
write-protected.
Address：051CH
P5-14 Reserved
051DH

PATH#1 ~ PATH#2 No Data Retained Address: 051EH

P5-15■ PMEM
Setting 051FH
Interface：
Default： 0x0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0 ~ 0x0011
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： The parameter is divided into 00YX:
X=0: PATH#1 Data retained
X=1: PATH#1 No data retained
Y=0: PATH#2 Data retained
Y=1: PATH#2 No data retained
Others are reserved
Users can continuously write the new position into the drive
through communication by P5-05.
Address: 0520H
P5-16■ AXEN Axis Position - Motor Encoder
0521H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： PUU (User position unit)
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Read: The feedback position of the motor encoder, which is the
monitor various V000 + the offset value.
Write: Any value can be written into the parameter and will neither
change V000 nor influence the positioning coordinate system. It is
only for observation when adjusting the offset value.

Address: 0522H
P5-17 AXAU Axis Position - Auxiliary Encoder
0523H
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse number
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Sends back: pulse counts of the auxiliary encoder (linear scale)
Address: 0524H
P5-18 AXPC Axis Position - Pulse Command
0525H
Interface：
Default： -
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse number
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Sends back: pulse counts of pulse command
Address: 0526H
P5-19 TBS E-Cam Curve Scaling
0527H
Interface：
Default： 1.000000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： 0.000001 times, which is 1 / (10^6)
Range： -2147.000000 ~ +2147.000000
Data Size： 32 bit
Format： DEC

Example： 1100000 = 1.1 times

(It will be provided after firmware version V1.017)
Settings：
This parameter is used to magnify or minify the E-Cam table
without changing its setting value.
For example, the data in the table is 0,10,20,30,40,20,
magnification x 2.000000 equals to the data in the table:
0,20,40,60,80,40, magnification x 1.000000.
Enable the operation of E-Cam by using the same pulse

frequency of the master axis. Magnify the magnification will
enlarge the route of E-Cam operation. The speed will be
magnified as well.
NOTE This parameter can be set anytime, but will be effective only when
pre-engaged → engaged.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time (Number Address: 0528H

P5-20 AC0
#0) 0529H
Interface：
Default： 200
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Permanet magnet synchronous rotary motor:
The setting time of acceleration/deceleration in PR mode, which
is the time it needs when accelerating from 0 to 3000r/min
Permanet magnet synchronous linear motor:
The setting time of acceleration/deceleration in PR mode, which
is the time it needs when accelerating from 0 to 5 m/s.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time (Number Address: 052AH

P5-21 AC1
#1) 052BH
Interface：
Default： 300
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms

Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Please refer to P5-20 for the setting of acceleration/deceleration
time in PR mode.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time (Number Address: 052CH

P5-22 AC2
#2) 052DH
Interface：
Default： 500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
time in PR mode.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time (Number Address: 052EH

P5-23 AC3
#3) 052FH
Interface：
Default： 600
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
time in PR mode.


P5-24 AC4
#4) 0531H
Interface：
Default： 800
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
time in PR mode.

P5-25 AC5
#5) 0533H
Interface：
Default： 900
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
time in PR mode.

P5-26 AC6
#6) 0535H
Interface：
Default： 1000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
time in PR mode.

P5-27 AC7
#7) 0537H
Interface：
Default： 1200
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
time in PR mode.

P5-28 AC8
#8) 0539H
Interface：
Default： 1500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
time in PR mode.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time (Number Address: 053AH

P5-29 AC9
#9) 053BH
Interface：
Default： 2000
Control
PR
Mode：

Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
time in PR mode.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time (Number Address: 053CH

P5-30 AC10
#10) 053DH
Interface：
Default： 2500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
time in PR mode.
Acceleration/Deceleration Time (Number Address: 053EH

P5-31 AC11
#11) 053FH
Interface：
Default： 3000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
time in PR mode.


P5-32 AC12
#12) 0541H
Interface：
Default： 5000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
time in PR mode.

P5-33 AC13
#13) 0543H
Interface：
Default： 8000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
time in PR mode.

P5-34 AC14
#14) 0545H
Interface：
Default： 50
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
Settings： The default value of this parameter is smaller (short deceleration
time) and it is used for deceleration time setting of auto protection.

P5-35 AC15
#15) 0547H
Interface：
Default： 30
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 1 ~ 65500
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The default value of this parameter is smaller (short deceleration
time) and it is used for short deceleration time and stops promptly
of auto protection.
Address: 0548H
P5-36 CAST CAPTURE - Start Address of Data Array
0549H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ (value set by P5-10 minus 1)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The first data CAPTURE obtained should be saved in the address
of data array.
NOTE It is writable only when COMPARE stops (please refer to P5-39)

Address: 054AH
P5-37■ CAAX CAPTURE－Axis Position CNT
054BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Shows the axis position of CAPTURE pulse source
NOTE 1）It is writable only when COMPARE stops (please refer to

P5-39)
2）If the source is the main encoder, this parameter is
write-protected and the content is the feedback position of the
motor (monitor variable 00h).
CAPTURE－The Number of Capturing Address: 054CH

P5-38■ CANO
Times 054DH
Interface：
Default： 1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 1 ~ (the value set by P5-10 minus the
value set by P5-36)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When CAP stops, it means the number of data that expect to
capture (readable and writable)
When CAP activates, it means the number of data that has not
been captured (read-only); Every time, when it captures one data,
the value of P5-38 will minus one. When the value is 0, it means
the capturing is completed.
NOTE The number of data which is used by COMPARE, CAPTURE and
E-Cam cannot exceed 800.

Address: 054EH
P5-39■ CACT CAPTURE－Activate CAP Control
054FH
Interface：
Default： 0x2010
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x0000 ~ 0xF13F
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
Low word
X: See the following table

Y: 0－CAPTURE is not working
1－AUX ENC (linear scale) is set as the source
2－PULSE Cmd
3－Main ENC (main encoder)
When the source of CMP is CAP axis, the source Y of CAP
cannot be changed.
Z: 0－NO, 1－NC
U: trigger the minimum interval (Unit: ms)
bit 3 2 1 0
X function Execute PR After Reset the Activate CAP
when capturing the position of
finishing first data, the first data
capturing CMP is
activated.
Description Execute PR It is invalid After Starts to
＃50 after when CMP is capturing the capture when
activated. first data, it is set to 1.
finishing CAP
reset the After
position finishing
coordinate capturing,
this bit
becomes 0
automatically
.

bit 0: When the value set by P5-38 is bigger than 0, set bit 0 to 1
will activate CAP function and DO.CAP_OK is OFF. Every
time, when a data is captured, the value of P5-38 will minus
one. When the P5-38 is 0, it means the capture function is
completed, DO.CAP_OK is ON and bit 0 will be reset to 0
automatically. If P5-38 equals to 0, set bit 0 to 1 will not
activate CAP function. DO.CAP_OK is OFF and bit 0 will
automatically be set to 0. If CAP function is activated, it
cannot set 1 to bit 0. It only can be written 0 to disable CAP
function.
bit 1: If this bit is 1, when capturing the first data, the current
position of CAP axis will be set to the value of P5-76.
bit 2: If this bit is 1, when capturing the first data, CMP will be
activated. (When bit 0 of P5-59 is set to 1 and P5-58 is set to
the previous value.) If CMP has been activated, then this
function is invalid.
bit 3: If this bit is 1, as soon as the CAP finished, PR procedure
#50 will be triggered automatically.
Delay Time After Position Completed Address: 0550H

P5-40 DLY0
(Number #0) 0551H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
st
Settings： The 1 Delay Time of PR mode

P5-41 DLY1
(Number #1) 0553H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
nd

P5-42 DLY2
(Number #2) 0555H
Interface：
Default： 200
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
rd

P5-43 DLY3
(Number #3) 0557H
Interface：
Default： 400
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
th

P5-44 DLY4
(Number #4) 0559H
Interface：
Default： 500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms

Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
th
Delay Time After Position Completed Address: 055AH

P5-45 DLY5
(Number #5) 055BH
Interface：
Default： 800
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
th
Delay Time After Position Completed Address: 055CH

P5-46 DLY6
(Number #6) 055DH
Interface：
Default： 1000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
th

Delay Time After Position Completed Address: 055EH

P5-47 DLY7
(Number #7) 055FH
Interface：
Default： 1500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
th

P5-48 DLY8
(Number #8) 0561H
Interface：
Default： 2000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
th

P5-49 DLY9
(Number #9) 0563H
Interface：
Default： 2500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

th
Settings： The10 Delay Time of PR mode

P5-50 DLY10
(Number #10) 0565H
Interface：
Default： 3000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
th

P5-51 DLY11
(Number #11) 0567H
Interface：
Default： 3500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
th

P5-52 DLY12
(Number #12) 0569H
Interface：
Default： 4000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767

Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
th
Delay Time After Position Completed Address: 056AH

P5-53 DLY13
(Number #13) 056BH
Interface：
Default： 4500
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
th
Delay Time After Position Completed Address: 056CH

P5-54 DLY14
(Number #14) 056DH
Interface：
Default： 5000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
th
Delay Time After Position Completed Address: 056EH

P5-55 DLY15
(Number #15) 056FH
Interface：
Default： 5500
Control
PR
Mode：

Unit： ms
Range： 0 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
th
Address: 0570H
P5-56 CMST COMPARE－Start Address of Data Array
0571H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ (The value of P5-10 minus 1)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The first COMPARE data is saved in the address of data array.
NOTE It is writable only when COMPARE stops (please refer to P5-59)
Address: 0572H
P5-57■ CMAX COMPARE－Axis Position
0573H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The axis position of COMPARE pulse source is displayed here.
It is writable only when COMPARE stops (please refer to P5-59)

NOTE 1）It is write-protected when the source is Capture axis.
2） When the source is the main encoder, P5-57 is also

write-protected. The pulse revolution is determined by
parameter P1-46. When P5-59.Y is set to the main encoder,
this parameter is set to the motor feedback position (monitor
variable 00h). If this parameter is not the same as the motor
feedback position due to homing or reset by CAP function, the
user can set P5-59.Y = 0 and then P5-59.Y = 3. In this way,
this parameter will be reset to the motor feedback position.
Address: 0574H
P5-58■ CMNO COMPARE－Compare Amount
0575H
Interface：
Default： 1
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 1 ~ (the value set by P5-10 minus the
value set by P5-56)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When COMPARE stops, it means the number of data that expect
to compare (readable and writable)
When COMPARE activates, it means the number of data that has
not been compared (read-only); Every time, when it compares
one data, the value of P5-38 will minus one. When the value is 0,
it means the comparing is completed.
Address: 0576H
P5-59 CMCT COMPARE－Activate CMP Control
0577H
Interface：
Default： 00640010h
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 00010000h ~ 0x0FFF313F
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX

Settings：
X: See the following table.

Y: 0－When selecting CAPTURE AXES, the source of CAP
cannot be changed.
1－AUX ENC (linear scale) is set as the source
2－PULSE Cmd
3－Main ENC (main encoder)
Z: 0－NO, 1－NC outputs the polarity
U: See table U below:
bit 15 14 13 12
U function - - Follow CAP Trigger PR
Description - - CMPdata is set by When this bit is set,

CAP PR#45 will be triggered
It is provided in after the last compare
V1.038 sub19 (or is completed.
the later version) It is provided in V1.038
sub09 (or the later
version)
CBA: Output the pulse length; Unit: 1ms

bit 3 2 1 0
X function After When Cycle mode CMP is

finishing finishing activated
comparing, comparing,
the counter CAP is
returns to 0. activated.
Description As soon as It is invalid Never end Starts to
the last data when CAP is compare
is compared, activated. when this bit
P5-57 is set is set to 1. It
to 0. returns to 0
when
finishing
comparing.

bit 0: When the value of P5-58 is more than 0, set bit to 1 will
activate CMP. When comparing one data, the value of P5-58
will minus 1. When P5-58 is set to 0, the comparing is
completed and returns to 0. If P5-58 is 0, set bit 0 to 1 will
not do any comparing and return to 0 automatically. If bit 0
has already been set to 1, it is not allowed to write 1 as the
new value into the parameter. But it is ok to write 0 to disable
CMP.
bit 1: If this bit is 1, P5-58 will be reset after comparing the last
data. Then, start from the first data again. The cycle will
never end and bit 0 is always 1.
bit 2: If this bit is 1, CAP will be activated after comparing the last
data. (Set bit 0 of P5-39 to 1 and reset P5-38 to the previous
value) If CAP has already been activated, this function is
invalid.
bit 3: If this bit is 1, set the counter (P5-57) to 0 after comparing
the last data. For example, if the comparing data is set to
3000 (one data in total), the default value of the counter
(P5-57) is 0. It is expected to input 4000 pulse. When it
reaches the 3000th pulse, the CMP is completed and P5-57
returns to 0. When the pulse reaches 4000, P5-57=1000.
(No accumulative error)
Address: 0578H
P5-60 POV0 Target Speed Setting #0
0579H
Interface：
Default： 20.0 200
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： 1 r/min 0.1 r/min
Range： 0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Example： 15 = 15 r/min 150 = 15 r/min
st
Settings： The 1 target speed of PR mode
Address: 057AH
057BH
Interface：
Default： 50.0 500

Control
PR
Mode：
Unit：
motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Example： Permanet magnet Permanet magnet
motor: 1= 1 r/min motor: 10 = 1r/min
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
nd
Address: 057CH
057DH
Interface：
Default： 100.0 1000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit：
motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
synchronous rotary
motor: synchronous rotary
motor: 10 = 1r/min
1= 1 r/min
Permanet magnet
Permanet magnet synchronous linear
synchronous linear motor: 10000 =
motor: 1000.0 = 0.01m/s
0.01m/s
rd
Address: 057EH
057FH
Interface：
Default： 200.0 2000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： Permanet magnet Permanet magnet
motor: motor:
1rpm 0.1rpm
motor: motor:
0.1 ~ 6000.0 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: motor:
1= 1 r/min 10 = 1r/min
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th

Address: 0580H
0581H
Interface：
Default： 300.0 3000
Control
PR
Mode：
motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: motor:
1= 1 r/min 10 = 1r/min
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th
Address: 0582H
0583H
Interface：
Default： 500.0 5000
Control
PR
Mode：


motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: motor:
1= 1 r/min 10 = 1r/min
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th
Address: 0584H
0585H
Interface：
Default： 600.0 6000
Control
PR
Mode：
motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC


motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th
Address: 0586H
0587H
Interface：
Default： 800.0 8000
Control
PR
Mode：
motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th
Address: 0588H
0589H
Interface：
Default： 1000.0 10000

Control
PR
Mode：
motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th
Address: 058AH
058BH
Interface：
Default： 1300.0 13000
Control
PR
Mode：
motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th
Address: 058CH
058DH
Interface：
Default： 1500.0 15000
Control
PR
Mode：
motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th

Address: 058EH
058FH
Interface：
Default： 1800.0 18000
Control
PR
Mode：
motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th
Address: 0590H
0591H
Interface：
Default： 2000.0 20000
Control
PR
Mode：


motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th
Address: 0592H
0593H
Interface：
Default： 2300.0 23000
Control
PR
Mode：
motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s

th
Address: 0594H
0595H
Interface：
Default： 2500.0 25000
Control
PR
Mode：
motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th
Address: 0596H
0597H
Interface：
Default： 3000.0 30000
Control
PR
Mode：


motor: 0.1 ~ 6000.0 motor: 1 ~ 60000
motor: 1~15999999 motor: 1~15999999
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
motor: 1000.0 = motor: 10000 =
0.01m/s 0.01m/s
th
Address: 0598H
P5-76★ CPRS CAPTURE－First Position Reset Data
0599H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -1073741824 ~ +1073741823
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Please refer to the description of P5-39 X 1
The Position of Synchronous Capture Address: 059AH

P5-77■ CSAX
Axis (CAP SYNC AXES) 059BH
Interface：
Default： 0

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The position of this axis will synchronize with CAP signal. That is
to say, when activating CAP every two times, the motor moving
distance of this axis is the value of P5-78. (There is no
accumulative error and only in single-way operation) The
synchronous capture axis can be the source of Master.
The Interval Pulse Number between Each Address: 059CH

P5-78 CSDS
Synchronous Capture Axis 059DH
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 10 ~ +100000000
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： It is the moving distance of synchronous capture axis between
two CAP actions.
The new value can be written into the parameter not until CAP is
disabled (P5-39, X0=0).
Error Pulse Number of Synchronous Address: 059EH

P5-79■ CSDS
Capture Axis 059FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse unit of capture axis
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
Settings： When synchronous capture axis is operating, the synchronous
error should be 0. This parameter shows this error value. The
followings are its concept:
Synchronous Error ＝ Output value of synchronous axis－
Setting value of synchronous axis
＝ the accumulative amount of P5-77－
(P5-78 x Capturing number of times)
When capturing the data, the synchronous axis works normally.
This parameter updates once.
This parameter can be written into as well. It indicates the offset of
synchronous master. When the synchronous capture axis is
regarded as the master of flying shear, modify this parameter can
deviate the cutting position to the left/right.
Max. Correction Rate of Synchronous Address: 05A0H

P5-80 CSDS
Capture Axis 05A1H
Interface：
Default： 10
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~ 90
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： This parameter limits the percentage (%) of synchronous
adjustment.
The bigger correction rate, the faster the synchronous error

becomes 0. However, the speed changing will be more severe.
The smaller correction rate, the slower the synchronous error
becomes 0. However, the speed changing will be more smooth.
In the application of flying shear, after adjusting the synchronous
error, P5-79: the bigger parameter value will reduce the time the
slave axis goes to the desired position. However, the speed is not
synchronized.

Address: 05A2H
P5-81 ECHD E-CAM: Start Address of Data Array
05A3H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ (800－P5-82)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The first data of E-Cam table is saved in the address of data
array.
NOTE This parameter can be set anytime, but will be effective only when
pre-engaged → engaged.
Address: 05A4H
P5-82 ECMN E-CAM: Area Number N (at least >=5)
05A5H
Interface：
Default： 5
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 5 ~ 720, must < = (P5-10－P5-81)
And P5-82 x P5-84 ＜＝ 2147483647
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： It means the E-Cam curve is divided into N area, and the table
should include N+1 data.
NOTE This parameter can be wrote when E-Cam stops (Please refer
toP5-88, X=0).
Address: 05A6H
P5-83 ECMM E-CAM: Master Gear Ratio Setting M
05A7H
Interface：
Default： 1

Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 1 ~ 32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When receiving pulse number P of the Master, E-Cam will rotate
M circle, which means the M cycle of the E-Cam table.
toP5-88, X=0).
Address: 05A8H
P5-84 ECMP E-CAM: Master Gear Ratio Setting P
05A9H
Interface：
Default： 3600
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 10 ~ 1073741823,
and P5-82 x P5-83 ＜＝ P5-84
and P5-82 x P5-84 ＜＝ 2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When receiving pulse number P of the Master, E-Cam will rotate
M circle, which means the M cycle of the E-Cam table.
toP5-88, X=0).
This parameter can be modified anytime, and has no limit that
mentioned above.
Address: 05AAH
P5-85 ECME E-CAM: Number of Area
05ABH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -

Range： 0 ~ (P5-82－1)
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The area number of E-cam when E-cam engaged.
Address: 05ACH
P5-86■ ECAX E-CAM: Master Axis Position
05ADH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： The position counter of the E-Cam Master
toP5-88, X=0).
Address: 05AEH
P5-87 PLED E-CAM: Lead Pulse
05AFH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -1073741824 ~ +1073741823
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When the engaging condition (P5-88.Z) of E-cam is satisfied, the
pulse number from the master has to exceed the setting value of
this parameter, so that E-cam is fully engaged.
In other words, E-cam engages after neglecting the lead pulse
specified by this parameter.

If the symbol of this parameter is + , it means the received forward

pulse is regarded as the lead pulse.
If the symbol of this parameter is - , it means the received reverse
pulse is regarded as the lead pulse.
Address: 05B0H
P5-88■ ECON E-CAM: Activate E-Cam Control
05B1H
Operation Related Section:
al Panel / Software Communication 7.11
Interface：
Default： 00000000h
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0 ~ 0x203FF251
Data
32bit
Size：
Format： HEX

Settings： The format of this parameter: (High word h) S0BA：(Low word L)

UZYX
Definition of each column is as follows:
 X: E-Cam command
Description of each bit:

X3 - -
X2 P5-19 is It is available after V1.038 sub48:
effective 0: P5-19 is effective after the next engage.
immediately 1: P5-19is effective immediately.
X1 E-Cam It is available after 1.038 sub29:
does not 0: E-Cam does not work
disengage 1: When E-Cam stops because of alarm
when Servo or Servo Off, it can keep in engaged
OFF status. When re-servo on, E-cam can
operate directly. It can return to the
correct position by macro #D.
X0 E-Cam is 0: E-Cam is disabled
enabled 1: E-Cam is enabled (E-CAM is enabled
while other functions cannot be
modified.)
 Y: Command source
0: CAP axis
1: AUX ENC
2: Pulse Cmd
3: PR command
4: Time Axis (1ms)
5: Synchronous Capture Axis (P5-77)
6: Analog channel 1 (virtual axis, Unit: 1M pulse/s /10V)
 Z: Engaging Time (No multiple choice)
0: Immediately
1: DI.CAM ON
2: Any one of the Capture

 U: Disengaging Condition (2, 4 and 6 cannot be selected at the

same time)
U Disengaged Condition Action after disengaged
0 Never disengaged －
1 DI.CAM is OFF In STOP status
2 Master axis receives the pulse number
which is set by P5-89 and stops
immediately. (The symbol represents the
direction)
6 (It is available after firmware version
V1.009) In STOP status
Same as 2, the E-cam starts to
decelerate when disengaging. It is
suitable for the application of calling the
next PR position command right after
disengaged.
4 (It is available after firmware version
Back to the pre-engage
V1.009)
status
Master axis exceeds the setting value of
The lead pulse is P5-92
P5-89 (Sign indicates the direction)
8 When U = 1, 2 or 6: Set X to 0
Disable E-Cam after it is disengaged.
When U = 4: N/A
To avoid jittering when it returns to lead
status.
The servo is Off, when ALM or forward/reverse limit occur or PR
NOTE
is doing homing procedure, it disengages (P5-88, X = 0)
 BA: When disengaging condition is statisfied (P5-88, U＝2, 4,
6), a PR 00~63 (hexadecimal; 00 means no action) will
automatically be executed.
 S:Shows the engage status (Read-only, the setting is invalid)
0: Stop
1: Engage status
2: Pre-engage status
Address: 05B2H
P5-89 ECRD E-CAM: Information of Disengaging Time
05B3H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -1073741824 ~ +1073741823
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Settings： (Please refer to the definition of P5-88 U setting value 2)
Address: 05B4H
P5-90 CMAP E-CAM: AREA No.＋The Point of DO ON
05B5H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： Angle (It was changed after firmware
V1.009)
Range： 0 ~ 360
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When E-cam is engaged, set the start angle of DO output (DO.
CAM_AREA).
Address: 05B6H
P5-91 CMAN E-CAM: AREA No. - The Point of DO OFF
05B7H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： Angle
Range： 0 ~ 360
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： When E-cam is engaged, set the end angle of DO output (DO.
CAM_AREA).
Address: 05B8H
P5-92 PLED E-CAM: Pre-engaged Time of Each Cycle
05B9H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -

Range： -100000000 ~ +100000000

Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： This parameter goes with the selection of P5-88, U=4 (E-cam will
disengage if it exceeds the moving distance):
After disengaging, it does not enter the Stop status but
pre-engaged status. The lead pulse is determined by this
parameter.
The pulse number sent by the Master must exceed the setting
value of this parameter so that E-cam will engage again.
In other words, E-cam will engage not until the lead pulse is
ignored.
If the symbol of this parameter is ＋, it means the received
positive pulse will be regarded as the lead pulse.
If the symbol of this parameter is －, it means the received
negative pulse will be regarded as the lead pulse.
Motion Control Macro Command: Address: 05BAH

P5-93 CSDS
Command Parameter # 4 05BBH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Before issuing the macro command, the relevant parameters # 4
must be set in advance.
The function of the parameter is determined by the macro
command. Not every macro command has its relevant
parameters.
Motion Control Macro Command: Address: 05BCH

P5-94 CSDS
Command Parameter # 3 05BDH
Interface：
Default： 0

Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
parameters.
Motion Control Macro Command: Address: 05BEH

P5-95 CSDS
Command Parameter # 2 05BFH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
parameters.
Motion Control Macro Command: Address: 05C0H

P5-96 CSDS
Command Parameter # 1 05C1H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
parameters.
Motion Control Macro Command: Issue Address: 05C2H

P5-97■ CSDS
Command / Executing Result 05C3H
Interface：
Default： 100
Control
ALL
Mode：
Unit： Pulse
Range： 0 ~ 0x0999
Data Size： 16 bit
Format： HEX
Settings： Write-in: It is used to issue the macro command (0CBAh)
Read: It is used to examine the execution result of macro
command (If success, the result will be sent back to
1CBAh).
If the command issues 0001, 1001h will be sent back when
success; and Fxxxh when failed (depending on the command
description).
If issuing the command that is not supported, the failure code
F001h will be sent back.

The provided command code is as the followings.
Command code Motion parameter protection: password setting,

0003h protection activation
Macro parameters P5-94= Protection level of data array (0~7)
P5-95= Set new password (1~16777215)
P5-96= Confirm new password (1~16777215)
Among them:
For success setting, the setting of P5-95 must
equal to P5-96 and the password must be set
within the allowable range.
This function can be executed before activating the function of
parameter protection.
If the protection function is activated, when repeatly execute this
function, the failure code will be sent back.
Failure code Protection function has been activated and
F031h cannot be set repeatly.
Failure code Wrong password setting: P5-95 not equals to
F032h P5-96.
Failure code Password setting exceeds the allowable range

F033h (1~16777215).
Failure code The protection level, P5-94 exceeds the
F034h allowable range (0~7).
Success code
1003h
Command code Motion parameter protection: unlock the

0004h protection
Macro parameters P5-96= enter the password (1~16777215)
This function can be executed when activating the function of

parameter protection.
If the protection function is unlocked, repeatly execute this function
will sent back the failure code.
If entering the wrong password, failure code Ennn will be sent back.
nnn means the rest decode number. It will be minused one number
after one failure. When the number is 0, it will be locked for good.
Failure code Protection function is unlocked and it cannot
F041h repeatly unlock.
Failure code The password setting exceed the allowable
F043h range (1~16777215)
Failure code The number of times of entering wrong
F044h
password exceeds the limit: Lock for good.
Reset the parameter (P2-08=10) to unlock it is
the only method. However, all parameter will
return to the default value.
Failure code Incorrect password setting: Failed to unlock.
Ennnh nnn: the rest decode number. It will be minused
one number after one failure. When the number
is 0, it will be locked for good.
Success code
1004h

Command Build up E-Cam table: flying shear, including synchronous

code 0006h area (7 areas)
General P5-81= Address of table (Data array)
parameters P5-82 = 7 (This macro is fixed to 7 areas)
P1-44, P1-45 = E-gear ratio (it has to be setup in advance)
Macro P5-94 = A (Deceleration ratio: numerator) x C (Number of
parameters cutter)
P5-95= B (Deceleration ratio: denominator)
P5-96= 1000000 x R x V
Among them:
R (cutting ratio) = L (cutting length)／ℓ (Girth of cutter)
Allowable cutting ratio: (0.3 ~ 2.5) times
Ｖ (Speed factor) ＝ target cutting speed ／ speed of
delivered product
V=1.0: When cutting, the speed of cutter is the same as the
product
V=1.1: When cutting, the speed of cutter is 10% faster than
the product
V=0.9: When cutting, the speed of cutter is 10% slower than
the product
This macro will calculate the data of E-Cam table according to the above
mentioned parameters, and store in data array which designated by
P5-81.Parameters listed above are related to E-Cam table calculation.
Please correctly setup those parameters before executing this macro.
After this macro is executed, if the above parameters has been changed, it
has to recreate the E-Cam table and this macro will have to be executed
again. Data in E-Cam table will be changed after executing this macro,
thus, do not execute it when E-Cam is in engaged status.
In E-Cam application, parameters, such as P5-83 and P5-84 that are not
related to this macro are not listed here. Users could setup parameters
according to the real application. Please refer to Chapter 7, sections about
E-Cam.
After executing this macro, E-Cam table will not be saved to EEPROM
automatically.
Failure code When creating the table, E-Cam is in engaged status.
F061h
Failure code The setting value of P5-94 exceeds the range: (1 ~ 65535)
F062h
Failure code The setting value of P5-95 exceeds the range: (1 ~ 65535)
F063h
Failure code The setting value of P5-96 exceeds the range: (300000 ~
F064h 2500000)
Failure code The address specified by P5-81is too long and the space of
F065h data array is not enough.
Failure code The setting value of P5-82 should be set to 7. Otherwise the
F066h command cannot be executed.

Failure code Data calculation error. Please decrease the setting

F067h value of (P1-44,P1-45) and keep the proportion will do.
Command Create E-Cam table: Flying cut

code 0007h
General P5-81 = Address of table (data array)
parameters P5-82 = N (30~72) (Area number of E-Cam)
P1-44, P1-45 = E-gear ration (has to be setup first)
Macro P5-93.H16 (high 16-bit) = S
parameters P5-93.L16 (low 16-bit) = W
Among them:
S (curve level) = 1~4 levels
W (degree of waiting area) = -1~170 degrees
W = -1 is available in firmware version V1.038 (sub29)
(or the later version)
P5-94 = Y (degree of synchronous area) = 0~330 degrees
P5-95.H16 (high 16-bit) = A x C

P5-95.L16 (low 16-bit) = B
Among them:
A (Deceleration ratio: numerator), C (Number of cutter)
B (Deceleration ratio: denominator)
P5-96 = 1000000 x R x V
Among them:
R (cutting ratio)
= L (target cutting length)／ ℓ (Length of cutter)
Allowable cutting ratio: (0.05 ~ 5.0) times
V (speed factor) = target cutting speed ／ speed of

delivered product
V=1.0: When cutting, the speed of cutter is the same as the
product
V=1.1: When cutting, the speed of cutter is 10% faster than
the product
V=0.9: When cutting, the speed of cutter is 10% slower than
the product

Note:
Ｗ´ = 180 + 360/N – 360/R + Y/2
When
1. P5-93.L16 ＜Ｗ´, E-cam table is in error (failure code F07Ah)
2. P5-93.L16 ＝Ｗ´, the initial speed is 0 in E-Cam table
3. P5-93.L16 ＞Ｗ´, the initial speed > 0 in E-Cam table
This macro will calculate the data of E-Cam table according to the above
mentioned parameters, and store in data array which designated by
P5-81.Parameters listed above are related to E-Cam table calculation.
Please correctly setup those parameters before executing this macro.
After this macro is executed, if the above parameters have been changed, it
has to recreate the E-Cam table and this macro will have to be executed
again. Data in E-Cam table will be changed after executing this macro,
thus, do not execute it when E-Cam is in engaged status.
In E-Cam application, parameters, such as P5-83 and P5-84 that are not
related to this macro are not listed here. Users could setup parameters
according to the real application. Please refer to Chapter 7, sections about
After executing this macro, E-Cam table will not be saved to EEPROM
automatically.
Failure code When creating the table, E-Cam is in engaged status.
F071h
Failure code P5-94 degree of synchronous area exceeds the range: (0
F072h ~ 330)
Failure code P5-93.H16 curve level exceeds the range: (1 ~ 4)
F073h
Failure code P5-93.L16 degree of waiting area exceeds the range: (0
F074h ~ 170)
Failure code The setting value of P5-96 exceeds the range: (50000 ~
F075h 5000000)
Failure code P5-82 area number of E-Cam exceeds the range: (30 ~
F076h 72)
Failure code The address specified by P5-81is too long and the space
F077h of data array is not enough.
Failure code Data calculation error. Please decrease the setting value
F078h of (P1-44,P1-45) and keep the proportion will do.
Failure code Acceleration degree is too small, then please decrease
F079h the value of waiting area (W), synchronous area (Y) or
curve level (S).
Failure code Waiting area is too small, then please increase the value
F07Ah of acceleration area (W) or decrease the value of
synchronous area (Y)

Command code E-Cam curve scaling (P5-19) is effective immediately

0008h
Macro N/A
parameters
This macro can be triggered when E-cam is engaged. P5-19 is effective
immediately.
Usually, E-Cam scaling is only changed by P5-19 when it entering the
engaged condition (see transition 3). It cannot be changed in engaged
condition. E-Cam scaling only can be changed after one E-Cam cycle so as
to make sure the E-Cam can return to the original position without
accumulative error.
Engaged: 1 Stop: 0
P5-19 is loaded into
E-Cam scaling Lead: 2
In application, two ways can change the setting of E-Cam curve scaling.
1. P5-88.X2 = 1:
When E-Cam is engaged, setup this bit at the same time. Function of
P5-19 will be enabled immediately.
2. Use macro#8:
Everytime when this macro command is triggered, function of P5-19 will
be enabled. However, if the value of P5-19 is changed and this marco is
not triggered, function of P5-19 will not be enabled. This macro
command has to be triggered again.
Failure code N/A

Command code Change position X, where E-Cam is engaged:

000Ch E-Cam disengages after rotating one cycle at
forward direction.
General N/A
parameters
Macro P5-93 = New engaged position X. Unit: pulse
parameters number of master axis.
Monitor variable 062(3Eh): It displays the current
engaged position (X) of master axis.
This macro command can change the engaged position even when
E-Cam is engaged. It will automatically calculate the residual engaged
length. E-Cam will disengage after rotating one cycle at forward
direction. Users have to set P5-88.U to 2, 4, 6, otherwise, the E-cam will
not disengage.
E-Cam will disengage when alarm occurs or the power supply is cut off.
If users desire E-Cam to re-engage at the last disengaged position and
continue its operation, it is recommended to record the disengaged
position (X) and resume the operation by this macro command. Please
note that when E-Cam is disengaged, the servo position might slightly
shift and therefore cause position error when E-Cam re-engages again.
The Engaged direction is in forward direction (Master axis operates at

forward direction):
When E-Cam operates one cycle, the pulse number of

master axis is: (P5-84／P5-83)
Slave
Axis
Position
(Y)
Master Axis Position (X)

Assign new position
Residual Engaged Length (the
P5-93
value will be calculated
automatically)
Note: When using this macro command, it would be better to execute

this command before operate the master axis.
Failure code When executing this macro command, E-Cam is not
F0C1h in engaged status.
To modify the engaged position only when E-Cam is
engaged.
Failure code The setting value of P5-93 is in error. The value
F0C2h cannot less than 0. It should > = 0.
Failure code The setting value of P5-93 is in error. The value has
F0C3h to less than the value of (P5-84 / P5-83)

Command code Calculate the error between E-Cam and indexing

000Dh coordinates for PR positioning.
General N/A
Parameters
Macro Parameters P5-93.Low_Word = DCBA: UZYX (8 digits, HEX)
YX (PR number) = 0~0x3F (it is invalid when the value
is set to 0)
UZ: The value has to be set to 0.
BA (Function of P5-95):
0 (Use avoid point)，
1 (Use available forward rate, V1.038 sub53)
DC (Inhibit reverse rotation):
0 (invalid),
1(Inhibit reverse rotation, V1.038 sub53)
P5-95: Avoid point (cannot pass this point) = 0 ~ 100

(%) of E-Cam cycle or available forward rate 0 ~ 100
(%)
Monitor variable 091(5Bh): It displays the current indexing coordinate
position (PUU)
When E-Cam is engaged, and the motor is stopped because of Servo Off or
alarm occurs, it would cause position error between the actual position and
E-Cam position. After re-servo On, this macro command can be used to
calculate the correction value and write the value into the specified PR for
incremental positioning. So that the motor can return to the ideal E-Cam
position.
When using this macro command:

1. P5-88.X1 = 1 to make E-Cam keep engaging when servo Off and
continue to calculate E-Cam position.
2. The hight of
indexing coordinate and E-Cam coordinate should be the same: P2-52=
ECAM_H (The moving distance when E-cam operates one cycle)
3. E-Cam table scaling (P5-19) must be 1.0 time
4. When E-Cam is engaged for the first time, 0 degree of E-cam should
aim at 0 degree of indexing coordinate.
A cycle of E-Cam A cycle of indexing

Slave
Axis
Position
(Y)
0°
0° 360°
Indexing coordinates
E-Cam table
Note 1: ECAM_H (height of E-Cam table) = E-Cam table (last point - first poinst)
Note 2: Indexing coordinate = (absolute coordinates／P2-52) take remainder.
Note 3: Use PR command for incremental positioning control.

When motor moves from the current position to the target position, it can
operate at forward or reverse direction. Duing to the cyclic operation, the
motor will travel to the specified position either at forward or reverse
direction. However, the moving distance is different between both. Use
avoid point to plan the timing of forward and reverse rotation.
＊Avoid point: the point that cannot be past by the planned PR.
: E-Cam current position
: E-Cam avoid point Θ, which is set by P5-95
Θ = 360° x P5-95 %
0°
Cannot pass
Actual traveling distance
Failure code E-Cam is not engaged when executing this macro

F0D1h command. E-Cam should be engaged.
Failure code The value of P5-93.YX (PR number) exceeds the
F0D2h range: 1 ~ 0x3F
Failure code The value of P5-95 (available forward rate) exceeds
F0D3h the range: 0 ~ 100 (%)
Failure code The position correction value does not exist. This
F0D5h macro command might be triggered twice.
Failure code When re-servo On, E-cam is not engaged.
F0D6h
Failure code The height (Y axis) of E-Cam table is not equal to the
F0D7h value of P2-52.
Failure code P5-19 is not equal to 1
F0D8h
Failure code P5-93.BA, P5-95 exceeds the range: 0 ~ 1
F0D9h
Failure code The setting value of P5-93.DC (reverse inhibit)
F0DAh exceeds the range: 0 ~ 1
Failure code The function of reverse inhibit has failed. Do not use
F0DBh macro command #D, #10h consecutively.

Command code Perform E-Cam alignement immediately and write the

000Eh correction value into the specified PR.
Macro parameters P5-93 = DCBA：UZYX (8 digits, HEX)
YX (PR number) = 0~0x3F, it is invalid when the value
is set to 0.
UZ (Max. alignment correction rate) = 0~0x64 (%)
A (Trigger the specified PR directly) = 1: On, 0: Off
DCB = has to be set to 0
P5-94 (DI delay time compensation) = -25000 ~
+25000; Unit: usec.
P5-95 (available forward rate) = 0 ~ 100 (%)
P5-96 (target position of alignement Ｘ); Unit: pulse
number of master axis = 0 ~ (P5-84/P5-83) – 1.
Monitor variable 062(3Eh): It displays the current engaged position of
master axis (X)
This macro command can move the engaged position to the alignment
target position (X) when E-Cam is engaged. And write the alignment
correction value into the specified PR.
During E-Cam operation (When E-Cam is engaged), if desire to quickly
align the E-cam position to the mechanical referral point, sensor can be
used to trigger DI.EVx to execute this macro command.
After E-Cam alignment is completed, the engaged position will move to the
new position. The excess or not enough moving distance after E-Cam
operates one cycle is called alignment correction value. It will be written into
PR specified by P5-93.YX. PR incremental command can be used to
compensate this value so that the slave axis position will remain and offset
the phase of E-Cam to align the referral position of machine. For some
applications, set value of P5-93.YX to 0 will do. Please note that PR can be
executed only when triggering the host controller.
Pulse number of master axis after rotating a cycle: (P5-84/P5-83) =

Slave L
axis
position
Alignment correction
(Y)
value = Y_Diff
Master axis position (X)
Current engaged Alignment target position
position P5-96
＊P5-93.UZ is able to limit the max. correction rate. The alignment target position
★ will be different from P5-96.
｜alignment target position★ – current engaged position｜ / L <= P5-93.UZ %
＊DI time delay compensation can be set via P5-94, it can correct the error caused
by different speed of motion.

When E-Cam moves from current position to the target one, it can rotates at
forward or reverse position. Duing to the cyclic operation, it can reach the
target position either at forward or reverse direction. However, the moving
distance between both is usually different. Use available forward rate to
plan the timing of forward and reverse rotation.
＊Avaliable forward rate: The available max. proportion of forward path

: Max. forward rotation limit. Counterclockwise represents
forward direction in the figure.
: Target position is within the range; going trip is at forward
direction
: Target position is within the range; going trip is at reverse
direction.
Avaliable forward rate ＝0% (0°), reverse path only
Avaliable forward rate＝25%, the available max. path is

+90°

+180°

+270°
Avaliable forward rate＝100% (360°), forward path

only
Failure code When executing this macro, E-Cam is not engaged.

F0E1h E-Cam has to engage to execute alignment correction.
Failure code The setting value of P5-93.YX (PR number) exceeds
F0E2h the range: 0 ~ 0x3F
Failure code The setting value of P5-93.UZ (Max. alignment
F0E3h correction rate) exceeds the range: 0~0x64 (％)

Failure code The setting value of P5-94 (DI delay time

F0E4h compensation) exceeds the range: -10000 ~ +10000
Failure code The setting value of P5-95 (Avaliable forward rate)
F0E5h exceeds the rnage: 0 ~ 100 (%)
Failure code The setting value of P5-96 (alignment target position)
F0E6h exceeds the range: 0 ~ (P5-84/P5-83) - 1
Command code Calculate the moving distance between current and

000Fh target position of E-Cam for PR positioning.
General N/A
parameters
Macro parameters P5-93.Low_Word = UZYX (4 digits, HEX)
YX (PR number of going trip) = 0~0x3F, it is invalid if
the value is set to 0.
UZ (PR number of return trip) = 0~0x3F, it is invalid if
the value is set to 0.
P5-93.Hi_Word = it has to be set to 0
P5-95 (Avaliable forward rate) = 0 ~ 100 (%)

P5-96 (target positionＸ); Unit: pulse number of master
axis = 0 ~ (P5-84/P5-83) - 1
Monitor variable 062(3Eh): It displays the current engaged position (X) of
master axis.
This macro command calculates the moving distance between current and
target engaged position (X) and write into the specified PR.
During E-Cam operation, if users desire to move the slave axis to the
specified position when master axis stops and still in engaged status, this
macro command can calculates the correct moving distance (Y_Drift) of
going trip for PR positioning.
When master axis resumes the operation, use another PR to run the
moving distance of return trip (-Y_Drift), it can back to the original position
(moving distance of going trip + moving distance of return trip = 0). E-Cam
position remains the same.
Slave Pulse command when master axis operates a cycle: (P5-84/P5-83)

axis
position Moving distance of
(Y) going trip = Y_Drift
Master axis position (X)

Current engaged Target position
position P5-96
Note: PR command must be the incremental command, regardless in going trip or
return trip.

When E-Cam moves from current position to the target one, it can rotates at
forward or reverse position. Duing to the cyclic operation, it can reach the
target position either at forward or reverse direction. However, the moving
distance between both is usually different. Use available forward rate to plan
the timing of forward and reverse rotation.
＊Avaliable forward rate: The available max. proportion of forward path

: Max. forward rotation limit. Counterclockwise represents
forward direction in the figure.
: Target position is within the range; going trip is at forward
direction
: Target position is within the range; going trip is at reverse
direction.
Avaliable forward rate = 0% (0°), reverse path only
Avaliable forward rate = 25%, the available max. path is

+90°

+180°

+270°
Avaliable forward rate = 100% (360°), forward path

only

Failure code When executing this macro, E-Cam is not engaged.

F0F1h E-Cam has to engage to change the engaged position.
Failure code The setting value of P5-93.YX (PR number of going
F0F2h trip) exceeds the range: 0 ~ 0x3F
Failure code The setting value of P5-93.UZ (PR number of return
F0F3h trip) exceeds the range: 0 ~ 0x3F
Failure code The setting value of P5-95 (Avaliable forward rate)
F0F5h exceeds the range: 0 ~ 100 (％)
Failure code The setting value of P5-96 (target position) exceeds
F0F6h the range: 0 ~ (P5-84/P5-83) - 1

Command code E-Cam stops for one cycle and resumes its operation at next cycle.
0010h
General N/A
parameters
Macro Value of P5-93 has to be set to 0.
parameters
After E-Cam is engaged, this macro command can stop the slave axis for a cycle of
distance regardless the E-Cam degree.
The following conditions have to be established when using this macro command.
1. E-Cam must be in engaged status.
2. E-Cam must be the forward operation curve (including straight line) so it can stop
temporally.
Refer to the figure below, triggering this macro command, E-Cam will stop for one
cycle regardless the degree (X) where E-Cam is.
E-Cam operates ECAM_H

Slave one cycle
axis
position E-Cam stops for E-Cam continues
(PUU) ECAM_H a cycle its operation
0° 360° X° X+360°
Degree (°) of
master axis Trigger this macro
command
Note 1: ECAM_H (E-Cam pause distance) = table (last point – first point) x P5-19 (the
effective scaling)
Note 2: This function can accumulate times. If the command is triggered for N times
consecutively, it will stop the E-Cam for N cycles. The accumulated pause distance
cannot exceed (>2^31), or the macro command will be disabled.
Note 3: When E-Cam resumes the operation, the accumulated pause distance will be cleared
to 0.
Failure code When executing this macro command, E-Cam is not engaged.
F101h
Failure code The setting value of P5-93 is incorrect: It has to be set to 0.
F102h
Failure code E-Cam has to operate at forward direction. Please check the
F103h E-Cam table and make sure P5-19 > 0.
Failure code The accumulated pause distance exceeds 2^31. Do not execute
F104h this macro command consecutively.

Address: 05C4H
P5-98 EVON PR# Triggered by Event Rising-Edge
05C5H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0000 ~ 0xDDDD
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings： Four items: UZYX
When EVx is set to ON, the PR# will be executed.
X=0: When EV1 is ON, PR will not be triggered.
X=1~D: When EV1 is ON, execute PR # 51~63.
Y=0: When EV2 is ON, PR will not be triggered.
Y=1~D: When EV2 is ON, execute PR # 51~63.
Note: EV3 and EV4 are supported after firmware V1.009.
Z=0: When EV3 is ON, PR will not be triggered.

Z=1~D: When EV3 is ON, execute PR # 51~63.
U=0: When EV3 is ON, PR will not be triggered.
U=1~D: When EV4 is ON, execute PR # 51~63.
Address: 05C6H
P5-99 EVOF PR# Triggered by Event Falling-Edge
05C7H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0000 ~ 0xDDDD
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX

Settings： Four items: UZYX

When EVx is set to OFF, the PR# will be executed.
X=0: When EV1 is OFF, PR will not be triggered.
X=1~D: When EV1 is OFF, execute PR # 51~63.
Y=0: When EV2 is OFF, PR will not be triggered.
Y=1~D: When EV2 is OFF, execute PR # 51~63.
Note: EV3 and EV4 are supported after firmware V1.009.
Z=0: When EV3 is OFF, PR will not be triggered.
Z=1~D: When EV3 is OFF, execute PR # 51~63.
U=0: When EV4 is OFF, PR will not be triggered.
U=1~D: When EV4 is OFF, execute PR # 51~63.

P6-xx PR Parameters (Please refer to Chapter 7 for detailed setting)

Address: 0600H
P6-00 ODEF Homing Definition
0601H
Operational Related Section;
Interface：
Default： 0x00000000
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： 0x00000000 ~ 0x10FFFF3F
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings： Homing definition:
31 ~ 27 ~ 23 ~
2B 3B 4B 19 ~
5B 15 ~ 11 ~ 8
6B 7~4 3~0
28 24 20 16 12 BIT
BOOT - DLY - DEC1 ACC0B PATH
 PATH: Path type (4 bit)
0: Stop: Homing complete and stop
1 ~ 63: Auto: Homing complete and execute the specified
path
 ACC: Select 0~F for acceleration time and corresponds to
P5-20~P5-35.
 DEC1: The deceleration time seletion of 1st homing,
the setting value of DEC is 0~F and corresponds to
P5-20 ~ P5-35.
 DLY: Select 0~F for the delay time and corresponds to P5-40
~ P5-55
 BOOT: When the servo drive applies to the power, if it will be
executed searching the origin.
0: Do not do homing
1: Execute homing automatically (SRV ON for the first time
after applying to power)

 Apart from the above mentioned definition, the related setting

of homing also includes:
1. P5-04 Homing mode
2. P5-05 ~ P5-06 Speed setting of searching the origin
3. P6-01: ORG_DEF is the location of the origin. It may not
be 0. This function is the offset of coordinate
system.
A. After the origin is found (Sensor or Z), it has to decelerate
to stop. The stop position will exceed the origin for a
short distanct.
If it does not return to the origin, set PATH to 0.
If it needs to return to the origin, set PATH to non-zero
value and set PABS = ORG_DEF.
B. If the origin is found (Sensor or Z), desire to move an
offset S and define the coordinate as P after moving,
then PATH = non-zero and set ORG_DEF = P-S. The
absolute position command = P.
Address: 0602H
P6-01 ODAT Origin Definition
0603H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Value of origin definition:
31 ~7B 27 ~ 8B 23 ~ 9B 19 ~ 15 ~ 11 ~ 8
10B 11B 7~4 3~0
28 24 20 16 12 BIT
ORG_DEF (32 bit)
Address: 0604H
P6-02 PDEF1 PATH#1 Definition
0605H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：

Unit： -
Range： 0x00000000 ~ 0xFFFFFFFF
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Settings： Properties of PATH# 1:
31 ~ 27 ~ 23 ~ 19 ~ 15 ~ 11 ~ 8 7 ~ 4 3 ~ 0
12B 13B 14B 15B 16B
28 24 20 16 12 BIT
P6-02 - - DLY - - - OPT TYPE
P6-03 DATA (32 bit)
 TYPE, OPT:
OPT TYPE
7 6 5 4 BIT 3 ~ 0 BIT
- UNIT AUTO INS 1: SPEED, Speed setting control
22B
2: SINGLE, Positioning control. It

will load in the next path when
finished.
CMD OVLP INS
3: AUTO positioning control. It will
23B
load in the next path when

finished.
- - - INS 7: JUMP to the specified path
8: Write the specified parameter
- - AUTO INS
to the specified path
 TYPE: 1 ~ 3 accept DO.STP stop and software limit.
 INS: When executing this PR, it interrupts the previous one.
 OVLP: Allow the overlap of the next path. The overlap is not
allowed in speed mode. When overlap happens in position
mode, DLY has no function.
 AUTO: When PR procedure completes, the next
procedure will be loaded in automatically.
 CMD: Refer to Chapter 7 for PR command description.
 DLY: 0 ~ F, delay time number (4 BIT). The delay after
executing this PR. The external INS is invalid.
DLY (4)
24B Index P5-40 ~ P5-55
Address: 0606H
P6-03 PDAT1 PATH# 1 Data
0607H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -

Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647

Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings： PATH# 1 Data
31 ~ 27 ~ 23 ~19 ~ 15 ~ 3~0
11 ~ 8 7 ~ 4
17B 18B 19B 20B 21B
28 24 20 16 12 BIT
DATA (32 bit)
Property of P6-02; P6-03 corresponds to the target position of
P6-02 or jump to PATH_NO.
NOTE PATH (procedure)
Address: 0608H
P6-04 PDEF2 PATH# 2 Definition
0609H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 060AH
060BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Address: 060CH
060DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 060EH
060FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0610H
0611H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX

Address: 0612H
0613H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0614H
0615H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0616H
0617H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647

Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
Address: 0618H
0619H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 061AH
061BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 061CH
061DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：

Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 061EH
061FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0620H
0621H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0622H
0623H
Interface：
Default： 0

Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0624H
0625H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0626H
0627H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Address: 0628H
0629H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 062AH
062BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 062CH
062DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX

Address: 062EH
062FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0630H
0631H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0632H
0633H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
Address: 0634H
0635H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0636H
0637H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0638H
0639H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -


Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 063AH
063BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 063CH
P6-30 PDEF15 PATH# 15Definition
063DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 063EH
063FH
Interface：
Default： 0

Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0640H
0641H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0642H
0643H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Address: 0644H
0645H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0646H
0647H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0648H
0649H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit

Format： HEX
Address: 064AH
064BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 064CH
064DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 064EH
064FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -

Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647

Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0650H
0651H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0652H
0653H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0654H
0655H
Interface：
Control PR

Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0656H
0657H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0658H
0659H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX

Address: 065AH
P6-45 PDAT22 PATH# 22Data
065BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 065CH
065DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 065EH
065FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
Address: 0660H
0661H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0662H
0663H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0664H
0665H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -


Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0666H
0667H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0668H
0669H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 066AH
066BH
Interface：
Default： 0

Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 066CH
066DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 066EH
066FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Address: 0670H
0671H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0672H
0673H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0674H
0675H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX

Address: 0676H
0677H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0678H
0679H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 067AH
067BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647

Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
Address: 067CH
067DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 067EH
067FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0680H
0681H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：

Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0682H
0683H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0684H
0685H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX

Address: 0686H
0687H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0688H
0689H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 068AH
068BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
Address: 068CH
068DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 068EH
068FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0690H
0691H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -


Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0692H
0693H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0694H
0695H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX

Address: 0696H
0697H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0698H
0699H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 069AH
069BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Address: 069CH
069DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 069EH
069FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 06A0H
06A1H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -

Data Size： 32bit

Format： HEX
Address: 06A2H
06A3H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 06A4H
06A5H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 06A6H
06A7H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：

Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 06A8H
06A9H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 06AAH
06ABH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Address: 06ACH
06ADH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 06AEH
06AFH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 06B0H
06B1H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit

Format： HEX
Address: 06B2H
06B3H
Operational Related SectionL
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 06B4H
06B5H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 06B6H
06B7H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -

Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647

Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 06B8H
06B9H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 06BAH
06BBH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Address: 06BCH
06BDH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 06BEH
06BFH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 06C0H
06C1H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX

Address: 06C2H
06C3H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 06C4H
06C5H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 06C6H
06C7H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647

Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC

P7-xx PR Parameters (Please refer to Chapter 7 for detailed setting)

Address: 0700H
0701H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
NOTE PATH (procedure)
Address: 0702H
0703H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0704H
0705H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -

Data Size： 32bit

Format： HEX
Address: 0706H
0707H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0708H
0709H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 070AH
070BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：

Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 070CH
070DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 070EH
070FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Address: 0710H
0711H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0712H
0713H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0714H
0715H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit

Format： HEX
Address: 0716H
0717H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0718H
0719H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 071AH
071BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -

Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647

Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 071CH
071DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 071EH
071FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Address: 0720H
0721H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0722H
0723H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0724H
0725H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit

Format： HEX
Address: 0726H
0727H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0728H
0729H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 072AH
072BH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -

Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647

Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 072CH
072DH
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 072EH
072FH
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

Address: 0730H
0731H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit
Format： HEX
Address: 0732H
0733H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Address: 0734H
0735H
Interface：
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Data Size： 32bit

Format： HEX
Address: 0736H
0737H
Interface：
Default： 0
Control
PR
Mode：
Unit： -
Range： -2147483648 ~ +2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC

PM-xx Motor Parameters

Address:
PM-00 Motor Type
Interface：
Default： 0
Control Mode： ALL
Unit： N/A
Range： 0~3
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： 0 = Surface-mounted permanent magnet synchronous rotary
motor (SPM); 2 = Permanent magnet synchrounous linear
motor (LM)
Automatic Identification of Motor Address:

PM-01
Parameter
Applicable Related Section: -
IM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit：
Range： 0~1
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
0 = disable the function
Settings：
1 = enable the function
Address:
PM-02 Confirmation of Motor Parameter
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit：
Range： 0~1

Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
0 = Motor parameter is invalid.
Settings：
1 = Motor parameter is valid.
When the drive is Servo On, if this parameter is disabled, an
alarm will occurs. When Automatic Identification of Motor
Parameter is completed, this bit is On automatically. Or, users
can self-define the motor parameter and enable this function.
Address:
PM-03 Encoder Type
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0x0100
Unit：
Range： 0 x0000~0x1311
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
The setting of signal type:

0 = Square wave digital signal
1 = Sinusoid analog signal
The setting of Hall sensor:

0 = without Hall sensor
1 = with Hall sensor
When selecting the setting without Hall sensor, the motor will
jitter to detect magnetic pole when servo On for the first time.
(it cannot work on Z axis with no spring or without balance.)

The filter setting of AB pulse from signal converter box:

0 = BYPASS
1 = 16M
2 = 8M
3 = 3M
Take pulse width 16Mhz(62.5ns) as the example,
62.5ns 62.5ns
When the width of single-phase pulse is smaller than 62.5ns,
the signal will be filtered.
The setting of signal source:

0 = comes from CN2
1 = comes from CN5
Address:
PM-04 Encoder Resolution
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 2500
Permanet magnet synchronous rotary
Unit：
motor:
pulse / rev (square wave digital siganl)
periods / rev (sinusoid analog signal)
Permanet magnet synchronous linear
motor:
10 5 m / pulse (square wave digital
siganl)
103 m / period (sinusoid analog
signal)
Range： 64~ 229  1
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-05 The Interpolation of Signal Converter Box
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：

Default： 11
Unit：
Range： 4~11
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-06 UVW Phase Sequence and Hall Sensor
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 00
Unit：
Range： 0 ~0x11
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
The relation between UVW phase sequence and encoder

0 = The scale direction and phase sequence of each U/V/W is

the same (see diagram below)
1 = The scale direction is opposite to UVW phase sequence

The relation between UVW phase sequence and Hall sensor

0: UVW phase sequence of Hall sensor is the same as the
motor’s.
1: UVW phase sequence of Hall sensor is opposite to the

motor’s

Address:
PM-07 Offset Angle of Hall Sensor
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 0.1° (electrical angle)
Range： 0 ~3600
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
U phase
Motor U phase
back EMF
PM-07
U phase of
Hall sensor
When hysteresis is caused by different moving direction of
motor, the original point of U phase of Hall sensor will base on
the center angle of hysteresis. (please refer to PM-08 for the
description of hysteresis).
Hysteresis Width of Hall Sensor Moving Address:

PM-08
Back and Forth
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 0.1°(electrical angle)
Range： 0 ~3600

Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
Settings：
Correction of Electrical Angle When Address:

PM-09
Reached Z Axis
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0x11
Unit：
Range： 0x00 ~ 0x11
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX

Settings：
X:
0: Disable the function of adjusting magnetic field via Z phase
1: Enable the function of adjusting magnetic field via Z phase
Y:
0: Disable the function. Use hall sensor to see if motor
magnetic field is deviated.
1: Enable the function. Use hall sensor to see if motor
magnetic field is deviated.
Address:
PM-10 Offset Angle of Z Signal
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 0.1°(electrical angle)
Range： 0 ~3600
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Current of Magnetic Field Detection When Address:

PM-11
Power On
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 100
Unit： %
Range： 0 ~300
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC

Settings： When PM-03.Y = 0, motor will detect motor magnetic field

automatically when applying to the power. The amount of
current is the same as the setting value. Followings are the
adjusting condition:
1. When the motor friction is too excessive, it easily cause
AL.052 duing to the wrong detection of magnetic field.
Increase the value can reduce the occurrence of Alarm
52.。
2. During the magnetic field detection, if the vibration is too
excessive, reduce the value of this parameter could reduce
the vibration.
※Please note that the magnetic field detection does not work
if Z axis has no spring or balance.
Condition of Magnetic Field Detection Address:

PM-12
When Power On
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 100
Unit： N/A
Range： 0X00 ~ 0XFF
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
X:
If the moving of motor magnetic field is more than X*0.25
degrees, the condition is established.
Y:
If the motor magnetic field should move more than Y*10
degrees, the condition is established.
When condition X and Y are both established, the detection of
motor magnetic field succeed.
When condition X or Y is not established, it will detect the
magnetic field by different angle. When the detection is failed
up to four times, AL.052 will occur.
PM-13 Reserved Address:

Address:
PM-15 Proportional Gain of Current Loop
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 0.001
SPM, IPM: 0~1023000
Range：
LM: 0~16383000
IM: 0~32767000
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-16 Integral Gain of Current Loop
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit：
SPM, IPM: 0~511
Range：
LM: 0~32767
IM: 0~4095
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：

Address:
PM-19 Overload Gain (Temperature Rises)
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 100
Unit： %
Range： 15~600
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Load Proportion Operation Time
0% -12sec × PM-20
20% -12.3sec ×PM-20
40% -13.6sec ×PM-20
60% -16.3sec ×PM-20
80% -22.6sec ×PM-20
100% N/A
120% 26.38sec ×PM-19
140% 35.2sec ×PM-19
160% 17.6sec ×PM-19
180% 11.2sec ×PM-19
200% 8sec ×PM-19
220% 6.1sec ×PM-19
240% 4.8sec ×PM-19
260% 3.9sec ×PM-19
280% 3.3sec ×PM-19
300% 2.8sec ×PM-19
320% 2.5sec ×PM-19
340% 2.2sec ×PM-19
360% 2.0sec ×PM-19
380% 1.8sec ×PM-19
400% 1.6sec ×PM-19
420% 1.4sec ×PM-19
440% 1.3sec ×PM-19
460% 1.2sec ×PM-19
480% 1.1sec ×PM-19
500% 1.0sec ×PM-19
Operation time indicates the time that protection level turns to
overload level from the normal one. When it turns to overload
level, the function of overload protection will be triggered.
Following is the example with 200% of current:

Motor current
Overload level
Protection level
200%
Normal level 0%
8sec*PM-19 12sec*PM-20
From the above figure, when motor outputs 200% of current,

the protection level will trun to overload level from the normal
one in 8*PM-19 seconds (the setting is accoding to the motor
that users select). When motor outputs no current, the motor
temperature drops to the normal level within 12*PM-20
seconds. That is to say, if users operate the motor by the
above pattern, it will not exceed the protection level. However,
if motor only generates no current in a short time, it will
exceed the protection level.
Address:
PM-20 Overload Gain (Temperature Falls)
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 100
Unit： %
Range： 15~600
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings： Please refer to PM-19
Address:
PM-21 Cogging Compensation
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0x1A00
Unit：

Range： 0x1100~0xAA11
Data Size： 16bit
Format： HEX
Settings：
COGGING compensation
1: Enable function of COGGING compensation
0: Disable function of COGGING compensation
Estimate COGGING torque

1: Enable COGGING torque estimation
0: Disable COGGING torque estimation
Estimate low-pass filter

1~A: 30~300HZ
Estimate high-pass filter

1~A: 0.5~5HZ
Address:
PM-22 Motor Temperature Sensor
ALL
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： N/A
Range： 0~3
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
0: Do not connect to motor temperature sensor
Settings：
1: NTC thermal resistor of Delta linear motor
3: Frequently-closed temperature switch
Wiring of CN5 temperature sensor:
Connect the two pin of temperature sensor to 13 pin and 14
pin respectively.

Address:
PM-23 Reserved
Address:
PM-24 Reserved
Address:
PM-25 Reserved
Address:
PM-26 Reserved (FOR BARCODE)
Address:
PM-27 Reserved (FOR BARCODE)
Address:
PM-28 PM Motor Poles
SPM, IPM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 10
Unit： pole
Range： 2~ 20
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-29 PM Motor Rated Current
SPMl, IPM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 30
Unit： 0.01A
Range： 0 ~ the rated current of servo drive
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：

Address:
PM-30 The Max. Current of PM Motor
SPM, IPM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0x0100
Unit： 0.01A
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-31 PM Motor Rated Speed
SPM, IPM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 3000
Unit： rpm
Range： 0 ~ 6000
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-32 The Max. Speed of PM Motor
SPM, IPM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 5000
Unit： rpm
Range： 0~6000
Data Size： 16bit

Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-33 PM Motor Torque (Force) Constant
SPM, IPM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 0.001Nm / A
Range： 0~13850
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-34 PM Motor Inertia
SPM, IPM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
7 2
Unit： 10 kg.m
Range： 0~2147483647
Data Size： 32bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-35 PM Motor Phase Resistance
SPM, IPM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 0.001ohm

Range： 0~15999
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-36 PM Motor Phase Inductance
SPM, IPM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 0.01mh
Range： 0~3200
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-38 PM Motor Back EMF Constant
SPM, IPM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 10 4 Volt/rpm
Range： 0~1209
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-39 Reserved

Address:
PM-40 Reserved
Address:
PM-41 Reserved
Address:
PM-42 Reserved
Address:
PM-43 Reserved
Address:
PM-44 Reserved
Address:
PM-45 Linear Motor Pole Pitch
LM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 0.1mm/360° (electrical angle)
Range： 0~32767
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-46 Linear Motor Rated Current
LM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 30
Unit： 0.01A
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：

Address:
PM-47 Max. Current of Linear Motor
LM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 100
Unit： 0.01A
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-48 Max. Speed of Linear Motor
LM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 5000
3
Unit： 10 m/s
Range： 0~15999
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-49 Force Constant of Linear Motor
LM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 0.01N / A
Range： 0~177362
Data Size： 32bit

Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-50 Linear Motor Phase Resistance
LM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 0.001ohm
Range： 0~63999
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-51 Linear Motor Phase Inductance
LM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：
Default： 0
Unit： 0.01mh
Range： 0~65189
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-53 Linear Motor Back EMF Constant
LM
motor type：
Operational
Interface：

Default： 0
1
Unit： 10 Volt/(m/s)
Range： 0~11824
Data Size： 16bit
Format： DEC
Settings：
Address:
PM-54 Reserved
Address:
PM-55 Reserved
Address:
PM-56 Reserved
Address:
PM-57 Reserved
Address:
PM-58 Reserved
Address:
PM-59 Reserved
Address:
PM-60 Reserved
Address:
PM-61 Reserved
Address:
PM-62 Reserved
Address:
PM-63 Reserved

Table 8.1 Function Description of Digital Input (DI)

Setting Value: 0x01
Trigger Control
DI Name Function Description of Digital Input (DI)
Method Mode
SON When this DI is On, servo is activated (Servo On) Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x02

Trigger Control
Method Mode
ARST After the alarm has been cleared, when the DI is ON the Rising ALL
drive will show that the alarm has been cleared. edge
triggered
Setting Value: 0x03

Trigger Control
Method Mode
GAINUP In speed and position mode, when the DI is ON (P2-27 Level PT, PR,
should be set to 1), the gain switched to the one multiplies triggered S
the switching rate.
Setting Value: 0x04

Trigger Control
Method Mode
CCLR Clear the pulse counter and the setting of parameter P2-50. Rising PT, PR
0: clear the position pulse deviation (It is suitable in PT edge
mode). When DI is ON, the accumulative pulse deviation of triggered
the drive will be cleared to 0. , Level
triggered
Setting Value: 0x05

Trigger Control
Method Mode
ZCLAMP When the speed is slower than the setting of zero speed Level S
(P1-38), if the DI is ON, the motor stops ruuning. triggered
Speed
Command
Setting value of
P1-38 (Zero speed)
ZCLAMP
input signal
OFF ON
Motor Speed
Setting value of
P1-38 (Zero speed)
Time

Setting Value: 0x06

Trigger Control
Method Mode
CMDINV In PT and speed mode, when the DI is ON, the input Level S, T
command will be in reverse direction. triggered
Setting Value: 0x07

Trigger Control
Method Mode
SPDTMC The acceleration /deceleration time of internal speed and Level S
analog speed is 1msec. triggered
Setting Value: 0x08

Trigger Control
Method Mode
CTRG In PR mode, after selecting the PR command (POS0 ~ 5), Rising PR
when the DI is ON, the motor will rotate according to the edge
command issued by the register. triggered
Setting Value: 0x09

Trigger Control
Method Mode
TRQLM In speed and position mode, when the DI is ON, the motor Level PT, PR,
torque (force) will be limited, and the limited torque (force) triggered S
command will be internal register or analog voltage
command.
Setting Value: 0x0A

Trigger Control
Method Mode
GTRY Gantry control function Rising PT
edge
triggered
Setting Value: 0x0B

Trigger Control
Method Mode
FHS The switch between full-/ half- closed loop mode. Level PT/PR
triggered Full-closed
loop
Setting Value: 0x0E

Trigger Control
Method Mode
FEC Clear the error between full-closed loop linear scale and Rising PT/PR
motor encoder edge Full-closed
triggered loop

Setting Value: 0x0F

Trigger Control
Method Mode
SPDKVC Switch between the 1st set of analog (P1-40) and the 2nd set Level S
(P1-81) triggered
Setting Value: 0x10

Trigger Control
Method Mode
SPDLM In torque mode, when the DI is ON, the motor speed will be Level T
limited, the limited speed command will be internal register triggered
or analog voltage command.
Setting Value: 0x11, 0x12, 0x13, 0x1A, 0x1B, 0x1C

DI Trigger Control
Function Description of Digital Input (DI)
Name Method Mode
POS0 PR Command Selection (1~64) Level PR
POS1 Position Corresponding triggered
POS2 Command Parameter
POS3 Homing P6-00
0 0 0 0 0 0
POS4 P6-01
POS5 Procedure1 0 P6-02
0 0 0 0 1
P6-03
~
Procedure P6-98
1 1 0 0 1 0
50 P6-99
Procedure P7-00
1 1 0 0 1 1
51 P7-01
~
Procedure P7-26
1 1 1 1 1 1
63 P7-27
Setting Value: 0x1D

Trigger Control
Method Mode
When DI.ABSE is ON, it is in ABS mode. DI.ABSQ, DI.ABSC,
DI.ABSR, DI.ABSD and DI.ABSC are enabled.
Level
ABSE When DI.ABSE is ON, the function of DI4, DO2, DO3 will be ALL
triggered
disabled. Function of DI4 will be ASDQ, DO2 will be ABSR
and DO3 will be ABSD.
Setting Value
Setting Value: 0x1F
Trigger Control
Method Mode
When DI.ABSC is ON, multi-turn data stored in absolute Rising
ABSC encoder will be cleared. When DI.ABSE is ON, this function edge ALL
is enabled. triggered

Setting Value: When DI.ABSE is ON, DI4 intputs ABSQ signal, function set by P2-13 is
disabled.
Trigger Control
Method Mode
ABSQ is During I/O transmission, Handshaking signal will be sent to Rising ALL
always the servo drive by the controller. When DI.ABSQ is OFF, it and
inputted means the controller issues Request ; DI.ABSQ is ON Falling
by DI4 means the controller has already recdived ABSD signal. edge
When DI.ABSE is ON, this DI is enabled. Please refer to triggered
diagram 13.4 for detailed description.
Setting Value: 0x14, 0x15

Trigger Contro
Method l Mode
SPD0 Internal Speed Command Selection (1~4) Level S
SPD1 DI signal of triggered
Speed
CN1 Command
Command Content Range
Number SPD1 SPD0 Source
Voltage
External deviation
S analog between +/-10 V
S1 0 0 Mode command V-REF and
GND
Speed
Sz N/A 0
command is 0
+/-5000
S2 0 1 P1-09 r/min
Register +/-5000
S3 1 0 P1-10
parameter r/min
+/-5000
S4 1 1 P1-11
r/min

Trigger Control
Method Mode
TCM0 Internal Torque (Force) Command Selection (1~4) Level T
TCM1 Torque DI signal of triggered
(force) CN1
Command Source Content Range
command
TCM1 TCM0
number
1B
Voltage
deviation
Analog
T between +/- 10 V
command
V-REF and
T1 0 0 Mode GND
Torque
(force)
Tz N/A 0
command
is 0
T2 0 1 P1-12 +/- 300 %
Register
T3 1 0 P1-13 +/- 300 %
T4 1 1
parameter P1-14 +/- 300 %

Setting Value: 0x18

Trigger Control
Method Mode
S-P In position and speed mode, if the DI is OFF, it is in speed Level Dual
mode. And it is in position mode when the DI is ON. (P selects triggered Mode
PT or PR via DI.PT-PR (0x2B).)
Setting Value: 0x19

Trigger Control
Method Mode
S-T In speed and torque (force) mode, if the DI is OFF, it is in Level Dual
speed mode. And it is in torque (force) mode when the DI is triggered Mode
ON.
Setting Value: 0x20

Trigger Control
Method Mode
T-P In position and torque (force) mode, if the DI is OFF, it is in Level Dual
torque (force) mode; if the DI is ON, then it is in position triggered Mode
mode.
Setting Value: 0x21

Trigger Control
Method Mode
EMGS When this DI is ON, the motor stops urgently. Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x22

Trigger Control
Method Mode
NL Reverse inhibit limit (contact b) Level ALL
(CWL) triggered
Setting Value: 0x23

Trigger Control
Method Mode
PL Forward inhibit limit (contact b) Level ALL
(CCWL) triggered
Setting Value: 0x24

Trigger Control
Method Mode
ORGP In PR mode, during the process of homing if the DI is ON ← Rising / PR
Falling
→ OFF, the servo will regard this position as the homing edge
origin. (Please refer to the setting of parameter P5-04) triggered

Setting Value: 0x27

Trigger Control
Method Mode
SHOM In PR mode, when searching the origin is needed, it will Rising PR
activate the function of searching the origin when the DI is edge
ON. (Please refer to the setting of parameter P5-04) triggered
Setting Value: 0x28

Trigger Control
Method Mode
Reserved
Setting Value: 0x2B

Trigger Control
Method Mode
PT-PR When selecting PT-PR dual mode or PT-PR-S multiple Level Dual
mode, source can be selected via this DI. If this DI is OFF, it triggered Mode
is in PT mode; If the DI is ON, it is in PR mode.
Setting Value: 0x36

Trigger Control
Method Mode
CAM E-Cam engaging control (Please refer to the setting of P5-88 Rising / PR
U, Z value) Falling
edge
triggered
Setting Value: 0x37

Trigger Control
Method Mode
JOGU When this DI is ON, the motor will JOG in forward direction. Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x38

Trigger Control
Method Mode
JOGD When this DI is on, the motor will JOG in reverse direction. Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x39

Trigger Control
Method Mode
EV1 Event trigger command #1 (Refer to the setting of P5-98, Rising PR
P5-99) /Falling
edge
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3A

Trigger Control
Method Mode
EV2 Event trigger command #2 (Refer to the setting of P5-98, Rising PR
P5-99) /Falling
edge

triggered
Setting Value: 0x3B

Trigger Control
Method Mode
EV3 Event trigger command #3 (It is provided after firmware Rising PR
version V1.008 sub04.) /Falling
edge
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3C
Trigger Control
Method Mode
EV4 Event trigger command #4 (It is provided after firmware Rising PR
version V1.008 sub04) /Falling
edge
triggered

Trigger Control
Method Mode
GNUM0 Gear Ratio Selection 0 (Numerator) Level PT
GNUM1 Gear Ratio Selection 1 (Numerator) triggered
Setting Value: 0x45

Trigger Control
Method Mode
INHP In position mode, when this DI is ON, the external pulse input Level PT
command is not working. triggered
(Note: The function has to be set to DI8 so as to ensure the
instantaneity of pulse prohibition)
Setting Value: 0x46

Trigger Control
Method Mode
STOP Motor stops Rising PR
edge
triggered
NOTE 1）11~17 Single control mode; 18~20 Dual control mode.

2）When P2-10 ~ P2-17 is set to 0, DI has no function.

Table 8.2 Function Description of Digital Output (DO)

Setting Value: 0x01
DO Trigger Control
Function Description of Digital Output (DO)
Name Method Mode
SRDY When the controlled and main circuit power is applied to the Level ALL
drive, this DO is ON if no alarm occurs. triggered
Setting Value: 0x02

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SON When the servo is ON, this DO is ON if no alarm occurs. Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x03

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
ZSPD When the motor speed is slower than the setting speed of Level ALL
zero speed (P1-38), this DO is ON. triggered
Setting Value: 0x04

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
TSPD When the motor speed is faster than the target speed Level ALL
(P1-39), this DO is ON. triggered
Setting Value: 0x05

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
TPOS In position mode, when the deviation pulse number is smaller Level PT, PR
than the position range (the setting value of P1-54), this DO is triggered
ON.
Setting Value: 0x06

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
TQL When it is in torque (force) limit, this DO is ON. Level ALL ,
triggered except T,
Tz
Setting Value: 0x07

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
ALRM When the alarm occurs, this DO is ON. Level ALL
(Except forward / reverse limit, communication error, triggered
undervoltage, abnormal fan)
Setting Value: 0x08

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
BRKR When the signal of brake control is output, adjust the setting Level ALL
of parameter P1-42 and triggered

ON
SON OFF OFF
ON
BRKR
OFF OFF
MBT1(P1-42) MBT2(P1-43)
Motor ZSPD
Speed (P1-38)
P1-43.
Setting Value: 0x09

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
HOME When homing is completed, it means the position coordinates Level PR
triggered
system is available and this DO is ON.
When applying to the power, this DO is OFF. When homing is
completed, this DO is ON. During the operation, this DO is
ON until the counter overflows (including command or
feedback) and the DO becomes OFF.
When PR triggers homing command, this DO becomes OFF.
After homing, this DO becomes ON.
Setting Value: 0x0D

DO
Function Description of Digital Output (DO) Control Mode
Name
ABSW Warning of absolute encoder. ALL
Setting Value: 0x0E

DO
Name
IDXD Indexing coordinates is valid. PR
Setting Value: 0x10

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
OLW When reaching the overload setting, this DO is ON. Level ALL
tOL= Overload allowable time of the servo x Setting value of triggered
P1-56, when the overload accumulative time exceeds
tOL, it will output pre-overload warning (OLW). However,
if the overload accumulative time exceeds the overload
allowable time of the servo, it will output pre-overload
error (ALRM).
For example:
The setting value of pre-overload warning is 60% (P1-56=60).
When the output average load of the servo drive is 200%, if
the output time exceeds 8 seconds, the servo drive will show
the overload alarm (AL.006).
tOL= The output average load of the servo exceeds 200% for
8 seconds x parameter setting value = 8sec x 60% =

4.8sec
Result: When the output average load of the servo drive
exceeds 200% for 4.8 seconds, this DO is ON. If it exceeds
for 8 seconds, then, DO.ALRM is ON.
Setting Value: 0x11

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
WARN Warning output (Forward / reverse limit, communication Level ALL
error, undervoltage, abnormal fan) triggered
Setting Value: 0x12

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
OVF Position Command Overflows Level PR
triggered
Setting Value: 0x13

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SNL Software limit (Reverse limit) Level ALL
(SCWL) triggered
Setting Value: 0x14

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SPL Software limit (Forward limit) Level ALL
(SCCWL) triggered
Setting Value: 0x15

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
Cmd_OK Complete PR command and enter into PR mode, this DO is Level PR
triggered
ON.
When PR command is executing, this DO is OFF.
After completing the command, this DO is ON.
When the DO is ON, it means the command is completed,
but not finishing motor positioning. Please refer to DO.TPOS.
Setting Value: 0x16

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
CAP_OK CAP procedure completed Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x17

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
MC_OK When DO.Cmd_OK and TPOS are both ON, this DO is ON. Level PR
Refer to P1-48. triggered

Setting Value: 0x18

Trigger Control
DO Name Function Description of Digital Output (DO)
Method Mode
CAM_AREA Master of E-Cam locates in setting area. Level PR
triggered
Setting Value: 0x19

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SP_OK Speed completed output: In speed mode, when the deviation Level S / Sz
between the speed feedback and the command is smaller triggered
than the setting value of P1-47, then this DO is ON.
Setting Value: 0x2C

DO
Name
When the value which is monitored by P0-09 is between
Zon1 ALL
P0-54～P0-55, then this DO is ON.
Setting Value: When DI.ABSE is ON, DO2 outputs ABSR signal, function set by P2-19
is disabled.
DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
ABSR is DO.ABSR is OFF means the Request sent by ABSQ has Level ALL
always been received. DO.ABSR is ON means the data that is triggered
outputted outputted by ABSD is valid. When DI.ABSE is ON, this DO is
by DO2 enabled. Please refer to diagram 13.4 for detailed
description.
Setting Value: When DI.ABSE is ON, DO3 outputs ABSD signal, function set by P2-20
is disabled.
DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
ABSD is Position data of ABS is outputted. The data is valid when Level ALL
always ABSR is ON. When DI.ABSE is ON, this DO is enabled. triggered
outputted Please refer to diagram 13.4 for detailed description.
by DO3
Setting Value: 0x30

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SDO_0 Ouput the status of bit 00 of P4-06 Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x31

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
triggered

Setting Value: 0x32

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
triggered
Setting Value: 0x33

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
triggered
Setting Value: 0x34

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
triggered
Setting Value: 0x35

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
triggered
Setting Value: 0x36

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
triggered
Setting Value: 0x37

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
triggered
Setting Value: 0x38

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
triggered
Setting Value: 0x39

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
triggered

Setting Value: 0x3A

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SDO_A Ouput the status of bit 10 of P4-06 Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3B

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SDO_B Ouput the status of bit 11 of P4-06 Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3C

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SDO_C Ouput the status of bit 12 of P4-06 Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3D

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SDO_D Ouput the status of bit 13 of P4-06 Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3E

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SDO_E Ouput the status of bit 14 of P4-06 Level ALL
triggered
Setting Value: 0x3F

DO Trigger Control
Name Method Mode
SDO_F Ouput the status of bit 15 of P4-06 Level ALL
triggered
NOTE 1）When P2-18～P2-22 is set to 0, DO has no function.


Chapter 9 Communication
9.1 RS-485 / RS-232 Communication Hardware Interface
This servo drive supports the serial communication of RS-485 and RS-232. Communication
function enables the servo drive to access and change parameters inside the system.
However, RS-485 and RS-232 cannot be used at the same time. Parameter P3-05 can use
RS-485 and RS-232 as the communication protocol. Followings are the wiring description.
RS-232
 Configuration
D-Sub
CN3
9 Pin Connector
1394 Connector
4 (Rx) 3 (Tx)
2 (Tx) 2 (Rx)
1 (GND) 5 (GND)
NOTE 1) 15-meter communication cable is suitable for less interference

environment. If the transmission speed is over 38400bps, the
length of communication cable should be shorter than 3 meters
so as to ensure the accuracy of transmission.
2) Numbers shown in the above diagram represent the pin number
of each connector.

Chapter 9 Communication ASDA-A2R Series
RS-485
 Configuration
NOTE 1） 100 meters of communication cable is suitable for less

interference environment. If the transmission speed is over
38400bps, the length of communication cable should not longer
than 15 meters so as to ensure the accuracy of transmission.
2） Numbers shown in the above diagram represent the pin number
of each connector.
3） Please use the power supply unit whose direct current is over 12
volt.
4） Using RS-485 can connect up to 32 servo drives at the same
time. REPEATER can be used to connect more servo drives. 127
is the maximum.
5） Please refer to Chapter 3.6 for CN3 Pin Definition.

9.2 RS-485 / RS-232 Communication Parameters Setting

The following four parameters, P3-00 (Address Setting), P3-01 (Transmission Speed),
P3-02 (Communication Protocol) and P3-05 (Communication Mechanism), are essential
and must be set for the communication of the servo drive. The rest, such as P3-03
(Communication Error Disposal), P3-04 (Communication Timeout), P3-06 (Control Switch
of Digital Input), P3-07 (Communication Response Delay Time) and P3-08 (Monitor Mode)
is optional. Please refer to Chapter 8 of this user manual.
Communication Parameter
PT PR S T Section
P3-00● ADR Address Setting 0x7F N/A O O O O 7.3
P3-01 BRT Transmission Speed 0x0203 bps O O O O 7.3
P3-02 PTL Communication Protocol 6 N/A O O O O 7.3
P3-05 CMM Communication Mechanism 0 N/A O O O O 7.3
(★) Read-only register, can only read the status. For example: parameter P0-00, P0-10
and P4-00, etc.
(▲) Setting is unable when Servo On, e.g. parameter P1-00, P1-46 and P2-33, etc.
(●) Not effective until re-power on or off the servo drive, e.g. parameter P1-01 and
P3-00.
(■) Parameters of no data retained setting, e.g. parameter P2-30 and P3-06.

9.3 MODBUS Communication Protocol

There are two modes of MODBUS networks communication, ASCII (American Standard
Code for information interchange) mode and RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode. Users
could set the needed communication protocol via parameter P3-02. Apart from these two
communication modes, this servo drive also supports function of 03H to access more than
one data, 06H to write one character and 10H to write multiple characters. Please refer to
the following descriptions.
 Code Description
ASCII Mode:
The so-called ASCII mode is using American Standard Code for Information Interchange
(ASCII) to transmit the data. Between two stations (Master and Slave) to transmit data 64H,
the master will send‘6’which represented by 36H of ASCII code and ‘4’ represented
by 34H of ASCII code.
ASCII code of digit 0 to 9 and characters A to F is as follows:
Character ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘2’ ‘3’ ‘4’ ‘5’ ‘6’ ‘7’
ASCII code 30H 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 36H 37H
Character ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘A’ ‘B’ ‘C’ ‘D’ ‘E’ ‘F’
ASCII code 38H 39H 41H 42H 43H 44H 45H 46H
RTU Mode:
Every 8-bit of data is constituted by two 4-bits hexadecimal characters. If data 64H is
transmitted between two stations, it will be transmitted directly, which is more efficient than
ASCII mode.
 Character Structure
Characters will be encoded into the following framing and transmitted in serial. The
checking method of different bit is as the following.
10 bits character frame (for 7-bit character)

7N2
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
bit bit
7-data bits
10-bits character frame
7E1
Start Even Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits
7O1
Start Odd Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 parity bit
7-data bits

11 bits character frame (for 8-bit character)

8N2
Start Stop Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 bit bit
8-data bits
8E1
Start Even Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits
8O1
Start Odd Stop
bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
parity bit
8-data bits

 Communication Data Structure

The Data Frame in two different communication modes:
ASCII mode:
Start Start character ’：’ (3AH)

Slave Address Communication address: 1-byte includes 2 ASCII codes
Function Function code: 1-byte includes 2 ASCII codes
Data（n-1）
Data content: n-word = 2n-byte includes 4n of ASCII code,
…….
n<=10
Data（0）
LRC Error checking: 1-byte includes 2 ASCII codes
End 1 End code 1：(0DH)(CR)
End 0 End code 0：(0AH)(LF)
The start character of communication in ASCII mode is colon ‘：’(ASCII is 3AH)，ADR is the
ASCII code of two characters. The end code is CR (Carriage Return) and LF (Line Feed).
And the communication address, function code, data content, error checking LRC
(Longitudinal Redundancy Check), etc are between the start character and end code.
RTU mode:
Start A silent interval which is longer than 10ms

Slave Address Communication address：1-byte
Function Function code：1-byte
Data（n-1）
……. Data content：n-word =2n-byte，n<=10
Data（0）
CRC Error checking：1-byte
End 1 A silent interval which is longer than 10ms
The start of communication in RTU (Remote Terminal Unit) mode is a silent interval. The
end of it is another silent interval. The communication address, function code, data content,
error checking CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check), etc are between the start and the end.

Example 1: function code 03H, access multiple words:
The Master issues the command to the 1st Slave and reads the continuous 2 words starting
from the start address 0200H. In response message from the Slave, the content of starting
address 0200H is 00B1H and the content of the 2nd data address 0201H is 1F40H. The
maximum allowable data in one single access is 10. The calculation of LRC and CRC will
be described in next chapter.
ASCII mode
Command message from the Master: Response message from the Slave:
Start ‘:’ Start ‘:’

‘0’ ‘0’
Slave Address Slave Address
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘3’ ‘3’
‘0’ Number of data ‘0’
Starting data ‘2’ (In Byte) ‘4'
address ‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ The content of ‘0’
starting address
‘0’ 0200H ‘B’
Number of data ‘0’ ‘1’
(In Word) ‘0’ ‘1’
‘2’ The content of the ‘F’
2nd data address
‘F’ 0201H ‘4’
LRC Check
‘8’ ‘0’
End 1 (0DH)(CR) ‘E’
LRC Check
End 0 (0AH)(LF) ‘8’
End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF)

RTU mode:
Command message (Master): Response message (Slave):
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H

Function 03H Function 03H
Starting data 02H (High word) Number of data
04H
address 00H (Low word) (In Byte)
00H The content of 00H (High word)
Number of data
starting address
(In Word) 02H B1H (Low word)
0200H
CRC Check Low C5H (Low word) The content of the 1FH (High word)
2nd data address
CRC Check High B3H (High word) 0201H 40H (Low word)
CRC Check Low A3H (Low word)
CRC Check High D4H (High word)
Note: Before and after the transmission in RTU mode, 10ms of silent interval is needed.
Example 2: function code 06H, write single word:
The Master issues command to the 1st Slave and writes data 0064H to address 0200H. The
Slave sends the response message to the Master after the writing is completed. The
calculation of LRC and CRC will be described in next chapter.
ASCII mode:

‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘0’ ‘0’
Function Function
‘6’ ‘6’
‘0’ ‘0’
Starting data ‘2’ Starting data ‘2'
address ‘0’ address ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Data content Data content
‘6’ ‘6’
‘4’ ‘4’
‘9’ ‘9’
LRC Check LRC Check
‘3’ ‘3’
End 1 (0DH)(CR) End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF) End 0 (0AH)(LF)

RTU mode:
Address 01H Address 01H

Slave Function 06H Slave Function 06H
Starting data 02H (High word) Starting data 02H (High word)
address 00H (Low word) address 00H (Low word)
00H (High word) 00H (High word)
Data content Data content
64H (Low word) 64H (Low word)
CRC Check Low 89H (Low word) CRC Check Low 89H (Low word)
CRC Check High 99H (High word) CRC Check High 99H (High word)
Example 3: function code 10H, write multiple words:
The Master issues command to the 1st Slave and writes 0BB8H and 0000H to the starting
address 0112H. That is to say, 0112H is written into 0BB8H and 0113H is written into 0000H.
The maximum allowable data in one single access is 10. The Slave sends the response
message to the Master after the writing is completed. The calculation of LRC and CRC will
be described in next chapter.
ASCII mode:

‘0’ ‘0’
‘1’ ‘1’
‘1’ ‘1’
Function Function
‘0’ ‘0’
‘0’ ‘0’
Starting data ‘1’ Starting data ‘1'
address ‘1’ address ‘1’
‘2’ ‘2’
‘0’ ‘0’
Number of data ‘0’ ‘0’
Number of data
(In Word) ‘0’ ‘0’
‘2’ ‘2’
Number of data ‘0’ ‘D’
LRC Check
(In Byte) ‘4’ ‘A’
‘0’ End 1 (0DH)(CR)
‘B’ End 0 (0AH)(LF)
The 1st data content
‘B’
‘8’
The 2nd data content ‘0’

‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
LRC Check
‘3’
End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF)
RTU mode:
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H

Function 10H Function 10H
Starting data 01H (High word) Starting data 01H (High word)
address 12H (Low word) address 12H (Low word)
Number of data 00H (High word) Number of data 00H (High word)
(In Word) 02H (Low word) (In Word) 02H (Low word)
Number of data CRC Check Low E0H (Low word)
04H
(In Byte) CRC Check High 31H (High word)
0BH (High word)
The 1st data content
B8H (Low word)
nd 00H (High word)
The 2 data content
00H (Low word)
CRC Check Low FCH (Low word)
CRC Check High EBH (High word)

 LRC and CRC transmission error checking

The error checking in ASCII communication mode is LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy
Check); CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is for RTU communication mode. The
algorithm of both is as the following.
LRC (ASCII mode):
Start ‘:’
‘7’
Slave Address
‘F’
‘0’
Function
‘3’
‘0’
‘5’
Starting data address
‘C’
‘4’
‘0’
‘0’
Number of data
‘0’
‘1’
‘B’
LRC Check
‘4’
End 1 (0DH)(CR)
End 0 (0AH)(LF)
The LRC algorithm is: add all byte, round down the carry and take 2’s complement. For
example, 7FH + 03H + 05H + C4H + 00H + 01H = 14CH, round down carry 1 and take
4CH.
2’s complement of 4CH is B4H.
CRC (RTU mode):
The description of CRC is as the followings:
Step 1: Load a 16-bits register of FFFFH, which is called CRC register.
Step 2: (The low byte of CRC register) XOR (The first byte of command), and save
the result in CRC register.
Step 3: Right move one bit. Check the least significant bit (LSB) of CRC register. If the
bit is 1, then (CRC register) XOR (A001H).
Step 4: Return to Step 3 until Step 3 has been executed for 8 times. Go to Step 5.
Step 5: Repeat the procedure from Step 2 to Step 4 until all byte is processing. Get
the result of CRC value.

Description: After calculating CRC value, fill in the low word of CRC first in command
message, and then fill in the high word of CRC. For example, if the result of CRC algorithm
is 3794H, fill in 94H in low word and then 37H in high word.
ARD 01H
CMD 03H
01H (High word)
Starting data address
01H (Low word)
Number of data 00H (High word)
(in word) 02H (Low word)
CRC Check Low 94H (Low word)
CRC Check High 37H (High word)

Example of CRC program:

Produce CRC in C language. This function needs two parameters:
unsigned char* data;
unsigned char length
This function returns CRC of unsigned integer.
unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length) {
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;
while( length-- ) {
reg_crc^= *data++;
for (j=0; j<8; j++ ) {
if( reg_crc & 0x01 ) { /*LSB(bit 0 ) = 1 */
reg_crc = (reg_crc >> 1)^0xA001;
} else {
reg_crc = (reg_crc>>1);
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
Example of personal computer procedure:
#include<stdio.h>
#include<dos.h>
#include<conio.h>
#include<process.h>
#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM 1 */
#define THR 0x0000
#define RDR 0x0000
#define BRDL 0x0000
#define IER 0x0001
#define BRDH 0x0001
#define LCR 0x0003
#define MCR 0x0004
#define LSR 0x0005
#define MSR 0x0006
unsigned char rdat[60];
/* read 2 data from address 0200H of ASD with address 1 */
unsigned char tdat[60]={‘:’,’0’,’1’,’0’,’3’,’0’,’2’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’0’,’2’,’F’,’8’,’\r’,’\n’};
void main() {
int I;
outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08); /* interrupt enable */
outportb(PORT+IER,0x01); /* interrupt as data in */
outportb(PORT+LCR,( inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80 ) );
/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7 == 1 */
outportb(PORT+BRDL,12);
outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00);
outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06); /* set prorocol
<7,E,1> = 1AH, <7,O,1> = 0AH
<8,N,2> = 07H <8,E,1> = 1BH

<8,O,1> = 0BH */
for( I = 0; I<=16; I++ ) {

while( !(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20) ); /* wait until THR empty */
outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[I]); /* send data to THR */
}
I = 0;
while( !kbhit() ) {
if( inportb(PORT+LSR)&0x01 ) { /* b0==1, read data ready */
rdat[I++] = inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data from RDR */
}
}
}

9.4 Write-in and Read-out Communication Parameters

Please refer to Chapter 8, Parameters for all parameter details. And the descriptions of
parameters which can be wrote or read through communication are as follows.
Parameters are divided into 8 groups, Group 0: Monitor Parameters, Group 1: Basic
Parameters, Group 2: Extension Parameters, Group 3: Communication Parameters, Group
4: Diagnosis Parameters, Group 5: Motion Setting, Group 6 and Group 7: PR Definition.
Write parameters via communication:

Parameters which can be written through communication include:
Group 0, except (P0-00~P0-01), (P0-08~P0-13) and (P0-46) Group 1 (P1-00~P1-76)
Group 2 (P2-00~P2-67)
Group 3 (P3-00~P3-11)
Group 4, except (P4-00~P4-04) and (P4-08~P4-09)
Group 5 (P5-00~P5-99), except P5-10, P5-16 and P5-76
Group 6 (P6-00~P6-99)
Group 7 (P7-00~P7-27)
Please note that:

(P3-01) When change to a new communication speed, the next data will be written in a
new transmission speed after setting the new value.
(P3-02) When change to the new communication protocol, the next data will be written
with the new communication protocol after setting the new value.
(P4-05) JOG controls parameters of the servo. Please refer to Chapter 8, Parameters for
the description.
(P4-06) Force to control output contact. This parameter is for DO (Digital Output) testing.
Users can write 1, 2, 4, 8 and 16 to test DO1, DO2, DO3, DO4 and DO5
respectively. Please write 0 after the test so as to inform the servo drive that the
test has been completed.
(P4-10) Adjustment function selection. Write 20 (= 14H in hexadecimal format) in
parameter P2-08 first to enable the adjustment so as to change the value of
P4-10.
(P4-11 ~ P4-21) This parameter is Offset Adjustment. Do not change the setting unless it
is necessary. If it is necessary, please write 22 (= 16H, in hexadecimal
format) in parameter P2-08 first to enable the function so as to change
the value of (P4-11 ~ P4-21)

Read parameters through communication:
Parameters can be read through communication include:
Group 0 (P0-00~P0-46) Group 4 (P4-00~P4-23)

Group 1 (P1-00~P1-76) Group 5 (P5-00~P5-99)
Group 2 (P2-00~P2-67) Group 6 (P6-00~P6-99)
Group 3 (P3-00~P3-11) Group 7 (P7-00~P7-27)

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
10.1 Alarm of Servo Drive
Corresponding Servo
Display Alarm Name Alarm Description
DO Status
Over current The current of the main circuit is 1.5
Servo
times more than the instantaneous ALM
Off
current of the motor.
Over voltage The voltage of the main circuit is higher Servo
ALM
than the standard voltage. Off
Under The voltage of the main circuit is lower Servo
WARN
voltage than the standard voltage. Off
Motor The drive corresponds to the wrong Servo
Combination motor. ALM Off
Error
Regeneration Regeneration control is in error. Servo
ALM
Error Off
Overload The motor and the drive is overload. Servo
ALM
Off
Over speed The control speed of the motor Servo
ALM
exceeds the normal speed. Off
Abnormal The input frequency of the pulse
Servo
Pulse command is over the allowable value ALM
Off
Command of the hardware interface.
Excessive The deviation of position command
Deviation of exceeds the allowable setting value. Servo
ALM
Position Off
Command
Encoder The encoder produces abnormal pulse. Servo
ALM
Error Off
Adjustment When executing electrical adjustment,
Servo
Error the adjusted value exceeds the ALM
Off
allowable value.
Emergency Press the emergency stop button. Servo
WARN
Stop Off
Reverse Activate the reverse limit switch. Servo
WARN
Limit Error On
Forward Activate the forward limit switch. Servo
WARN
Limit Error On
IGBT The temperature of IGBT is over high Servo
ALM
Overheat Off

Chapter 10 TroubleshootingASDA-A2R Series
Corresponding Servo
DO Status
Abnormal It is in error when DSP accesses Servo
ALM
EEPROM EEPROM. Off
Abnormal The encoder output exceeds the Servo
ALM
signal output rated output frequency. Off
Serial RS-232/485 communication is in
Servo
Communication error ALM
Off
Error
Serial RS-232/485 communication time out
Servo
Communication WARN
On
Time Out
Reserved Reserved
Main Circuit Only one single phase is inputted in

Servo
Power Lack the main circuit power. WARN
Off
Phase
Early Warning Early Warning for Overload Servo
WARN
for Overload On
Encoder initial The magnetic field of the encoder U,
Servo
magnetic field V, W signal is in error. ALM
Off
error
The Internal of The internal memory of the encoder
Servo
the Encoder is and the internal counter are in error. ALM
Off
in Error
Unreliable The error of the internal data has
Servo
internal data of been detected for three times ALM
Off
the encoder continuously.
Motor Crash The motor crashes the equipment,
Servo
Error reaches the torque of P1-57 and ALM
Off
exceeds the time set by P1-58.
Incorrect wiring Incorrect wiring of the motor power
of the motor line U, V, W, GND Servo
ALM
power line U, V, Off
W, GND
Connection of Connection of 26 pin on converter
26 pin on box (encoder) is breakdown Servo
ALM
converter box Off
is breakdown
Motor Motor’s temperature is too high Servo
temperature ALM
Off
error

Corresponding Servo
DO Status
Excessive Excessive Deviation of Full
Deviation of Closed-loop Position Control
Full Servo
ALM
Closed-loop Off
Position
Control
Communication Communication of CN5 (encoder) is
Servo
of CN5 is breakdown ALM
Off
breakdown
Warning of Warning of servo drive function
servo drive overload Servo
WARN
function On
overload
Auto detection When executing PM-01, function of
of motor auto detection, this alarm will occur Servo
ALM
parameters is when the detection is completed. Off
completed.
Auto detection During auto detection, when friction
of motor is too big, motor is stuck or entering Servo
ALM
parameters is wrong resolution and pole pitch, this Off
in error alarm will occur.
Initial magnetic When PM-03.Y = 0, it will detect the
pole detection initial magnetic pole automatically. Servo
ALM
error When it cannot find the initial Off
magnetic pole, this alarm will occur.
Motor If PM-02 = 0, this alarm will occur
Servo
parameter is when motor servo On. ALM
Off
not confirmed
Exceeding the Parameter range of linear motor is
range of motor different from rotary motor. In
Servo
parameter PM-00, if it exceeds the range when ALM
Off
switching the motor type, this alarm
will occur.
Motor magnetic When enabling the Y item of PM-09,
fields is servo will detect the motor’s current
abnormal magnetic field, and compare it with Servo
ALM
the position of Hall sensor’s. When Off
the deviation between both is too
excessive, this alarm will occur.
Feedback When P2-81 = 1, it will check if the
pulse is lost pulse is lost. If the loss amount is Servo
ALM
more than the value of P2-82, this Off
alarm will occur.

Excessive During initial magnetic pole

deviation of detection, it will check if the position
initial magnetic error exceeds the range. If yes, this Servo
ALM
pole detection alarm will occur. Off
position when
power on
Motor Motor’s temperature will be over Servo
temperature WARN
high On
warning
DSP Firmware EEPROM has not been reset after
Upgrade upgrading the firmware. The fault
Servo
can be cleared when firstly set ALM
Off
P2-08 to 30. Then set P2-08 to 28.
And re-power on the drive.
10.2 Alarm of CANopen Communication

Corrective Corresponding Servo
Actions DO Status
CANopen SDO SDO Rx Buffer NMT: Reset
receives buffer overflow (receives node or Servo
ALM
overflow more than two SDOs 0x6040.Fault On
within 1 millisecond) Reset
CANopen PDO PDO Rx Buffer
receives buffer overflow (receives
Same as Servo
overflow more than two same ALM
above On
PDOs of the COBID
within 1 millisecond)
Index error The specified Index in
occurs when the message does not Same as Servo
ALM
accessing exist. above On
CANopen PDO
Sub-Index error The specified
occurs when Sub-Index in the Same as Servo
ALM
accessing message does not above On
CANopen PDO exist.
Data Size error The data length in the
occurs when message does not Same as Servo
ALM
accessing match to the specified above On
CANopen PDO object.
Data range The data value in the
error occurs message is over the
Same as Servo
when range of the specified ALM
above On
accessing object.
CANopen PDO


Action DO Status
CANopen The specified object in
PDO object is the message is Same as Servo
ALM
read-only and write-protected. above On
write-protected
PDO object is the message does not Same as Servo
ALM
not allowed in support PDO above On
PDO
PDO object is the message is
Same as Servo
write-protected write-protected when ALM
above On
when Servo Servo ON
On
Error occurs An error occurs when
when reading loading the default value
CANopen via ROM at start-up. All Same as Servo
ALM
PDO object via objects of CAN returns to above On
EEPROM the default value
automatically.
when writing saving the current value
Same as Servo
CANopen into ROM. ALM
above On
PDO object via
EEPROM
The accessing The quantity of the data
address of inside ROM is over the
EEPROM is planned space. It is
out of range probably because the
Same as Servo
when using software has been ALM
above On
CANopen updated. The data inside
PDO object ROM is stored by the old
version. Thus, it cannot
be used.
CRC of It indicates that the data
EEPROM stored in ROM has been
calculation damaged. All objects of
Same as Servo
error occurs CAN will return to the ALM
above On
when using default setting
CANopen automatically.
PDO object
Enter the When entering
incorrect parameters via CAN, the
password parameters are Same as Servo
ALM
when using password-protected. above On
CANopen Users have to decode the
PDO object password first.
Abnormal The communication of NMT:
CAN Bus CAN Bus is breakdown or Reset node Servo
ALM
hardware Error Rx/Tx Counter is or re-servo On
over 128. on

10.3 Alarm of Motion Control

Actions DO Status
An error occurs An error occurs when DI:ARST,
when loading loading data via CANopen
CANopen data EEPROM. 0x1011 Servo
WARN
Restore On
default
parameter
Write Write parameters via
parameters: PR procedure: the DI:Alm Reset Servo
WARN
exceeds the value is over the or P0-01= 0 On
range range.
DI:Alm Reset Servo
parameters: PR procedure: the WARN
or P0-01= 0 On
read-only parameter is read-only
Correct the
parameters: PR procedure: it is
PR
parameter write-protected when Servo
command WARN
locked the servo is ON or the On
and
input data is
parameter
unreasonable.
PR command Feedback position NMT: Reset
overflows counter overflows and node or Servo
WARN
executes the absolute 0x6040.Fault On
positioning command. Reset
PR positioning The execution of Same as Servo
is over time positioning command WARN
above On
exceeds the time limit.
The number of The range of PR
PR command command is between Same as Servo
WARN
exceeds the 0 and 63, or it will above On
range exceed the limit.
Index error The specified Index in DI.ARST
occurs when the message does not NMT: Reset
Servo
accessing exist. node or WARN
On
CANopen 0x6040.Fault
object Reset
Sub-Index error The specified
occurs when Sub-Index in the
Same as Servo
accessing message does not WARN
above On
CANopen exist.
object
Data Size error The data length in the
occurs when message does not
Same as Servo
accessing match to the specified WARN
above On
CANopen object.
object


Actions DO Status
Data range The data value in the
error occurs message is over the
Same as Servo
when range of the specified WARN
above On
accessing object.
CAN.
object is the message is Same as Servo
WARN
read-only and write-protected above On
write-protected
PDO is not The specified object in
allowed in the message does not Same as Servo
WARN
CANopen support PDO above On
object
object is the message is
Same as Servo
write-protected write-protected when WARN
above On
when Servo Servo ON
On
when reading loading the default value
CANopen via ROM at start-up. All Same as Servo
WARN
object via objects of CANopen above On
EEPROM returns to the default
value automatically.
when writing saving the current value
Same as Servo
CANopen into ROM. WARN
above On
object via
EEPROM
The accessing The quantity in the data
address of inside ROM is over the
EEPROM is planned space. It is
out of range probably because the
Same as Servo
when using software has been WARN
above On
CANopen updated. The data
object inside ROM is stored by
the old version. Thus, it
cannot be used.
CRC of It indicates that the data
EEPROM stored in ROM has been
calculation damaged. All CANopen
Same as Servo
error occurs objects will return to the WARN
above On
when using default setting
CANopen automatically.
object


Actions DO Status
Enter the When entering
incorrect parameters via CAN, the
password parameters are Same as Servo
WARN
when using password-protected. above On
CANopen Users have to decode
object the password first.
Forward The value of position The fault will
Software Limit command is bigger than be cleared
forward software limit automatically
Servo
(P5-08) when the WARN
On
motor
operates
backwards.
Reverse The value of position The fault will
Software Limit command is smaller be cleared
than reverse software automatically
Servo
limit (P5-09) when the WARN
On
motor
operates
backwards.
Feedback Feedback position NMT: Reset
position counter overflows. node or Servo
WARN
counter 0x6040.Fault On
overflows Reset
Servo OFF Servo OFF when the
Same as Servo
error motion path is WARN
above On
incomplete.
CANopen CANopen IP mode fails
Same as Servo
fails to to synchronize with the WARN
above On
synchronize controller.
The The synchronized
synchronized signal, SYNC of
Same as Servo
signal of CANopen is sent too WARN
above On
CANopen is fast.
sent too fast
The The synchronized
synchronized signal, SYNC of
Same as Servo
signal of CANopen has not been WARN
above On
CANopen is received in time.
sent too slow
CANopen IP Command cannot be
Same as Servo
command is issued in CANopen IP WARN
above On
failed mode.
SYNC Period CANopen 301 Obj Same as Servo
is in error WARN
0x1006 Data Error！ above On
Position Please refer to the
Deviation DI:Alm Reset Servo
description of parameter WARN
Alarm or P0-01= 0 On
P1-48.

After DO.MC_OK ON,

DO.MC_OK becomes
OFF because DO.
TPOS turns OFF.
NOTE If the alarm occurs and is different from the alarm showed in Alarm of
Servo Drive, Alarm of CANopen Communication and Alarm of
Motion Control, please contact with distributors or technical personnel.

10.4 Causes and Corrective Actions

Alarm Display
：Over current
Causes Checking Method Corrective Actions
The drive output is Check if the wiring between the Eliminate short-circuit and avoid
short-circuit motor and the drive is correct and metal conductor being exposed.
see if the wire is short-circuited.
The motor wiring is in Check if the wiring steps are Rewiring by following the wiring
error. correct when connecting the description from the user
motor to the drive. manual.
IGBT is abnormal The temperature of the heat sink Send the drive back to the
is abnormal distributors or contact with Delta
The control parameter Check if the setting value Setting back to the default
setting is in error. exceeds the default setting setting and then gradually adjust
the value.
Unreasonable Check if the command doing Less steep command used or
command reasonable acceleration time. filter applying to smooth
command.
：Over voltage
The input voltage of the Use the voltmeter to see if the Apply to the correct power
main circuit is higher input voltage of the main circuit is supply or serial voltage
than the rated within the rated allowable voltage regulator.
allowable voltage. value. (please refer to Chapter
12.1)
Wrong power input Use the voltmeter to see if the Apply to the correct power
power system matches the supply or serial adaptor.
(incorrect power
specification.
system)
The hardware of the Use the voltmeter to see if the Send the drive back to the
servo drive is input voltage of the main circuit is distributors or contact with Delta.
damaged. within the rated allowable voltage
value but still shows the error.
：Under voltage
The input voltage of the Check if the input voltage wiring Re-confirm the voltage wiring.
main circuit is lower of the main circuit is normal.
than the rated
allowable voltage.
No power supply for Use the voltmeter to see if the Check the power switch
the main circuit. voltage of the main circuit is
normal.

Wrong power input Use the voltmeter to see if the Apply to the correct power
(incorrect power power system matches the supply or serial adaptor.
system) specification.
：Motor Combination Error

The encoder is The encoder is abnormal. Change the motor
damaged.
The encoder is loose. Check the encoder connector. Install the motor again.
Motor Combination Connect to the right motor. Change the motor
Error
：Regeneration Error
The regenerative Check the connection of Reconnect the regenerative
resistor is unconnected regenerative resistor. resistor or calculate the value of
or too low the regenerative resistor.
Parameter P1-53 is not Check if parameter P1-53 of Set parameter P1-53 of
set to zero when the regenerative resister is set to regenerative resistor to zero
regenerative resistor is zero. when it is not applying.
not in use.
Wrong parameter Check the setting value of Correctly reset the setting.
setting parameter P1-52 and P1-53.
：Overload
Over the rated loading Set parameter P0-02 to 11 and Increase the motor capacity or
of the drive and
see if the average torque [%] is reduce the load.
continuously excessive
using over 100% all the time.
The setting of the 1. Check if there is any 1. Adjust the gain value of the
control system
mechanical vibration. control circuit.
parameter is
inappropriate. 2. Check if the acceleration / 2. Slow down the acceleration /
deceleration constant is set too deceleration setting time.
fast.
Wrong wiring of the Check the wiring of U, V, W and Correct wiring
motor and the encoder. the encoder.
The encoder of the Send the drive back to the distributors or contact with Delta.
motor is defective.

：Overspeed
Unreasonable Use the scope to check if the Less steep command used or
command signal of analog voltage is filter applying to smooth
abnormal. command.
Inappropriate Check if the setting of parameter Correctly set parameter P2-34
parameter setting P2-34 is too small (the condition (the condition of over-speed
of over-speed warning). warning).
：Abnormal Pulse Command

The pulse command Use the scope to check if the Correctly set the input pulse
frequency is higher input frequency is over the rated frequency.
than the rated input input frequency.
frequency.
：Excessive Deviation of Position Command

Parameter P2-35 is set Check the setting value of Increase the setting value of
too small parameter P2-35 (The warning P2-35 (The warning condition of
condition of excessive position excessive position deviation)
deviation)
The setting of the gain Check if the setting value is Correctly adjust the gain value
value is too small. appropriate
The torque limit is too Check the torque limit value Correctly adjust the torque limit
value
low.
Excessive external Check the external load Reduce the external load or
load evaluate the motor capacity
again
Improper setting of Make sure if the proportion of Correctly setup E-gear ratio
E-gear ratio P1-44 and P1-45 is appropriate.
：Encoder Error
Wrong wiring of the Check if the wiring follows the Correct wiring
encoder suggested wiring of the user
manual.
The encoder is loose Check the drive connector of Install the encoder again
CN2 and encoder

Bad connection of the Check if the connection between Reconnect the wiring
encoder CN2 of the drive and the encoder
of the servo motor is loose
The encoder is Check if the motor is damaged Change the motor
damaged
：Adjustment Error
The analog input Measure if the voltage of the Correctly ground the analog
contact is incorrectly analog input contact is the same input contact
set back to zero as the ground voltage
The detection device is Reset the power supply If the error still occurs after reset,
damaged send the drive back to the
distributors or contact with Delta.
：Emergency Stop
Press the emergency Check if the emergency stop Activate emergency stop
stop button button is enabled.
：Reverse Limit Error

Reverse limit switch is Check if the limit switch is Enable the reverse limit switch
activated. enabled.
The servo system is Check the control parameter and Re-adjust the parameter or
unstable. inertia ratio evaluate the motor capacity.
：Forward Limit Error

Forward limit switch is Check if the limit switch is Enable the forward limit switch
activated. enabled.
The servo system is Check the control parameter and Re-adjust the parameter or
unstable. inertia ratio evaluate the motor capacity.

：IGBT Overheat
Over the rated loading of Check if it is overloading or the Increase the motor capacity or
reduce the load.
the drive and motor current is too high.
continuously excessive
using
The drive output is Check the drive output wiring Correct wiring
short-circuit
：Abnormal EEPROM
It is in error when DSP Press the SHIFT Key on the The fault occurs when applying
accesses EEPROM.
panel and it shows EXGAB. to the power. It means one of the
X = 1, 2, 3 parameters is over the
reasonable range. Please
G＝group code of the parameter
re-power on after adjusting.
AB＝hexadecimal of the The fault occurs in normal

operation. It means it is in error
parameter
when writing the parameter. The
If it shows E320A, it means it is alarm can be cleared by
parameter P2-10; If it shows DI.ARST.
E3610, it means it is parameter
P6-16. Please check the
parameter.
Abnormal hidden Press the SHIFT Key on the The fault occurs in parameter
parameter panel and it shows E100X reset. The setting of the drive is
wrong. Please set the correct
type of the drive.
Data in ROM is Press the SHIFT Key on the The fault occurs when it is
damaged. panel and it shows E0001 servo-on. Usually it is because
the data in ROM is damaged or
there is no data in ROM. Please
send the drive back to the
distributors or contact with Delta.

：Abnormal Signal Output

The encoder is in error Check the fault records Conduct the corrective actions of
and cause the (P4-00~P4-05). See if the alarm AL011, AL024, AL025, AL026
abnormal signal output exists with the encoder error
(AL011, AL024, AL025, AL026)
The output pulse Check if the following conditions Correctly set parameter P1-76
exceeds the hardware produce: and P1-46:
allowable range. P1-76 < Motor Speed or P1-76 > Motor Speed or
Motor Speed Motor Speed
 P1  46  4  19.8  10 6  P1  46  4  19.8  106
60 60
：Serial Communication Error

Improper setting of the Check the setting value of Correctly set the parameter
communication communication parameter value
parameter
Incorrect Check the communication Correctly set the communication
communication address address
address
Incorrect Check the accessing value Correctly set the value
communication value
：Serial Communication Time Out

Improper setting of the Check the parameter setting Correctly set the value
time-out parameter
Check if the communication Correct wiring
The drive hasn’t
cable is loose or broken.
received the
communication
command for a long
time.
：Reserved

：Main circuit power leak phase

The main circuit power Check if RST power cable is Make sure it applies to the
is abnormal loose or does not connect to the power. If issue persists, please
power. This alarm occurs when send the drive back to the
no power connects to 3-phase for distributors or contact with Delta.
under 1.5 kW (included) servo
drive. No power connects to
single phase for 2 kW (included
or above) servo drive, this alarm
occurs.
：Early warning for overload

Early warning for 1. Check if it is used in overload 1. Please refer to the corrective
overload
condition. actions of AL006.
2. Check if the value of 2. Please increase the setting
parameter P1-56 is set to value of parameter P1-56. Or
small. set the value over 100 and
deactivate the overload
warning function.
：Encoder initial magnetic field error

The initial magnetic 1. Check if the servo is properly If issue persists, please send the
drive back to the distributors or
field is of the encoder grounded.
contact with Delta.
in error 2. Check if the encoder cable
(Signal, U, V, W of the separates from the power
encoder magnetic field supply or the high-current
is in error.) circuit to avoid the
interference.
3. Check if the shielding cables
are used in the wiring of the
encoder.
4. If it connects to Hall sensor,
please check the wiring of Hall
sensor.

：The internal of the encoder is in error

The internal of the 1. Check if the servo is properly 1. Please connect the UVW
encoder is in error. grounded. connector (color green) to the
(The internal memory 2. Check if the encoder cable heat sink of the servo drive.
and the internal
separates from the power 2. Please check if the encoder
counter are in error)
supply or the high-current cable separates from the
circuit to avoid the power supply or the
interference. high-current circuit.
3. Check if the shielding cables 3. Please use shielding mesh.
are used in the wiring of the 4. If issue persists, please send
encoder. the drive back to the
distributors or contact with
Delta.
：Unreliable internal data of the encoder

The encoder is in error. 1. Check if the servo is properly 1. Please connect the UVW
(Errors occur in the grounded. connector (color green) to the
internal data for three heat sink of the servo drive.
2. Check if the encoder cable
times continuously)
separates from the power 2. Please check if the encoder
supply or the high-current cable separates from the
circuit to avoid the power supply or the
interference. high-current circuit.
3. Check if the shielding cables 3. Please use shielding mesh.
are used in the wiring of the 4. If issue persists, please send
encoder. the drive back to the
distributors or contact with
Delta.
：Encoder reset error

Reset the encoder 1. If the contact of the 1. Make sure the signal cable is normal
signal cable is poor 2. Please use shielded net for encoder
2. If the encoder power is signal cable.
stable 3. If issue persists, please send the
3. If the operating drive back to the distributors or
temperature is higher contact with Delta.
than 95 ℃

：Motor Crash Error

Motor Crash Error 1. Check if P1-57 is enabled. 1. If it is enabled by mistake,
2. Check if P1-57 is set too small please set P1-57 to zero.
and the time of P1-58 is set too 2. According to the actual torque
short. setting, if the value is set too
small, the alarm will be
triggered by mistake.
However, if the value is set too
big, it will lose the function of
protection.
：Incorrect wiring of the motor power line U, V, W, GND

The wiring of U, V, W, Check if U, V, W of the motor is Follow the user manual to
GND of the motor is incorrect connected correctly wire U, V, W and make
incorrect connected. sure it is grounded.
：Connection of 26 pin on converter box is breakdown

Connection of 26 pin Check the status of converter box Re-connect the breakdown part
on converter box is and then re-servo on will do.
breakdown 1. Switch mode
Rotary switch at X1: AB pulse:
Check if the connection of pin
1~6 on 26 pin is breakdown.
Rotary switch at X2: SIN COS:
2. Drive mode
The 1st bit of PM-03 = 0:
The 1st bit of PM-03 = 1:
：Motor Temperature Error

Motor temperature Check if the temperature of Reduce the temperature of
error surrounding environment is over surrounding environment
high

：Excessive deviation of full-closed loop position control

Excessive deviation of 1. Check if P1-73 is set too 1. Increase the value of P1-73.
full closed-loop position
small. 2. Check if the connection is
control
2. Check if the connector is well connected.
loose or there is any
connection problem of other
mechanism.
：Communication of CN5 is breakdown

Communication of CN5 Check if the connection of pin1~5 Make sure the connection is
is breakdown and pin 9 on CN5 connector is correct and then re-servo on.
breakdown.
：Warning of servo drive function overload

Warning of servo drive N/A Set Bit 4 of P2-66 to 1 could
function overload close the display of this alarm.
：Auto detection of motor parameters is completed

When executing the It informs users the detection is Please re-power on the servo
function of PM-01 completed and should re-power drive.
(Automatic Identification on the servo drive.
of Motor Parameter), the
alarm occurs when the
auto detection is
completed.

：Auto detection of motor parameters is in error

When executing the 1. Check if motor pole pitch, 1. Enter the value which is the
function of PM-01, if encoder resolution and same as the actual one and
the friction is too big, encoder type are entered activate the detection again.
motor is stuck or correctly. 2. The rotary motor will rotate at
entering wrong 2. Check if motor is stuck during forward and reverse direction
resolution and pitch detection. for one magnetic cycle during
pole, this alarm will 3. Check if the motor friction is detection. The linear motor
occur. too big. will move for a pitch forward
4. Check if the feedback of linear and backward. Please
scale is abnormal, the preserve the moving distance
connection is breakdown, the before detection.
scale is not installed properly 3. Chang another motor with
or there is noise interference. more power.
4. Correct the problem of linear
scale.
：Initial magnetic pole detection error

When motor does not 1. Check if the feedback is Correct the problem of the
connect to Hall sensor, normal encoder
it will search the initial 2. Check if the motor friction is
magnetic pole when too big
power on. If the initial
magnetic pole is not
found, this alarm will
occur.
：Motor parameter is not confirmed

If PM-02 = 0, this alarm Make sure the motor parameter
occurs when motor group is entered correctly. Set
servo On. PM-02 to 1 and re-power on will
do. After the detection procedure
is completed, this parameter will
be setup automatically.

：Exceeding the range of motor parameters

When switching the Check if the parameter is The parameter setting range of
motor type, if the incorrect: linear motor is different from
setting value exceeds Press the SHIFT Key to display rotary motor. Please setup the
the range of PM-00, EXGAB correct parameter according to
this alarm will occur. X＝1, 2, 3 the motor type.
G＝Parameter group code

AB＝Hex. Code of parameter
E320A represents P2-10;
E3610 represents P6-16; and
E3D10 represents PM-16.
：Motor parameter is not confirmed

When enabling the Y The servo drive monitors 1. Exclude the noise problem, if
item of PM-09, servo motor’s magnetic field through the type is square wave digital
will detect the motor’s signal, users could filter out
the encoder, thus,
current magnetic field, the noise through the proper
and compare it with the 1. check if the feedback of setting of filter function.
position of Hall encoder interferes the pulse
The setting of converter box
sensor’s. When the loss because of the noise.
=>PM-03
deviation between both 2. assume that the feedback type The setting of CN5 =>P1-74
is too excessive, this of the encoder is square wave
2 Limit the max. speed of motor.
alarm will occur. digital signal, check if the
Setup P1-55.
motor is over speed and
exceeds the limit that
hardware could take. The limit
is 20Mhz (the resolution of
quardruple frequency)
3. check if Hall sensor is normal.
：Feedback pulse is lost

When P2-81 = 1, it will 1. Check if the feedback of 1. Exclude the noise problem, if
check if pulse is lost. If encoder interferes the pulse the type is square wave digital
the pulse loss amount loss because of the noise. signal, users could filt out the
exceeds the value of 2. Assume that the feedback type noise through the proper
P2-82, this alarm will of the encoder is square wave setting of filter function.
occur. digital signal, check if the The setting of converter box
motor is over speed and =>PM-03
exceeds the limit that hardware The setting of CN5 =>P1-74
could take. The limit is 20Mhz 2 Limit the max. speed of
(the resolution of quardruple motor. Setup P1-55.
frequency)

：Excessive deviation of initial magnetic pole detection position when

power on
During initial magnetic 1. Check if the command is 1. Do not issue the command
pole detection, it will issued when power just on. right after the power is on.
check if the position 2. Check if the moving is too Users can issue the command
error exceeds the excessive during initial pole until TPOS is On.
range. If yes, this alarm detection. 2. Reduce the value of PM-11.
will occur. Reduce the detect current of
initial pole.
：Motor Temperature Warning

Motor’s temperature Check if the temperature of Reduce the temperature of
surrounding environment is over surrounding environment
will be over high
high
：DSP firmware upgrade

Upgrade DSP firmware Check if the firmware is Firstly set P2-08 to 30. Then set
upgraded. P2-08 to 28, the alarm will be
cleared when re-power on.
：CANopen SDO receives overflow

SDO Rx Buffer Check if the servo drive receives NMT:Reset node 或 0x6040.Fault
overflow (receives (sends) more than one SOD
Reset
more than two SDOs within 1ms.
within 1ms)
：CANopen PDO receives overflow

PDO Rx Buffer Check if the servo drive receives NMT: Reset node or
overflow (receives (sends) more than one PDO of 0x6040.Fault Reset
more than two PDOs of COBID within 1ms.
COBID within one
millisecond)
：Index error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO

The specified Index in Check if the Entry Index of PDO NMT: Reset node or
the message does not Mapping is modified when PDO 0x6040.Fault Reset
exist. is receiving or sending

：Sub-Index error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO

The specified Check if the Entry Sub-index of NMT: Reset node or
Sub-Index in the PDO Mapping is modified when 0x6040.Fault Reset
message does not PDO is receiving or sending.
exist.
：Data Size error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO

The data length in the Check if the data length of Entry NMT: Reset node or
message does not of PDO Mapping is modified 0x6040.Fault Reset
match to the specified when PDO is receiving or
object. sending.
：Data range error occurs when accessing CANopen PDO

The data value in the Check if the written range is NMT: Reset node or
message is over the wrong when PDO is receiving or 0x6040.Fault Reset
range of the specified sending.
object.
：CANopen PDO Object is read-only and write-protected

The specified object in Check if the specified object is NMT: Reset node or
the message is read-only when PDO is receiving 0x6040.Fault Reset
write-protected. or sending.
：CANopen PDO Object is not allowed in PDO

The specified object in Check if the specified object NMT: Reset node or
the message does not allows PDO Mapping when PDO 0x6040.Fault Reset
support PDO. is receiving or sending.
：CANopen PDO Object is write-protected when Servo On

The specified object in Check that when PDO is NMT: Reset node or
the message is receiving or sending, if the 0x6040.Fault Reset
write-protected when specified object is write-protected
Servo ON when Servo On.

：Error occurs when reading CANopen PDO object via EEPROM

An error occurs when When PDO is receiving or NMT: Reset node or
loading the default sending, check if the error occurs 0x6040.Fault Reset
value via ROM at because the specified object
start-up. All objects of reads EEPROM.
CAN returns to the
default value
automatically.
：Error occurs when writing CANopen PDO object via EEPROM

An error occurs when When PDO is receiving or NMT: Reset node or
saving the current sending, check if the error occurs 0x6040.Fault Reset
value into ROM. because the specified object is
wrote into EEPROM
：The accessing address of EEPROM is out of range when using

CANopen PDO object
The quantity of the data Check that when PDO is NMT: Reset node or
inside ROM is over the 0x6040.Fault Reset
receiving or sending, if the
planned space. It is
probably because the specified object enables
software has been EEPROM address exceeds the
updated. The data limit.
inside ROM is stored
by the old version.
Thus, it cannot be
used.
：CRC of EEPROM calculation error occurs when using CANopen PDO

object
It means the data Check if the specified object NMT: Reset node or
stored in ROM is would cause CRC calculation 0x6040.Fault Reset
damaged. All CANopen error in EEPROM when PDO is
objects automatically receiving or sending.
returns to the default
value.

：Enter the incorrect password when using CANopen PDO object

When entering Check if the specified object NMT: Reset node or
parameters via CAN, enters the wrong password when 0x6040.Fault Reset
parameters are PDO is receiving or sending.
password-protected.
Users have to decode
the password first.
：Abnormal CAN Bus hardware

Abnormal CAN Bus 1. Check if the communication NMT: Reset node or re-servo on
hardware cable of CAN Bus is good.
2. Check if the communication
quality is good. (It is suggested
to use common grounding and
shielded cable)
：An error occurs when loading CANopen data

An error occurs when 1. If the alarm is cleared when DI:ARST, CANopen 0x1011
loading CANopen data re-servo on, it means the data Restore default parameter
error occurs instantaneously
when accessing in the
previous time.
2. If the error still exists after
re-servo on, it means the data
in EEPROM is damaged. It
has to enter the correct value
again. The method is as the
followings:
a. If the user desires to enter
the default value, it can set
P2-08 to 30, 28 or
CANopen object as
0x1011.
b. If the user desires to enter
the current value, it can set
CANopen object to
0x1010. (Please refer to
CANopen description.)

~ ：An error occurs when writing parameter via PR

PR commands TYPE 8 DI：Alm Reset or
Error occurs when ：parameter exceeds
P0-01 = 0
writing parameters the range
：the parameter is
read-only
Re-adjust PR command and
：Servo On or invalid parameters
value
：PR command overflows

PR command PR mode continuously operates NMT: Reset node or
overflows in one direction and causes 0x6040.Fault Reset
feedback register overflows. And
the coordinate system cannot
reflect the correct position. If
issuing the absolute positioning
command (except incremental) at
this time, the error will occur.
：PR positioning is over time

PR positioning is over This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
time moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
contact the distributors.
：The number of PR command exceeds the range

The number of PR This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
command exceeds the moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
range contact the distributors.
：Index error occurs when accessing CANopen object

The specified Index in This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
the message does not moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
exist. contact the distributors.

：Sub-Index error occurs when accessing CANopen object

The specified This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
Sub-Index in the moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
message does not contact the distributors.
exist.
：Data size error occurs when accessing CANopen object

The data length in the This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
message does not moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
match to the specified contact the distributors.
object.
：Data range error occurs when accessing CANopen object

The data in the This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
message is over the moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
range of the specified contact the distributors.
object.
：CANopen object is read-only and write-protected

The specified object in This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
the message is moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
write-protected. contact the distributors.
：CANopen PDO Object is not allowed in PDO

the message does not moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
support PDO contact the distributors.
：CANopen object is write-protected when Servo On

the message is moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
write-protected when contact the distributors.
Servo ON

：Error occurs when reading CANopen object via EEPROM

An error occurs when This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
loading the default moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
value via ROM at contact the distributors.
start-up. All objects of
CAN returns to the
default value
automatically.
：Error occurs when writing CANopen object via EEPROM

An error occurs when This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
saving the current moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
value into ROM contact the distributors.
：The accessing address of EEPROM is out of range when using

CANopen object
The quantity of the data This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
inside ROM is over the moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
planned space. It is contact the distributors.
probably because the
software has been
updated. The data
inside ROM is stored
by the old version.
Thus, it cannot be
used.
：CRC of EEPROM calculation error occurs when using CANopen object

It indicates that the This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
data stored in ROM moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
has been damaged. All contact the distributors.
objects of CAN will
return to the default
settings automatically.

：Enter the incorrect password when using CANopen object

When entering This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
parameters via CAN, moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
the parameters are contact the distributors.
password-protected.
Users have to decode
the password first.
：Forward Software Limit

Forward software limit Forward Software Limit is NMT: Reset node or
determined by the position 0x6040.Fault Reset
command, not the actual
feedback position. It is because
the command will arrive first and
then the feedback. When the
protection function is activated,
the actual position might not over
the limit. Therefore, setting an
appropriate decelerating time
could satisfy the demand. Please
refer to the description of
parameter P5-03.
：Reverse Software Limit

Reverse software limit Reverse Software Limit is NMT: Reset node or
determined by the position 0x6040.Fault Reset
command, not the actual
feedback position. It is because
the command will arrive first and
then the feedback. When the
protection function is activated,
the actual position might not over
the limit. Therefore, setting an
appropriate decelerating time
could satisfy the demand. Please
refer to the description of
parameter P5-03.
：Feedback position counter overflows

Feedback position This alarm will not occur at the NMT: Reset node or
counter overflows moment. If it does, please 0x6040.Fault Reset
contact the distributors.

：Servo Off error

Servo Off error 1. Check if the wiring of NMT: Reset node or
DI.SERVO ON is correct 0x6040.Fault Reset
2. Check if the controller servo on
the drive too early.
：CANopen fails to synchronize

CANopen fails to 1. Check if the communication NMT: Reset node or
synchronize quality of the circuit is bad. 0x6040.Fault Reset
2. Check if the controller sends
SYNC signal successfully.
3. Check if the setting of P3-09 is
reasonable. (It is better to use
the default value)
：The synchronized signal of CANopen is sent too fast

The synchronized 1. Check if synchronized cycle NMT: Reset node or
signal of CANopen is 0x1006 is the same as the 0x6040.Fault Reset
sent too fast
setting of controller.
the default value)
3. Check if the order of controller
is incorrect.
：The synchronized signal of CANopen is sent too slow

The synchronized 1. Check if the communication NMT: Reset node or
signal of CANopen is quality of the circuit is bad. 0x6040.Fault Reset
sent too slow
2. Check if synchronized cycle
0x1006 is the same as the
setting of controller.
the default value)
4. Check if the order of controller
is incorrect.

：CANopen IP command fails

CANopen IP command The calculating time of IP mode NMT: Reset node or
fails takes too long. Please disable 0x6040.Fault Reset
USB monitoring function.
：SYNC Period is in error

SYNC Period is in error Examine the content of 0x1006.If NMT: Reset node or
it is smaller than or equals to 0, 0x6040.Fault Reset
the alarm will occur.
：Position Deviation Alarm

DO.MC_OK is ON and Please refer to the description of DI：Alm Reset or P0-01= 0
becomes OFF. parameter P1-48.
After DO.MC_OK ON,
DO.MC_OK becomes OFF
because DO.TPOS turns OFF.
The position of the motor might
be deviated by the external force
after positioning. This alarm can
be cleared by P1-48.Y=0.

10.5 Corrective Actions after the Alarm Occurs

：Over current Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
：Over voltage Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
：Undervoltage The alarm can be cleared after the voltage

returns to normal.
： The magnetic field of the The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
motor is abnormal
：Regeneration error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
：Overload Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
：Excessive speed deviation Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
：Abnormal pulse command Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
：Excessive deviation of Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm

position control
：Encoder error The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
：Adjustment error The alarm can be cleared when removing

CN1 wiring and execute auto adjustment.
：Emergency stop The alarm can be cleared automatically after
turning DI.EMGS off
：Reverse limit error Turn DI.ARST on or Servo Off to clear the
alarm. The alarm also can be cleared when
the motor operates backwards.
：Forward limit error Turn DI.ARST on or Servo Off to clear the
alarm. The alarm also can be cleared when
the motor operates backwards.
：The temperature of IGBT is Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
abnormal
：Abnormal EEPROM If the alarm occurs, then parameter reset is a
must. And re-servo on again. If it happens
during the operation, please turn DI.ARST on
to clear the alarm.
：Abnormal signal output Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
：Serial communication error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
：Serial communication Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm

timeout
：Main circuit power leak Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
phase
：Early warning for overload Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm

：Encoder initial magnetic field The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
error
：The internal of the encoder is The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
in error
：The encoder is in error The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
：Motor crash error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
：Incorrect wiring of the motor The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
power line U, V, W, GND
： Connection of 26 pin on The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
converter box is breakdown
：Motor temperature error The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
：Excessive deviation of full Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm

closed-loop position control
：Communication of CN5 is The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
breakdown
：Warning of servo drive
Set Bit 4 of P2-66 to 1 and re-power on will do.
function
：Auto detection of motor The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
parameters is completed
：Auto detection of motor Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
parameters is in error
：Initial magnetic pole Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
detection error
：Motor parameter is not Set PM-02 to 1 and re-power on. The alarm
confirmed will be cleared automatically.
：Exceeding the range of Correctly setup the parameter and re-power
motor parameter on. The alarm will be cleared automatically.
：Motor magnetic field error The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
：Motor magnetic field error The alarm can be cleared after re-power on.
：Motor magnetic field error Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm
：Motor temperature warning The alarm will be cleared when the

temperature recovers
：DSP firmware upgrade Firstly set P2-08 to 30. Then set it to 28. And
the alarm will be cleared after re-power on.
：CANopen SDO receives NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
butter overlfow
：CANopen PDO receives NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
buffer overflow

：Index error occurs when NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset

accessing CANopen PDO
：Sub-Index error occurs when NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
：Data range error occurs NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
when accessing CANopen
PDO
：CANopen PDO object is NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
read-only and
write-protected.
：CANopen PDO object is not NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
allowed in PDO
：CANopen PDO object is NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
write-protected when Servo
On
：Error occurs when reading NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
CANopen PDO object via
EEPROM
：Error occurs when writing NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
CANopen PDO object via
EEPROM
：The accessing address of NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
EEPROM is out of range
when using CANopen PDO
object
： CRC of EEPROM NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
calculation error occurs
when using CANopen
PDO object
：Enter the incorrect password NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
when using CANopen PDO
object
：Abnormal CAN Bus NMT:Reset node or re-servo on
hardware
： An error occurs when Turn DI.ARST on to clear the alarm, CANopen
loading CANopen data 0x1011 Restore default parameter
：An error occurs when writing DI.Alm Reset or P0-01 = 0
parameter via PR：exceeds
the range
：An error occurs when writing DI.Alm Reset or P0-01 = 0
parameter via PR：read-only

：An error occurs when writing Re-adjust PR command and parameter

parameter via PR：
parameter locked
：PR command overflows NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
：PR positioning is over time NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
：The number PR command NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset

exceeds the range
： Index error occurs when NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
accessing CANopen object
：Data Size error occurs when NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
： Data range error occurs NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
when accessing CAN.
：CANopen object is read-only NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
and write-protected
：PDO is not allowed in NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
CANopen object
：CANopen object is NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
write-protected when Servo
On
：Error occurs when reading NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
CANopen object via
EEPROM
：Error occurs when writing NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
CANopen object via
EEPROM
：The accessing address of NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
EEPROM is out of range
when using CANopen
object
：CRC of EEPROM calculation NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
error occurs when using
CANopen object
：Enter the incorrect password NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
when using CANopen object
：Forward Software Limit NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
：Reverse Software Limit NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset

：Feedback position counter NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset

overflows
：Servo Off error NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
：CANopen fails to NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset

synchronize
：The synchronized signal of NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
CANopen is sent too fast
：The synchronized signal of NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
CANopen is sent too slow
：CANopen IP command is NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
failed
：SYNC Period is in error NMT: Reset node or 0x6040.Fault Reset
：Position Deviation Alarm DI:Alm Reset or P0-01 = 0

Chapter 11 Specifications
11.1 Specifications of Servo Drive

100 W 200 W 400 W 750 W 1 kW 1.5 kW 2 kW 3 kW
ASDA-A2R Series
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30
Three phase 220
Phase / Voltage Single phase/ Three phase 220 VAC
VAC
Three phase 200
Pow
Permissible voltage Single phase/ Three phase 200 ~ 230 VAC, -15%~10% ~ 230 VAC,
er
-15%~10%
Continuous output 0.9 1.55 2.6 5.1 7.3 8.3 13.4 19.4
current Arms Arms Arms Arms Arms Arms Arms Arms
Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling
Encoder resolution / Feedback
resolution (for Delta’s 20BIT 20-bit (1280000 p/rev)
rotary motor)
Main circuit control SVPWM control
Control mode Manual／Auto
Dynamic brake N/A Built-in
Max. input pulse Transmitted by differential: 500K/4Mpps, transmitted by open-collector:
frequency 200Kpps
Position Control Mode
Pulse type Pulse + symbol; A phase + B phase; CCW pulse + CW pulse

Command source External pulse／Register
Smoothing strategy Low-pass and P-curve filter
E-gear ratio: N／M time, limitation: (1/50 < N/M < 25600)
E-gear ratio
N: 1~32767／M: 1:32767
Torque limit Parameter settings
Feed forward
Parameter settings
compensation
Voltage
0 ~ ±10 VDC
range
Speed Control Mode
Analog
Input
command 10 K
resistance
input
Time
2.2 us
constant
Speed control range*1 1:5000
Command source External analog command / Register
Smoothing strategy Low-pass and S-curve filter

Chapter 11 Specifications ASDA-A2R Series
100 W 200 W 400 W 750 W 1 kW 1.5 kW 2 kW 3 kW

ASDA-A2R Series
01 02 04 07 10 15 20 30
Torque limit Via parameter setting or analog input
Bandwidth Max.1kHz
The load fluctuation (0 ~ 100%) is 0.01%
Speed accuracy*2 The power fluctuation ±10% is 0.01%
The ambient temperature fluctuation (0 ~ 50℃) is 0.01%
Voltage
0 ~ ±10 VDC
range
Torque control mode
Analog
Input
command 10 K
resistance
input
Time
2.2 us
constant
Command source External analog command / Register
Smoothing strategy Low-pass filter
Speed limit Via parameter setting or analog input
The monitor signal which can be set via parameters (Output voltage range:
Analog monitor output
±8 V)
Servo on, Fault reset, Gain switch, Pulse clear, Zero clamp, Command input
reverse control, Internal position command trigger, Torque (force) limit, Speed
limit, Internal position command selection, Motor stop, Speed command
selection, Speed / position mode switching, Speed / torque (force) mode
Input
switching, Torque (force) / position mode switching, Pt／Pr command
switching, Emergency stop, Positive / negative limit, Original point, Forward /
reverse operation torque limit, Homing activated, E-CAM engage, Forward /
Digital reverse JOG input, Event trigger, E-gear N selection, Pulse input prohibition
Input/Output
A, B, Z Line Driver output
Servo on, Servo ready, Zero speed, Target speed reached, Target position
reached, torque (force) limiting, Servo alarm, Brake control, Homing
Output completed, Early warning for overload, Servo warning, Position command
overflows, Software negative limit, Software positive limit, Internal position
command completed, Capture procedure completed, Servo procedure
completed, Master position area of E-CAM
Over current, Overvoltage, Undervoltage, Overheat, Regeneration error,
Overload, Excessive speed deviation, Excessive position deviation, Encoder
error, Adjustment error, Emergency stop, Negative / positive limit error,
Protective function
Excessive deviation of full-closed loop control, Serial communication error,
Rst leak phase, Serial communication timeout, Short-circuit protection of
terminal U, V, W and CN1, CN2, CN3
Communication interface RS-232／RS-485／CANopen／USB
Indoors (avoid the direct sunlight), no corrosive fog (avoid fume, flammable
Installation site
gas and dust)
Altitude Elevation under 1000M
Environment
Atmospheric
86kPa ~ 106kPa
pressure
Operating
0℃ ~ 55℃(If the temperature is over 45℃, forced air circulation is needed.)
temperature
Storage
-20℃ ~ 65℃
temperature
Humidity Under 0 ~ 90% RH (non-condensing)

2 2
Vibrating Under 20Hz, 9.80665m/s (1G), 20 ~ 50Hz 5.88m/ s (0.6G)
IP rating IP20
Power system TN system*4
IEC/EN 61800-5-1, UL 508C, C-tick
Approvals
Note:
*1 When it is in rated load, the speed ratio is: the minimum speed (smooth operation) /rated speed.
*2 When the command is the rated speed, the velocity correction ratio is: (rotational speed with no load –
rotational speed with full load) / rated speed.
*3 Please refer to section 11.6 for overload features.
*4 TN system: The neutral point of the power system connects to the ground directly. The exposed metal
components connect to the ground via the protective earth conductor.

11.2 Specifications of Servo Motor (ECMA Series)

Low inertia series
C104 C△04 C△06 C△08 C△09
ECMA
0F 01 02 04 04 07 07 10
Rated power (kW) 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.4 0.75 0.75 1.0
Rated torque (N-m)*1 0.159 0.32 0.64 1.27 1.27 2.39 2.39 3.18
Max. torque (N-m) 0.477 0.96 1.92 3.82 3.82 7.16 7.14 8.78
Rated speed (r/min) 3000 3000
Max. speed (r/min) 5000 3000
Rated current (A) 0.69 0.90 1.55 2.60 2.60 5.10 3.66 4.25
Max. instantaneous current
(A)
2.05 2.70 4.65 7.80 7.80 15.3 11 12.37
Max. power per second
(kW/s)
12.27 27.7 22.4 57.6 24.0 50.4 29.6 38.6
2
Rotor inertia (× 10-4kg.m ) 0.0206 0.037 0.177 0.277 0.68 1.13 1.93 2.62
Mechanical constant (ms) 1.14 0.75 0.80 0.53 0.74 0.63 1.72 1.20
Torque constant – KT(N-m/A) 0.23 0.36 0.41 0.49 0.49 0.47 0.65 0.75
Voltage constant – KE
(mV/(r/min))
9.8 13.6 16.0 17.4 18.5 17.2 24.2 27.5
Armature resistance (Ohm) 12.7 9.30 2.79 1.55 0.93 0.42 1.34 0.897
Armature inductance (mH) 26 24.0 12.07 6.71 7.39 3.53 7.55 5.7
Electric constant (ms) 2.05 2.58 4.30 4.30 7.96 8.36 5.66 6.35
Insulation class Class A (UL), Class B (CE)
Insulation resistance ＞100M, DC 500V
Insulation strength 1.8k Vac,1 sec

Weight – without brake (kg) 0.42 0.5 1.2 1.6 2.1 3.0 2.9 3.8
Weight – with brake (kg) -- 0.8 1.5 2.0 2.9 3.8 3.69 5.5
Radial max. loading (N) 78.4 78.4 196 196 245 245 245 245
Axial max. loading (N) 39.2 39.2 68 68 98 98 98 98
(kW/s) (with brake)
-- 25.6 21.3 53.8 22.1 48.4 29.3 37.9
2
Rotor inertia (× 10-4kg.m )
-- 0.04 0.19 0.30 0.73 1.18 1.95 2.67
(with brake)
Mechanical constant (ms) --
(with brake)
0.81 0.85 0.57 0.78 0.65 1.74 1.22
Brake holding torque --
[Nt-m (min)] *2
0.3 1.3 1.3 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5
Brake power consumption (at --
20˚C) [W]
7.3 6.5 6.5 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2
Brake release time --
[ms (Max)]
5 10 10 10 10 10 10
Brake pull-in time --
[ms (Max)]
25 70 70 70 70 70 70

C104 C△04 C△06 C△08 C△09

ECMA
0F 01 02 04 04 07 07 10
Vibration grade (μm) 15
Operating temperature (˚C) 0℃ ~ 40℃
Storage temperature (˚C) -10℃ ~ 80℃
Operating humidity 20 ~ 90%RH (non-condensing)
Storage humidity 20 ~ 90%RH (non-condensing)
Vibration capacity 2.5G
IP65 (use the waterproof connector and shaft seal installation (or
IP Rating
oil seal)
Approvals
Note:
*1 The rated torque is the continuous permissible torque between 0~40˚C operating temperature which is
suitable for the following heat sink dimension.
ECMA-_ _ 04 / 06 / 08：250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-_ _ 10：300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-_ _ 13：400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-_ _ 18：550mm x 550mm x 30mm
Material: Aluminum – F40, F60, F80, F100, F130, F180
*2 The built-in brake of the servo motor is for remaining the item in stop status. Do not use it to decelerate or
as the dynamic brake.

Low inertia series

C△10 C△13
ECMA
10 20 30
Rated power (kW) 1.0 2.0 3.0
*1
Rated torque (N-m) 3.18 6.37 9.55
Max. torque (N-m) 9.54 19.1 28.65
Rated current (A) 7.30 12.05 17.2
Max. instantaneous
current (A)
21.9 36.15 47.5
(kW/s)
38.1 90.6 71.8
Rotor inertia
2 2.65 4.45 12.7
(× 10-4kg.m )
Mechanical constant (ms) 0.74 0.61 1.11
Torque constant –
KT(N-m/A)
0.44 0.53 0.557
(mV/(r/min))
16.8 19.2 20.98
Armature resistance
(Ohm)
0.20 0.13 0.0976
Armature inductance
(mH)
1.81 1.50 1.21
Electric constant (ms) 9.30 11.4 12.4

Weight – without brake
(kg)
4.3 6.2 7.8
Weight – with brake (kg) 4.7 7.2 9.2
Radial max. loading (N) 490 490 490
Axial max. loading (N) 98 98 98
(kW/s) (with brake)
30.4 82.0 65.1
Rotor inertia
2
(× 10-4kg.m ) 3.33 4.95 14.0
(with brake)
Mechanical constant (ms)
(with brake)
0.93 0.66 1.22
Brake holding torque
8.0 8.0 10.0
[Nt-m (min)] *2
Brake power consumption
(at 20˚C) [W]
19.4 19.4 19.0
Brake release time
10 10 10
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
[ms (Max)]
70 70 70

C△10 C△13
ECMA
10 20 30
Operating temperature
(˚C) 0℃ ~ 40℃
20 ~ 90%RH
Operating humidity
(non-condensing)
20 ~ 90%RH
Storage humidity
(non-condensing)
IP65 (use the waterproof
IP Rating connector and shaft seal
installation (or oil seal) model)
Approvals
Note:
ECMA-_ _ 04 / 06 / 08：250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-_ _ 10：300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-_ _ 13：400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-_ _ 18：550mm x 550mm x 30mm

Medium／High inertia series

E△13 E△18 G△13
ECMA
05 10 15 20 20 30 35 03 06 09
Rated power (kW) 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0 3.0 3.5 0.3 0.6 0.9
Rated torque (N-m)*1 2.39 4.77 7.16 9.55 9.55 14.32 16.71 2.86 5.73 8.59
Max. torque (N-m) 7.16 14.3 21.48 28.65 28.65 42.97 50.13 8.59 17.19 21.48
Rated current (A) 2.9 5.6 8.3 11.01 11.22 16.1 19.2 2.5 4.8 7.5
8.7 16.8 24.9 33.03 33.66 48.3 57.6 7.5 14.4 22.5
(A)
7.0 27.1 45.9 62.5 26.3 37.3 50.8 10.0 39.0 66.0
(kW/s)
2
Rotor inertia (× 10-4kg.m ) 8.17 8.41 11.18 14.59 34.68 54.95 54.95 8.17 8.41 11.18
Mechanical constant (ms) 1.91 1.51 1.10 0.96 1.62 1.06 1.08 1.84 1.40 1.06
Torque constant –
0.83 0.85 0.87 0.87 0.85 0.89 0.87 1.15 1.19 1.15
KT(N-m/A)
30.9 31.9 31.8 31.8 31.4 32.0 32 42.5 43.8 41.6
(mV/(r/min))
Armature resistance (Ohm) 0.57 0.47 0.26 0.174 0.119 0.052 0.052 1.06 0.82 0.43
Armature inductance (mH) 7.39 5.99 4.01 2.76 2.84 1.38 1.38 14.29 11.12 6.97
Electric constant (ms) 12.96 12.88 15.31 15.86 23.87 26.39 26.39 13.55 13.50 16.06
Insulation class Class A (UL), class B (CE)
Insulation resistance > 100M, DC 500V
Weight – without brake (kg) 6.8 7.0 7.5 7.8 13.5 18.5 18.5 6.8 7.0 7.5
Weight – with brake (kg) 8.2 8.4 8.9 9.2 17.5 22.5 22.5 8.2 8.4 8.9
Radial max. loading (N) 490 490 490 490 1176 1470 490 490 490 490
Axial max. loading (N) 98 98 98 98 490 490 98 98 98 98
6.4 24.9 43.1 59.7 24.1 35.9 48.9 9.2 35.9 62.1
(kW/s) (with brake)
2
Rotor inertia (× 10-4kg.m )
8.94 9.14 11.90 15.88 37.86 57.06 57.06 8.94 9.14 11.9
(with brake)
Mechanical constant (ms)
2.07 1.64 1.19 1.05 1.77 1.10 1.12 2.0 1.51 1.13
(with brake)
10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 25.0 25.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
[Nt-m (min)] *2
Brake power consumption
19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0 20.4 20.4 19.0 19.0 19.0 19.0
(at 20˚C) [W]
Brake release time [ms
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
(Max)]
Brake pull-in time [ms (Max)] 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70

E△13 E△18 G△13

ECMA
05 10 15 20 20 30 35 03 06 09
Operating temperature (˚C) 0℃ ~ 40℃
IP65 (use the waterproof connector and shaft seal installation (or oil
IP Rating
seal) model)
Approvals
Note:
ECMA-_ _ 04 / 06 / 08：250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-_ _ 10：300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-_ _ 13：400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-_ _ 18：550mm x 550mm x 30mm

Medium／High inertia series

F113 F△13 F113 F△18
ECMA
05 08 13 18 30
Rated power (kW) 0.5 0.85 1.3 1.8 3.0
Rated torque (N-m)*1 3.18 5.41 8.34 11.48 19.10
Max. torque (N-m) 8.92 13.8 23.3 28.7 57.29
Rated speed (r/min) 1500
Max. speed (r/min) 3000
Rated current (A) 3.9 7.1 12.6 13 19.4
Max. instantaneous
12.1 19.4 38.6 36 58.2
current (A)
Max. power per
9.8 21.52 34.78 52.93 66.4
second (kW/s)
Rotor inertia
2 10.3 13.6 20 24.9 54.95
(× 10-4kg.m )
Mechanical constant
2.8 2.43 1.62 1.7 1.28
(ms)
Torque constant - KT
0.82 0.76 0.66 0.88 0.98
(N-m/A)
29.5 29.2 24.2 32.2 35.0
(mV/(r/min))
Motor resistance
0.624 0.38 0.124 0.185 0.077
(Ohm)
Motor inductance (mH) 7 4.77 1.7 2.6 1.27
Electric constant (ms) 11.22 12.55 13.71 14.05 16.5
Weight – without brake
6.3 8.6 9.4 10.5 18.5
(kg)
Weight – with brake
-- 10.0 -- -- 22.5
(kg)
Radial max. loading
490 490 490 490 1470
(N)
Axial max. loading (N) 98 98 98 98 490
Max. power per
second (kW/s) (with 8.8 19.78 32.66 50.3 63.9
brake)

Rotor inertia
2
(× 10-4kg.m ) 11.5 14.8 21.3 26.2 57.06
(with brake)
Mechanical constant
3.12 2.65 1.73 1.79 1.33
(ms) (with brake)
10 10.0 10.0 10.0 25.0
[Nt-m (min)] *2
Brake power
consumption 19 19.0 19.0 19.0 20.4
(at 20˚C)[W]
Brake release time
10 10 10 10 10
[ms (Max)]
Brake pull-in time
70 70 70 70 70
[ms (Max)]
Operating temperature
0 ℃~ 40℃
(℃ )
Storage temperature
-10℃ ~ 80℃
(℃ )
IP65 (use the waterproof connector and shaft
IP Rating
seal installation (or oil seal) model)
Approvals*4
Note:
ECMA-_ _ 04 / 06 / 08：250mm x 250mm x 6mm
ECMA-_ _ 10：300mm x 300mm x 12mm
ECMA-_ _ 13：400mm x 400mm x 20mm
ECMA-_ _ 18：550mm x 550mm x 30mm
ECMA-_ _ 22：650mm x 650mm x 35mm
Material: Aluminum – F40, F60, F80, F100, F130, F180, F220
*3 If desire to reach the max. torque limit of motor 250%, it is suggest to use the servo drive with higher watt.
*4 The application of UL safety compliance for ECMA-F11305, ECMA-F11308, ECMA-F11313,
ECMA-F11318 is under processing.

11.3 Specifications of Servo Motor (ECML series)

S16 S20
ECML
06 08 03 04 05
Rated force (N) 21.8 36 29.6 39.4 49.3
Max. force (N) 87.2 144 118.3 157.5 197.1
Rated current (Arms) 0.66 0.66 1.1 1.1 1.1
2.64 2.64 4.4 4.4 4.4
(Arms)
Force constant-FC（N/Arms） 33 44 26.9 35.8 44.8
Voltage constant –KE
11 14.7 8.9 11.9 14.9
(Vrms/(m/s))
Armature resistance (Ohm) 55.7 74.2 20 26.6 33.3
Armature inductance (mH) 10.5 14 7 9 11
Rated power (W) 47 62.6 46.9 62.3 78
Max. instantaneous power (W) 751.7 1001.3 749.7 997.1 1248.3
Motor constant (N/ W ) 3.2 4.6 4.3 5 5.6
Electric constant (ms) 0.19 0.19 0.35 0.34 0.33
Thermal resistance (℃/W) 1.6 1.2 1.6 1.2 0.96
Weight of coil assembly (kg) 0.35 0.45 0.65 0.83 1.0
Length of coil assembly (mm) 108 138 108 138 168
Vertical attraction Force (N) 0 0 0 0 0
Magnetic pole pitch (mm) 30 60
Air gap (mm) 0.75
Max. temperature of coil
130℃
assembly
Insulation class Class B (CE)
Operating temperature (˚C) 0 ~ 40
Storage temperature (˚C) -10 ~ 80
Approvals

S25 S32
ECML
04 06 08 04 06 08
*1
Rated force (N) 62.3 93.5 130.0 87.4 138.9 185.2
Max. force (N) 249.2 374 520.0 349.6 555.7 740.9
Rated current (Arms) 1.7 1.7 2.5 1.9 2.7 2.7
6.8 6.8 10.0 7.6 10.8 10.8
(Arms)
Force constant –FC (N/Arms) 36.6 55 52.5 46 51.4 68.6
Back EMF constant – KE
12.2 18.3 17.5 15.3 17.2 22.9
(Vrms/(m/s))
Armature resistance (Ohm) 11.6 17.4 12.6 14 10.7 14.3
Armature inductance (mH) 14.6 22 23 16 12.5 16.6
Rated power (W) 64.9 97.4 152.5 97.9 151 201.8
Max. instantaneous power
1038.6 1557.8 2439.6 1565.7 2416.5 3229.5
(W)
Motor constant (N/ W ) 7.7 9.5 10.5 8.8 11.3 13
Electric constant (ms) 1.26 1.26 1.83 1.14 1.17 1.16
Thermal resistance (℃/W) 1.16 0.77 0.49 0.77 0.5 0.37
Weight of coil assembly (kg) 1.1 1.6 2.1 1.5 2.2 2.8
Length of coil assembly (mm) 138 198 258 138 198 258
Vertical attraction Force (N) 0 0 0 0 0 0
Magnetic pole pitch (mm) 60 60
Air gap (mm) 1.0 1.75
Max. temperature of coil
130℃
assembly
Insulation class Class B (CE)
Insulation strength AC 1500V, 60 seconds
Operating temperature (˚C) 0 ~ 40
Storage temperature (˚C) -10 ~ 80
Approvals

11.4 Torque Features (T-N curve)

220 V Series
Torque (N-m)
0.477
(300%)
Acceleration /
Deceleration
area
0.159
(100%)
0.095 Continuous
(60%) area
Speed
(r/min)
3000 5000
ECMA-C1040F□S
Torque (N-m)
8.78
(276%)
Acceleration /
Deceleration
area
3.18
(100%)
Continuous
area
Speed
(r/min)
2000 3000
ECMA-C10910□S
Torque (N-m)
28.65
(300%)
Acceleration /
Deceleration
area
9.55
(100%)
6.40 Continuous
(67%) area
Speed
(r/min)
3000 4500
ECMA-C11330□4

Torque (N-m) Torque (N-m)
50.13
(300%) 8.92
(280%)
Acceleration / Acceleration /
Deceleration Deceleration
area 5.1 area
(160%)
16.71 3.18
(100%) (100%)
11.20 Continuous Continuous
1.59
(67%) area area
Speed (50%) Speed
(r/min) (r/min)
2000 3000 1500 2300 3000
ECMA-E11835□S ECMA-F11305□S

11.5 Force and Speed Features (F-S curve)

Continuous area Continuous area

Acceleration / Speed (m/s) Acceleration /
Speed (m/s)
Deceleration area Deceleration area
4.5 4.5
4.0 4.0
3.5 3.5
3.0 3.0
2.5 2.5
2.0 2.0
1.5 1.5
1.0 1.0
0.5 0.5
Force (N) Force (N)
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
ECML-S3204 ECML-S3206
Continuous area
Acceleration /
Speed (m/s)
Deceleration area
4.5
4.0
3.5
3.0
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Force (N)
0
ECML-S3208

11.6 Overload Features

Definition of overload protection
The overload protection is to prevent the motor in overheat status.
Cause of overload
1) When the motor operates over the rated torque, the operation time is too long
2) The inertia ratio is set too big and frequently accelerate / decelerate
3) Connection error between the power cable and encoder wiring
4) Servo gain setting error and cause resonance of the motor
5) The motor with brake operates without releasing the brake
The graph of load and operating time

Low inertia (ECMA C1, J1 series)

Medium and Medium-high inertia (ECMA E1, F1 series)
High inertia (ECMA G1 series)

11.7 Dimensions of the Servo Drive

ASD-A2R-0121; ASD-A2R-0221; ASD-A2R-0421 (100W ~ 400W)
Weight 1.5（3.3）
NOTE 1) Dimensions are in millimeters (inches); Weights are in kilograms

(pounds).
2) Dimensions and weights might be revised without prior notice.

ASD-A2R-0721; ASD-A2R-1021; ASD-A2R-1521 (750W ~ 1.5kW)
Weight 2.0（4.4）

(pounds).

ASD-A2R-2023; ASD-A2R-3023 (2kW ~ 3kW)
Weight 2.89（6.36）

(pounds).

11.8 Dimensions of ECMA Series Servo Motor

Motor Frame Size: 86 or below (Units: mm)
300±50
300±50 LG LR
LE
TP
LS
LW
ØLBh7
ØSh6
□LC
RH
KEY DETAILS SHAFT END DETAILS
LL
Model C1040F□ S C△0401□ S C△0602□ S C△0604□ S C△0604□ H

LC 40 40 60 60 60
LZ 4.5 4.5 5.5 5.5 5.5
LA 46 46 70 70 70
S 8( 00.009 ) 8( 00.009 ) 14( 00.011) 14( 00.011) 14( 00.011)
LB 30( 00.021) 30( 00.021) 50( 00.025 ) 50( 00.025 ) 50( 00.025 )
LL
79.1 100.6 105.5 130.7 145.8
(without brake)
LL
-- 136.6 141.6 166.8 176.37
(with brake)
LS 20 20 27 27 27
LR 25 25 30 30 30
LE 2.5 2.5 3 3 3
LG 5 5 7.5 7.5 7.5
LW 16 16 20 20 20
RH 6.2 6.2 11 11 11
WK 3 3 5 5 5
W 3 3 5 5 5
T 3 3 5 5 5
M3 M4 M4 M4
TP --
Depth 8 Depth 15 Depth 15 Depth 15
NOTE 1) Dimensions are in millimeters.

3) Box, (□) represents the shaft end/ brake or the number of oil seal.
4) The boxes (ᇞ) in the model names are for encoder resolution types (ᇞ=1:
Incremental encoder, 20-bit; ᇞ=2: Incremental encoder, 17-bit).

Motor Frame Size: 86 or below (Units: mm)

300±50
300±50 LG LR
LE
TP
LS
LW
ØLBh7
ØSh6
□LC
RH
KEY DETAILS SHAFT END DETAILS
LL
C△0804□ C△0907□ S C△0910□ S

Model C△0807□ S C△0807□ H
7
LC 80 80 80 86 86
LZ 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6 6.6
LA 90 90 90 100 100
S 14( 00.011) 19( 00.013 ) 19( 00.013 ) 16( 00.011) 16( 00.011)
LB 70( 00.030 ) 70( 00.030 ) 70( 00.030 ) 80( 00.030 ) 80( 00.030 )
LL
112.3 138.3 151.1 130.2 153.2
(without brake)
LL
152.8 178 189 161.3 184.3
(with brake)
LS 27 32 32 30 30
LR 30 35 35 35 35
LE 3 3 3 3 3
LG 8 8 8 8 8
LW 20 25 25 20 20
RH 11 15.5 15.5 13 13
WK 5 6 6 5 5
W 5 6 6 5 5
T 5 6 6 5 5
M4 M6 M6 M5 M5
TP
Depth 15 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 15 Depth 15

4) The boxes (ᇞ) in the model names are for encoder resolution types (ᇞ=1:
Incremental encoder, 20-bit; ᇞ=2: Incremental encoder, 17-bit).

Motor Frame Size: 100 ~ 130 (Units: mm)
C△1020□
Model C△1010□ S C△1330□ 4 E△1305□ S E△1310□ S E△1315□ S E△1320□ S
S
LC 100 100 130 130 130 130 130
LZ 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
LA 115 115 145 145 145 145 145
22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013)
0
S 24( 0.013 )
95(00.035) 95(00.035) 0 0 0 0
0
LB 110( 0.035 ) 110(0.035) 110(0.035) 110(0.035) 110(0.035)
LL
153.3 199 187.5 147.5 147.5 167.5 187.5
(without brake)
LL
192.5 226 216.0 183.5 183.5 202 216
(with brake)
LS 37 37 47 47 47 47 47
LR 45 45 55 55 55 55 55
LE 5 5 6 6 6 6 6
LG 12 12 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
LW 32 32 36 36 36 36 36
RH 18 18 20 18 18 18 18
WK 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
W 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
T 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
TP
Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20

4) The boxes (ᇞ) in the model names are for encoder resolution types
(ᇞ=1: Incremental encoder, 20-bit; ᇞ=2: Incremental encoder, 17-bit).

Motor Frame Size: 100 ~ 130 (Units: mm)
Model F11305□ S F△1308□ S F11313□ S F11318□ S G△1303□ S G△1306□ S G△1309□ S

LC 130 130 130 130 130 130 130
LZ 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
LA 145 145 145 145 145 145 145
S 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013) 22(00.013)
LB 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035) 110(00.035)
LL
139.5 152.5 187.5 202 147.5 147.5 163.5
(without brake)
LL
168 181 -- -- 183.5 183.5 198
(with brake)
LS 47 47 47 47 47 47 47
LR 55 55 55 55 55 55 55
LE 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
LG 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5 11.5
LW 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
RH 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
WK 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
W 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
T 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6 M6
TP
Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20 Depth 20


Motor Frame Size: 180 or above (Units: mm)
Model E△1820□ S E△1830□ S E△1835□ S F△1830□ S

LC 180 180 180 180
LZ 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
LA 200 200 200 200
S 35(00.016) 35(00.016) 35(00.016) 35(00.016)
LB 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035) 114.3(00.035)

LL (without brake) 169 202.1 202.1 202.1
LL (with brake) 203.1 235.3 235.3 235.3
LS 73 73 73 73
LR 79 79 79 79
LE 4 4 4 4
LG 20 20 20 20
LW 63 63 63 63
RH 30 30 30 30
WK 10 10 10 10
W 10 10 10 10
T 8 8 8 8
M12 M12 M12 M12
TP
Depth 25 Depth 25 Depth 25 Depth 25


11.9 Dimensions of ECML Series Servo Motor

Coreless (Units: mm)
Coil Assembly
Model S1606 S1608 S2003 S2004 S2005

CH 42 42 52 52 52
CW 32 32 42 42 42
CD 17.5 17.5 21.5 21.5 21.5
CL 108 138 108 138 168
P1 29 29 29 29 29
P2 50 80 50 80 110
P3 21 21 21 21 21
P4 66 96 66 96 126
T1 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
T2 25 25 35 35 35
T3 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
T4 25 25 35 35 35
M1 x L1 M4x4.5 M4x4.5 M4x7 M4x7 M4x7
M2 x L2 M4x4.5 M4x4.5 M4x7 M4x7 M4x7
W1 16 16 21 21 21
W2 15 15 15 15 15
W3 17 17 17 17 17
W4 9 9 11 11 11
W5 14 14 20 20 20
PD 6 6 6 6 6
SD 6 6 6 6 6

Coil Assembly
Model S2504 S2506 S2508 S3204 S3206 S3208

CH 62 62 62 70 70 70
CW 52 52 52 60 60 60
CD 27 27 27 35.5 35.5 35.5
CL 138 198 258 138 198 258
P1 37 37 37 37 37 37
P2 64 124 184 64 124 92x2
P3 27 27 27 27 27 27
P4 84 144 204 84 144 204
T1 5 5 5 5 5 5
T2 42 42 42 50 50 50
T3 5 5 5 5 5 5
T4 42 42 42 50 50 50
M1 x L1 M5x8 M5x8 M5x8 M6x10 M6x10 M6x10
M2 x L2 M5x8 M5x8 M5x8 M6x10 M6x10 M6x10
W1 26 26 26 30 30 30
W2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
W3 21 21 21 21 21 21
W4 11 11 11 13 13 13
W5 30 30 30 34 34 34
PD 7 7 7 7 7 7
SD 6 6 6 6 6 6

Magnet Shaft
Holder Installation Area Holder Installation Area
Movable section working area L3
(Total length) L1
SM16 SM20
Model
0340 0520 0700 0880 1060 1240 0370 0550 0730 0910 1090 1270
L1 340 520 700 880 1060 1240 370 550 730 910 1090 1270
L2 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
L3 270 450 630 810 990 1170 300 480 660 840 1020 1200
L4 25 40 40 60 60 60 35 50 50 60 60 60
L5 290 440 620 760 940 1120 300 450 630 790 970 1150
Approx.
0.51 0.78 1.05 1.32 1.59 1.86 0.87 1.29 1.71 2.13 2.55 2.97
mass
SM 25 SM 32
Model
0390 0570 0390 0570 0390 0570 0390 0570 0390 0570 0390 0570
L1 390 570 390 570 390 570 390 570 390 570 390 570
L2 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
L3 300 480 300 480 300 480 300 480 300 480 300 480
L4 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45 45
L5 300 480 300 480 300 480 300 480 300 480 300 480
Approx.
1.43 2.08 1.43 2.08 1.43 2.08 1.43 2.08 1.43 2.08 1.43 2.08
mass

Chapter 12 Setting of Motor
Parameters
12.1 Tuning Procedure of Motor Parameters
Delta ASDA-A2R Servo Drive provides a more flexible option for selecting servo drive and
motor. Once the system is properly set through the tuning procedure, it can go with the
permanent magnet synchronous linear motor and permanent magnet synchronous rotary
motor of other brands.
Users can setup motor parameters through the software or panel. For safety reasons,
please Servo OFF the servo drive beforehand.
The tuning procedures are as follows.

STEP 1: Open PC software. Click the motor system setting from parameter function
selection.

Chapter 12 Setting of Motor Parameters ASDA-A2R Series
STEP 2: Setup motor parameters
Two methods can setup motor parameters:

1. Directly edit motor parameters:
If users already know all motor parameters, please directly enter the value of each
parameter for editing. Please refer to Chapter 8, PM Parameter Groups for relevant motor
parameters. After editing, download the parameter to the servo drive and set PM-02 to 1.
Then, re-servo ON the servo drive to enable the setting.
2. Run Motor Analysis:

Users can follow the instructions of Motor Analysis to finish the setting of motor parameters.
The following steps detail the function of Motor Analysis.

STEP 3: Setup the parameter initial value
1
2
3
This page is for setting up the initial value of parameter editing.

1. Set default value as edit settings: the initial value of parameter editing = The initial value
of the parameter
2. Load from servo as edit settings: the initial value of parameter editing = Servo parameter
value
3. To maintain the current value as edit settings: the initial value of parameter editing = The
parameter value edited in STEP 2.

STEP 4: The setting of motor basic parameters
Select the motor type:

Permanent magnet synchronous linear motor or permanent magnet synchronous rotary
motor
When editing parameters, if the selected parameter has decimal point, the software will
show the result after computing.

STEP 4.1: The setting of permanent magnet synchronous rotary motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1. The rated speed of PM synchronous rotary motor: range: 0~3000; unit: rpm
2. The maximum speed of PM synchronous rotary motor: range: 0~6000; unit: rpm
3. The torque constant of PM synchronous rotary motor: range: 0~13850; unit: 0.001Nm/A
(ampere)
7
4. The inertia of PM synchronous rotary motor: unit: 10 kg  m
2
5. The rated current of PM synchronous rotary motor: range: 0~the rated current of the
servo; unit: 0.01A (ampere); the input value cannot exceed the rated current of the
servo.
6. The rated current of the servo: It is the read-only value
7. The maximum current of PM synchronous rotary motor: input the maximum current of
the motor; range: 0~the maximum current of the servo; unit: 0.01A (ampere)
8. The maximum current of the servo: It is the read-only value

STEP 4.2: The setting of permanent magnet synchronous linear motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
1. The maximum speed of PM synchronous linear motor: range: 0~15999; unit: 10 m / s
2. The force constant of PM synchronous linear motor: range: 0~177362; unit: 0.01N/A
(ampere)
3. The rated current of PM synchronous linear motor: range: 0~the rated current of the
servo; unit: 0.01A (ampere); the input value cannot exceed the rated current of the
servo.
4. The rated current of the servo: It is the read-only value
5. The maximum current of PM synchronous linear motor: input the maximum current of
linear motor; range: 0~the maximum current of the servo; unit: 0.01A (ampere)
6. The maximum current of the servo: It is the read-only value.

STEP 5: The setting of feedback signal type

STEP 5.1: The setting of permanent magnet synchronous rotary motor
Select the encoder feedback signal type: square wave digital signal or sinusoid analog
signal

STEP 5.1.1: The setting of square wave digital signal
1 2
1. If the Hall sensor is installed: Select if the motor is installed Hall sensor.
2. The setting of signal source: Select the feedback signal source, CN2 or CN5
3. Encoder resolution (signal before quadrature process): The pulse number in one cycle
of motor feedback; unit: pulse / rev
4. The resolution of quadruple frequency: It is the read-only value. Value = PM-04*4; Unit:
count / rev
5. The maximum speed limit: The maximum speed limit of mechanism. Unite: rpm; range:
5 * 10 6 * 60
0~PM-32 (motor maximum speed)*1.05 or PM  04 (take the minimum value)

STEP 5.1.2: The setting of sinusoid analog signal
1 2
3
4
5
2. The setting of signal source: Its signal source is from CN2 port.
3. Encoder resolution (signal before quadrature process): The pulse number in one cycle
of motor feedback; unit: period / rev
4. The interpolation of signal converter box: Setup the interpolation of signal converter box.
It fine-cuts the sinusoid analog signal and transforms the signal into square wave signal
which also enhances the resolution.
5. The result after interpolation: It is the read-only value. Value = PM-04*PM-05; unit:
count / rev
6. The maximum speed limit: The maximum speed limit of mechanism. Range: 0~6000;
unit: rpm

STEP 5.2: The setting of permanent magnet synchronous linear motor

STEP 5.2.1: The setting of square wave digital signal
1 2
4
5
6
2. The setting of signal source: Select the feedback signal source, CN2 or CN5
3. Encoder resolution (signal before quadrature process): The length of one pulse of linear
scale feedback; unit: 10 m / pulse
5
For example, if the resolution of linear scale is 1um (signal after quadrature process),
users should enter 400000 in the table; if it is 0.5um, then users should enter 200000.
4. The resolution of quadruple frequency: It is the read-only value. Value = PM-04/4; Unit:
10 5 m / count
5. The pole pitch of permanent magnet synchronous linear motor. Range: 0~32767; unit:
0.1mm
6. The maximum speed limit: The maximum speed limit of mechanism. Range: 0~ PM-48
5 * PM  04
3
motor maximum speed*1.05 or 10 2 (take the minimum value); unit: 10 m / s .

STEP 5.2.2: The setting of sinusoid analog signal
1 2
3
4
5
6
7
2. The setting of signal source: Its signal source is from CN2 port only.
3. Encoder resolution: The length of one sinusoid cycle of linear scale feedback; unit:
10 3 m / period
4. The interpolation of signal converter box: Setup the interpolation of signal converter box.
It fine-cuts the sinusoid analog signal and transforms the signal into square wave signal
which also enhances the resolution.
5. The result after interpolation: It is the read-only value. Value = PM-04/PM-05*100; unit:
10 5 m / count
6. The pole pitch of permanent magnet synchronous linear motor. Input the pole pitch of
permanent magnet synchronous linear motor. Range: 0~32767; unit: 0.1 mm
7. The maximum speed limit: input the maximum speed limit of mechanism; range:
3
0~15999; unit: 10 m / s

STEP 6: Automatically detect parameters

STEP 6.1
Press START, the software starts to detect electrical parameters of the motor. The motor
will slightly wobble at first. Then, the linear motor moves back and forth for one pole pitch
and the rotary motor rotates one cycle. Users shall pay attention to the direction the motor
moves at the moment as it can be used to setup the definition of motor’s moving direction.
Before the detection, please reserve the motor’s moving distance in advance.
During the detection, if an alarm occurs, please refer to Chapter 10 for troubleshooting.
After conducting the corrective active, press Previous and then Next to clear the alarm.

The following common alarms are for reference.
：Auto detection of motor parameters is in error

When executing the 1. Check if motor pole pitch, 1. Enter the value which is the
function of PM-01, if encoder resolution and same as the actual one and
the friction is too big, encoder type are entered activate the detection again.
motor is stuck or correctly. 2. The rotary motor will rotate at
entering wrong 2. Check if motor is stuck during forward and reverse direction
resolution and pitch detection. for one magnetic cycle during
pole, this alarm will 3. Check if the motor friction is detection. The linear motor
occur. too big. will move for a pitch forward
4. Check if the feedback of linear and backward. Please
scale is abnormal, the preserve the moving distance
connection is breakdown, the before detection.
scale is not installed properly 3. Chang another motor with
or there is noise interference. more power.
4. Correct the problem of linear
scale.
Check if the feedback of linear scale works properly through PC software.
In monitor variable mode, press the SHIFT Key to pop up the menu. Select FDBK PULSE
IN 1REV (512) and check 32BIT. This is the actual feedback pulse of linear scale
(quardruple frequency). Manually move the fixed distance of linear motor. Observe the
change of variables to see if the moving distance matches the linear scale resolution.
For example, the linear scale resolution is 1um. If the linear motor is moved for 0.1m, the
0.1
6
 100000
value of FDBK PULSE IN 1REV (512) will be 1 * 10 pulse number.
If it has excessive error, please check if the linear scale has the problem that mentioned
above.

：Encoder initial magnetic field error

The initial magnetic 1. Check if the servo is properly If issue persists, please send the
drive back to the distributors or
field is of the encoder grounded.
contact with Delta.
in error 2. Check if the encoder cable
(Signal, U, V, W of the separates from the power
encoder magnetic field supply or the high-current
is in error.) circuit to avoid the
interference.
3. Check if the shielding cables
are used in the wiring of the
encoder.
4. If it connects to Hall sensor,
please check the wiring of Hall
sensor.
Judge the causes of alarm from Hall sensor. The followings are the description.
1. Check if the wiring of Hall sensor is correct.
2. If the motor connects to digital Hall sensor, the following methods can help to identify if
digital Hall sensor can work properly.
In PC software, enter address 0xe37b and the value is 16bit. Bit1, bit2 and bit3 of this
variable corresponds to the three-phase U, V and W of Hall sensor respectively. Move the
motor will change the value.
The normal value changes regularly includes two situation mentioned below.
i. (1,0,1) =>(1,0,0) =>(1,1,0) =>(0,1,0) =>(0,1,1) =>(0,0,1)
ii. (0,0,1) =>(0,1,1) =>(0,1,0) =>(1,1,0) =>(1,0,0) =>(1,0,1)
If the value irregular changes, it means Hall sensor might have the problem that mentioned
below.
1. The problem of interference: The value irregular changes.
2. If one of the following situations is established, such as the connection between Hall
sensor and servo drive is broken, broken Hall sensor, wrong wiring, one of the value
remains or the value changes but out of order, e.g. the value shows (1, 1, 1) and (0, 0,
0), the alarm (AL.024) occurs.
：Incorrect wiring of the motor power line U, V, W, GND

The wiring of U, V, Check if U, V, W of the motor is Follow the user manual
W, GND of the incorrect connected to correctly wire U, V, W
motor is incorrect and make sure it is
connected. grounded.

STEP 6.2: Set the motor moving direction
When the detection is completed, the above page pops up. Users self-define the first
moving direction as backward or forward direction. The setting value is saved in Z item of
P1-01.

STEP 6.3:
After the auto detection procedure is completed and re-servo on the servo drive, please
press The servo has been re-power on and proceed to the next step.

STEP7: Edit motor parameters
This page shows motor parameters and the value from auto-detection. The listed
parameters are effective. If users desire to change the motor parameter, simply enter the
value and press Write into the Servo will do.

STEP8: Gain adjustment of linear motor

Open PC software and select Auto Gain Tuning.
1 2

1. Set the proper bandwidth

2. Set the proper weight of linear motor and the total weight of system loading. Unit: kg
The estimated input value should close to the actual weight. If the input value is much
smaller than the actual one, the motor might tremble during the operation; if the input
value is much bigger than the actual one, it might cause resonance.
3. Gain computing
The software automatically computes the gain.
4. Download to servo drive
The gain value is not effective until it is downloaded to servo drive.
Estimate the actual weight of linear motor

Enable Gain Control Panel:

5
4
1. Activate the servo drive
2. Setup the speed curve of weight estimation and press Download.

For example, set the Jog speed to 10000 which means the operation speed is
100mm/s.
3. Decide the back and forth moving distance
Use Jog function to enable the motor moves back and forth between two fixed points
and estimate the weight. And the distance between two fixed points can be determined
by Position 1 and 2.
4. Start
Press the Start Key and the motor starts to move back and forth. In the item of the total
weight of movable section and load, users can see the value starts to change. It
means it is in weight estimation. When the value is stable, it can stop the motor. Press
Set J to complete the estimation.
If it is in weight estimation, but the value in total weight of movable section and load
remains, the speed and acceleration / deceleration constant should be increased in
STEP 2 before conducting the estimation.
5. Setup the bandwidth and gain.

STEP9: P2-35 (The setting of preventing excessive position error)
With the proper setting of P2-35, it can effectively prevent the sudden unintended
acceleration.
The motor can run at the maximum speed within the maximum limit. Observe the variable
which is the approximate value of encoder error through PC software and then set a buffer
range to P2-35.
For example, when the motor runs to the maximum speed, the maximum encoder error is
25000, the range of P2-35 can be set between 35000 and 40000.

STEP10: P1-74.U (The filter setting of CN5 linear scale) (digit in thousands)
When the feedback signal of CN5 connector is the AB type square wave from motor
encoder or the signal of linear scale, setup the proper digital filter can effectively suppress
the noise. Users can refer to the maximum approximate value of feedback pulse and setup
the buffer value of P1-74.U. The setting value of U and its corresponding filter frequency:
U = 1 (20Mhz)
U = 2 (10Mhz)
U = 3 (6.66Mhz)
U = 4 (1.66Mhz)
U = 5 (833Khz)
U = 6 (416Khz)
Take filter frequency 20MHz (50ns) as the example:
50ns 50ns
The single phase with the width smaller than 50ns will be filtered.
For example, when connecting to 1um of linear scale, the maximum speed of motor is 1m/s.
At the moment, the maximum moving frequency of linear scale is 1MHz (quardruple
frequency) and the minimum width of single phase pulse is 2us (= 500khz). Consider the
change of pulse width or the motor’s moving speed might exceed the upper limit, thus,
setup a buffer range (set U to 4).
STEP11: Output A/B pulse by pass from CN5: P1-74.Y (digit in tens)
When the feedback signal of CN5 connector is the AB type square wave from motor
encoder or the signal of linear scale, output A/B pulse by pass from CN5 in order to transmit
a more realistic signal to the controller. Set P1-74.Y to 1 will do.

STEP12: Parameters that are commonly used in A2R
Execution Related
parameters
Aiming to the excessive position error, the parameter will
P2-35
activate the alarm for protection.
Aiming to the problem of severe noise from low-resolution
motor, it is suggested to set P2-84 to 111 to reduce the P2-84
interference.
Output A/B pulse by pass from CN5
When the motor feedback signal is from CN5, then output P1-74
A/B pulse signal BYPASS will be the most ideal and Set P1-74.Y to 1
realistic signal output
When the motor feedback signal is from CN5, setup the P1-74.U
appropriate filter function of linear scale can prevent the (digit in
interference. thousands)
Examination of leak pulse:
When the motor feedback signal is square wave digital
signal, it might cause the problem of leak phase. The motor
might move to the wrong position or even out of control. P2-81, P2-82,
At this moment, set P2-81 to 1 can examine the problem of P2-83
leak pulse.
If the amount of leak pulse exceeds the value of P2-82,
AL.057 will occur.
No Hall sensor. Input the current to detect the position of
PM-11
initial magnetic field.
Setup the sensor of motor temperature PM-22

12.2 Panel Setup Procedure (without PC Software)

The setting of permanent magnet synchronous rotary motor
1. Press the MODE Key to select parameter function
mode.
2. Press the SHIFT Key to select parameter group
mode to P2 group.
3. Press the UP Key to select the parameter to P2-08.
4. Press the SET Key to show the value.
5. Use SHIFT, UP and DOWN Keys to set the value
to 40. Then press the SET Key to save the value.
6. Press the SHIFT Key to select the parameter group
mode to PM group.
7. Use the UP and DOWN Key to select the
parameter to PM-00
8. Press the SET Key to show the value
to 0 and press the SET Key.
10. Use UP and DOWN Keys to select the parameter
to PM-31.
12. Use SHIFT, UP and DOWN Keys to setup the
rated speed of the motor (unit: rpm; range:
0~3000). Then, press the SET Key to save it.
to PM-32.
maximum speed of the motor (unit: rpm; range:
0~6000). Then, press the SET Key.
to PM-33
torque constant of the motor (unit: 0.001Nm/A;
range: 0~13850). Then, press the SET Key to save
the value.
to PM-34.
7
motor inertia (unit: 10 kg  m ). Then, press the
2
SET Key to save it.

to PM-29
rated current of the motor. (unit: 0.01A; range:
0~the rated current of the servo drive). Then, press
the SET Key to save it.


to PM-30
maximum current of the motor (unit: 0.01A; range:
0~the maximum current of the servo drive). Then,
press the SET Key to save it.
to PM-03
encoder feedback type and press the SET Key to
save it. The parameter setting is as the followings.

0 = Square wave digital signal
1 = Sinusoid analog signal

The filter setting of AB pulse from signal converter

box:
0 = BYPASS
1 = 16M
2 = 8M
3 = 3M

0 = comes from CN2
1 = comes from CN5
to PM-04
encoder resolution (single-phase resolution). Then,
Unit: pulse / rev (square wave digital signal)
Unit: periods / rev (sinusoid analog signal)
mode to P1 group
to P1-55


maximum speed of the mechanism (unit: rpm;
range: 0~the maximum speed of the motor). Then,
38. Re-servo ON the servo drive.
39. Press the MODE Key to select the parameter
function mode.
mode to P2 group
to 40. Then, press the SET Key to save the value.
mode to PM group.
to 01 and press the SET Key to save the value.
47. After servo ON (P2-30=1), the motor starts to
estimate.
※ The motor will operate one cycle in forward and
reverse direction.
48. When AL.050 occurs (see the figure on the right), it
means the estimation is completed. Please
re-servo ON the servo drive.
※If it occurs other ALARM, please refer to the table
of troubleshooting.

The setting of permanent magnet synchronous linear motor

1. Press the MODE Key to select the parameter
function mode.
mode to P2 group.
mode to PM group.
to PM-00.
to 2 and press the SET Key.
to PM-48.
12. Use SHIFT, UP and DOWN Keys to set the
3
maximum speed of the motor (unit: 10 m/s;
range: 0~15999) and press the SET Key.
to PM-49
15. Use SHIFT, UP and DOWN Keys to set the motor
force constant (unit: 0.01N/A; range: 0~177362)
and press the SET Key to save it.
to PM-46
18. Use SHIFT, UP and DOWN Keys to set the rated
current of the motor (unit: 0.01A; range: 0~the
rated current of the servo drive). Then, press the
SET Key to save it.
to PM-47.
maximum current of the motor (unit: 0.01A; range:
0~the maximum current of the servo drive). Then,
to PM-45.
motor pole pitch (unit: 0.1mm/360°; range:
0~32767). Then, press the SET Key to save it.
to PM-03


encoder feedback type. Then, press the SET Key
to save it. The parameter setting is as the
followings.

0 = square wave digital signal
1 = sinusoid analog signal

The filter setting of AB pulse from signal converter

box:
0 = BYPASS
1 = 16M
2 = 8M
3 = 3M

0 = comes from CN2
1 = comes from CN5
to PM-04
encoder resolution (single-phase resolution).Then,
10 5 m / pulse (square wave digital signal),
10 3 m / period (sinusoid analog signal)
to P1 group.
to P1-55
3
maximum speed of the mechanism (unit: 10 m / s ;
range: 0~the maximum speed of the motor). Then,
34. Re-servo ON the servo drive.
35. Press the MODE Key to select parameter function
mode.

36. Press the SHIFT Key to select parameter group

mode to P2 group.
mode to PM group.
43. After servo ON (P2-30=1), the motor starts to
estimate automatically.
※The motor moves back and forth for one pole
pitch.
44. When AL.050 occurs (see the figure on the right), it
means the estimation is completed. Please
re-servo ON the servo drive.
※If it occurs other ALARM, please refer to the table
of troubleshooting.


Appendix A Accessories
 Power Connector
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0000
Title Part No. Manufacturer

Housing C4201H00-2*2PA JOWLE
Terminal C4201TOP-2 JOWLE
Delta Part Number: ASDBCAPW0100

Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW1000
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW2000
Revision December, 2014 A-1

Appendix A AccessoriesASDA-A2R Series
 Power Cable
Delta Part Number: ASD-ABPW0003, ASD-ABPW0005

L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD-ABPW0003 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-ABPW0005 5000  100 197  4
Delta Part Number: ASD-ABPW0103, ASD-ABPW0105

L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD-ABPW0103 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-ABPW0105 5000  100 197  4
A-2 Revision December, 2014

Delta Part Number: ASD-CAPW1003, ASD-CAPW1005

(50mm)
(1.97 inch)
L (80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L
Title Part No. Straight
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW1003 3106A-20-18S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CAPW1005 3106A-20-18S 5000  100 197  4
(50mm)
(1.97 inch)
L (80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW1103 3106A-20-18S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CAPW1105 3106A-20-18S 5000  100 197  4

Delta Part Number: ASD-A2PW1003, ASD-A2PW1005

(50mm)
(1.97 inch)
L (80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L
mm inch
1 ASD-A2PW1003 3106A-20-18S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-A2PW1005 3106A-20-18S 5000  100 197  4
Delta Part Number: ASD-A2PW1103, ASD-A2PW1105
(50mm)
(1.97 inch)
L (80 mm)
(3.15 inch)
L
mm inch
1 ASD-A2PW1103 3106A-20-18S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-A2PW1105 3106A-20-18S 5000  100 197  4
L
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW2003 3106A-24-11S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CAPW2005 3106A-24-11S 5000  100 197  4

L
mm inch
1 ASD-CAPW2103 3106A-24-11S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CAPW2105 3106A-24-11S 5000 100 197  4
 Encoder Connector
Delta Part Number: ASD-ABEN0000

Housing AMP (1-172161-9) AMP
MOTOR SIDE Terminal AMP (170359-3) AMP
CLAMP DELTA (34703237XX) DELTA
PLUG 3M 10120-3000PE 3M
DRIVE SIDE
SHELL 3M 10320-52A0-008 3M
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAEN1000

MOTOR SIDE 3106A-20-29S -
PLUG 3M 10120-3000PE 3M
DRIVE SIDE
SHELL 3M 10320-52A0-008 3M

 Encoder Cable (Incremental type)
Delta Part Number: ASD-ABEN0003, ASD-ABEN0005

PLUG 3M 10120-3000PE 3M
DRIVE SIDE
SHELL 3M 10320-52A0-008 3M
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD-ABEN0003 3000  100 118 4
2 ASD-ABEN0005 5000  100 197  4
Delta Part Number: ASD-CAEN1003, ASD-CAEN1005

DRIVE PLUG 3M 10120-3000PE 3M
SIDE SHELL 3M 10320-52A0-008 3M
L
mm inch
1 ASD-CAEN1003 3106A-20-29S 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CAEN1005 3106A-20-29S 5000  100 197  4

 Encoder Cable (Absolute type)

Delta Part Number: ASD-A2EB0003, ASD-A2EB0005

PLUG 3M 10120-3000PE 3M
DRIVE SIDE
SHELL 3M 10320-52A0-008 3M
L
Title Model Name
mm inch
1 ASD-A2EB0003 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-A2EB0005 5000  100 197  4
Delta Part Number: ASD-A2EB1003, ASD-A2EB1005

DRIVE PLUG 3M 10120-3000PE 3M
SIDE SHELL 3M 10320-52A0-008 3M
L
Title Model Name
mm inch
1 ASD-A2EB1003 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-A2EB1005 5000  100 197  4

 Signal Converter Box
Delta Part Number: ASD-IF-EN0A20
 SCSI 26 pin Connector

Delta Part Number: ASD-CNSC0026
Title Part No. Vender Part No. Manufacturer
Housing 305059030L 10326-52A0-008 3M
Terminal 307740120L 10126-3000PE 3M
 SCSI 20 pin Connector

Title Part No. Vender Part No. Manufacturer
Housing 305059010L 10320-52A0-008 3M
Terminal 307740110L 10120-3000PE 3M

 Signal Converter Box Cable

Delta Part Number: ASD-CASC2003, ASD-CASC2005
5.3~5.7 (28AWG)
CONNECTOR 1 CONNECTOR 2
5.0 5.0
5.0 5.0
L
L
Title Part No. mm²（AWG） Type
mm inch
1 ASD-CASC2003 5.3~5.7(28AWG) UL2464 3000  100 118  4
2 ASD-CASC2005 5.3~5.7(28AWG) UL2464 5000  100 197  4
 I/O Connector
Vendor Name Vendor P/N

3M TAIWAN LTD 10150-3000PE
3M TAIWAN LTD 10350-52A0-008
 Terminal Block Module

Delta Part Number: ASD-BM-50A

 RS-232 Communication Cable

Delta Part Number: ASD-CARS0003
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 ASD-CARS0003 3000  100 118 4
 Software Communication Cable

Delta Part Number: DOP-CAUSBAB
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 DOP-CAUSBAB 1400  30 55 1.2
 CANopen Communication Cable

Delta Part Number: TAP-CB03, TAP-CB04
L
Title Part No.
mm inch
1 TAP-CB03 500  10 19  0.4
2 TAP-CB04 1000 10 39  0.4

 CANopen Distribution Box

Delta Part Number: TAP-CN03
 RS-485 Connector
Delta Part Number: ASD-CNIE0B06

 CN1 Quick Connector

Delta Part Number: ASD-IF-SC5020

 Optional Accessories
100W servo drive and 50W low-inertia motor
Servo Drive ASD-A2R-0121-
Low-inertia Motor ECMA-C1040FS
Motor Power Cable (without brake) ASD-ABPW000X
Power Connector (without brake) ASDBCAPW0000
Motor Power Cable (with brake) ASD-ABPW010X
Power Connector (with brake) ASDBCAPW0100
Incremental Type Encoder
ASD-ABEN000X
Connector
Absolute Type Encoder Connector ASD-A2EB000X
Encoder Connector ASD-ABEN0000
(X=3 indicates that the cable length is 3m; X=5 indicates that the cable length is 5m)
100W servo drive and 100W low-inertia Motor

Low-inertia Motor ECMA-C△0401S
ASD-ABEN000X
Connector


ASD-ABEN000X
Connector

ECMA-C△0604S
Low-inertia Motor
ECMA-C△08047
ASD-ABEN000X
Connector
400W servo drive and 500W medium-inertia Motor

Medium-inertia Motor ECMA-E△1305S
Motor Power Cable (without brake) ASD-CAPW100X
Motor Power Cable (with brake) ASD-CAPW110X
Power Connector ASD-CAPW1000
ASD-CAEN100X
Connector
Encoder Connector ASD-CAEN1000

400W servo drive and 300W high-inertia Motor

High-inertia Motor ECMA-G△1303S
ASD-CAEN100X
Connector

High-inertia Motor ECMA-F11305S
ASD-CAEN100X
Connector

ECMA-C△0807S
Low-inertia Motor
ECMA-C△0907S
ASD-ABEN000X
Connector


ASD-CAEN100X
Connector
1kW servo drive and 1kW low-inertia Motor

ASD-CAEN100X
Connector

ASD-ABEN000X
Connector

1kW servo drive and 1kW medium-inertia Motor

ASD-CAEN100X
Connector
1kW servo drive and 850W medium-high-inertia Motor

High-inertia Motor ECMA-F△1308S
ASD-CAEN100X
Connector
1kW servo drive and 900W high-inertia Motor

ASD-CAEN100X
Connector

1.5kW servo drive and 1.5kW medium-inertia Motor

ASD-CAEN100X
Connector

Motor Power Cable (without brake) ASD-A2PW100X
Motor Power Cable (with brake) ASD-A2PW110X
ASD-CAEN100X
Connector

ASD-CAEN100X
Connector


ASD-CAEN100X
Connector
2kW servo drive and 1.3kW Medium-high-inertia Motor

Medium-high-inertia Motor ECMA-F11313S
ASD-CAEN100X
Connector
2kW servo drive and 1.8kW Medium-high-inertia Motor

Medium-high-inertia Motor ECMA-F11318S
ASD-CAEN100X
Connector


Low-inertia Motor ECMA-C△13304
ASD-CAEN100X
Connector

ASD-CAEN100X
Connector
3kW servo drive and 3.5kW medium-inertia Motor

ASD-CAEN100X
Connector

3kW servo drive and 3kW Medium-high-inertia Motor

Medium-high-inertia Motor ECMA-F△1830S
ASD-CAEN100X
Connector
Other Accessories (suitable for the whole series of ASDA-A2R)

Name Product Number
50 Pin I/O Connector (CN1) ASD-CNSC0050
Terminal Block Module ASD-BM-50A
RS-232 Communication Cable ASD-CARS0003
Software Communication Cable DOP-CAUSBAB
CANopen Communication Cable TAP-CB03 / TAP-CB04
CANopen Distribution Box TAP-CN03
　RS-485 Connector ASD-CNIE0B06
Regenerative Resistor 400W 40Ω BR400W040
Regenerative Resistor 1kW 20Ω BR1K0W020
Regenerative Resistor 1.5kW 5Ω BR1K5W005


Appendix B Maintenance and
Inspection
■Basic Inspection
Item Content
Periodically check if the screws of the servo drive, the connection
between the motor shaft and the mechanical system as well as
the connection of terminal block and mechanical system are
securely tightened.
The gap of the control chamber and the installation of the cooling
fan should free from oil, water or metallic particles. Also, the servo
General inspection drive shall free from the cutting power of the power drill.
If the control chamber is installed in the site which contains
harmful gas or full of dust, please be ensured the servo drive is
free from the harmful gas and dust.
When making encoder cable or wire rods, please be ensured the
wiring is correct. Otherwise, the motor may have sudden
unintended acceleration or be burned.
To avoid the electric shock, the ground terminal of the servo drive
should firmly connect to the ground terminal of the control
chamber. If the wiring is needed, wait at least 10 minutes after
disconnecting the drive from the main supply power, or discharge
electricity by discharge device.
The splicing parts of the wiring terminal should be isolated.
Make sure the wiring is correct so as to avoid the damage or any
abnormity.
Inspection before Check if the electric conductivity objects including sheetmetal
(such as screws) or inflammable objects are not inside the servo
operation drive.
(has not applied to Check if the control switch is in OFF status.
the power yet) Do not place the servo drive of external regenerative resistor on
inflammable objects.
To avoid the electromagnetic brake losing efficacy, please check if
stop function and circuit break function can work normally.
If the peripheral devices are interfered by the electronic
instruments, please reduce electromagnetic interference with
devices.
Please make sure the external voltage level of the servo drive is
correct.
The encoder cable should avoid excessive stress. When the
Inspection before
motor is running, please be ensured the cable is not frayed or
running the servo over extended.
Please contact with Delta if there is any vibration of the servo
drive
motor or unusual noise during the operation.
Revision December, 2014 B-1

Appendix B Maintenance and InspectionASDA-A2R Series
(has already applied Make sure the setting of the parameters is correct. Different
to the power) machinery has different characteristic, please adjust the
parameter according to the characteristic of each machinery.
Please reset the parameter when the servo drive is in the status of
SERVO OFF, or it may cause malfunction.
When the relay is operating, make sure it can work properly.
Check if the power indicator and LED display works normally.
Maintenance
 Please use and store the product in a proper site.
 Periodically clean the surface of the servo drive and servo motor so as to avoid the
dust and dirt.
 Do not disassemble any mechanical part when in maintenance.
 Periodically clean the ventilation ports of the servo drive and do not use the product in
a high-temperature site for a long time so as to avoid the malfunction.
The lifetime of machinery parts

 Dc Bus Capacitor
DC Bus Capacitor will be deteriorated by the affection of ripple current. Its lifetime is
determined by the surrounding temperature and operating conditions. If it is operating
in an air-conditioned site, its lifetime can up to 10 years.
 Relay
The contact of switching power supply will wear and leads to poor contact. The lifetime
of relay is influenced by the power supply capacity; thus, the accumulative time of
switching power supply is about 100,000 times.
 Cooling Fan
In continuous operation, the lifetime of the cooling fan is 2 to 3 years. However, if there
is any unusual noise or vibration during inspection, place a new one is a must.
B-2 Revision December, 2014

A High Performance With Diverse Communication Interfaces Servo Drive Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A High Performance With Diverse Communication Interfaces Servo Drive Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

A High Performance With Diverse Communication Interfaces Servo Drive Series User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ASDA-A2R Series User Manual

Interfaces Servo Drive

Delta Greentech (China) Co., Ltd.

Delta Electronics (Japan), Inc.

Delta Electronics (Korea), Inc.

A High Performance with

Delta Electronics Int’l (S) Pte Ltd.

Delta Electronics (India) Pvt. Ltd.

Delta Greentech (Brasil) S.A.

 Installation and inspection of servo drive and servo motor

This manual addresses personnel with the following qualifications:

 Servo system designers

 No water, corrosive gas and inflammable gas are allowed in installation

Revision December, 2014 i

ASDA-A2R is applicable on industrial application and is suggested to be installed in the

The symbol of danger, warning and stop represent:

It indicates the potential hazards. It is possible to cause severe injury or fatal

It indicates the potential hazards. It is possible to cause minor injury or lead to

It indicates the absolute prohibited activity. It is possible to damage the product or

ii Revision December, 2014

 During the operation, it is prohibited to touch any rotating motor parts. Or it is

Maintenance and Inspection

Main Circuit Wiring

Revision December, 2014 iii

Terminal Wiring of the Main Circuit

NOTE If there is any difference of each version, please refer to DELTA’s

iv Revision December, 2014

Safety precautions when connecting to linear motor

 Strong magnets! It can be harmful to pacemaker wearers and

 Caution, strong magnet field.

 Mechanical hazard! To avoid jammed during maintenance.

 Improper installation is prohibited, such as to knock, to cut off, to

NOTE If there is any difference of each version, please refer to DELTA’s

Revision December, 2014 v

Chapter 1 Inspection and Model Explanation

1.2 Product Model .............................................................................................. 1-3

1.2.1 Nameplate Information ......................................................................... 1-3

1.2.2 Model Explanation ................................................................................ 1-5

1.3 Servo Drive and Corresponding Servo Motor ................................................ 1-9

1.4 Each Part of the Servo Drive ......................................................................... 1-10

1.5 ECML Series Servo Motor ............................................................................. 1-13

2.2 Ambient Conditions of Storage ...................................................................... 2-1

2.3 Ambient Conditions of Installation ................................................................. 2-2

2.4 Installation Direction and Space .................................................................... 2-3

2.5 Specification of Circuit Breaker and Fuse ...................................................... 2-4

2.6 EMI Filters Selection...................................................................................... 2-5

2.7 Selection of Regenerative Resistor ............................................................... 2-7

3.1.1 Wiring Diagram of Peripheral Devices (connect to Delta’s Servo Motor

Communication Type) ............................................................................ 3-1

Revision December, 2014

3.1.2 Connectors and Terminals of the Servo Drive ....................................... 3-3

3.1.3 Wiring Method ....................................................................................... 3-5

3.1.4 Specification of ECMA Motor U, V, W Power Cable .............................. 3-7

Specification of ECML Motor U, V, W Power Cable .............................. 3-9

3.1.5 Specification of Connector of Encoder Cable ........................................ 3-10

Specification and Definition of Motor Signal Cable ................................ 3-13

3.1.6 Selection of Wire Rod ............................................................................ 3-14

3.2 Schematic Diagram of Servo System ............................................................ 3-16

3.3 I/O Signal (CN1) Connection ......................................................................... 3-18